danload 6000 reference manual - emerson 6000 reference manual _____ daniel measurement and control,...
TRANSCRIPT
DanLoad 6000 REFERENCE MANUAL __________________________________________
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.AN EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT COMPANY
HOUSTON, TEXAS
Part Number: 3-9000-670
Revision 6.A
Supporting Software Version 6.00
SEPTEMBER 2006
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Preface i
DANIELDANLOAD 6000
REFERENCE MANUAL
NOTICE
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC. ("DANIEL") SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR
EDITORIAL ERRORS IN THIS MANUAL OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL. DANIEL MAKES NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IM PLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS
M ANUAL AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL DANIEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
PRODUCTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE OR USE AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR CAPITAL, FUEL AND POWER, AND CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES.
PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION ONLY
AND MAY BE TRADEM ARKS/REGISTERED TRADEM ARKS OF THESE COMPANIES.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION ARE PRESENTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY, AND
WHILE EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THEIR ACCURACY, THEY ARE NOT TO BE
CONSTRUED AS WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
PRODUCTS OR SERVICES DESCRIBED HEREIN OR THEIR USE OR APPLICABILITY. ALL SALES ARE
GOVERNED BY DANIEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS, WHICH ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. WE
RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR IMPROVE THE DESIGNS OR SPECIFICATIONS OF SUCH PRODUCTS
AT ANY TIME.
DANIEL DOES NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION, USE OR MAINTENANCE OF ANY
PRODUCT. RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROPER SELECTION, USE AND MAINTENANCE OF ANY DANIEL
PRODUCT REMAINS SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND END-USER.
DANIEL AND THE DANIEL LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC. THE
EMERSON LOGO IS A TRADEMARK AND SERVICE MARK OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO.
COPYRIGHT © 2006BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.
HOUSTON, TEXAS, U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced orcopied in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic ormechanical - without first receiving the written permission ofDaniel Measurement and Control, Inc., Houston, Texas, U.S.A.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Prefaceii
WARRANTY
1. LIMITED WARRANTY: Subject to the limitations contained in Section 2 herein and except as otherwise expressly
provided herein, Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. ("Daniel") warrants that the firmware will execute the
programming instructions provided by Daniel, and that the Goods manufactured or Services provided by Daniel will be
free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and care until the expiration of the applicable warranty
period. Goods are warranted for twelve (12) months from the date of initial installation or eighteen (18) months from
the date of shipment by Daniel, whichever period expires first. Consumables and Services are warranted for a period
of 90 days from the date of shipment or completion of the Services. Products purchased by Daniel from a third party for
resale to Buyer ("Resale Products") shall carry only the warranty extended by the original manufacturer. Buyer agrees
that Daniel has no liability for Resale Products beyond making a reasonable commercial effort to arrange for procurement
and shipping of the Resale Products. If Buyer discovers any warranty defects and notifies Daniel thereof in writing during
the applicable warranty period, Daniel shall, at its option, promptly correct any errors that are found by Daniel in the
firmware or Services, or repair or replace F.O.B. point of manufacture that portion of the Goods or firmware found by
Daniel to be defective, or refund the purchase price of the defective portion of the Goods/Services. All replacements or
repairs necessitated by inadequate maintenance, normal wear and usage, unsuitable power sources, unsuitable
environmental conditions, accident, misuse, improper installation, modification, repair, storage or handling, or any other
cause not the fault of Daniel are not covered by this limited warranty, and shall be at Buyer's expense. Daniel shall not
be obligated to pay any costs or charges incurred by Buyer or any other party except as may be agreed upon in writing
in advance by an authorized Daniel representative. All costs of dismantling, reinstallation and freight and the time and
expenses of Daniel's personnel for site travel and diagnosis under this warranty clause shall be borne by Buyer unless
accepted in writing by Daniel. Goods repaired and parts replaced during the warranty period shall be in warranty for the
remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. This limited warranty is the only
warranty made by Daniel and can be amended only in a writing signed by an authorized representative of Daniel. Except
as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
OR ANY OTHER MATTER WITH RESPECT TO ANY OF THE GOODS OR SERVICES. Buyer acknowledgesand agrees that corrosion or erosion of materials is not covered by this warranty.
2. LIMITATION OF REMEDY AND LIABILITY: DANIEL SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
CAUSED BY DELAY IN PERFORMANCE. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF
WARRANTY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR, CORRECTION, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND
OF PURCHASE PRICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY CLAUSE IN SECTION 1 HEREIN. IN NO EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION (WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT,
INFRINGEMENT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OTHER TORT OR OTHERWISE), SHALL DANIEL'S
LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS CUSTOMERS EXCEED THE PRICE TO BUYER OF THE SPECIFIC
GOODS MANUFACTURED OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY DANIEL GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM OR CAUSE
OF ACTION. BUYER AGREES THAT IN NO EVENT SHALL DANIEL'S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS
CUSTOMERS EXTEND TO INCLUDE INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES. THE
TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
ANTICIPATED PROFITS, REVENUE OR USE, AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
FOR CAPITAL, FUEL AND POWER, AND CLAIMS OF BUYER’S CUSTOMERS.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Table of Contents iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Functional Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61.2 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91.3 General Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2.0 INSTALLATION
2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.2.1 Card Cage Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.2.2 DanLoad 6000 Board Description and Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-382.4.1 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-382.4.2 Selection/Installation of Electrical Wire / Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-392.4.2.1 Input / Output Field Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-412.4.2.2 Electrical Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-412.4.3 Selection/Installation of Wire Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.5 Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442.5.1 Hardware Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442.5.2 Software Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442.5.3 Wiring Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-452.5.4 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
3.0 SETUP
3.1 Overview of DanLoad 6000 Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73.2.1 Data Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Table of Contentsiv
3.2.2 Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3 Initial Setup Procedure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163.3.1 Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4 Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5 Process I/O Signal Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-243.5.1 Physical I/O Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253.5.2 Inverted Discrete Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.6 Product Delivery and Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-703.6.1 Sequential Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-703.6.2 In-Line Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.7 Temperature and Pressure Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-783.7.1 Temperature Correction to a Non-Standard
Reference Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.8 Mass Loading Using a Mass Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.9 Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3.10 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-883.10.1 Additive Injection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-923.10.2 Additive Injection Configuration (Typical Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-993.10.3 Additive Meter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1093.10.4 Multi-Stream Injection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1123.10.5 Multi-Rate Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
3.11 Transaction Storage Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1213.11.1 Transaction Storage / Transaction Ticket
Setup Procedure (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1223.11.2 Default Ticket Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1343.11.3 Transaction Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1363.11.4 Relation Between Batch Storage and
Transaction Storage Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1483.11.5 Relation Between Transaction Storage Codes /
Batch Storage Codes / Program Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1493.11.6 Transaction Ticket Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1513.11.7 Transaction Ticket Layout Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1523.11.8 Alarm BitMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
3.12 Compartment Size Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
3.13 Cutoff (End of Day Processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Table of Contents v
3.14 Set Contrast / Backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1663.15 CALMON - Turbine Meter Calibration Monitoring for the
DanLoad 6000 Electronic Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
3.16 Configuration Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
4.0 OPERATION
4.1 Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.1.1 Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.1.1.1 LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.1.1.2 LCD Alpha-Numeric / Graphic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.1.3 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2 Batch Delivery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.2.1 Controlling the Batch Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204.4.1 Example Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.5 Alarm Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-304.5.1 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-314.5.2 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
5.0 FLOW METER PROVING
5.1 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.1.1 Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2 Tank Prover Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215.2.1 Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225.2.2 Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235.2.3 Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235.2.4 Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245.2.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.3 Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-285.3.1 Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295.3.2 Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-305.3.3 Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-315.3.4 Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-315.3.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Table of Contentsvi
6.0 PROGRAM CODE DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 Program Code Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2 Program Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3 Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.5 Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.6 Meter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.7 Component Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.8 Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6.12 Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
6.13 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.14 I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
6.15 Additive I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144
6.16 Component I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158
6.18 Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180
6.19 Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186
6.20 Dynamic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1906.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195
6.21 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Table of Contents vii
6.22 Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208
6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-228
6.24 LPG / Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-230
6.25 Transaction Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-239
6.26 Transaction Ticket Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-248
6.27 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-254
6.28 CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-257
APPENDICES
A Installation Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4A.2 Functional Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7A.3 General Configuration Parameters Setup (Table A-11) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19A.4 Flow Meter Parameters Setup (Table A-12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22A.5 Flow Control Valve Parameters Setup (Table A-13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24A.6 Component Parameters Setup (Table A-14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26A.7 Component Block Valve / Pump Parameters Setup (Table A-15) . . . . A-28A.8 Delivery Parameters Setup (Table A-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30A.9 Blending Parameters Setup (Table A-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33A.10 Temperature Compensation Parameters Setup (Table A-18) . . . . . . . . A-35A.11 Pressure Compensation Parameters Setup (Table A-19) . . . . . . . . . . . A-37A.12 Density Compensation Parameters Setup (Table A-20) . . . . . . . . . . . A-38A.13 Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters Setup (Table A-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40A.14 Additive Parameters Setup (Table A-22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41A.15 LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Setup (Table A-23) . . . . . . . . . . . A-44A.16 Dynamic Data Display Parameters Setup (Table A-24) . . . . . . . . . . . A-46A.17 Communications / Data Logging Parameters Setup (Table A-25) . . . A-54A.18 Transaction Storage Parameters Setup (Table A-26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56A.19 Transaction Ticket Parameters Setup (Table A-27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61A.20 Alarm Parameters Setup (Table A-28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
B Configuration Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C LPG Loading Configuration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
D Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Table of Contentsviii
E Field Wiring Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
F Other Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
FIGURES
1-1 Typical Load Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2-1 Standard Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52-2 Standard Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62-3 Shallow Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72-4 Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82-5 Card Cage Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102-6 DC Power Supply Voltage Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112-7 AC Power Input Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122-8 CPU Board - Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132-9 CPU and Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132-10 CPU Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142-11 CPU Analog Inputs Program Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142-12 DUART Board Address Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152-13 2-Ch. Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172-14 4-Ch. Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-222-15 MPMC Version Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242-16 Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-262-17 Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-262-18 Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . 2-292-19 Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312-20 DC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-332-21 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
3-1 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53-2 Program Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63-3 General Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73-4 Program Code View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83-5 Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123-6 Alpha-Numeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183-7 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-243-8 Set Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-303-9 Alarm Action Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-473-10 Digital Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-753-11 Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (w/o Stem Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-12 Transaction Ticket (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Table of Contents ix
3-13 Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1273-14 Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1283-15 DanLoad Default Ticket Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1353-16 Set Contrast / Backlighting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
4-1 Keypad Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64-2 Key Functions (Batch Delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74-3 Recipe Selection Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94-4 Additive Selection Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114-5 Loading Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124-6 Diagnostic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-504-7 Input / Outputs Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-524-8 DUART Ports Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-544-9 LAN Port Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
5-1 Prover / Meter Volume Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105-2 Meter Proving Report For Tank Prover Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-395-3 Meter Proving Report For Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Master Meter Meter-Factors Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
6-1 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86-2 Parameters List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96-3 CPU v2 Analog Calibration Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-262
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Table of Contentsx
This page intentionally left blank.
Section 1
Introduction
Functional Characteristics
Hardware Configuration
General Terminology
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 1
This manual contains information on the installation, setup, and operation of the DanLoad 6000.The DanLoad 6000 is a versatile microcomputer based batch delivery controller and liquid flowcomputer. This type of instrument is commonly referred to as a Preset in the tanker vehicle loadingindustry. The DanLoad 6000 is easy to setup on-site for utilization in virtually any application thatrequires precise flow measurement and control of liquid batch deliveries. Batch delivery operationsare easily conducted in a logical manner. A batch delivery can be setup and started with severalintuitive commands. The instrument provides a graphic display of the progress of the batch delivery.
NotesThis manual covers the DanLoad 6000 software version 5.74 released in July, 2001. TheDanLoad 6000 software version number is displayed during the startup sequence after power isapplied to the instrument and in the diagnostics menu. This software version is compatiblewith both the original CPU board and the new version 2 CPU (CPU v2) board.
How to use the Manual
The information contained in this manual is intended for use by operators, shift supervisors,instrument technicians, process engineers, and terminal / plant managers. To the extent that ispractical, each section of the manual is designed as a stand alone document. The last section,Section 6, contains a reference for the function of all program codes (parameters) that define theoperation of the DanLoad 6000. Each program code is identified by a three-digit number between001 and 991. Program codes are shown in the following forms in this text.
# 001 Passcode Unique program code.
# 052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve to be controlled Sequence of four similar three-digitprogram codes. Each three-digitnumber applies to one flow meter.Program code sequence is in flowmeter sequence in numerical order (1to 4).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 2 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
# 481 / ... / 655 Name Sequence of similar three-digit program codenumbers is too long to list all numbers. Theellipsis (...) is a place holder for additionalprogram code numbers. In this example, theellipsis represent 28 additional recipe nameprogram code numbers.
Information applicable to new installations is located in the following sections.
# Section 1 - Introduction# Section 2 - Installation# Section 3 - Setup# Section 6 - Program Code Definitions
Information applicable to operation of an existing system is located in the following sections.
# Section 4 - Operation# Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving
The individual sections contain the following information.
# Section 1 - Introduction (this section)This section contains an overview of the capabilities of the DanLoad 6000. A glossary ofterms used throughout the manual is located at the rear of this section.
# Section 2 - InstallationThis section contains information on installation planning, mechanical installation, andelectrical installation of the DanLoad 6000. Design considerations for on-site placement,mounting, and wiring methods are included in this section. Also read Section 3, Section 6,Appendix A, Appendix B, and Appendix C before installing the instrument.
# Section 3 - SetupThis section contains information on the initial setup (functional configuration) andmodification of setup parameters stored in the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 retainssetup information in non-volatile memory. Therefore, the initial setup can be performed ina shop or office, before on-site physical installation of the instrument. Also read Section 2,Section 6, Appendix A, Appendix B, and Appendix C before installing the instrument.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 3
# Section 4 - OperationThis section contains detailed information on local operation of the DanLoad 6000. Singleproduct delivery, multi-component blending, and additive injection procedures are covered.Information on data logs and fault analysis and correction is also located in this section.
# Section 5 - Flow Meter ProvingThis section contains information on operator directed, manual flow meter proving using theDanLoad 6000. The instrument can monitor and perform flow meter proofs using tank meterprovers, master flow meters, or mechanical displacement pipe provers.
# Section 6 - Program Code DefinitionsThis section contains reference information for all program codes (parameters) whichdetermine the functional configuration of the DanLoad 6000.
# Appendix A - Parameter ConfigurationThis appendix contains several tables that can be photocopied and used as an aid inconfiguration of the DanLoad 6000 and interconnect wiring. The information in thisappendix is related to the information in Section 2 - Installation and Section 3 - Setup.
# Appendix B - Configuration RecordThis appendix contains a table that can be copied to provide a place to document theconfiguration of an installation.
# Appendix C - LPG Loading Configuration ChecklistThis appendix contains instructions and listings that can be copied to provide a place todocument LPG loading configurations.
# Appendix D - Spare PartsThis appendix contains lists of recommended DanLoad 6000 spare parts.
# Appendix E - Field Wiring DrawingsThis appendix contains drawings that are relevant to the set up and operation of the DanLoad6000 installation in the field.
# Appendix F - Other DrawingsThis appendix contains other drawings that may be helpful for configuring and operating theDanLoad 6000.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 4 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
Overview
The DanLoad 6000 can be operated in an independent stand-alone mode with batch deliveryoperations monitored and controlled from the operator control panel located on front of the DanLoad6000. The DanLoad 6000 can also function as a slave unit in a terminal automation system network.The information contained in this manual covers local operation of the DanLoad 6000 in the Stand-alone Mode. The DanLoad 6000 accepts process input signals from and provides process controlsignals to the common instruments and devices used in liquid batch delivery systems. Theseinstruments / devices include: liquid flow meters (turbine and positive displacement type), solenoidcontrolled digital flow control valves, additive injectors, security devices for verifying electricalground connections and compartment overfills, electric motor driven pumps, and motor operatedblock valves. The DanLoad 6000 can be easily setup (configured) to deliver single componentliquids or to blend up to four liquid components in precise ratios, with or without additive injection.The various possible delivery and blending functions of the DanLoad 6000 are controlled by operatorselectable recipes (predefined delivery control procedures). Additive injection is controlled bymanual selection, recipe selection, or automatic selection from a terminal automation system. Thesefeatures allow one DanLoad 6000 and the associated liquid delivery equipment to deliver manydifferent combinations of liquid products, based on requirements of the client or receiver of thedelivered product.
One common application for a DanLoad 6000 is as an on-site controller for delivering refinedhydrocarbon liquid products from loading terminal storage tanks to mobile tanks, such as tankertrucks, rail tank cars, and tank barges. Some other applications include liquid component blendingand / or additive injection in refinery or chemical plant processes. In addition, liquid componentscan be blended with or without additive injection into flowing pipelines or into storage tanks. Atypical load rack installation with a DanLoad 6000 and associated equipment is shown in Figure 1 -1.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 5
Figure 1-1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 6 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
1.1 Functional Characteristics
The functional characteristics and capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 are presented in this section.These functional characteristics and capabilities are closely related to the hardware configuration ofthe instrument. Section 1.2 - Hardware Configuration, contains general information on thehardware configuration of the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 is delivered from the factory withseveral basic electronic modules and other optional modules to accommodate process input / outputsignals. The required process input / output signal boards are determined by the loading systemconfiguration and should be specified when the DanLoad 6000 is purchased. The mix of processinput / output signal boards and communications modules is field reconfigurable. The hardwareconfiguration determines the input / output process signal handling capacity and the data logging /data communications capability of the instrument. The flow measurement and logical functionslisted below are available in all hardware configurations of the DanLoad 6000. However, eachunique installation requires a specific complement of process input / output signal boards, based onthe actual devices that are monitored and controlled in the system.
The DanLoad 6000 can monitor and control operation of up to four flow meters, up to four flowcontrol valves, delivery of up to four products, and up to six additive injectors and additive meterssimultaneously. The minimum configuration consists of one flow meter measuring one component(liquid product). Two high resolution pulse per unit volume outputs are provided for use by externalequipment, such as meter prover counters. Product deliveries and component blending deliveriesare selected by up to thirty configurable recipes (batch delivery / blending control procedures) andautomatic or manual selection of additive injection. Any additive(s) can be associated with anyrecipe(s). The actual implementation of the various possible process operations are covered in detailin other sections of this manual.
# Batch Delivery
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control quantity-based preset batch delivery ofone product or a blend of two to four liquid components. During blending operations, one to fourflow meter streams are controlled independently from the other flow meter streams. Anycombination of pulse output type flow meters of different sizes and flow handling capacities can bemonitored and controlled by one DanLoad 6000. Each flow meter stream can have uniquecharacteristics for the liquid component. For accounting and tracking purposes a batch delivery orgroup of consecutive batch deliveries can be combined to form one transaction.
In addition, the DanLoad 6000 can control batch loading of up to four independent loading arms,if only one loading arm is in use at any one time.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 7
# Blending
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control gross or standard quantity based blendingof several liquid components. Component blending can be performed by one of the followingselectable methods.
# Sequential, automatic block valve control
# Sequential, manual block valve control
# In-line, proportional
# In-line, non-proportional
# “Side” Stream Blending
Sequential blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components or transfers, one componentat a time to the receiving tank by using block valves, either automatically or manually controlled.Components are delivered in a time sequence through one flow meter / flow control valve stream.
In-line blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components simultaneously measured byindividual flow meters / flow control valves, into one composite delivery stream. The blend ratiois precisely maintained during in-line proportional blending. The blend ratio is roughly maintainedduring in-line non-proportional blending. However, the blend ratio of a completed batch load isprecise after the batch has been completely loaded.
"Side" stream blending is similar to in-line blending except one product component is deliveredupstream to another product component. "Side" stream blending is typically used to inject ethanolinto gasoline. Ethanol is injected into the gasoline stream and the blend is measured by the custodytransfer meter.
The DanLoad 6000, Version 6.0 provides the ability of ethanol blending with gasoline. Toaccomplish this, an ethanol meter can be added and ethanol will be injected upstream into thegasoline product stream. When ethanol is injected into the gasoline stream the gasoline meter nowwill measure the blended product and cannot account for just the gasoline component. Also whenethanol is blended with gasoline, the gross volume of the blend changes due to the expansion of themix. To accurately measure the gasoline-ethanol blend it is important to measure the blendedproduct. This configuration provides the ability of ethanol blending with gasoline. This type ofmixing is termed as "Side" Stream Blending.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 8 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
# Additive Injection
The DanLoad 6000's additive control functionality is designed with the following objectives:
# Allows direct control of additive injection (for up to 6 physical additives) via an"additive panel" (additive meter and on/off valve), thus making so-called "smart"additive injectors obsolete. This also makes the DanLoad 6000 a more attractiveeconomical solution for load rack automation when additive injection is required.
# Allows different injection methods (additive injector types) for each logical additiveso that old and new additive injection equipment can be mixed on a single loadingarm, e.g. mix other units and additive panels on the same loading arm.
# Provides multiple injection rates (concentrations) per additive via the "Multi Rate"additive selection method.
# Provides recipe gross and standard running totalizers and additive running totalizersto facilitate product and additive inventory management.
# Provides (functional) backward compatibility with previous DanLoad 6000 versions,though actual program codes may be different.
# Provides reporting (data logging) capabilities to facilitate product and additiveinventory management and configuration.
Additive volume is measured via a K-factor per additive which is used for both authorized andunauthorized additive flow. The “Multi Rate” additive selection method allows multiple additiveratios (concentrations of additive) to be configured per additive by configuring an additive ratio perrecipe. The DanLoad 6000 runs a cutoff (end of day processing) every 24 hours based on theconfigured cutoff hour. The totalizer and throughput data logs can be reprinted using the “Reprintcutoff” option in the program mode menu. Recipe and additive running totalizers allow product andadditive throughput for a particular customer to be monitored. The configuration summary data logcan be printed from the diagnostics menu in the manual operating mode.
# Meter Proving
The DanLoad 6000 can be used to perform manual flow meter proofs. Tank provers, master meters,or mechanical displacement meter proves can be used for flow meter proving.
# Transaction Storage / User Defined Transaction Ticket
Various data accumulated during each batch delivery and groups of batch deliveries (transaction)can be selected for storage in non-volatile memory. This data can be acquired by a terminalautomation system and / or printed on user defined pre-printed transaction tickets. Ticket formatscan be designed to meet the user's requirements.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 9
# LPG / Pressure Control
LPG (liquid petroleum gas) can be measured (temperature and pressure corrected) and the flowcontrol valve can be automatically controlled to maintain the minimum back pressure. Otherfeatures include Mercaptan vessel fill and display of external faults. Appendix C provides a LPGLoading Configuration Checklist.
# Calibration Monitoring
Preliminary support of calibration monitoring is provided in the form of a “Calibration failure” alarmper meter and a “CALMON status” screen in the program mode. Section 3.9.3 Additive MeterCalibration and CALMON provides a brief summary of the CALMON program codes.
1.2 Hardware Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 contains electronic modules in the form of plug-in printed circuit boards. Thebasic hardware configuration of the instrument is required for normal operation. In many cases, theinstrument in the basic hardware configuration has the capacity to monitor and control the batchdelivery installation. In other cases, additional process input / output signal expansion printedcircuit boards and / or data communications modules may be required. Flow calculations and logicalcontrol capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 in the basic hardware configuration and the fully expandedconfiguration are identical. Hardware expansion of the instrument only increases the process signalhandling capacity and / or provides data signal handling capability. Information on hardwareconfiguration is contained in Section 2 - Installation. The basic configuration of a DanLoad 6000is described below.
# Integral text / graphics display and operator keypad mounted in a rugged weatherproof case,designed for outside installation in NEC Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardousatmosphere environments.
# One DC Voltage power supply with factory selectable power input of 115 Vac or 230 Vac,47 to 63 Hertz.
# One main processor (CPU version 1) board with two micro-controllers, shared memory,non-volatile memory, and other related logic and process signal circuitry. Two swing armstatus inputs. And optionally (requires addition of a module to the version 1 main processorboard):
# One RS-485 port and one RS-232 port OR two RS-485 ports.
# One flow meter pulse input board, able to process two flow meter pulse inputs (two flowmeters or IP-252 pulse integrity from one flow meter) and provide two discrete DC Voltagecontrol outputs.
# One discrete AC input / output board, able to process two status inputs and eight controloutputs (90 to 230 Vac).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 10 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
1.3 General Terminology
The terminology used throughout this manual is defined in the table below. Section 6 - ProgramCode Definitions contains additional information which helps clarify these terms. Some of thedefinitions are based on information contained in American Petroleum Institute (API) standards andindustry accepted use. Other national standards use similar terminology.
Term Definition
additive A liquid that is injected into a primary liquid component in relatively smallquantities, usually less than four percent of the delivered volume total.Additives are injected into the primary liquid component by an injectormechanism which places a known, fixed volume of the additive into theprimary liquid component stream for each injector pulse received from theDanLoad 6000.
arm (also: swing arm, loading arm) A movable pipe / hose assembly used at atanker truck loading island. The arm can be designed for either top loadingor bottom loading to the tanker compartments. A swing arm can bepositioned to load at either side of the loading island or the parked state.
batch A preset, quantity-based product delivery or blended component delivery ofa single recipe.
blend stream Blend stream is the blended product stream and is a mix of both gasoline andethanol.
blending The process of mixing two or more liquid components to form a compositedelivered stream. The DanLoad 6000 can control blending based on apredetermined recipe by the sequential (automatic or manual) or the in-line(proportional or non-proportional) methods. The quantity of each componentin a blend is typically greater than two to four percent of the blended product.Injection of very small quantities of liquids, less than four percent of theblended product, is usually controlled by the additive injection process.
component Any liquid metered and controlled by the DanLoad 6000. Liquidhydrocarbons refined from crude oil and LPG’s (such as propane) are usuallyreferred to as products. Components are base products or tank productsstored at a distribution terminal. The component is measured before beingblended with other components. Additives may be injected before (upstreamof) or after (downstream of) the component meter.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 11
Term Definition
gross quantity The indicated quantity times the meter factor derived from a meter provingof the flow meter at a specific flow rate.Calculation: gross quantity = indicated quantity times meter factor
indicated quantity The change in the flow meter reading that occurs during a product flowmeasurement operation. (Not displayed by the DanLoad 6000)Calculation: indicated quantity = end reading minus start reading
IP-252 Institute of Petroleum standard 252. A British standard for pulse fidelity andsecurity for pulse output type flow meters. Program codes 233 and 234define the operation of this function. (Note: Equivalent standard is APIManual of Petroleum Measurement Standards / Chapter 5 - Metering /Section 5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow Measurement Pulsed-DataTransmission Systems.)
K-factor (system factor)The pulses per unit quantity generated by a pulse output type flow meter. TheK-factor is also called the system factor. The nominal value is determined byflow meter design and factory water flow calibration. The “average” K-factors for the flow meters are usually indicated on the flow meternameplates.
load [Sequential blending] In multi-component blending, a load is the completeddelivery of one component of a batch. The completion of loading allcomponents in the batch completes the batch delivery. If the recipe onlyloads one component, a load corresponds to a batch delivery.
[In-line blending] Each component of the blend is loaded simultaneously.Depending on the blend ratio, the low-proportion components are loadedcompletely during the time that the high proportion component(s) are beingloaded. After loading of the highest proportion component has beenterminated, all component loads and the batch delivery are complete.
loading island (also loading rack) An installation of one or more loading arms or risersused to deliver liquid components to a tanker vehicle located on one or bothsides of the island, depending on the design of the island.
loading riser The related instruments and devices, located in a meter stream, that providethe liquid component loading capability to a mobile tanker vehicle. (Note:The flow meter piping can also be installed horizontally, if desired.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 12 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
Term Definition
load spot (also bay, lane) One side of a loading island, a position where a tankervehicle parks for a loading operation. One load spot can have one or moreloading arms.
meter factor A number obtained by dividing the actual volume of liquid passed througha flow meter during a meter proving operation by the volume registered bythe flow meter. The meter factor is used in flow calculations to correct theindicated volume (end flow meter registration minus start flow meterregistration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter throughput atoperating conditions)
Meter prover volume corrected to standard conditionsMeter factor = -----------------------------------------------------
Flow meter indicated vol corrected to std conditions
meter proving A procedure used to determine the meter factor for a flow meter. The K-factor (exact number of pulses per a volume unit that are generated by a flowmeter) is determined at the factory. The K-factor is used to derive amathematical factor, known as meter factor, that is used to adjust results ofthe internal flow calculations performed by the DanLoad 6000. (Note: Theflow meter is not re-calibrated; determination of the meter factor allows theoperator to manually re-calibrate the DanLoad 6000 so that the non-adjustable calibration characteristic [pulses per volume unit (K-factor)]of the flow meter is incorporated into the flow calculations.)
permissive A discrete signal from a device that is input to a discrete input in theDanLoad 6000. The signal is used by the DanLoad 6000 to allow a productdelivery to be initiated or allow a product delivery to continue. Permissivecontacts are CLOSED in the normal or safe state and OPEN in the abnormalor unsafe state.
preset A generic term that describes the functional instrument group of the DanLoad6000. The term originated from mechanical and electrical preset counters.The DanLoad 6000 provides much more versatility and capability comparedto a simple mechanical or electrical preset counter.
primary blend stream componentA blended product measured by a primary blend stream meter is called aprimary blend stream component.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 13
Term Definition
primary blend stream meter (sales meter)A meter measuring the gasoline-ethanol blend is called a primary blendstream meter.
program code One of approximately 1000 parameters that define the operation of theDanLoad 6000. All program codes are defined in Section 6.
quantity (example: gross standard quantity)The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operationaltemperature and pressure, indicated in one of the following corrected units:cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.
recipe A pre-entered delivery / blending / control description that allows theDanLoad 6000 to automatically control the product quantity or total quantitybased on percentages of multiple components during a batch deliveryoperation. Up to thirty recipes can be defined in the DanLoad 6000.
side stream Side stream is the controlled stream and is a term referred to the ethanolproduct. The ethanol product is metered and can be controlled and measured.
side stream componentA mix component measured by both a side stream meter and a primary blendstream meter is called a side stream component. Ethanol is referred as a sidestream component.
side stream meter A meter measuring the side component (ethanol) is called a side streammeter.
standard quantityThe gross quantity corrected to standard temperature and/or pressure. Thisis a quantity measurement.
TLMCalculation: standard quantity = gross quantity times C (correctionfactor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the meter)
PLMtimes C (correction factor for the effect of pressure on theliquid in the meter)
transaction Group of one or more consecutive batch deliveries for accounting purposes.The batches that comprise a transaction always use one recipe, one additiveselection, and one loading side. An example of a transaction is the deliveryof multiple batches to different compartments in a single tanker vehicle.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
1 - 14 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
Term Definition
volume (example: indicated volume; gross volume)The actual space occupied by the product measured, indicated in one of thefollowing actual units: cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.
wild stream Wild stream is the uncontrolled stream and is a term referred to the gasolineproduct. This is because the gasoline product cannot be exclusively metered,controlled or measured.
wild stream componentA product component measured as part of (Primary Blend Stream Component– Side Stream Component) a primary blend stream component by a primaryblend stream meter is called a wild stream component. Gasoline is referredas wild stream component.
Section 2
Installation
Specifications
Installation Planning
Mechanical Installation
Electrical Installation
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 1
NoteAppendix A contains several tables with data on the physical and functional configuration ofthe DanLoad 6000. These tables can be photocopied and unique configuration data can bemanually entered to provide a record of specific DanLoad 6000 installations.
This section contains DanLoad 6000 specifications and information on installation of the DanLoad6000. Installation tasks should be performed in the following order.
# Installation planning# Initial setup (described in Section 3 - Setup)# Mechanical (physical) installation# Electrical installation
The initial setup, described in Section 3 - Setup, must be performed before the DanLoad 6000 isplaced in-service. The initial setup can be performed with only a 115 or 230 Vac power sourceconnected to the instrument.
Mechanical and electrical installation recommendations for the DanLoad 6000 adhere to generalindustry standards for this type equipment and are covered in Section 2.3 - Mechanical Installationand Section 2.4 - Electrical Installation. The remaining part of Section 2 contains information oninstallation planning for the DanLoad 6000.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 2 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications
# Dimensions (approximate):
Standard The standard enclosure for the DanLoad 6000.
Remote / Secondary
The short enclosure contains the front panel display and keypad only. This enclosure isusually used as a remote operator station in a two side loading island.
Item Standard Remote / Secondary
Height 13-inches (330 mm) 13-inches (330 mm)
Width 14-inches (355 mm) 14-inches (355 mm)
Depth 14-inches (355 mm) 8-inches (200 mm)
Weight 75-pounds (34 kg) 45-pounds (20,5 kg)
# Power requirements:
Standard Power Supply:115 Vac (+ 10% / - 15%), 47 to 63 Hz, 1-phase230 Vac (+/_ 15%), 47 to 63 Hertz, 1-phase25 VA nominal
CE-Mark Power Supply - AC Line Input:90-140 VAC, or 198-270 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, single phaseFactory Selected with a single jumper (28 VA nominal)
# Cable entry (USA version):
Center 2-inch female NPT, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse, RTD, analog,status / control) cables
Left 1-inch female NPT, normally used for AC power input and AC status /control signals
Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):1-inch female NPT, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analogsignals when separate signal routing is required
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 3
# Cable entry (metric version):
Center M50 x 1.5 mm, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse, RTD, analog, status/ control) cables
Left M25 x 1.5 mm, normally used for AC power input and AC status / controlsignals
Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):M25 x 1.5 mm, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog signalswhen separate signal routing is required
# Environment:
Temperature [operating with case heater installed]:-40 to +140 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to +60 degrees Celsius)
Temperature [storage (non-operating)]:-4 to +158 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to +70 degrees Celsius)(Note: Storage temperature lower limit is due to fluid in the liquid crystaldisplay (LCD) unit.)
Relative humidity: 5 to 95 percent (non-condensing)
# Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC):
Optionally CE-Mark CompliantFCC Method - (CFR-47) Part 15 - Digital DevicesCCA LMB-EG-08 section 3.6.3.4CISPR Methods: Radiated emissions from 30 MHz to 1000 MHzConducted emissions (mains disturbance) from 150 kHz to 30 MHzSusceptibility - 10 volts/meter over the frequency range 30 MHz to 1000 MHzFast transients - Line power and I/OElectrostatic Discharge
# Mechanical shock:
Per S.A.M.A. PMC 31.1-1980, Section 5.3
# Enclosure:
NEMA 4X weatherproof, corrosion resistantNEMA 7 for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D areasEEx d IIB T6, IP65
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 4 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# Fasteners:
Front cover hex drive bolts and case mounting bolts: M10 - 1.5 (metric)Two front cover bolts are longer than the other front cover bolts. These two longbolts have holes near the end of the threaded end to allow placement of a Weight andMeasures seal wires. The seal wires prevent undetected access to the DanLoad 6000electronic / field wiring compartment.Depth of tapped mounting bolt holes: 0.50 inches (13 mm)Front cover hex bolt wrench: 8-mm (or 5/16-inch) Allen wrenchTorque specification (all bolts): 18 to 21 foot-pounds-force
(24 to 29 Newton-meters)
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 5
Standard Enclosure DimensionsFigure 2 - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 6 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Standard Enclosure Field MountingFigure 2 - 2
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 7
Shallow Enclosure DimensionsFigure 2 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 8 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Shallow Enclosure Field MountingFigure 2 - 4
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 9
2.2 Installation Planning
Installation planning is very important due to the physical and functional reconfigurable capabilitiesof the instrument. Several worksheets are provided in Appendix A to aid in installation planning andsystem design. These worksheets are used in conjunction with the Setup Procedure described inSection 3. Installation planning consists of the following three major tasks.
# Assure that the DanLoad 6000 contains the required number and type of process input /output signal boards for monitoring and controlling the other devices in the product deliverysystem.
# Determine the functions to be performed by the DanLoad 6000. These functions areselectively enabled during the setup procedure (logical configuration) of the instrument.
# Design the mechanical / electrical installation considering the safety and ease of use by theoperator. Also consider the safety and ease of access to instruments and devices formaintenance technicians.
2.2.1 Card Cage Description
The DanLoad 6000 is constructed in a modular electronic and functional form. An electronic cardcage is located inside the cast enclosure. The layout of the card cage is shown in Figure 2-5. Thecard cage contains a passive backplane with sockets for installation of a main processor board, aDC power supply board, and one to seven process input / output signal boards. The function of eachboard is described in Section 2.2.2.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 10 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Card Cage LayoutFigure 2 - 5
NOTE: Placement of I/O boards in card cage determines I/O assignmentsduring start up. Please see section 3.5.1 for details.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 11
2.2.2 DanLoad 6000 Board Description and Jumper Settings
NoteSeveral of the electronic circuit boards contain jumpers that must be verified for correctconfiguration before installation of the instrument. Jumper configuration should be verifiedbefore the setup procedure is executed. Verify the following jumper configurations beforeapplying any power or connecting any process input / output signals to the instrument. Toidentify pin 1 on any of the jumper selections, find the location on the back of the board wherethe jumper pins are soldered into place. The square solder pad will always be pin 1.
# Power Supply (DC Voltage)
Installed in the leftward vertical slot (J0) with component side facing right (toward the I/Ocard slots).
The DC power supply generates the following voltages for the following uses;
Voltage Use
+ 5 Vdc digital logic
+ 5 Vdc unregulated LCD display unit
+ 15 Vdc / - 15 Vdc analog inputs
+ 12 to + 15 Vdc meter pulse transmitter power supply (100 mA dc version)
+ 24 Vdc DC status / analog transmitters
DC Power Supply Voltage UseFigure 2 - 6
Two field-wiring connectors are located on the front edge of the power supply board. TB1accepts AC power input (either 115 or 230 Vac) and provides a fused output for an optionalinternal space heater. TB2 accepts AC Voltage input and provides fused AC Voltage outputto the permissive circuits.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 12 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12692) Standard Supply
Jumper Function
JO1-1 to JO1-2JO2-1 to JO2-2
115 Vac power input
JO1-2 to JO2-2 230 Vac power input
AC Power Input JumpersFigure 2 - 7
The AC power jumpers are soldered wire jumpers located on the DC power supply board.AC power input should be specified at order time so that the jumpers are installed correctlyat the factory.
For the CE-Mark supply using AC power input, install jumper JP2 for 155 VAC operation,or remove jumper JP2 for 230 VAC operation.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 13
# CPU Board (version 1)
Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.
The main processor board has two CPU's (central processing units). One CPU processes thecontrol panel and communications functions and the other CPU performs flow measurementand process input / output signal handling. Dual port RAM (random access memory) isused by both CPU's to transfer data. Data is maintained in a non-volatile state for ten yearsby an on-board battery. The CPU board also contains one 3-terminal connector which isdedicated to one or two dry contact closure inputs used for sensing the position of a swing-arm switch. Communications is via a plug-in DUART board that mounts on top of CPUversion 1. See “DUART”.
CPU Board Jumper Settings
Jumper Function
E16 to E17 4Mbit EPROM with firmware3.00 & up
E7 to E8 4Mbit EPROM with firmware2.00 & up
E2 to E3 Enable display failure /internaltemp alarm LED (yellow LED)
CPU Board JumpersFigure 2 - 8
CPU Board and Analog Inputs Board Combinations - Jumper Settings
The DanLoad 6000 can be configured without an analog inputs board or with a 2-channelanalog inputs or an 8-channel analog inputs board. Jumpers are provided for configurationof analog ground and digital ground. These jumpers should be set as follows.
Jumper Function
E12 to E13 on the CPU Board No Analog InputsBoard installed
Remove E12 to E13 on CPUboard and install JP1 on AnalogInputs Board
Analog Inputs Board is installed
CPU & Analog Inputs Board Combination JumpersFigure 2 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 14 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# CPU Board (version 2)
Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.
On-board communications ports and the RS232 - RS485 option is jumper selectable.The address for the communication port is software selectable.Dual Display connector (P2):The primary display wires to the top position and the secondary display wires to the bottomposition.
On-board Analog inputs include one 4-20 mA and one 100 ohm RTD input. The on-boardswing-arm switches have been removed; standard discrete inputs can be used instead.
Communications - One RS485 and 1 RS232 OR two RS485 ports (jumper selectable).Channel 1 is always RS485. Channel 2 is RS232 or RS485 as shown.
Jumper RS232 RS485
JP1 1&2 closed 2&3 closed
JP2 1&2 closed 2&3 closed
JP3 1&2 closed 2&3 closed
JP4 1&2 closed 2&3 closed
CPU Board Jumpers - Comm Ch 2 Figure 2 - 10
Analog Inputs - Calibration Values
Calibration values are required for the analog inputs. These values are printed on a labellocated on top of U40. The label has the program codes and four values for each type ofinput. These values must be entered into the program codes when using the analog inputs,in particular, after the unit has been cold started.
PC 4-20 mA PC RTD
984 LL (low low) 988 LL (low low)
985 LH (low high) 989 LH (low high)
986 HL (high low) 990 HL (high low)
987 HH (high high) 991 HH (high high)
CPU Analog Inputs Program CodesFigure 2 - 11
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 15
# DUART (used with CPU Version 1)(Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) Communications Board
Optional DUART module can be installed, with the component side down, on top of themain processor board.
One dual serial communications port module (DUART module) with 1 RS-485 and 1 RS-232 OR 2 RS-485 ports is optional. The communications module is not required for stand-alone operation of the DanLoad 6000. However, the DUART is required if the data loggingfeature is used or if communication to an Automation System is required.
Switch Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12693)
The address of the DanLoad 6000 serial port is set by an eight position DIP switch locatedon the optional DUART board. Each address must be unique for data access by a terminalautomation system.
Address
Switch SW1 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Decimal weight 6 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
0 <reserved> on on on on on on on on
1 off on on on on on on on
2 on off on on on on on on
3 off off on on on on on on
4 on on off on on on on on
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
255 off off off off off off off off
DUART Board Address SwitchFigure 2 - 12
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 16 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board (MPB)
Recommended card cage locations are slots J5 and / or J6, component side faces left(toward the power supply). The recommended location for a single meter pulse board is slotJ5.
The two-channel meter pulse board provides 8 to 15 Vdc or 24 Vdc power for two meterpulse preamplifiers and accepts meter pulse inputs from two meter preamplifiers or dualinputs from one meter. The 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board can be used with 1 single pulse meter,1 dual pulse meter or 2 single pulse meters. The meter preamps or pulsers can be poweredwith any one of three options. Options 1 and 2 are implemented by installing a plug-onpiggyback power supply module. These modules are adjustable 8-15 VDC power supplieswith either 15 ma (Daniel P/N 3-6000-002) or 100 mA (Daniel P/N 3-6000-022) outputs.Option 3 uses 24 VDC supplied from the power-supply board. The DC power source foreach meter preamplifier is jumper selectable. Two optically isolated raw meter pulse outputs(prover outputs) are provided. These outputs are for meter proving and are duplicates of theraw meter pulse stream. Two DC Voltage control outputs are provided. These controloutputs are assignable to various functions. One common use for these outputs is to driveexternal pulse per unit quantity totalizers.
# Power Down Pulse Counting
Should power failure shut the system down, power to the pulsers and preamps willbe sustained long enough to accumulate pulses until the flow control valve closes.This is available with the 15 mA P/S option only (P/N 3-6000-002).
# Dual Pulse Security for a Single Flow Meter
Dual pulse security is available per the IP252 Level-B standard. This isaccomplished by monitoring two meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90 degreesout of phase. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section 6.13 of this manual.
NoteThe 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board has been replaced by the 4-Ch Meter Pulse Board and isno longer manufactured. The 4-Ch Meter Pulse Board is a direct replacement for the2-Ch board. Depending on your configuration, wiring changes may be necessary. Please review the 2-Ch and 4-Ch wiring diagrams carefully.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 17
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12694)P/N 3-6000-022, 100 mA P/S - P/N 3-6000-002, 15 mA P/S
Jumper Connection Function
JP1JP5
1 to 2in
meter 1 preamp power = 24 Vdc
JP1JP5
2 to 3in
meter 1 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS1)
JP1JP3JP3JP5
1-to-21-to-23-to-4out
meter 1 input optically isolated and floating, requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP3JP3
1 to 23-to-4
meter 1 input optically isolated
JP3 2-to-3 meter 1 input direct
JP8 out meter 1 standard input filtering( 5 kHz. low pass filter)
in meter 1 additional high frequency filtering( 50 Hz. low pass filter)
JP2JP4
1-to-2in
meter 2 preamp power = 24 Vdc
JP2JP4
2-to-3in
meter 2 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS2)
JP2JP7JP7JP4
1-to-21-to-23-to-4out
meter 2 input optically isolated and floating, requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP7JP7
1-to-23-to-4
meter 2 input optically isolated
JP7 2-to-3 meter 2 input direct
JP6 out meter 2 normal input filtering(5 kHz. low pass filter)
in meter 2 additional high frequency filtering(50 Hz. low pass filter)
2-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board JumpersFigure 2 - 13
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 18 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# 4-Ch Meter Pulse Board (MPB)
Recommended locations are slots J5 and / or J6, component side faces left (toward thepower supply). The recommended location for a single 4-Ch meter pulse board is slot J5.
See Figure 2-14 for 4-Ch meter pulse board jumper settings.
The 4-Channel meter pulse board provides 5, 15 or 24 volts, which may be jumper selected(JP17, 18, 19,20) for flow meter pulse preamplifiers. The meter pulse board is able to supplypower at 24 volts at 200 mA when used with Daniel’s enhanced line-powered switcherpower supply. When using Daniel’s standard power supply, the load capacity is lower. The4-Ch meter pulse board accepts inputs from up to two physical meters. Each physical metercan have pulse security independently of any others. Pulse security identification is IP 252level “B” using dual pulse stream, electrically out of phase. Two DC voltage control outputsare provided. These are assignable to various functions. One common use for these outputsis to drive an electrical pulse-per-unit quantity totalizer.
MPB Input Signal
3-6000-042 +12 V square wave (nominal)
3-6000-132 +4 V square wave (nominal)
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 19
# Dual Pulse Security for a Single Flow Meter
Dual pulse security is available per the IP252 Level-B standard. This isaccomplished by monitoring two meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90° ±89° outof phase. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section 6.13 of this manual.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 20 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 21
Identification between board 1 and board 2 for P/N 3-6000-042, -132.
4-Channel Meter pulse board3-6000-042 - For dual pulse (IP252 level B) or single Preamp operation:
First board
Meter 1A, short jumper JP1Meter 2A, short jumper JP2Open JP3 and JP4
Second board
Meter 1A, short jumper JP3Meter 2A, short jumper JP4Open JP1 and JP2
3-6000-132 - (Euro version) For dual pulse (IP252 level B) operation:
First board
Meter 1A, short 1&2 on jumper JP1Meter 2A, short 1&2 on jumper JP2Open JP3 and JP4
Second board
Meter 1A, short 1&2 on jumper JP3Meter 2A, short 1&2 on jumper JP4Open JP1 and JP2
3-6000-132 - (Euro version) For one preamplifier per meter (no pulse security):
1 through 4 meters
Please note that 1 board can handle 4 meters.
First Meter: Meter 1A, short 2&3 on jumper JP1Second Meter: Meter 1B, short 2&3 on jumper JP2Third Meter: Meter 2A, short 2&3 on jumper JP3Fourth Meter: Meter 2B, short 2&3 on jumper JP4
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 22 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-15532 - P/N 3-6000-042, -132)
MeterConnection Function
1A 1B 2A 2B
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 in Enable meter input X
JP11
JP15
JP12
JP16
JP13
JP6
JP14
JP5
1-to-23-to-4out
meter input optically isolated andfloating, requires external5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP11
JP15
JP12
JP16
JP13
JP6
JP14
JP5
1-to-23-to-4in
meter input optically isolated
local ground
JP11JP15
JP12JP16
JP13JP6
JP14JP5
2-to-3in
meter input directlocal ground
JP9 JP10 JP8 JP7 out meter standard input filtering( 5 kHz. low pass filter)
in meter additional high frequencyfiltering( 50 Hz. low pass filter)
4-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board JumpersFigure 2 - 14
NotesMeter Channels 1A and 2A are the primary meter inputs.Meter Channels 1B and 2B are used as the second input for dual pulse meter inputs.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 23
The voltage levels factory setting is for 15 VDC when using the Linear P/S 3-6000-027, -031.
4-Channel Meter Pulse Board 3-6000-042, -132Meter Pulse Preamp or Pulser Voltage Output -- Jumper ScheduleFactory Setting: 15 Volts
When using Linear P/S 3-6000-027, -031Maximum Current 100 mA
Jumper options: For 5 VDC or 12-15 VDC @ 100 mAClose JP17 1 and 2Close JP18 2 and 3
For 5 Volts adjustable: Close Jumper JP19 and JP20
For 15 Volts adjustable: Close Jumper JP19, Open JP20
Jumper options: For 24 VDC @ 100 mAClose JP17 2 and 3, Open JP18,JP19 and JP20 don’t care
When using the CE-Mark Line Switcher P/S 3-6000-067, -068
On the Line Switcher P/S: Close JP3 2 and 3 (Soldered)Maximum Current 400 mA (200 mA per MPB)
4 channel meter pulse board (P/N 3-6000-047, -132)
Factory adjustment: 12.5 VDCJumper options: For 5 VDC, 12-15 VDC or 24 VDC @ 200 mA
Close JP17 1 and 2Close JP18 1 and 2
For 5 Volts Adjustable: Close Jumper JP19 and JP20For 15 Volts Adjustable: Close Jumper JP19, Open JP20For 24 Volts Adjustable: Open Jumpers JP19 and JP20
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 24 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# MPMC (Meter Pulse Microcontroller) Board (P/N 3-6000-044)
The MPMC Board is a plug-on piggyback board to the 4-Ch meter pulse board.
The 4-Ch meter pulse board is known as the “smart” meter pulse board when fitted with aMeter Pulse Microcontroller (MPMC) Board (P/N 3-6000-044). With a smart 4-Ch meterpulse board installed, the DanLoad 6000 can be configured to make use of the followingfeatures provided by the MPMC. The plug-on board is shown as part of the main boardnoted in the previous section.
MPMC Version Features Provided
1.00 Factored pulse outputs
2.00 Factored pulse outputsand turbine metercalibration monitoring
MPMC Version ComparisonsFigure 2 - 15
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 25
# AC Discrete Input / Output Board (AC I/O)
Recommended locations are slots J1 and / or J2, component side faces left (toward thepower supply). The recommended location for a single AC I/O board is slot J1.
[Note: There are two different versions of the AC I/O board (Ver. 1 & Ver. 2). Terminalconnections are the same on each version of the board. However, the on-board jumperconfiguration is different for each version of the board. Note drawing CE-12695 inAppendix E and information in Figures 2-14 and 2-15.]
The AC I/O board accepts two discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and provides eight discrete(ON/OFF) control outputs. Note Figures 2-14 and 2-15 for jumper settings to set thediscrete input voltage level selection options (24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 90-240 Vac or Vdc). Internalseries resistors in each input circuit should be jumpered (bypassed) if 24 Vac or 24 Vdcsignals are used. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each output circuit is ratedto switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay or solenoid coil.
Status inputs are processed as indicated:
Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)
Inputs are externally powered by 120/240 volts AC/DC or 24 volts AC/DC byinstalling a jumper. This voltage should be applied through a contact closure only,as a solid-state relay may not drop below the input voltage threshold whendeenergized.The status input is ON when the contact is closed or the voltage is present on theinput.The status input is OFF when the contact is open or the voltage is removed.
Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)
All functions are the same as the Version 1 AC I/O Board except that each voltagerange has a jumper selection (24 VAC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC and 240 VAC), and theinputs will function with either contact closures or solid-state relays.Note: Version 2 board will not work with 120/240 VDC.
NoteGanging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of ACtriac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is required,the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper isolation.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 26 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Jumper Settings - Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)(Assembly Drawing CE-12693 - P/N 3-6000-005)
Jumper Connection Function
W1 out Input 2 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc
in Input 2 24 Vac / Vdc
W2 out Input 1 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc
in Input 1 24 Vac / Vdc
Version 1 AC I/O Board JumpersFigure 2 - 16
Jumper Settings - Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)(Assembly Drawing CE-12722 - P/N 3-6000-045)
Jumper Connection Function
JP1 pins 1 to 2 Input 2 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
JP2 pins 1 to 2 Input 1 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
JP1 pins 2 to 3 Input 2 is 120 Vac
JP2 pins 2 to 3 Input 1 is 120 Vac
JP1 out Input 2 is 240 Vac
JP2 out Input 1 is 240 Vac
Version 2 AC I/O Board JumpersFigure 2 - 17
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 27
# Enhanced I/O Board and Additive Injector I/O Board
Recommended locations are slots J1 and / or J2, component side faces left (toward thepower supply). The recommended location for a single Enhanced I/O board is slot J1.
[Note: There are two different versions of the Enhanced I/O board. The Ver. 1 style boardis shown in drawing CE-12697 in Appendix E as the “Additive Injector (I/O) Board”. The“Additive Injector Board” will be recognized as an Enhanced I/O Board when the DanLoad6000 displays the identity and location of the boards in the card cage. The Ver. 2 style boardis shown in drawing CE-19027 in Appendix E as the “Enhanced (I/O) Board”. Terminalconnections are the same on each version of the board. However, the on-board jumperconfiguration is different for each version of the board.]
The Enhanced (or Additive Injector) I/O board accepts six discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs(24 Vac or 24 Vdc maximum voltage) and provides six discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs.Note Figures 2-16 and 2-17 for jumper settings to select discrete input voltage levels for thetwo board styles. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each output circuit is ratedto switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay or solenoid coil. Inputsare available as high-speed (130 Hz maximum with a minimum pulse width of 3 ms), lowspeed (10 Hz maximum with a minimum pulse width of 50 ms) or a mixture of both. Besure to specify the correct part number.
Status inputs are processed as indicated:
# Version 1 (Additive Injector) I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697)
Internally powered status input (Note Reverse Logic):
The status input is ON when the contact is open.The status input is OFF when the contact is closed.
Externally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed and the voltage is presenton the input.The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is removed.
NotesGanging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of ACtriac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is required,the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper isolation.
Inputs can be configured ON = open or ON = closed.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 28 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027)
Internally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed.The status input is OFF when the contact is open.
Externally powered status input or solid-state relays:
There are three voltage ranges which are jumper selectable (24 VAC,24VDC, 120 VAC or 240 VAC). When using DC voltage, the positivevoltage must be on the common input to two-channel inputs.
The status input is ON when the contact is closed.The status input is OFF when the contact is open.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 29
Jumper Settings - Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board(Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697) - P/N 3-6000-010 (low speed), -060 (high speed), -059(combination low and high speed)
Input Jumper Internal Power External Power
1&2 W3 SHORT PINS1&2, 3&4, 5&6
OPENNO JUMPERS
3&4 W2 SHORT PINS1&2, 3&4, 5&6
OPENNO JUMPERS
5&6 W1 SHORT PINS1&2, 3&4, 5&6
OPENNO JUMPERS
Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board JumpersFigure 2 - 18
NoteThe maximum voltage for discrete inputs on the Additive Injector Board is 24 Vac or24 Vdc.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 30 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 31
Jumper Settings - Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board(Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027) - P/N 3-6000-036 (low speed), -048 (high speed), -049(combination low and high speed)
NoteWhen using a Linear Power Supply P/N 3-6000-027, -031 JP10 needs to have pin 2-3.When using the Switching Power Supply P/N 3-6000-067, -068 JP10 needs to havepins 1 to 2.
Jumper Schedule
Select Internal PowerJP10 pins 2 to 3
External Power
InputChannel
24 VdcInternal Power
20 to 30 Vac or Vdc
102 to 140Vac
204 to 260Vac
1 and 2 JP9 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6JP8 1 to 2JP7 1 to 2
JP9 all outJP8 1 to 2JP7 1 to 2
JP9 all outJP8 2 to 3JP7 2 to 3
JP9 all outJP8 all outJP7 all out
3 and 4 JP6 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6JP5 1 to 2JP4 1 to 2
JP6 all outJP5 1 to 2JP4 1 to 2
JP6 all outJP5 2 to 3JP4 2 to 3
JP6 all outJP5 all outJP4 all out
5 and 6 JP3 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6JP2 1 to 2JP1 1 to 2
JP3 all outJP2 1 to 2JP1 1 to 2
JP3 all outJP2 2 to 3JP1 2 to 3
JP3 all outJP2 all outJP1 all out
Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board JumpersFigure 2 - 19
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 32 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# DC Discrete Input / Output board (DC I/O) (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696)
Recommended locations are slots J3 and / or J4, component side faces left (toward thepower supply). The recommended location for a single DC I/O board is slot J3.
The DC I/O board accepts six 24 Vdc or 24 Vac discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs andprovides four discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs. The nominal input level is 24 Vdc or 24Vac, either dry contact closures or externally powered, depending on internal jumperconfiguration. See Figure 2-18. Control output circuits are 24 Vdc only. Each output circuitis rated to switch a non-inductive load of 250 mA dc maximum. Inputs are available as highspeed (130 Hz maximum with a minimum pulse width of 3 ms), low speed (10 Hz maximumwith a minimum pulse width of 50 ms) or a combination of both. Be sure to specify thecorrect part number.
Status inputs are processed as indicated:
Internally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed.The status input is OFF when the contact is open.
Externally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed and voltage is present on the input.The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is removed.
NoteInputs can be configured ON = open or ON = closed.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 33
Jumper Settings - DC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696) - P/N 3-6000-006(low speed), -058 (high speed), -057 (combination of low and high speed)
Jumper Connection Function
W1 2-to-3 in Input 6 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W1 1-to-2W1 3-to-4
in Input 6 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W2 2-to-3 in Input 5 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W2 1-to-2W2 3-to-4
in Input 5 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W3 2-to-3 in Input 4 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W3 1-to-2W3 3-to-4
in Input 4 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W4 2-to-3 in Input 3 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W4 1-to-2W4 3-to-4
in Input 3 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W5 2-to-3 in Input 2 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W5 1-to-2W5 3-to-4
in Input 2 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W6 2-to-3 in Input 1 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W6 1-to-2W6 3-to-4
in Input 1 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
DC I/O Board JumpersFigure 2 - 20
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 34 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# 2-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram BE-12707) - P/N 3-6000-061(standard, -40 to 110 C), -062 (high range, 50 to 200 C), -063 (low range, -50 to -200o o
C)o
Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).
The 2-channel analog input board accepts one 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)input and one 4 to 20 mA dc current loop input. The RTD input must be a platinum RTD,100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha is0.003850 S/S/ C (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 C. A common current sourceo o
and Vref is provided for the RTD. The 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an internal 225Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load is 975 Ohms. Analogtransmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a standard range(-40 to 110 C), high range (50 to 200 C), and a low range (-50 to -200 C). Be sure too o o
specify the correct part number.
Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.
# 8-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12698) - P/N 3-6000-064(standard, -40 to 110 C), -065 (high range, 50 to 200 C), -066 (low range, -50 to -200o o
C)o
Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).
The 8-channel analog input board accepts four 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)inputs and four 4 to 20 mA dc current loop inputs. RTD inputs must be platinum RTD's,100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha is0.003850 S/S/ C (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 C. A common current sourceo o
and Vref is provided for the RTD's. Each 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an internal225 Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load in 975 Ohms. Analogtransmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a standard range(-40 to 110 C), high range (50 to 200 C), and a low range (-50 to -200 C). Be sure too o o
specify the correct part number.
Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 35
2.3 Mechanical Installation
In planning the physical installation of the DanLoad 6000, consider ease of use of the instrumentwith the operator in a safe and comfortable position. Consideration must also be given toperformance of maintenance tasks without disrupting ongoing product delivery operations in closeproximity. It may be helpful to draw rough diagrams of the normal actions of the operator duringthe different possible batch delivery related tasks. Be especially mindful of the location of theoperator in relation to the location of one or two tanker vehicles and their related loading arm /bottom loading hose connections. Some location / position restrictions may be present when aDanLoad 6000 is used as a retrofit or upgrade in an existing installation. However, mechanicalinstallation planning should still be performed. It may be possible to correct an inconvenientcontroller mounting location that exists in a current loading rack installation when a DanLoad 6000is retrofit at the installation.
The major steps performed during installation are listed below.
# Plan the installation# Fabricate device supports and lay electrical conduit# Mount the DanLoad 6000 and other load rack devices# Run and connect all wiring# Verify and tag each wire# Seal conduit within 18-inches (450 mm) of each device# Secure cases and covers of all devices# Apply electric power# Setup (configure) DanLoad 6000 and any other devices as required# Disable product block valves and additive block valves to prevent any product or
additive flow - then verify system monitor and control functions with dry piping# Enable one product block valve at a time and one additive injection system at a time
- then verify the piping integrity and system operation in increments for each product andeach additive handling system
# Perform meter proofs to determine DanLoad 6000 meter calibration
Consider the points listed below during installation planning for a DanLoad 6000.
# Maintenance access:
The operator panel is hinged at the bottom side and opens down for ease of maintenanceaccess. All conduit routing should be to the rear, sides, or down. No object should belocated under the DanLoad 6000 and in front of the conduit connections for a distance ofapproximately 15-inches (380 mm) below the instrument.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 36 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# Mounting height:
Recommended mounting height is approximately 45 to 50 inches (1.14 to 1.27 meters)above grade to the bottom of the DanLoad 6000 case. Mounting height determines the easeof viewing the display panel and ease of use of the keypad.
# Mounting position:
North / south / east / west orientation of the operator control panel is somewhatpredetermined by the loading facility design. Consider the location of the user / operator inrelation to one or two tanker vehicles present and connected at the loading island.
# Mounting fixtures:
Mounting fixtures must be fabricated for the DanLoad 6000. Four M10-1.5 metric threadbolts for mounting are provided with each DanLoad 6000. The instrument can be bottommounted or rear mounted. Bottom mounting is preferable due to the weight of the device.The mounting attachment should be a 1/8-inch (3 mm) (minimum) thick mild steel memberwith four 7/16-inch (11.5 mm) diameter holes that match the bolting pattern being used.The steel member may be sheet, angle, channel, or other shape.
The forward pair of mounting screw holes in bottom mount fixtures must be centered nomore than 3/4-inch (19 mm) from the edge. The case has a 2-degree taper to the rear. Thestandard case may need a shim as much as 0.170-inch (4.3 mm) thick at the rear pair ofscrews to level the instrument. Leveling the case will allow for best conduit alignment.
Fixtures for rear mounting may need additional bracing to ensure rigidity.
# Special installation considerations:
The DanLoad 6000 is designed for installation in an outdoor environment. The instrumentis weather proof and explosion proof per applicable standards. Some of the followinginstallation suggestions concerning environmental protection describe accepted engineeringpractices and should not be considered to be limitations on the utility of the instrument.
# If the loading rack / island area is covered, the DanLoad 6000 should be located sothat the user / operator is protected or partially protected from direct rainfall.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 37
# Tropical climates: It is advisable to place sunshades above the DanLoad 6000 andother electronic instruments, such as process transmitters. Sunshades should belocated to prevent direct sunlight on the instruments during the hottest part of the day(10:00 to 15:00). Sunshades can be constructed of metal, fiberglass, or othersuitable materials. They should be rear sloping to direct rain to the rear of theinstrument, away from the user / operator. Avoid sharp edges or corners onsunshades to prevent injuries.
# Desert areas / blowing sand: In areas where blowing sand in common, it isadvisable to install a cover to protect the operator control panel during idle time.Continuous blowing sand over an extended time period can affect the readability ofthe key legends and the display panel due to the sandblasting effect. A cover can befabricated from raw materials or may consist of modified NEMA 4 weatherproofenclosure with a sealed rear cutout for placement over the operator panel. Use carein the design of any hinged cover so that wind gusts do not move the cover and causeinjuries. Any cover design must allow for maintenance access to the DanLoad 6000.The operator panel is hinged to open in the down direction for maintenance access.
# High humidity: In areas of continuous high humidity, it is advisable to place a 3-inch x 3-inch desiccant pack inside the DanLoad 6000 case. Desiccant packs shouldbe placed so that expansion due to moisture absorption does not interfere with anyof the equipment or wiring inside the case. Two sources of desiccant packs are:
# Waterguard Desiccants # A+ CorporationP.O. Box 1079 Prairieville, Louisiana 7076916023 I-10 East, Suite 30Channelview, Texas 77530
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 38 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
2.4 Electrical Installation
WarningShut off all sources of AC and DC power to the loading island site before installing theDanLoad 6000.
2.4.1 General Considerations
Use two or three cable entries provided on the bottom of the enclosure for wiring access to theDanLoad 6000.
# A threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the left side of theunit (for AC power and control / status signals).
# A spare threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the right sideof the unit (may be used for meter pulse wiring if it is desired to segregate meter pulsewiring from all other signals).
# A threaded 2-inch female NPT (or M50 x 1.5 mm) connection for DC cabling and lowvoltage level signals in the center.
NoteAll cable entries must be sealed within 18-inches (450 mm) of the enclosure with suitablesealing / potting compound.
Guidelines for field wiring installation:
# External AC and DC wiring must be routed in separate conduits.
# Record cable / wire routing and interconnection information so that as-built documentationfor the system can be generated later.
# Provide remote circuit breakers and optional disconnect switches for all AC and DC powerinput circuits.
# Follow power and signal field wiring grounding standards.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 39
# Use only stranded copper wire, equal to or larger gauges as indicated on the basic wiringdiagrams located at the rear of this section, do not cut or weaken wire strands duringinsulation removal.
# All wire ends should be clearly marked with slip-on wire tags or similar devices, the wiretags should preferably be color coded to indicate the voltage level and marked with thespecific signal name.
# Power and signal wires should be cut with an additional length of approximately 2-inchesfor service loops to allow terminal board / connector removal.
# All wiring should be positioned within the unit to avoid unnecessary crimping andovercrowding, and to insure proper clearance for the instrument door and hinges.
# After completion, thoroughly check the wiring to insure that input AC power and all fieldinput / output signals are correctly connected at the DanLoad 6000 terminations and at theterminations located on the corresponding field device.
2.4.2 Selection / Installation of Electrical Wire and Cable
All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code, local state or other jurisdiction, andcompany standards and practices. Recommendations for 115 / 230 Vac power wiring:
# Use multi-strand copper conductor wire and cable for connecting the DanLoad 6000 to thepower source and the field devices.
# All wire and cable must be in new condition, and must adhere to the manufacturer's qualitystandards with the size, type of insulation, voltage rating.
# Recommended wire types and sizes for AC power input to the DanLoad 6000:
# Power feed should be 115 or 230 Vac, 47 to 63 Hertz, single phase, three wire. A15 Amp circuit breaker and optionally a power disconnect switch must be located ina safe area.
# Wire size AWG 14 for power feed for distances up to 250 feet.
# Wire size AWG 12 for power feed for distances of 250 to 500 feet.
# Wire size AWG 10 for power feed for distances of 500 to 1000 feet.# Contact Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service - Electronics Division, for power
feed distances greater than 1000 feet.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 40 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# Single-conductor wiring must be THWN type, which is moisture and heat-resistantthermoplastic with nylon jacket, approved for dry-and-wet locations, and has amaximum operating temperature of 75 degrees Celsius (167 degrees Fahrenheit).The wire or cable jacket must contain the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. mark forGasoline and Oil Resistant, II.
# Shielded wires and cables for meter pulse signals must have shield-drain wires. The shield-drain wires must not be more than two AWG sizes smaller than the conductors for the cable.The shield-drain wire must be connected to ground at only one end of the run.
# RS-485 serial data signals should be connected via two twisted pairs with overall shield,AWG 28 to AWG 22. Ideally, the capacitance should not be greater than 16 pF per foot(Belden 9842 for example). The use of a signal common (ground) conductor connected toeach device is a recommended option. Capacitance greater than 16 pF per foot may be usedat reduced baud rates and/or with shorter data communication cable runs. See typicalcommunications connection drawings in Appendix E.
# RS-232 single ended serial data signals should be AWG 28 to AWG 18 for cable lengths to15 meters (50 feet). Consult factory for cable lengths greater than 15 meters.
# All cables must have either Teflon or PVC exterior jacket.
# Insulated wire and cable must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendation. Maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimumbending radius must not be exceeded.
# Use suitable lubrication during wire pulls in conduit to prevent wire stress.
# All cables and individual wires must have cable or wire markers at each termination. Markersmust contain the specific wire or cable codes designated for that particular circuit. The wireand cable markers must be legible and permanent.
# Check all wiring connected to the DanLoad 6000 for continuity, proper size, and properclassification. Verify the source or destination of each circuit before connection to theDanLoad 6000 and related devices.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 41
2.4.2.1 Input / Output Field Signal Wiring
Recommendations for process signal wiring:
# Metal conduit must be used for all process signal wiring.
# Use separate conduits for AC Voltage and DC Voltage circuits.
# All process signal wiring must be a single, continuous length between field devices, and theDanLoad 6000, unless the length and / or conduit runs require that multiple pulls be made.In these instances, the individual conductors must be interconnected with suitable terminalblocks.
2.4.2.2 Electrical Grounds
Recommendations for electrical grounds:
# A clamp type ground lug (color green) is located on the inside bottom front of the case.Chassis ground conductors (color code green) inside the DanLoad 6000 enclosure shouldbe stranded, insulated, copper wire. These device chassis ground conductors should all beconnected to the clamp type ground lug.
# A clamp type ground lug is located on the outside of the case at the rear of the lower right(facing the operator panel) casting rib. This ground point should be connected to a copperground rod as described below.
# A single-point ground (the outside case ground lug) must be connected to a copper-clad,ten-foot long, 3/4-inch diameter steel rod, which is buried, full-length, vertically, into thesoil as close to the equipment as is practical. (Grounding rod furnished by others.)
# Resistance between the copper-clad steel ground rod and the earth ground must not exceed25 Ohms. If necessary, additional ground rods may be driven into the ground, while aspacing of not less than 6 feet is used to separate each of the ground rods. Additionally, theground rods must be interconnected with a continuous stranded wire, sized as indicatedbelow.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 42 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
# When several DanLoad 6000 units are located in close proximity, each single pointequipment ground must be inter-connected to the single point grounds of the other DanLoadunits. These inter-enclosure equipment grounding connections must be made in a daisy-chain fashion with only one point of the grounding daisy-chain being connected to the actualground rod.
# The equipment-grounding conductors used between DanLoad 6000 units and the copper-cladsteel ground rod, or for inter-enclosure equipment ground connections must be sizedaccording to the following specifications:
# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 8 for distances of less than 15 feet.
# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 6 for distances of 15 to 30 feet.
# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 4 for distances of 30 to 100 feet.
# Consult Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service Department - ElectronicsDivision for distances greater than 100 feet.
# All inter-enclosure equipment-grounding conductors must be protected by metallicconduit.
# Shield-drain wires must be connected to ground at only one end of the shieldedconductor run.
# External equipment, such as data printers or terminal automation systems, whichare connected to the DanLoad 6000, must be powered via isolation transformers tominimize the ground loops caused by the internally shared safety and chassisgrounds.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 43
2.4.3 Selection / Installation of Wire Conduit
Recommendations for conduit installation:
# All conduit and the associated assembly and installation materials used for the installationof the DanLoad 6000 must be in new condition and shall adhere to the manufacturer's qualitystandards.
# All conduit runs must have an explosion proof sealing (potting) fitting located within 18-inches (455 mm) distance from the conduit entrance to the DanLoad 6000.
# The conduit installation must be vapor tight, with threaded hub fittings, sealed conduitjoints and gaskets on covers, or other approved vapor-tight conduit fittings.
# Conduit cutoffs must be square. Cutoffs must be made by a cold cutting tool, hacksaw, orby some other approved means that does not deform the conduit ends or leave sharp edges.
# All conduit fitting threads, including factory-cut threads, must be coated with a metal-bearing conducting grease, such as Crouse-Hinds STL or equivalent, prior to assembly.
# Temporarily cap the ends of all conduit runs immediately after installation to preventaccumulation of water, dirt, or other contaminants. Conduits must be swabbed out prior toinstalling the conductors.
# Where applicable, explosion proof seals must be installed in the conduit.
# Install drain fittings at the lowest point in the conduit run, install seals at the point of entryto the DanLoad 6000 to prevent vapor passage and accumulation of moisture.
# Use liquid tight conduit fittings, such as Myers Scru-tite, or similar, for conduit which isexposed to moisture.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 44 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
2.5 Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display
2.5.1 Hardware Setup / Configuration
Refer to Figure 2-21 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections.
The primary display/keypad is connected to P2 on the CPU board. The secondary display/keypadis connected to P3 on the CPU board.
The jumper (W1) on the secondary keypad board is installed to recognize the key codes from thesecondary keypad. The jumper (W1) on the primary keypad board should not be installed.
The weights and measures key (top left of the keyboard) will only function on the primary keypad.
Interface Board Function
3-6000-034 Remote display
3-6000-147 Remote start/stop
3-6000-149 Remote start/stop and remotedisplay
2.5.2 Software Setup / Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 auto-configures any connected display/keypad modules at power-up/reset of theCPU board. The yellow (top) and red (bottom) LED's (located to the right of the display) should"blink" on/off (once) just before text appears on the display. The displays/keypad modules shouldnot be powered on/off independently of the CPU board; they should be powered-up prior to or at thesame time as the CPU board.
The primary and secondary keypad/display modules have independently controlled automaticbacklighting and contrast adjustment. The primary LCD type (program code 355) and secondaryLCD type (program code 358) should be configured appropriately for each.
The primary and secondary displays present the same information simultaneously. However, onlyone keypad (primary or secondary) is active at a time. The active keypad is controlled by the swing-arm switches (SW2 and SW1) on the CPU board and the configured side detect method (programcode 312). A version of the remote display interface also incorporates a remote Start/Stop feature(assm. 3-6000-149). A second version of the board has only the Start/Stop feature (assm. 3-6000-147). The field wiring for both boards is shown in Appendix E.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 45
2.5.3 Wiring Details
The cable that connects the 2 interface cards requires 16 conductors, minimum wire size 24 AWG.The maximum length of the cable should be 2000 feet (610 meters).
2.5.4 Power Requirements
The standard enclosure furnishes a line Power Supply, which can be 120 or 240 VAC, 47 to 63 HZ.The display/keypad modules power requirement is 7 VDC minimum at 0.5 amperes.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 46 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Secondary Keypad / Display Connections Figure 2-21
Section 3
Setup
Operator Interface
Initial Setup Procedure
Signal Handling
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 1
NoteAppendix A contains several tables with data on the physical and functional configuration ofthe DanLoad 6000. These tables can be photocopied and unique configuration data can bemanually entered to provide a record of specific DanLoad 6000 installations.
This section contains information on the initial setup and configuration of the DanLoad 6000 Preset.Any combination of up to four flow meters, up to four components, and up to six additives can bedefined and controlled. A minimum of one flow meter and one component must be defined. Theuser performs the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000 via the operator control panel by following anautomatic sequence of displayed-prompts and key-press-responses.
The initial setup routine is a general procedure that combines the basic configuration of theinstrument with a tutorial function that familiarizes the user with the methods of changing values ofprogram codes. The initial setup procedure does not cover all the different types of program codes.For instance, the basic setup does not cover product blending, additive injection, or transactionstorage definitions.
Section 3.6 contains details on the setup and program codes associated with Product Blending.Section 3.7 contains details on the setup and program codes associated with Temperature andPressure Compensation.Section 3.8 contains information about Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter.Section 3.9 contains details on the setup and program codes associated with Additive Injection.Section 3.10 contains details on Transaction Storage Definition which is applicable if user definedtransaction tickets are printed or the DanLoad 6000 communicates with a terminal automationsystem.
The DanLoad 6000 only requires AC power to execute the setup procedure. Therefore, it is possibleto preconfigure the instrument in a shop or office before on-site installation. The DanLoad 6000retains the setup configuration in non-volatile memory when power is disconnected from the unit.The DanLoad 6000 should have the correct type and number of process signal input / output boardsinstalled before initial setup procedure is begun.
The initial setup procedure is performed in any of the following instances.
# Before or during installation of a new DanLoad 6000 that has not been setup previously.# If a new main processor board, that has not been setup, is installed (Note: Spare main
processor boards can be setup for your application in advance. The setup parameters areretained in non-volatile battery-backed RAM (random access memory).Note: A configured battery backed RAM module can be moved from one main processorboard to another main processor board without loss of configuration or totalizer data.)Note: When changing the CPU board, make sure the replacement board has the samefirmware version as the original CPU board. Follow the instructions that come with spareor replacement boards and be sure to handle the CPU Board carefully so that the componentsdo not touch the back of the board.
# If the integrated RAM / battery module on the main processor board is replaced.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 2 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
After the initial setup procedure has been completed, the DanLoad 6000 can be easily reconfiguredto add or change operational features such as product blending, additive injection, new deliverycontrol recipes, data logging, and communication with a terminal automation system.
3.1 Overview of DanLoad 6000 Capabilities
The DanLoad 6000:
# Accepts various types and combinations of process input signals, such as flow from pulseoutput type flow meters, temperatures (RTD), pressures and / or density (4 to 20 mA dcanalog), and discrete contact closures indicating various status and permissive conditions.
# Performs mathematical and logical calculations based on configuration program codes(setup program codes), user / operator input from the keypad, and the current values andstates of the process inputs.
# Generates discrete relay / solenoid control output signals based on the results of themathematical and logical calculations performed.
# (Optionally) Transmits selected data logs to a logging printer.
# (Optionally) Transmits user defined transaction tickets to a logging printer.
# (Optionally) Performs bi-directional communication, functioning as a slave processor fora terminal automation system, distributed processing system, or other host computer. TheDanLoad 6000 Communications Specification, part number 3-9000-674, containsinformation for programmers and engineers involved in implementing the DanLoad 6000 asa node in a communications network.
The DanLoad 6000 can be set up to perform many different tasks based on the requirements ofvarious load rack applications. Setup is accomplished by physical configuration (installing circuitboards) and then executing the setup routine. The setup routine or logical configuration isaccomplished by user interaction with the operator control panel which consists of a multi-line /graphical LCD display panel and a numeric / function keypad.
Information on installation planning, design, and physical configuration of the DanLoad 6000 iscovered in Section 2 - Installation. Therefore, it is assumed at this time that the instrumentcontains the process input / output signal boards which provide the physical signal handling capacityfor the intended load rack application. The physical configuration, locations and types of processinput / output boards, can be sensed by the DanLoad 6000 and displayed for verification at the startof the setup routine.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 3
Program Codes
Program codes are all configurable parameters of the DanLoad 6000. Each Program Code consistsof the following four parts. A three-digit identification number, a name, a selection or value (note:some values are selected from a predefined pick-list, other values are free form entry), and one tofour program code attributes. The selection or value of a program code affects the general orspecific operation of the DanLoad 6000. Each three-digit identification number / name combinationidentifies the specific selection or value. Identical names are repeated when the associated functionis required at several places in a series of similar functions. Therefore, the name is the generalidentifier of the program code and the three-digit identification number is the specific identifier ofthe program code.
Example: 085 Low flow restart volume 50
Item Description
085 The three-digit program code is in the range of 001 to 991.Not all numbers in the series are used. The program codenumber is a unique identifier of an associated value orselection.
Low flow restart volume The name of the program code can be unique or can berepeated for similar program codes in a series of programcodes. In this example: program code 085 / 091 / 097 / 103Low flow restart volume where each three-digit identificationnumber corresponds to one component: 1, 2, 3, or 4.
50 The value of the program code. In this example, the valuecan be any number from 0 to 99999.
<attribute> (not shown) Program codes may have one or more of the following fourattributes set active: Read only, Weights and measures,Data logging, Value changed. See Section 6.1 for additionalinformation on program code attributes.
Program codes are divided into twenty-five functional groups. Each functional group is divided intoone or more display pages which can be shown on the display panel. Program codes are accessiblefor monitoring or changing when the DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Program Mode. A diagramof the Program Mode menu tree is shown in Figure 3 - 1. All program codes are accessible via theSetup selection of the Program Mode Menu. Functional groups of program codes are listed inFigure 3 - 2. The value part of a program code can be changed by keypad entries.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 4 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Operating Modes
The method of user interaction with the DanLoad 6000 is defined by the functional state of theinstrument. Communications and interaction with a terminal automation system is defined by thestate of the Operating Mode.
Functional mode (set by the user via the Display/Keypad):
# Loading Mode Normal operation with the instrument controlling batch productdeliveries to a tanker vehicle.
# Program Mode Permits initial setup and modification of the operation of theinstrument. Access to this mode is passcode restricted and can onlybe entered while the DanLoad 6000 is not controlling a batch deliveryoperation and a delivery transaction is not open.
Operating mode (set by state of program code 025 Operating mode and by the state of programcode 343 auto/manual changeover INPUT):
# Auto Remote control operation, by communicating with a terminalautomation system and local validation of configured safety circuits.
# Manual Communicates status to a Terminal Automation System, but withoutremote control functions. Performs local validation of configuredsafety circuits.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
3-5 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ Setup
Program Mode Menu
Alarm reset 6 Alarm reset display
Reprint transaction 6 Reprint transaction display
Setup - Setup menu ______________________________________________________ *
Program code attributes 6 Program code attributes display *
*
Set date and time 6 Set date and time display *
*
Set contrast/backlighting 6 Set contrast/backlighting display *
*
Diagnostics - Diagnostics menu _______________________________ * * *
Reprint cutoff - Reprint end-of-day processing data * *
* *
CALMON status - Calibration monitoring Diagnostics Menu Setup Menu Firmware versions Security parameters Additive calibration - Additive meter calibration screen RAM tests Unit parameters Keypad Valve parameters EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) Display Meter parameters Inputs/Outputs Component parameters DUART Delivery parameters ARCNET Digital valve parameters Crash analysis Pulse per unit outputs Show memory Additive delivery parameters Print configuration Factors Exit (ALT+CLEAR) Alarms I/O parameters Additive I/O parameters Component I/O parameters Temperature/pressure/density Recipes Data communications Dynamic data display Data logging Blending Additive pumps/block valves LPG/pressure Transaction storage Transaction ticket Analog inputs Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
Menu Tree - Figure 3 - 1
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
3-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ Setup
Parameters Program Code Used For
Security parameters 001 to 024 operation security
Unit parameters 025 to 047 global parameters
Valve parameters 048, 049 flow control valves
Meter parameters 050 to 061 flow meters
Component parameters 065 to 077 liquid components
Delivery parameters 078 to 111 batch deliveries
Digital valve parameters 112 to 127 digital flow control valves
Pulse per unit outputs 128 to 134 quantity pulses to external equipment
Additive delivery parameters 135 to 168 additive injection
Factors 169 to 219 flow meter factors and flow rates
Alarms 220 to 279 actions and limits
I/O parameters 280 to 379 input / output signal assignments
Additive I/O parameters 380 to 399 additive injection signal assignments
Component I/O parameters 400 to 425 component block valve signal assignments
Temperature / pressure / density 426 to 479 standard quantity calculation
Recipes 480 to 661 product / batch deliveries
Data communications 662 to 672 logging / terminal automation system
Dynamic data display 679 to 695 operator data view (programmable)
Data logging 696 to 710 reports to printer
Blending 711 to 799 product blending control
Additive pumps/block valves 800 to 817 additive pump and block valve control
LPG/Pressure 818 to 833 select pressure calculation and control methods
Transaction data storage 834 to 902 allocate memory for transaction data storage
Transaction ticket 920 to 982 user defined transaction ticket format
Analog inputs 983 to 991 v2 CPU board calibration for 4-20 mA RTD
Program Code Groups - Figure 3 - 2
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 7
3.2 Operator Interface
User / operator interaction with a DanLoad 6000 is described below.
# The user issues a command via a single key press / release action or by simultaneouslypressing / releasing two keys. While operating in the Loading Mode, all operator entries aresingle-key press actions. While operating in the Program Mode, some user entries requiresimultaneous two-key actuations.
# The DanLoad 6000 responds by either executing the command immediately or by promptingthe user, via the display panel, for additional data entry.
# If the command is executed immediately, the displayed information will change in somemanner to indicate response to the command.
# If the command cannot be completed without additional information from the user, one ofvarious types of data input prompt displays will be shown. Now the user has the option toenter the data in response to the displayed prompt or to return the DanLoad 6000 to theprevious state without modifying any internal or external state or configuration.
3.2.1 Data Display Operation
While operating in the Program Mode, data from the DanLoad 6000 is presented to the user on an8-line by 40-column LCD display panel. Miscellaneous messages and data are displayed in theformat shown in the General Display Format, Figure 3 - 3.
Header lineData lineData lineData lineData lineData lineData lineMessage line
General Display FormatFigure 3 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 8 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
One common format of the general display is the Program Code View display, Figure 3 - 4. TheProgram code View display is used throughout the initial setup procedure and in the future formonitoring and / or changing program code values / selections.
Header lineccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvMessage line
Program Code ViewFigure 3 - 4
The field types displayed in the Program code View, Figure 3 - 4, are described below.
# Header line An alpha-numeric field that is used to describe the contents ofthe display. Usually a program codes group or sub-grouptitle, such as:
Meter 1 parameters
# ccc A three-digit field containing the Program Codeidentification number that specifics a unique program code.The range of the program code series is 001 to 991 (severalprogram code numbers in the series are not assigned). Allprogram codes / parameters are described in the tables inAppendix A and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.
# name An alpha-numeric field that contains the name that describesthe function of the program code. Names are up to 34-characters long. Identical names are used for functions thatare repeated several times in a series of similar program codesfor different physical or logical items. A typical name is:
Meter ID
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 9
# vvvvvvvv A variable length numeric, alpha-numeric, or selection fieldthat contains the value or selection of the correspondingparameter (Program Code). The contents of this field can bechanged by the user (unless the program code attribute isRead-only). The value / selection is changed via key entries.The key entry sequences are dependent on the type of fieldand are described in the following section. The three types offields that can be displayed in this area are:
# numeric The field can contain a variable number ofdigits (0 thru 9), a decimal separator (defined byprogram code 040 Decimal separator), and a minussign (-).
# alpha-numeric The field consists of a variablenumber of alpha-numeric characters (also called astring).
# selection The field consists of one of an internallydefined option selected from a list of possible optionsfor this field entry.
# Message line An alpha-numeric field used to display a message to the user.Several prompt messages can be user defined in theapplicable sections of the following setup description.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 10 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Keypad (English Version)
3.2.2 Keypad Operation
The keypad, located on the front panel, provides the method for the local operator to entercommands and data into the DanLoad 6000. Example of keypad layouts for different languages areshown below.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 11
Keypad (Spanish Version)
Keypad (French Version)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 12 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Key Primary Function Alternate Function
0 thru 9 numeric digits
ALT used in combination with otherkeys to modify the function ofthe other keys, seedescriptions in theALTERNATE FUNCTIONcolumn
0 0 digit view I/O configuration summary
1 1 digit toggle minus sign '-'
3 3 digit increase display contrast (darken)
6 6 digit decrease display contrast(lighten)
START start batch delivery
STOP/PRINT stop batch delivery/printbatch/transaction report
ENTER accept value or execute option PROGRAM
CLEAR remove selected value EXIT
SELECT scroll options list BACKSPACE
87
scroll up scroll left
96
scroll down scroll right
W&M the Weights and Measures security switch(round, spring loaded, sealable switch located in the upper left areaof the keypad; this switch is sealable in the depressed (CLOSED) position)
Key FunctionsFigure 3 - 5
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 13
Several keys perform dual functions, dependent on the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000. TheLoading Mode is active if the Loading Display, the Additive Selection Display, or the RecipeSelection Display is currently showing on the display panel. The Program Mode is active if theProgram Mode Menu or any related sub-menu is currently showing on the display panel. Specificfunctions of the keys in the Loading Mode and the Program Mode are described below.
Key Function
Loading Mode only:
START Initiate a batch delivery after entry of the preset quantity.
STOP/PRINT Suspend a batch delivery operation in progress or end transaction in progress.Print an optional transaction report that may include batch data.
Loading Mode and Program Mode:
W&M (spring loaded captive switch located in the upper left area of the keypad)The Weights and Measures security switch provides global restriction formodification of all program codes that have the Weights and Measuresattribute set ON. This restriction prevents users / operators from modifyingthe values or selections of these program codes. See Section 6.1 ProgramCode Attributes for a complete description of program code attributes and theWeights and Measures security switch.
# CLOSED Depressed and captive with the slot in the vertical position.Can be wire sealed in this position. Critical weights and measuresvariables cannot be modified.
# OPEN Extended with the slot in the horizontal position. Criticalweights and measures variable can be modified (the switch must beOPEN prior to accessing the Program Mode to enable modificationcapability).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 14 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Key Function
ALT This key is used in conjunction with several other keys to change the primaryfunction performed by the other key. The primary function of a dual functionkey is indicated on the top of the key face (white letters / black background).The alternate function of a dual function key is indicated on the bottom of thekey face (black letters / white background). Numeric keys 0, 1, 3, and 6also have alternate functions as indicated below. The ALT key should bepressed and maintained in the depressed position while simultaneouslypressing and releasing an alternate function key to execute an alternatefunction.
0 thru 9(Loading Mode) Numeric keys used for numeric data entry.
(Program Mode) Numeric keys used for numeric data entry and selection of alphacharacter group for data entry.
ALT+0 Active in Program Mode only, activates display of the physical configurationof the DanLoad 6000. The first page displayed contains the location of theprocess signal input / output boards detected during the power-up sequence.Successive pages, accessed by the 98 keys, show the currently configuredstate of physical input / output to logical input / output assignments in thefollowing groups: RTD inputs, 4-20 mA inputs, Discrete inputs, Discreteoutputs
ALT+1 Active in Program Mode only. Toggles the minus sign on or off for anumeric entry. Can be used before, during, or after entry of a numericvalue.
ALT+3 Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Increases the display contrast(darkens the display).
ALT+6 Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Decreases the display contrast(lightens the display).
ENTER(Loading Mode) Accept or bypass data item entry or preset quantity entry and
continue.
(Program Mode) Accept the value or selection highlighted by the box cursor.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 15
Key Function PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER)
(Loading Mode) Change to Program Mode.
(Program Mode) Ignore any edit made to the current field selected by the box cursorand restore the original value / selection.
CLEAR(Loading Mode) Clear the current data item entry or preset quantity entry.
Remove the Dynamic Data Display window from the loading. display
(Program Mode) Clear the current numeric or alphanumeric entry.
EXIT (ALT+CLEAR)(Loading Mode) Bypass the data item entry sequence. If data item entry is defined
(Program Mode) Step to the next higher menu level. Change to Loading Mode whenthe Program Mode Menu is displayed.
SELECT(Loading Mode) Display dynamic data window on the loading display.
(Program Mode) Scroll through selection options. Step to next character positionwhen editing an alpha-numeric string entry.
BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT)(Loading Mode) No function.
(Program Mode) Step to previous character position when editing an alpha-numericstring entry. Scroll backward through selection options.
98 (Loading Mode) Change Dynamic Data Display page.
(Program Mode) Step to next or previous program code (parameter) display line.
67 (ALT+9 or ALT+8)(Loading Mode) No function.
(Program Mode) Step to next or previous character entry when editing an alpha-numeric string entry.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 16 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.3 Initial Setup Procedure Overview
The initial setup procedure guides the user through a sequence of displayed-prompts and key- press-responses. The user accomplishes the following three tasks while executing the initial setupprocedure.
# Accept or modify several default program code values / selections that inform the DanLoad6000 about the physical characteristics of the batch loading system. Section 3.5 containsinformation on process input / output channel assignment.
# Accept or modify several default program code values / selections that inform the DanLoad6000 about the type of flow calculations and logical operations to be performed.
# Guide the user through interactive verification and / or program code value changes. Thistutorial function familiarizes the user with the display format and the operator interface,using the keypad.
Read all of this section and review Section 6 - Program Code Definitions prior to performing theinitial setup procedure. In most cases, desired responses to the prompts encountered during theinitial setup procedure can be determined during execution of the setup procedure. However, if thecorrect response cannot be determined during the setup procedure, it is permissible to accept anyor all of the default values / selections for the program codes. Any default value or selection that isaccepted or modified can be changed easily at any time in the future.
The initial setup procedure automatically enters default values / selections for some program codesthat are not covered by the procedure. In some cases, these default values / selections requiremodification for the intended application. Review the additional information contained in Sections3.6 to 3.12 after the initial setup procedure is completed. This additional information should bereviewed to assure that the DanLoad 6000 is properly configured for your installation.
3.3.1 Data Entry
Several key press responses are required during execution of the initial setup procedure. Theresponses are a press / release of ENTER or 9 to continue, numeric data entries with the 0 thru 9numeric keys, option selection scrolling with the SELECT key, or alpha-numeric data entry. Thevalue or option displayed is accepted and entered by pressing the ENTER key or either the 9 or 8arrow key. Methods for data entry are described below.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 17
# Numeric data entry
Place the box cursor over the selected program code with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. Enter thedesired number with the numeric keys 0 through 9. Numeric entries are toggled betweennegative and positive values by entering the numeric value in the field and then pressing andholding the Alt key while pressing the 1 digit key. If an entry error is made, press theCLEAR key to clear the field and start again, or toggle the +/- sign to the opposite state.
# Option data entry
Selection options are contained in short lists permanently stored in the DanLoad 6000. Placethe box cursor over the selected program code with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. If necessary, usethe SELECT key or the BACKSPACE KEY (ALT+SELECT) to scroll the list forwardor backward until the desired option is displayed.
# Alpha-numeric data entry
If alpha-numeric data entry is permitted in a field, the message line will display thefollowing prompt: 0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3=0, 4=#, 5="This prompt indicates to the user that an alpha-numeric string of characters can be entered.The numbers 1 through 5 point to a specific location in a continuous string of characters. Forexample, the number 1 points to the letter A, a string of upper case letters continue to Z,the next character is a, a string of lower case letters continue to z, the next character is 0,a string of numbers continues to 9. In other words, each group of characters is in onecontinuous string of all possible characters. The apparent groups of characters do not wraparound to the start of that group.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 18 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
1 2 3 4 5
A a 0 # number/pound " double quote
B b 1 $ dollars ' apostrophe
C c 2 % percent : colon
D d 3 ? question mark ; semicolon
E e 4 ! exclamation point ( left parenthesis
F f 5 & ampersand ) right parenthesis
G g 6 + plus < less than
H h 7 - minus > greater than
I I 8 * asterisk [ left bracket
J j 9 / slash ] right bracket
K k = equal { left brace
L l . dot } right brace
M m , comma \ backslash
N n _ underline
O o ^ circumflex
P p ~ tilde
Q q á a acute
R r Í I acute
S s ó o acute
T t ú u acute
U u ñ n tilde (eñe)
V v ä a diaeresis (umlaut)
W w ë e diaeresis (umlaut)
X x ï I diaeresis (umlaut)
Y y ö o diaeresis (umlaut)
Z z ü u diaeresis (umlaut)
space
Alpha-Numeric CharactersFigure 3 - 6
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 19
Figure 3 - 6 contains a list of all available alpha-numeric characters organized into fivegroups. The characters in group 5 will vary slightly depending on the language selection(program code 028). Alpha-numeric characters are entered in the following manner whenthe prompt is displayed.
C The flashing square cursor is positioned in the leftward field position. The cursorindicates the current character entry position within the alpha-numeric field.
C The cursor is moved one character position right each time the SELECT key ispressed. The cursor is moved one character position left each time theBACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key is pressed.
C To enter an alpha-numeric character in the current character position, press thenumber key 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 which indicates the group of characters whichcontains the desired entry. Any number group selector can be pressed after the initialselection, if an error is made. (Note: An easy method to access the Z character ispress 2 to display lower case a then press the 7 (ALT+8) key.)
C The first character of the selected group will now be displayed in the active characterposition.
C To select another character from the specified group of characters, press the RIGHTARROW (6 ) which is the (ALT+9) to move to the next character in the selectionstring. Or, press the (7) which is the (ALT+ 8) to move to the previous character inthe selection string. The character selections will jog in sequence automatically ifboth the ALT key and either one of the arrow keys are simultaneously maintaineddepressed. When the desired character is displayed in the active character position,release the keys.
C Use the SELECT or the BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key to step the cursor tothe next or any desired position in the alpha-numeric field. Repeat the entrysequence described above until the field content is as desired.
# Special alpha-numeric data entry
Program codes 129 / 132 Control meters in the Pulse per unit outputs group and 139 / 144/ 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Control meters in the Additive parameters group select one of thefixed options G, N, or X in the following manner. Place the box cursor over the selectedprogram code with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. Maintain the ALT key depressed and select thedesired option with the 9 or 8 arrow keys.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 20 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.4 Initial Setup Procedure
The Weights and Measures switch located in the upper left area of the keypad should be rotateduntil the captive pin passes through the slot and releases the switch to the extended (OPEN)position.
The electrical jumper configuration for individual circuit boards installed at this time is describedin Section 2 - Installation. The electrical jumper configuration should be verified and AC powershould be connected and applied to the instrument.
The sequence of the initial setup procedure is presented below with examples of the displayspresented to the user, an explanation of the contents of the display, and the user response to eachdisplay.
DanLoad 6000CPU-1 firmware v5.30CPU-2 firmware v5.30Message EPROM v5.30
Power failure mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
The display example above shows the firmware (application software) version of the DanLoad 6000and the date and time that AC power input was last removed from the instrument.
DanLoad 6000Running CPU-1 RAM testPassedRunning CPU-2 RAM testPassed
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 21
The display example above shows the results of automatic diagnostic tests that check the operationof the RAM (random access memory). The normal message is Please wait while the test is inprogress and the normal result message is Passed. A Failed message indicates that a hardwareproblem exists in the DanLoad 6000.
Slot 1 AC I/OSlot 2 EmptySlot 3 EmptySlot 4 EmptySlot 5 2-Ch. MeterSlot 6 EmptySlot 7 2-Ch. AnalogDUART = 000 Pres ALT+CLEAR to exit
The display example above shows the location of all process input / output signal boards installedand the serial communications address of the DanLoad 6000. A message DUART = ###, where ###is 000 to 255, indicates the communications address for the dual universal asynchronous receiver/ transmitter module that handles RS 232 / RS 485 serial communications.
On the V1 CPU, the DUART is a daughter Board with an address switch. For firmware versions 5.3and higher the address switch is no longer used to configure the unit address. Program code 662 isused to identify the address of the unit.
On the V2 CPU, the DUART is built-in and is addressed using Program code 662.
The tables located in Appendix A should be photo-copied at this time and the copies used for entryof the physical input / output signal assignments for the DanLoad 6000. The individual channelassignments can be viewed and recorded at this time. While viewing the slot assignment displayabove, press any key to continue. The following display will be shown.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 22 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Meter inputs 01 Chan 0 2-Ch Meter in J5 02 Chan 1 2-Ch Meter in J5
ALT+SELECT to reconfigure
The display example above shows one of several similar displays which indicate the automatic input/ output signal numbering performed by the DanLoad 6000. The 9 and 8 arrows keys are used topage through this display group. Display types included in this group are:
I/O Signal Type Maximum Number
Meter inputs (shown above) 4 *
RTD inputs 4 * (5 for v2 CPU)
4-20 mA inputs 8 * (9 for v2 CPU)
Discrete inputs (can be more than one display page) 24 *
Discrete outputs (can be more than one display page) 28 *
* If circuit board configuration causes additional I/O points of any type tobe present, the additional I/O points cannot be assigned logically. (TheI/O points are not accessible.)
Section 2.4.1 contains additional information on automatic assignment of input / output channels.The fields located in this display group are described below.
# Header line Defines the input / output signal type.
# 01 Sequential number for this input. The sequence starts at 01 andcontinues through the highest input or output channel of that type.The DanLoad 6000 assigns these numbers automatically by sensingthe type of board in each slot (J1 to J7). Boards are scanned fromleft to right. Therefore, similar type channels in leftward locatedboards will have lower numbers than similar type channels inrightward located boards. A minimum of one meter pulse board mustbe present. If an analog board is not present, the RTD inputs and 4-20 mA inputs groups will display the message No points of this type.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 23
# Chan # Sequential number of the physical input / output channel on thecorresponding board. The sequence starts at 0. The maximum valuefor this field is 7, which corresponds to the eighth output on an ACI/O board (channels 0 to 7). All other boards have fewer channelsthan the AC I/O board.
# Meter Pulse This field indicates the board type in the indicated slot. Displays inthis field can be: 2-channel or 4-channel Meter, 2-channel or 8-channel Analog, AC I/O, DC I/O, or Enhanced I/O.
# J5 This field indicates the physical location of the board. Displays inthis field can be: J1 through J7.
# ALT+SELECT to reconfigureConfiguration during the initial setup procedure is automatic and noresponse to this prompt is required. If an input / output signal boardis added in slots J1 to J7 in the future, the DanLoad 6000 senses thepresence of the new board and always displays the currentconfiguration in the Slot # <board type> display. However, theinput / output channels are not renumbered until the manualcommand (ALT+SELECT) to reconfigure is issued.
(Note: If the input / output signal board arrangement of a configuredDanLoad 6000 is changed and the ALT+SELECT command is issued,input / output points may be renumbered. The physical I/O tointernal logical signal may be changed when the channels arerenumbered to correspond to the new configuration.)
NotesThe two swing arm switch inputs on the Main Processor Board and the two / four meterpulse inputs and two high resolution meter pulse outputs on the Meter Pulse Board arededicated functions and are not shown in the Configuration Summary Display.
The v2 CPU (introduced in 1997) has a built-in DUART, but does not have dedicated swing-arm inputs. AC or DC discrete inputs on I/O boards are used instead.
Version 5.50 software can be used with v1 CPU boards per the following:1. The communications address must be configured via program code 662 since
the DUART board’s address switch is ignored.2. Either the dedicated swing-arm discrete or inputs are used for side detection
depending on program codes 312, 37 and 377. See note at the beginning of5.12 in the software specification.
3. 4-20 mA input 01 and RTD input 01 on the CPU board are inaccessible.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 24 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.5 Process Input / Output Signal Handling
All input / output signal board slots (J1 to J7) are electrically identical. However, for electricalisolation of AC and DC signals, only AC I/O or Enhanced I/O boards should be installed in slotsJ1, J2 or J3. It is strongly suggested that board placement follow the recommended layout indicatedin the descriptions of each board in Section 2. The recommended board layout provides electricalisolation of AC Voltage control and status signals (AC I/O and / or Enhanced I/O boards) by thevertical metal partition that can be located between slots J2 and J3 or J3 and J4. In addition, if ananalog input signal board is installed, this board is electrically and physically isolated in therightward slot J7. A DanLoad 6000 basic configuration contains the following boards.
I/O Board
Capacity
Input Output
main processor 2 RS-485 or 1 RS-485 and 1 RS-232
2 DC (dedicatedfunction: swing arm)
N/A
one meter pulse (2-ch or 4-ch)
2 pulse- OR -4 pulse
2 pulse (dedicatedfunction: highresolution meter pulsefor 2-ch meter pulseboard only)2 DC control
one AC I/Oorone Enhanced I/O
2 AC status
6 DC/AC status
8 AC control
6 AC control
Basic ConfigurationFigure 3 - 7
For a v2 CPU installation, the “base” DanLoad 6000 has one 2- or 4-Channel Meter Pulse board andone AC I/O board. The v2 CPU board (1997) has one 4-20 mA input and one RTD input built-in.Up to two 2- or 4-Channel Analog Inputs boards can be added for measuring temperatures, pressuresand densities. Note that the DanLoad 6000 cannot correct densities at measured temperatures todensities at standard temperatures. Up to two meter pulse boards (of the same kind or mixed) canbe used.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 25
Basic configuration considerations:
# Serial communications require an RS-485 / RS-232 DUART module. For v1 CPU boards,a DUART module is required for data logging to a printer or data logging device. TheDUART is integral to the v2 CPU board.
# The meter pulse input board can be either 2-channel or 4-channel types. One or two boardscan be installed. If two boards are installed, they can be any combination of 2-channel and4-channel boards. However, there can be a total of only four flow meters. If two 4-channelboards are installed, four meters with two pulse signals from each meter can be implementedfor IP-252 level 'B' pulse security. For pulse security verification, pulse input Channel Ais used for flow measurement and pulse input Channel B is used for verification of ChannelA integrity).
# The swing arm input on v1 CPU boards is normally from either a single switch or dualswitch swing arm. This input is used for swing arm side detect and keypad side enable andto indicate the active load rack side to a terminal automation system.
3.5.1 Physical Input and Output Signal Assignment
The DanLoad 6000 automatically assigns physical input and output channel numbers during initialsetup or when manually commanded to do so. The channel assignment is performed as follows. Theinstrument scans the input / output signal boards located in slots J1 (leftward) through J7(rightward) in that order. Each board is identified and the physical channels on the board, indicatedin Appendix A, are assigned a sequential channel number corresponding to the same type channel.These physical I/O channel assignments can be viewed by pressing the ALT+0 key while operatingin the Program Mode. While viewing the channel assignments, the prompt message ALT+SELECTto reconfigure is displayed on the message line. Issuing this command causes the DanLoad 6000to re-number the physical input / output channels if the board complement has been altered in anymanner since the last configuration. There are five different types of input / output signals that canbe handled by the DanLoad 6000. These channel types are listed below.
I/O Channel Type Description
Meter inputs Dedicated meter pulse input numbers 01 and 02 if one meter pulse board isinstalled. Dedicated meter pulse input numbers 01, 02, 03, 04 if two meterpulse boards are installed. (Four channel meter pulse boards implementchannels 1A / 1B and 2A / 2B OR 3A / 3B and 4A / 4B depending on boardjumper configuration.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 26 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
I/O Channel Type Description
Analog Input Signal Channel Assignment
Input TypeAnalog Board Type
1 each 2-Ch
2 each 2-Ch
1 each8-Ch
2 each8-Ch
1 each 2-Ch /1 each 8-Ch
# of RTD inputs 1 2 4 8 5
# of 4-20 mA inputs 1 2 4 8 5
Discrete inputs Assigned discrete input numbers from 01 to the maximum number of discretestatus inputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered by theconfiguration scan.
Discrete outputs Assigned discrete output numbers from 01 to the maximum number ofdiscrete control outputs present, in the order that the inputs are encounteredby the configuration scan.
The physical channel assignments are indicated under each channel type header in the followingformat.
cc Chan n <board type> in Jn
where:
cc = Logical (software assigned) input / output number (for this type of point)assigned to this point. This number is assigned automatically. Discrete Vdcand Vac status inputs are numbered sequentially in the same series. Eachchannel number is dependent on the I/O board location and the physical boardchannel. Vdc and Vac control outputs are numbered sequentially in the sameseries, dependent on the I/O board location and the physical board channel.
Chan n = Sequential channel number 0 to n that identifies the physical channel on theI/O board. The maximum range for this number is 0 to 7. (Note: Maximumof 8 output channels on an AC I/O board.)
<board type>= Board name: 2-Ch. Meter, 4-Ch. Meter, AC I/O, DC I/O, Enhanced I/O,2-Ch. Analog, 8-Ch. Analog
Jn = Slot number, J1 through J7, where the board is located.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 27
The logical input / output number assignments are solely dependent on I/O board locations. Thisassignment informs the DanLoad 6000 of the physical input / output signal configuration and assignsnon-duplicated logical channel numbers (leftward column) for identifying each point. The physicalchannel assignments cannot be changed. The assignments are determined by the process I/O boardcomplement and type of boards.
Fail Safe Operation
The operating state of a discrete output is OPEN or deenergized when the controlled device is in aOFF, CLOSED, NORMAL, or SAFE state. Discrete outputs that control flow control valves, blockvalves, or pumps are energized or CLOSED to OPEN the valve or RUN the pump motor so that anopen wire, open coil, or power failure to the DanLoad 6000 will cause the affected valve(s) tomove to their CLOSED positions and pump motors to stop running. This method of handling controloutputs assures that operation of the loading system is inherently fail-safe.
Safety circuits (permissive status inputs) are normally closed switch or relay contacts that indicatea normal or safe condition from the corresponding device. Common permissive devices are vehicleground connection detectors, tank overspill detectors, and fire warning systems. The DanLoad6000 has the capability of detecting up to eight general purpose safety circuit inputs, six recipeselection inputs, and four block valve status inputs. Several normally closed contacts for differentsafety circuits can be field wired in series. This implementation reduces the number of physicaldiscrete inputs required, but also generalizes the common safety input. The DanLoad 6000, orterminal automation system, cannot determine the specific device that has generated the safetycircuit open alarm when several permissive signals are wired in series.
3.5.2 Inverted Discrete Inputs
Inverted discrete inputs. In order to provide greater flexibility with field signals, most discrete inputfunctions (e.g. safety circuit inputs, see the list below) can be configured to be "open" when poweris applied, "closed" otherwise, by simply adding 50 to the actual discrete input number, i.e.
Discrete input Meaningnumber0 Point not configured1 First discrete input, closed when power applied2 Second discrete input, closed when power applied. .. .
51 First discrete input, closed when no power applied52 Second discrete input, closed when no power applied. .. .
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 28 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Discrete inputs numbers 51 and above are called inverted discrete inputs. The DanLoad 6000validates inverted discrete inputs based on the actual number of discrete inputs, e.g. if there are 10discrete inputs (two AC I/O boards and a DC I/O board), discrete inputs 0 thru 10 and 51 through60 can be configured.
The configuration summary display ("ALT"+"0" in program mode) and the I/O diagnostic use onlyreal discrete inputs, not inverted state discrete inputs.
In Setup, inverted discrete inputs can be configured for the following:
- Safety circuit inputs- Recipe selection inputs- Component block valve inputs- Auto/manual change-over- Primary alarm reset switch- Flow control valve stem switch inputs- Flow control valve close inputs- Meter flow inputs- Additive selection inputs- Swing 1 and swing 2 inputs- End input
It is not be meaningful to configure inverted discrete inputs for the following:
- Additive feedback/meter inputs
Logical Signal Processing
The DanLoad 6000 implements logical signal handling techniques at the process signal interfacelevel by allowing any process input or output signal to be connected to any physical input or outputchannel of the same type, such as RTD, status input, or control output. This is accomplished byassigning each physical input and output channel to an internal logical channel (function) duringthe setup procedure via the program codes. This design provides flexibility for the user by allowingone common physical configuration of the DanLoad 6000 to be adaptable to most applications. Inaddition, the spare parts stocking requirements are greatly reduced so that only a minimal numberof different types of electronic signal input / output boards are required.
The actual links (assignments) between
physical input and output channels 76logical inputs and outputs 76
internal logical processing of these channels
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 29
are performed automatically during the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000. These assignments canbe manually changed later if required. The current physical channel to logical channel assignmentscan be viewed at any time. All physical input / output channel to logical channel assignments aredefined in the following program code groups. Appendix A contains worksheets that identify eachpoint.
# Meter parameters, program codes 050 to 061# I/O parameters, program codes 280 to 360# Recipe I/O parameters, program codes 361 to 379# Component I/O parameters, program codes 400 to 425# Additive I/O parameters, program codes 380 to 399# Additive pumps / block valves, program codes 800 to 833
The channel assignments defined by these program codes are viewable while operating in ProgramMode. The rightward column of the program code display line contains a one or two digit number.This number is the currently assigned logical channel number in the series of channel numberscorresponding to the type of channel.
Discrete status inputs and outputs are assigned to default logical channels during setup. Duringinitial setup, carefully verify that all input and output point assignments match the actual wiring ofyour installation. See Appendix A for default channel assignments.
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key to exit the input / output signal configuration display area andcontinue with the initial setup.
DanLoad 6000
Unit is not configured
Initial setup required
Enter passcode _________
The display example above shows messages that indicate the initial setup procedure has never beenexecuted on this DanLoad 6000. Enter the factory default passcode, 6000, with the numeric keysand then press the ENTER key.
The Set Date and Time display is shown next. This display provides the method the set the currentdate and time for the DanLoad 6000 internal calendar / clock. The date and time are maintained byan on-board battery on the main processor board and do not require external power.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 30 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Set Date and Time
Current date is mm/dd/yy Enter new date (mm/dd/yy): Current time is hh:mm:ss Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):
Set Date and Time DisplayFigure 3 - 8
The current date and time are displayed in the formats indicated in the Set Date and Time display.The date format is always in the form (mm/dd/yy) during the initial setup. After the initial setupis complete, the date format can be change via program code 038 Date format, if desired. The dateand time default during initial setup and before modification is: 01/01/93 00:00:ss [January 1,1993, several seconds (ss) after midnight (00:00:00)]. The flashing underline cursor is displayedright of the Enter new date (mm/dd/yy): prompt line for entry of a different date than the currentdate. Use numeric keys 0 to 9 to enter all or part of a new date. If it is desired to leave the value forany component of the current date unchanged, press the ENTER key. The ENTER key must bepressed once after each component of the date is entered or to accept the current value in thatcomponent. After the date has been entered or accepted, the flashing underline cursor moves to theright of the Enter new time (hh:mm:ss) prompt. The time value is entered or accepted in a similarmanner as the date entry. The EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key may be used at any time to step to thenext entry line.
The Set Date and Time display can be accessed at any time after the initial setup procedure iscompleted by selecting Set Date and Time from the Program Menu.
Meter totalizers Meter Gross Std 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0
Press any key to continue
The display example above shows the gross and standard values of the flow meter accumulators.The values may be zeros as indicated or some other values.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 31
Initial setup Is this unit a blender No
The display example above shows the default selection No, which indicates that the application issingle component loading. The default selection sets the number of flow meters, number of flowcontrol valves, number of components to 1, and unit type to sequential with automatic control ofthe block valve.
If the application requires blending of two to four components, press the SELECT key to scroll thepick list to the Yes option. Press the ENTER or the 9 arrow key to select the next program code.The Type of blender defaults to Seq.(auto). If another type of blending control is desired, press theSELECT key to scroll the options list (options are described in Section 6 - 026 Unit type. Pressthe 9 arrow key to select the next program code.
If Type of blender is Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual), the next prompt displayed is:065 Number of components which defaults to 2
If Type of blender is In-line or Off-rack, the next prompt displayed is:050 Number of meters which defaults to 2
Accept or change the default value as required.
Initial setup Is this unit a blender Yes Type of blender Seq.(auto) 065 Number of components 2
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 32 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
NoteFor the remaining description of the initial setup procedure, it is assumed that:
Is this unit a blender? selection remains the default option No
The following description covers one flow meter, one flow control valve, and onecomponent. The procedure for defining multiple devices and components is similar except forthe requirement to define additional program codes for the additional devices and components.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 33
Meter 1 parameters 051 Meter ID M1 052 Valve to be controlled 1
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="
The display example above shows program codes related to flow meter number 1. The No selectionfor blending has set the number of meters to 1, program code 050 indicated below is not displayedin the initial setup procedure:
050 Number of meters 1
051 Meter ID M1
Default string M1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the bottom line to allowthe user to change this string to any five characters.
052 Valve to be controlled 1
Default value is valve number 1. Assigns a flow control valve to control flow through this meter.A flow control valve must be assigned to each meter to control the batch loading. More than onemeter be assigned to the same flow control valve.
NoteIf the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual) multi-component blender, components are defined at this time. If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as an In-line or Off-rack blender, flow meters 2 through 4, as required, are defined at this time.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 34 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Component 1 066 Component ID Component #1 067 Meter 1 068 Mass adjustment 0.000000
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="
The display example above shows program codes related to component number 1. The No selectionfor blending has set the number of components to 1, program code 065 indicated below is notdisplayed in the initial setup procedure:
065 Number of components 1
066 Component ID Component #1
Default string Component #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the message lineto allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters.
067 Meter 1
Default value 1. This number indicates that flow meter 1 is assigned to measure this component.Only one flow meter, meter 1, is defined at this time so 1 is the only valid assignment. However,this assignment can be from 1 to 4 depending on the number of flow meters defined in theinstallation. (This program code defines the relation between components (products) and flowmeters.)
068 Mass adjustment 0.000000
Default selection 0.000000. This program code sets the “mass computation adjustment” factor (1),such that: Mass = Std volume x (Density - Buoyancy x 1). While the std volume is typically similarin magnitude to the gross volume, i.e. a similar number of units, the mass may be substantiallydifferent from both.
NoteIf the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual) multi-component blender, additional components are defined at this time.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 35
Delivery parameters 078 Maximum preset qty 3000 079 Minimum preset qty 50 080 Preset/delivery type Gross 081 Delivery display type Gross 082 Stop key action Low flow 083 Fall back qty 1000
The display example above shows global program codes related to the delivery method used todeliver all defined components. The default delivery program codes should be verified or changedas required to match the requirements of the installation.
078 Maximum preset qty 3000
Default value 3000. The entry sets the upper quantity limit, for any batch delivery, that can beentered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. The value is typically set to thequantity of the largest compartment to be loaded in any authorized tanker vehicle. Operatingprocedures may require loading of a quantity in excess of this number by loading more than onebatch to one compartment.
079 Minimum preset qty 50
Default value 50. The entry defines the lower quantity limit, for any batch delivery, that can beentered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. This quantity is referred to as theflushing quantity at some installations. Refer to Section 6.8 for details on the special value zero (0)operation.
080 Preset/delivery type Gross
Default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the gross quantity calculation is used fordelivery control. The flow control valve always controls ramp up to high flow rate based on grossdelivered quantity. The flow control valve controls ramp down to the low flow rate and terminatesdelivery based on the quantity type selection in this field.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 36 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
081 Delivery display type Gross
Default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the Loaded, Remaining, and Transactionvalues are displayed in gross quantity.
082 Stop key action Low flow
Default selection Low flow. This selection indicates the action to take after the STOP key is pressedduring a batch delivery. The flow rate is reduced until the low flow rate is achieved and then theload is terminated by commanding the flow control valve to close.
083 Fall back qty 1000
Default value 1000. This value is the quantity that flows at a fall back flow rate before the DanLoad6000 attempts to ramp up to the next higher flow rate.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 37
Comp 1 delivery parameters 084 Low flow start qty 50 085 Low flow restart qty 20 086 Low flow stop qty 50 087 Line pack delay (s) 2 088 Pump stop delay (s) 30 089 Block valve delay (s) 0
The display example above shows program codes related to the delivery method used to deliver thecomponent number 1 only. These default delivery program codes should be verified or changed asrequired depending on the design of the installation.
084 Low flow start qty 50
Default value 50. This value indicates the quantity units that must be loaded at the low flow ratebefore issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve. (Sequential unit type only.)
085 Low flow restart qty 20
Default value 20. This value indicates the quantity units that must be loaded at the low flow ratebefore issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve. If the quantity specified by programcode 084 Low flow start quantity has been delivered, this quantity is used after restart of a batchdelivery that has been temporarily suspended for any reason. (Sequential unit type only.)
086 Low flow stop qty 50
Default value 50. This value indicates the quantity units that must be loaded at the low flow ratebefore issuing the close command to the flow control valve at the end of a batch delivery operation.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 38 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
087 Line pack delay (s) 2
Default value 2. This value indicates that the pump run relay output is energized two seconds beforethe command is issued to open the flow control valve to low flow rate setting.
088 Pump stop delay (s) 30
Default value 30. This value indicates that the command to close the flow control valve is issuedand 30 seconds later the pump run relay output is de-energized.
089 Block valve delay (s) 0
Default value 0. This value indicates that the control output to open the component block valve isissued and 0 seconds later (immediately) the command to open the flow control valve to low flowrate is issued. The block valve control output is opened (block valve closed) at the termination ofthe batch delivery.
NoteIf the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multi-component blender, additional components aredefined at this time.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 39
Delivery parameters (cont'd) 108 Ramp clicks 30 109 Maintenance clicks 30 110 Additive pump stop (s) 10 111 Primary component 1
The display example above shows global program codes related to the method used to adjust flowcontrol valves, additive pump control, and blending.
108 Ramp clicks 30
Default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts to increase theflow rate to a higher flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and maintaining the fall backflow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.
109 Maintenance clicks 30
Default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts to maintain thecurrent normal flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and falling back to the next lowerflow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.
110 Additive pump stop (s) 10
Default value 10. This value is the number of seconds between the end of the load operation anddeenergizing the additive pump control circuits.
111 Primary component 1
Default value 1. This value sets the number of the component to use for calculation of blend ratiosand for clean line flushing. (Only applicable when program code 722 Blend error method set toGrspctsmpl or Stdpctsmpl .)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 40 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Meter factors 169 Number of factors/component 2 170 Meter factor method Fixed
The display example above shows global program codes related to the method used to handle meterfactors for all components / flow meters.
169 Number of factors/component 2
Default value 2. This value indicates that two meter factors for each component at two different flowrates (low flow start/stop and high flow) will be defined. Up to four flow rates for each componentcan be defined.
170 Meter factor method Fixed
Default selection Fixed. This selection indicates that the exact meter factors are used and nomathematical interpolation of the meter factor values between associated flow rate points will beperformed.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 41
Component 1 factors 171 Nominal K-factor 23.0 172 Master meter factor 1.0000 173 Stop rate 120
The display example above shows program codes related to component number 1 only. TheDanLoad 6000 maintains the fixed relationship between each defined component and each flowmeter so that high flow measurement accuracy can be maintained when multiple components aredelivered through one flow meter.
NoteThe values of program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor have great affect oncontrol of the quantity of product delivered and flow measurement accuracy. These programcode values must be set properly before any loading operation is performed.
171 Nominal K-factor 23.0
Default value 23.0. This value indicates the K-factor (system factor) for the flow meter. [NOTE:The initial K-factor should be the pulses per quantity unit obtained from the flow meter identificationplate or from the manufacturer. This number should be mathematically rounded to one decimalplace (nn.n), if necessary].
172 Master meter factor 1.0000
Default value 1.0000. This value is the base meter factor value used for comparison with all systemmeter factor entries. Program code [175 / 177 / 179 / 181] [186 / 188 / 190 / 192] [197 / 199 / 201/ 203] [208 / 210 / 212 / 214] Comp p meter factor f meter factors are compared to the program code172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor for the component and are considered invalid if theydeviate more than +/- the percentage value of program code 215 Master MF %. In this example,assuming that program code 215 Master MF % is the default value of 2.00, acceptable meter factorsmust be within the range of 0.9800 to 1.0200 (NOTE: The master meter factor is calculated by the171 Nominal K-factor divided by the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimalplaces.)
173 Stop rate 120
Default value is 120. This program code defines the flow rate at which a component is deliveredduring the component’s configured low flow stop quantity at the end of an in-line batch. The overallflow rate of the blend at the end of a batch is the sum of the stop rates of any flowing components.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 42 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Component 1 factor 1 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1 200 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1 1.0000
The display example above shows program codes related to component 1 and meter factor 1 (lowflow rate) only.
174 Comp 1 flow rate 1 200
Default value 200. This value is the calibration flow rate for meter factor 1 and is also the low flowstart and stop flow rate for sequential unit type. The flow rate is in quantity units per minute (suchas gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of program code 171Nominal K-factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units for theflow meter.
Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this program code are gallons perminute.
175 Comp 1 meter factor 1 1.0000
Default value 1.0000. This value is the meter factor for flow rate 1 program code 174 Comp 1 flowrate 1. (NOTE: The meter factor is calculated by the program code 171 Nominal K-factor dividedby the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 43
Component 1 factor 2 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2 600 177 Comp 1 meter factor 2 1.0000
The display example above shows program codes related to component 1 and meter factor 2 (whichis the high flow rate for sequential unit type with the number of factors set to 2).
176 Comp 1 flow rate 2 500
Default value 500. This value is the flow rate for meter factor 2 in quantity units per minute (suchas gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of program code 171Nominal K-factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units for theflow meter. Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this program code aregallons per minute.
177 Comp 1 meter factor 2 1.0000
Default value 1.0000. This value is the meter factor for flow rare 2. (NOTE: The initial meterfactor should be 1.0000 until an actual meter factor can be determined from a meter proof. Theinitial meter factor is calculated by program code 171 Nominal K-factor divided by the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
NoteA third and fourth flow rate for component 1 can be defined at this time if desired. If thecomponent's meter will be proved at more than two flow rates, additional flow rates / meterfactors can be defined at this time.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 44 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
MF validation 215 Master MF % 2.00 216 Adjacent MF % 0.25 217 Passcode per transaction No 218 Product units mnemonic Gal 219 Use restart qty No
The display example above shows global program codes that set the limits for validation of manuallyentered meter factors.
215 Master MF % 2.00
Default value 2.00. This value is the set point for verification of individual component meter factorswith respect to the Master meter factor for the component. Program codes for master meter factorsand components are indicated in the table below.
Components 6 1 2 3 4
Master Meter Factors 6 172 183 194 205
Comp x meter factor 1 175 186 197 208
Comp x meter factor 2 177 188 199 210
Comp x meter factor 3 179 190 201 212
Comp x meter factor 4 181 192 203 214
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 45
216 Adjacent MF % 0.25
Default value 0.25. This value is the set point for verification of individual component meter factorswith respect to adjacent meter factors for the component. Program codes for master meter factorsand adjacent meter factors are indicated in the table below. Entering 0.00 disables the validation.
Components
1 2 3 4
Master Meter Factors 6 172 183 194 205
Adjacent Meter Factors 9
Comp x meter factor 1 9
175 186 197 208
8Comp x meter factor 2 9
177 188 199 210
8Comp x meter factor 3 9
179 190 201 212
8Comp x meter factor 4 181 192 203 214
217 Passcode per transaction No
Not implemented.
218 Product units mnemonic Gal
Input a product units name (up to six characters) for display on the loading screen and printing ondata logs. This allows the description to be in any language or local abbreviation.
219 Use restart qty No
Select either “No” or “Yes”. If “No” is selected, start up each component by loading its low flowstart quantity at its low flow rate. If “Yes” is selected, start up the first component by loading its lowflow start quantity at its low flow rate. Start up further components by loading their low flow restartquantities at their low flow rates.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 46 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters 220 Secondary alarm reset (s) 300
The display example above shows a global program code that sets the storage time for secondaryalarm conditions.
220 Secondary alarm reset (s) 300
Default value 300. This value indicates that active alarms designated as Secondary alarms will beautomatically cleared (reset) after 300 seconds has elapsed.
The time limit allows time for the operator to correct a condition that causes a secondary alarm tooccur during loading. The secondary alarm condition terminated the batch delivery. However, ifthe cause of the secondary alarm is cleared within the time specified by program code 220Secondary alarm reset (s), the product delivery can be restarted. If the cause of the alarm is notcleared within the time specified by program code 220 Secondary alarm reset (s), the batch deliveryis ended and a new batch must be defined before delivery can resume.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 47
The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to thatalarm. The four possible alarm actions are described below. The alarm actions for several alarmsare limited to less than four selections. The Alarm action for several alarms is pre-determined andcannot be changed.
Alarm Action Description Reset
Primary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shutand the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot resumeuntil the alarm is cleared.
RED (lower) LED on operator panel is steady ON
Either or both alarm discrete outputs, program codes 287Alarm output 1 and 379 Alarm output 2 is maintainedclosed (if defined and enabled by the corresponding mask).
Alarm data is stored in Alarm Storage Memory.
Keypad in Program Mode.
Alarm reset discrete input, programcode 344 Primary alarm reset (ifdefined).
Terminal automation system.
Secondary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shutand the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot resumeuntil the alarm is cleared or the Secondary alarm reset timehas elapsed.
RED (lower) LED on operator panel is pulsed ON / OFF
Either or both alarm discrete outputs, program codes 287Alarm output 1 and 379 Alarm output 2 is pulsed (ifdefined and enabled by the corresponding mask).
Alarm data is stored in Alarm Storage Memory.
The alarm can be reset by correcting the cause, e.g.reconnecting a safety circuit, in which case the batch can berestarted if the remaining quantity is not less than theminimum preset quantity. The alarm is reset automaticallyat the end of a configurable time period (program code220) , in which case the batch can be restarted (“PressSTART when ready of STOP to cancel”) if the remainingquantity is not less than the minimum preset quantity.
Correct cause of alarm
Automatically reset after time value inprogram code 220 Secondary alarmreset (s) has elapsed.
Info An event message is displayed on the message line of thedisplay panel for ten seconds or special processing isperformed. (Example of special processing is issuing atemperature failure alarm.)
Alarm data is stored in Alarm Storage Memory.
<not applicable>
Off Disable monitoring of this alarm. <not applicable>
Alarm Action SummaryFigure 3 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 48 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 221 Low flow alarm action Primary 222 Minimum flow rate 100 223 Low flow time (s) 10 224 High flow alarm action Primary 225 Maximum flow rate 660 226 High flow time (s) 10
The display example above shows program codes which define the global method of processing lowand high flow rate conditions for any defined flow meter.
221 Low flow alarm action Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the Low flow alarm becomes active, thecurrent delivery operation will be suspended.
222 Minimum flow rate 100
Default value 100. This value is the minimum flow rate (quantity units per time unit) allowed forthe time period indicated by program code 223 Low flow time (s).
223 Low flow time (s) 10
Default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be continuously belowthe minimum flow rate specified by program code 222 Minimum flow rate before the alarm istriggered.
224 High flow alarm action Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the High flow alarm becomes active, thecurrent delivery operation will be suspended.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 49
225 Maximum flow rate 660
Default value 660. This value is the maximum flow rate (quantity units per time unit) allowed forthe time period indicated by program code 226 High flow time (s). This flow rate setting should beset above and close to the normally expected high flow rate. This setting allows rapid detection ofa loss of control of the flow control valve condition.
226 High flow time (s) 10
Default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be continuously belowthe minimum flow rate specified by program code 225 Maximum flow rate before the alarm istriggered.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 50 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 227 Overrun limit qty 2.0 228 Underflow alarm action Off 229 Underflow limit qty 5.0 230 No flow t-o alarm action Primary 231 No flow t-o (s) 5 232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 10.0
The display example above shows program codes which define the method of processing severalflow related error conditions.
227 Overrun limit qty 2.0
Default value 2.0. This value is the quantity units allowed to be delivered which exceed the presetquantity. The alarm can only occur after the DanLoad 6000 has attempted to stop the delivery in thenormal manner. The alarm priority selection is permanently set to Primary. If the Overrun limitquantity alarm becomes active, the delivery operation in progress will be suspended. (NOTE: Itmay be necessary to temporarily set this value to a significantly larger value while the first severalbatches are delivered at a new installation. This is required so that the DanLoad 6000 can calculatethe final trip or closing quantity delivered. The DanLoad 6000 does not calculate the final tripquantity if the delivery is terminated by an alarm action.)
WarningUse several small quantity batch deliveries to load a vessel after initial setup. This procedurepermits verification of proper flow control valve operation and prevents overfilling the vessel.
228 Underflow alarm action Off
Default selection Off. This selection indicates the action taken if the delivered quantity is less thanthe value of program code 229 Underflow limit quantity. The Off selection disables the underflowalarm.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 51
229 Underflow limit qty 5.0
Default value 5.0. This value is the number of quantity units allowed for the delivered quantity tobe less than the preset quantity at the end of a batch delivery operation.
230 No flow t-o alarm action Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the No flow alarm becomes active, thecurrent delivery operation will be suspended.
231 No flow t-o (s) 5.0
Default value 5.0. This value is elapsed time allowed for not receiving any pulses from the flowmeter when the system is in a component flowing configuration.Example: The pump is running, the block valve is OPEN, and the flow control valve is OPEN
and no pulses are detected.
232 Unauthorized flow qty 10.0
Default value 10.0. The quantity of unauthorized flow at which an unauthorized flow alarm occurs.The DanLoad 6000 measures pulses continuously, not just when a batch is in progress. Zero disablesthe unauthorized flow alarm. If the unauthorized flow quantity is set to "something point 1", e.g. 0.1,1.1 or 2.1, then a meter's unauthorized flow counter (the internal one that causes the alarm to beraised, not the running totalizer seen in the dynamic data display or by the automation system) iscleared whenever the meter is authorized for a batch; this prevents the "unauthorized flow alarm willeventually happen" problem. The default value is 10.0.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 52 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 233 Error limit (pulses) 0 234 Reset count (pulses) 10000 235 Data logging alarm action Info 236 Time-out ch. A (s) 10 237 Time-out ch. B (s) 10
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing pulse securityerror conditions. These program codes are only applicable in installations that used IP-252 pulsesecurity methods and only during batch deliveries. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section6.13 of this manual and item below.
NotePulse security implementation is hardware and software dependent. The value of programcode 233 Error limit (pulses) must be set to 0, to prevent triggering this alarm if the physicalflow meter installation does not provide the required dual pulse train to the DanLoad 6000.
233 Error limit (pulses) 0
Default value 0. This value is the allowable accumulated error count due to comparison differencesbetween dual pulse train inputs from one flow meter. The priority selection is internally set toPrimary. If an Error limit alarm becomes active, the current batch delivery operation will bestopped.
234 Reset count (pulses) 10000
Default value 10000. This value is used reset the accumulated pulse comparison error count fromdual pulse train comparison to be reset to zero after 10000 errors have been accumulated during thecurrent delivery operation.
Example: If program code 233 Error limit (pulses) is set to 10 and program code 234 Resetcount (pulses) is set to 1000, the DanLoad 6000 allows no more than 10 pulses errorsfor each accumulated 1000 input pulses.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 53
235 Data logging alarm action Info
This selection is used to specify the action taken when a data logging alarm (overwriting an alarmmessage in the alarm message storage memory) occurs.
236 Time-out ch. A (s) 10
This value specifies the allowable time between receiving messages from the terminal automationsystem before issuing a Comms failure channel A alarm. Zero disables the alarm.
237 Time-out ch. B (s) 10
This value specifies the allowable time between receiving messages from the terminal automationsystem before issuing a Comms failure channel B alarm. Zero disables the alarm.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 54 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 238 Temp fail alarm action Primary 239 Minimum temperature -40.0 240 Maximum temperature 110.0 241 Density fail alarm action Primary 242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000 243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of RTD temperature inputsignal and density input signal error conditions.
238 Temp fail alarm action Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation will besuspended if the process temperature input is less than the value of program code 239 Minimumtemperature or greater than the value of program code 240 Maximum temperature. A Primary alarmmust be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary settingdetects temperature input failures. The backup temperature specified by program code 434 / 437 /440 / 443 Comp x backup temp is not used in the Primary mode.
239 Minimum temperature -40.0
Default value -40.0. This value is lower limit allowed for a process temperature input before a Tempfail alarm is issued. (Note: -40 degrees Celsius is the lowest temperature that can be measured bya standard RTD input.)
240 Maximum temperature 110.0
Default value 110.0. This value is upper limit allowed for a process temperature input before a Tempfail alarm is issued. (Note: +110 degrees Celsius is the highest temperature that can be measuredby a standard RTD input.)
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 55
241 Density fail alarm action Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation will besuspended if the process density/gravity input is less than the value of program code 242 Minimumdensity/gravity or greater than the value of program code 243 Maximum density/gravity. A Primaryalarm must be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primarysetting detects density/gravity input failures. The backup density/gravity specified by program code457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Comp x backup density/gravity is not used in the Primary mode.
242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000
This value is lower limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is triggered.
243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000
This value is upper limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is triggered.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 56 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 244 Minimum pressure 0.0 245 Maximum pressure 0.0 246 Additive error limit 3 247 Additive feedback count 10 248 Block valve time (s) 10
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
244 Minimum pressure 0.0
This value is the low pressure set point used for validation of pressure input signals.
245 Maximum pressure 0.0
This value is the high pressure set point used for validation of pressure input signals.
246 Additive error limit 3
This value sets the error count limit for triggering an Additive error limit alarm. (See Section 3.9for additional information.)
247 Additive feedback count 0
The expected number of feedback pulses per additive ratio cycle for the “Mech” additive injectionmethod, e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3 “confirmation pulse”, 2 for Hyrolec injector. The number of secondswithin which the additive feedback input must go on and off again after the additive ratio output hasbeen energized for the “Handshake” additive injection method, e.g. 5 (per Mapco).
248 Block valve time (s) 10
This value sets the time allowed for a component block valve to close after the block valve controloutput has been deenergized at the end of a loading operation or when a loading operation istemporarily stopped.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 57
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary 250 #1 Ground detector open 251 Circuit 2 alarm action Primary 252 #2 Overspill detector open
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 1 is open during a batch.
250 #1 Ground detector open
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 1 is openduring a batch.
251 Circuit 2 alarm action Primary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 2 is open during a batch.
252 #2 Overspill detector open
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 2 is openduring a batch.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 58 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 253 Circuit 3 alarm action Secondary 254 #3 Permissive power failure 255 Circuit 4 alarm action Secondary 256 #4 Additive injection failure
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions. Note that safety circuits 3 and 4 alarms have alternate uses as the “end” and “recipeselection” alarms respectively.
253 Circuit 3 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 3 is open during a batch.
254 #3 Permissive power failure
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 3 is openduring a batch.
255 Circuit 4 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 4 is open during a batch.
256 #4 Additive injection failure
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 4 is openduring a batch.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 59
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 257 Circuit 5 alarm action Secondary 258 #5 Arm down side 1 259 Circuit 6 alarm action Secondary 260 #6 Arm down side 2
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
257 Circuit 5 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 5 is open during a batch.
258 #1 Arm down side 1
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 5 is openduring a batch.
259 Circuit 6 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 6 is open during a batch.
260 #2 Arm down side 2
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 6 is openduring a batch.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 60 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 261 Circuit 7 alarm action Secondary 262 #7 Walkway down side 1 263 Circuit 8 alarm action Secondary 264 #8 Walkway down side 2
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
261 Circuit 7 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 7 is open during a batch.
262 #7 Walkway down side 1
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 7 is openduring a batch.
263 Circuit 8 alarm action Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 8 is open during a batch.
264 #8 Walkway down side 2
This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 8 is openduring a batch.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 61
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 265 Circuit 5 type 1 266 Circuit 6 type 2 267 Circuit 7 type 1 268 Circuit 8 type 2 269 Alarm o/p 1 mask 8388607 270 Alarm o/p 2 mask 0
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
265 Circuit 5 type 1
This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 5.
266 Circuit 6 type 2
This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 6.
267 Circuit 7 type 1
This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 7.
268 Circuit 8 type 2
This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 8.
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask 8388607
A one in the bit corresponding to the alarm type means that alarms of that type should control thealarm output according to the alarm action. The default value is 8388607 for all 23 alarm types.
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask 0
A one in the bit corresponding to the alarm type means that alarms of that type should control thealarm output according to the alarm action. The default value is 0, i.e. no alarm types.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 62 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The following table indicates the scope of the values of program codes 265 to 268.
Program Code 265 to 268 Circuit x type
Type Description
0 Check Safety circuit x while a batch is in progress
1 Check Safety circuit x while a batch is in progress ONLY at side 1 *
2 Check Safety circuit x while a batch is in progress ONLY at side 2 *
* Determined by the state of the swing arm switch inputs to the CPU board and the configuredside-detect method (program code 312).
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 63
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 271 Unauth additive flow vol 0.0000 272 Prod/add -% 0 273 Prod/add +% 0
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
271 Unauth additive flow vol 0.0000
This selection sets the volume of unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarmis raised for the “Meter” and “Control” injection methods.
272 Prod/add -% 0
This selection sets the percentage of the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch belowwhich an additive failure alarm is raised.
273 Prod/add +% 0
This selection sets the percentage of the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch abovewhich an additive failure alarm is raised.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 64 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm parameters (cont'd) 276 Ramp down alarm action Primary 277 Ramp down time (s) 4 278 Additive per 1000 error limit 1 279 End time (s) 180
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicatederror conditions.
276 Ramp down alarm action Primary
A ramp down alarm is raised when the alarm is active and the DanLoad 6000 is unable to reduce theflow rate to a lower, desired flow rate within the time specified. This selection determines if theramp down alarm action is enabled (Primary) or disabled (Off).
277 Ramp down time (s) 4
This selection sets the time in seconds allowed for ramp down before the ramp down alarm is raised.
278 Additive per 1000 error limit 1
This selection sets the number of ratio quantities worth of additive by which the actual quantity ofadditive can differ from the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch before an additivefailure alarm is raised.
279 End time (s) 180
This selection sets the end time in seconds.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 65
Recipes 480 Number of recipes 1
Recipe 1 481 Recipe name Recipe #1 482 Comp 1 % 100.00 483 Comp 2 % 0.00 484 Comp 3 % 0.00 485 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0.00 486 Sequence or low proportion 1 0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3=0 4=#,5="
The display examples above show program codes related to the method defining recipes that controlthe delivery of components in blending operations. Validation of recipe component percentages isperformed when a recipe is selected and when a preset quantity is entered. Component percentagesare validated as follows.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 66 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Sequential blending
The sum of the percentages referenced by program code 486 Sequence to load program codemust equal 100.
Example: Sequential Blending(065 Number of components = 3)
Program Code Valid Invalid
481 Name
482 Comp 1 % 70 70
483 Comp 2 % 20 30
484 Comp 3 % 10 0
485 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0 0
486 Sequence or low proportion 312 320
# In-line blending
The sum of the percentages of components specified by program code 065 Number ofcomponents must equal 100.
Example: In-line Blending(065 Number of components = 3)
Program Code Valid Invalid
481 Name
482 Comp 1 % 70 70
483 Comp 2 % 20 20
484 Comp 3 % 10 0
485 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0 10
486 Sequence or low proportion
Note: For an in-line blender, the “sequence or low proportion” should normally be filled withzero’s unless one or more low proportion components are required.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 67
480 Number of recipes 1
Default value 1. This value causes one set of recipe definition program codes to be available forconfiguration. This value can be printed on Transaction Reports.
481 Recipe name Recipe #1
Default string Recipe #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the message line toallow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters. The name of the currently selectedrecipe is shown in the upper left area of the display while operating in the Loading Mode. This valuecan be printed on Transaction Reports.
482 Comp 1 % 100.00
Default value 100. This value sets the recipe to define a single component (component #1) fordelivery. This value was set automatically because of the initial selection of No blending (one flowmeter, one flow control valve, and one component)
483 Comp 2 % 0.00
Default value 0. This value indicates that this component is not loaded by this recipe.
484 Comp 3 % 0.00
Default value 0. This value indicates that this component is not loaded by this recipe.
485 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0.00
Default value 0. This value indicates that this component is not loaded by this recipe.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 68 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
486 Sequence or low proportion 1
Default value 1. This value indicates that only component 1 is delivered when this recipe is selected.If more than one component is defined, the other components can be specified in the sequence toload by indicating the component number at the desired sequence place in this program code.
For sequential blending:
Indicates the sequence to load the preconfigured components.
Example: Program code 486 Sequence to load set to 142 indicates that during sequentialloading, component 1 is loaded first, component 4 is loaded second, component 2 is loadedthird, then the complete batch is terminated.
For in-line blending:
Sequence positions xxxx correspond to components 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively. For eachpreconfigured component, a zero in program code 486 Sequence to load indicates that thecomponent is a high-proportion component. A one in program code 486 Sequence to loadindicates that the component is a low-proportion component that is loaded during the highflow time of the batch.
Example: Program code 486 Sequence to load set to 010 indicates that this is a 3-componentblender and during in-line blending, components 1 and 3 are high-proportion componentsand component 2 is a low-proportion component, i.e. delivered during the high flow part ofthe batch.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 69
Setup complete
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
The display example above shows that the initial setup procedure is finished. Press the EXIT(ALT+CLEAR) key to continue. The DanLoad 6000 is now in the Loading Mode. Additionalprogram codes, such as those controlling additive injection, that were not covered in the initial setupprocedure should be reviewed and modified if required at this time.
Assuming that only one recipe was defined, the loading display indicated below is displayed.
Gasoline mm/dd/yy hh:mm 0%
Loaded 0 +)))),
* * * * Preset 0 Gal * * Remaining 0 Gal * * Transaction total 0 Gal .))))-
Enter preset qty
The Loading Display example above is the normal display that is presented to the user / operatorduring presetting batch quantities and batch deliveries. The user / operator is able to define thedelivery quantity and monitor the delivery operation via this display and the keypad. Batch deliveryoperations are described in Section 4 - Operation.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 70 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.6 Product Delivery and Blending
From two to four products can be blended into a composite stream and delivered. The Delivery -Blending table located in Appendix A contains an overview of all physical input and output signalsand internal control program codes that are related to product delivery / blending equipment andprocedures.
The basic configuration of the type of blending to be performed is controlled by the entry in programcode 026 Unit type. The configurable blender types are described below.
3.6.1 Sequential Blending
Sequential blending is the loading of one product at one time through one flow meter and one flowcontrol valve. The blend ratio is correct only after all components of the blend have been loaded.A DanLoad 6000 that controls loading of one product is configured as a sequential blender, althoughno component blending action is performed. Block valve control for each component can becontrolled either automatically or manually as described below.
# Seq.(auto)
The DanLoad 6000 controls the opening and closing of the component block valvesautomatically.
# Seq.(manual)
The DanLoad 6000 prompts the operator to open and close the component block valves atthe start and end of each batch loading.
Prompt: Open block valve - press ENTER after a batch delivery has been configuredand the START key is pressed
Prompt: Close block valve - pres ENTER after delivery of the batch and after theflow control valve has been closed
The response to either prompt is to press the ENTER key to execute the open or close blockvalve operation.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 71
The loading method for sequential blending is described below.
# Preset the batch quantity (the total quantity of the components to be loaded) and press theSTART key.
# Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the first component to the low flowrate value and maintain the low flow rate for the specified low flow start quantity (programcode 84 for component 1 and other components as required).
# Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the component to the high (normal)flow rate value and maintain the flow rate during the component delivery.
# Close the flow control valve to decrease the flow rate of the component to the low flow ratevalue and deliver the specified quantity at the low flow shutdown rate.
# After the low flow rate quantity has been delivered, shut the flow control valve.
# If only one component was specified in the recipe, the batch delivery is complete at thistime, if another component was specified in the recipe, this component is loaded in thesame manner as specified by the steps listed above. The total batch quantity preset in step1 remains the same. The sequence of component loading is repeated for each componentspecified by the recipe and in the sequence to load specified by the recipe. The sequence toload is program code 486 for recipe number 1.
3.6.2 In-Line Blending
In-line blending is the simultaneous blending and loading of two to four products. Each product hasa dedicated flow meter and flow control valve. In-line blending can be either non-proportional orproportional as described below.
# In-line non-proportional
In-line non-proportional blending is accomplished by delivering the low-proportion quantitycomponent(s) of the blend at their assigned high (normal) flow rate(s) during the first partof the delivery of the high-proportion component at its high (normal) flow rate. The blendingcontrol is set by program code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load for the active recipe. Thismethod of delivery is implemented so that the flow meter for each component is operatingnear its maximum rated flow rate to assure maximum measurement accuracy for eachcomponent in the blend. After the low-proportion quantity component(s) have beendelivered, the high-proportion quantity component continues delivery until the blend ratiois attained. The total blend ratio can be in error until the total preset quantity is delivered.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 72 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# In-line proportional
(Note: In-line proportional blending can only be implemented in cases where proportion ofeach component in the blend is great enough to permit the component flow meter to operateabove the minimum specified flow rate of the meter during the entire batch loading cycle.)In-line proportional blending is accomplished by controlling the ratio between allcomponents at all times during the delivery by controlling the individual flow rate of eachcomponent. The ratio of the delivered blend is correct at all times during the delivery.Therefore, the delivery can be stopped at any time and the delivered blend will be withintolerance.
# “Side” Stream Blending
"Side" stream blending is similar to in-line blending except one product component isdelivered upstream to another product component. "Side" Stream blending is typically usedto inject ethanol into gasoline. Ethanol is injected into the gasoline stream and the blend ismeasured by the custody transfer meter. The basic control/operation of side Stream Blendingis described below:
• Program code 023 – “Side” Stream Blending, allows to enable side stream blending.• Setting program code 024 - Sequential proportional, to “Yes” allows proportional
blending of side stream component (ethanol) with primary component (gasoline).( Note: This program code is applicable only when DanLoad 6000 is configured forsequential blending.)
• Set up the Side Stream Meter Program codes 053/056/059/062. These programcodes specify the meter number used as a Side Stream Meter. For example, assumethat meter 1 is the primary premium blend stream meter used for loading Premiumand measures the blend of Premium and Ethanol. Meter 2 is the primary regularblend stream meter used for loading Regular and measures the blend of Regular andEthanol. Meter 3 is the side stream meter for measuring the Ethanol componentvolume.
Program code 053, 056, 059, and 062 correspond respectively to preset meters 1, 2,3, and 4 set in PC 051, 054, 057, and 060 . In the above example meter 1 (PC 051)measures the combined blend volume of both the Premium component and theEthanol component, and meter 2 (PC 054) measures the combined blend volume ofboth the Regular component and the Ethanol component, Meter 3 (PC 057) measuresonly the Ethanol volume.
As an example, the user sets program code 053 = 3, 056 = 3, and 059=0. Thisconfiguration indicates that the Ethanol measured by Meter 3 is passing through thePremium meter 1 (053) and through the Regular meter 2 (056). Meter 3 (059) is notbeing used to measure a final delivered flow, however the volume being measuredby meter 3 flows though meter 1 or meter 2.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 73
• Set up the Midgrade Primary blend Stream meter (if applicable) Program Code063.This program code defines the meter number where the side stream (Ethanolstream) passes through in case of more than two product blending.
(Note: This program code is applicable only when DanLoad 6000 is configured forinline blending.
For example, meter 1 is for Premium, meter 2 is for Regular and meter 3 is forEthanol. Set program code value to 1 if the Premium meter (meter 1) is used to passthe Ethanol for Midgrade product (Blending of Premium, Regular and Ethanol).
• The Block valve operation of “Side” stream sequential blending is not changed.
• The block valve operation of “Side” stream in-line blending is changed as follows:Assign an output (Program Code 400/402/404/406) to open a block valve to allowthe side stream component (e.g. Ethanol) to blend with the wild stream component(e.g. Gasoline). For two component blending (One component must be the sidestream component) the block valve output will be "Closed" when the correspondingwild stream component is used.
(Note: Do not assign any output for the side stream component.)• Assign an input (Program code: 401/403/405/407) to monitor the status switch for
the block valve defined in program code 400/402/404/406.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 74 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Delivery Parameters Define batch loading control program codes.
Define the pump / block valve / flow control valve timing relationship. The program codes indicatedbelow set the timing for each component.
open start open close stop BV PUMP FCV FCV BV PUMP | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |--------LPD-------| |---–PSD---| |-----------BVD-------------|
where:BV - block valveFCV - flow control valveLPD - 087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s)BVD - 089 / 095 / 101 / 107 Block valve delay (s)PSD - 088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s)
Startup:
The line pack delay and block valve delay are relative to the opening of the flow control valve at thestart of a loading operation. The diagram indicates the line pack delay time is shorter than blockvalve delay time. Both of these delays are independent and only related to the opening of the flowcontrol valve. Therefore, the delays may be set to open the block valve and start the pumpsimultaneously or to start the pump before opening the block valve. If 0 seconds delay is entered forthe line pack delay and the block valve delay, the pump starts, the block valve opens, and the flowcontrol valve opens simultaneously. The logic does not allow configuration for starting the pumpor opening the block valve after the flow control valve is commanded OPEN.
Shutdown:
The flow control valve is shut to stop the flow. The block valve is automatically closed when noflow is detected. For a normally terminated delivery, the pump stop delay is from the time that noflow is detected until the pump output is de-energized.
Program code 248 Block valve time (s) in the Alarms group sets the time period to allow aftersending a block valve CLOSE command (discrete output OPEN) before activating an Unable toclose block valve # alarm, if the block valve fails to respond to the CLOSE command. A zeroindicates “redirect to recipe selection inputs” for recipes 1 through 6 and “not used” for recipes 7 andabove.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 75
# Digital Valve Parameters Define operation of flow control valves.
This group of program codes define the characteristics for operation of digital flow control valves(throttling valves) only. Fixed set point stem switch valves do not use these program codes.However, two-stage valves with one or two stem switches do use the Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2control outputs to control the valve actuator. The control logic for digital flow control valves isshown in Figure 3 - 10. And the control and status logic for two-stage valves is shown in Figure3 - 11 and Figure 3 - 12.
Digital Flow Control Valve Operation
Device
Valve State
Closed Opening Static Open Closing
Solenoid 1 (upstream)control output
Off On On Off
Upstream pilot valve (cavity fill) Open Closed Closed Open
Solenoid 2 (downstream)control output
Off On Off Off
Downstream pilot valve (cavity drain) Closed Open Closed Closed
Digital Flow Control ValveFigure 3 - 10
The incremental open / close state of a digital flow control valve, such as a Daniel model 1815 orDan-Flo valve, is controlled by two variable duration pulsed control outputs (Solenoid 1 andSolenoid 2). A digital flow control valve has a sealed variable capacity chamber downstream of themovable plug. The upstream surface area and cavity surface area of the plug plus pressure exertedby a closing spring, closes the plug against the seat and stops all flow through the valve when theupstream process liquid is allowed to enter the cavity (through normally open Solenoid 1). This isthe normal state of the valve with neither solenoid powered.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 76 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The valve is opened to the low flow set point by closing the upstream (cavity fill) pilot and openingthe downstream (cavity drain) pilot. The DanLoad 6000 senses the flow rate from the meter pulseinput and stops the valve from opening when the desired flow rate is attained. The valve open / closeaction is stopped at any position by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot and closing theupstream (cavity fill) pilot. Flow rate through the flow meter is adjusted dynamically. The valveis closed by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot and opening the upstream (cavity fill)pilot.
WarningThe Daniel model 1815 flow control valve has an needle valve located in the upstream pilotcircuit that can be used to restrict the flow in this circuit and slow the valve opening speed. Acorresponding needle valve located in the downstream pilot circuit can be used to restrict flowin that circuit and slow the valve closing speed. These two needle valves are normally set fullyopen so that the DanLoad 6000 has maximum possible control of the valve. These needlevalves should only be adjusted by persons familiar with the operation of these valves. Usecaution when delivering a product after one or both of these needle valves have been adjusted. Mis-adjustment of the needle valves can cause tank overfill and spillage or under delivery.
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches) Operation
Device
Valve State
Closed
Opening toLow FlowStart &Low FlowStart
Opening toFullOpen & FullOpen
Closing toLow FlowStop &Low FlowStop
Closed
Solenoid1controloutput
Off On On On Off
Solenoid2controloutput
Off Off On Off Off
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches)Figure 3 - 11
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 77
The Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2 control outputs are used to control the open / close position of a flowcontrol valve without stem switches. A flow control valve without stem switches does not controlthe flow rate based on rate of flow feedback from the flow meter. The flow rate at low flow starthigh flow (normal flow) and low flow stop is controlled by an external flow rate regulator. Controloutput Solenoid 1 is closed to open the valve. The valve opens to the low flow start position andthe low flow start quantity is delivered at that rate. After the low flow start quantity has beendelivered, control output Solenoid 2 is closed to open the flow control valve to the high (normalflow rate) position. When the remaining quantity equals the low flow stop quantity, control outputSolenoid 2 is opened to position the valve at the low flow stop flow rate. After the low flow stoprate is delivered, control output Solenoid 1 is opened and the flow control valve is fully shut. Allflow through the valve ceases.
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches) Operation
Output
Valve State
Closed/Closing
Opening StaticOpen(“locked”)
Solenoid 1controloutput
Off On On
Solenoid 2controloutput
Off On Off
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches)Figure 3 - 11b
The normally closed stem switch (stem switch 1) is monitored during initial opening so that thevalve can be locked at low flow start. The normally open stem switch (stem switch 2) is monitoredwhile ramping down from high flow so that the valve can be locked at low flow stop.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 78 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
TL PL3.7 Temperature (C ) and Pressure (C ) Compensation
Temperature compensation and pressure compensation of the liquid quantity to the quantity atstandard conditions can be used together or independently. One of several standards can be selectedfor temperature compensation. One of several standards can be selected for pressure compensation.Each standard is applicable to a specific density range of hydrocarbon liquids. Each standard isapplicable to a specific temperature or pressure range. Temperature compensation is commonly usedwhen loading refined hydrocarbon liquids and crude oil, though in some cases it may be performedby a terminal automation system. Both temperature and pressure compensation are normally usedwhen loading liquefied petroleum gas (LPG). Tables 3 - 1, 3- 2, and 3 - 3 contain information onthe applicability of the various standards.
NoteDaniel Industries, Inc. and Daniel Measurement and Control Products (“Daniel”) shall not beheld responsible or liable in any way for loss or damage, including, but not limited to,consequential damage, resulting from the use of volume correction tables or relatedmathematical relationships or for violation of any federal, state, or municipal laws, regulations,or practices of the United States or of any foreign country.
The DanLoad 6000 can also calculate mass from the quantity at standard condtions. See Section 3.8,Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 79
TL PLC / C Associations Cross Reference (Table 3 -1)
TLC Options 9PLC Options
Off ConstAPI11.2.1
API11.2.2
API11.2.1M
API11.2.2M
Off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Linear Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
API 6A Yes Yes Yes No No No1 2 1,2
API 6B Yes Yes Yes No No No1 2 1,2
API 6C Yes Yes Yes No No No1 2 1,2
API 24A Yes Yes No No No No2 1 2 1,2
API 24B Yes Yes No No No No2 1 2 1,2
API 54A Yes Yes No No Yes No2 1,2 1
API 54B Yes Yes No No Yes No2 1,2 1
API 54C Yes Yes No No Yes No2 1,2 1
IMP/PEMEX Yes Yes No No No No2 1,2 2 1,2
Table 24 (Old) Yes Yes No Yes No No2 2 2
Table 54 (Old) Yes Yes No No Yes Yes2 2
Petrobras Yes Yes No Yes Yes No2 3 3 1,2
TP-16 Yes Yes No Yes No No2 2 2
China Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
API 6D Yes Yes Yes No No No1 2 1,2
API 54D Yes Yes No No Yes No2 1,2 1
4311 1 Yes Yes No Yes No No2 2 2
CAN 54B Yes Yes No No Yes No2 1,2 1
Notes:
TL PLYes = The density ranges for both C and C overlap and both compensation methods can be usedtogether.
1 = The density ranges do not overlap.
TL PL2 = The density units are not the same for C and C .
TL PL3 = The C option enables special processing for the C option.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 80 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Density Range Overlaps (Approximate) for CTL and CPL Options (Table 3 - 2)
Option Density Range
kg/m3 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100
TLC
Table 24 0.500 to 1.100 60/60 F (. 500 to 1100 kg/m3)o
TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
Table 54 0.500 to 1.100 kg/l (. 500 to 1100 kg/m3) TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 6A 0 to 100 degrees API (6110 to 1.0760 (610 to 1075 kg/m3) TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 24A 0.6110 to 1.0760 (610 to 1075 kg/m3) TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 54A 610 to 1075 kg/m3 TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 6B 0 to 85 degrees API (653 to 1075 kg/m3) TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 24B 0.6535 to 1.0760 (653 to 1075 kg/m3) TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 54B 653 to 1075 kg/m3 TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
IMP/PEMEX 0.6495 to 1.0730 (. 649 to 1072 kg/m3) TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
Linear(User ")
Unlimited densityTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
PLC
API 11.2.2 Relative density 0.350 to 0.637 (density 349.7 to 636.4)PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
API 11.2.2M 350 to 636 kg/m3PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
API 11.2.1 0 to 90 degrees API (638 to 1074 kg/m3) PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
API 11.2.1M 638 to 1074 kg/m3 PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
User F-factor Unlimited densityPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
CAN 54B 653 TO 1075 kg/m3 T TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
Notes:
TL1 TTT ... Approximate density range for C selection (432 Temperature option)
PL2 PPP ... Approximate density range for C selection (444 Pressure option)
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 81
3 The density at 60 degrees Fahrenheit = specific gravity 60/60 F * 999.012 kg/m3.o
4 Program code 445 F-factor X 1000000000 is the component’s compressibility factor * 109
in quantity units per pressure unit. This entry is only used if program code 444 Pressureoption is set to Const, since the other CPL options calculate the F-factor based on thetemperature and density.
5 Values of density and gravity are scaled dependent on the setting of program code 046. Setthis carefully since it is also used for mass computation. The density/gravity scale follows.
046 Density/gravity scale Format
1 xxxx.x
2 xxx.xx
3 xx.xxx
4 (default) x.xxxx
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 82 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
TLDensity Ranges for C Selections (432 Temperature option) (Table 3 -3)
TLC Option Temp Range Density Input / Reference Temperature Density Range
API 6A 0 to 300 F API gravity 0 to 40 degrees APIo
0 to 250 F 40 to 50 degrees APIo
0 to 200 F 50 to 100 degrees APIo
API 6B 0 to 300 F API gravity 0 to 40 degrees APIo
0 to 250 F 40 to 50 degrees APIo
0 to 200 F 50 to 85 degrees APIo
API 6C None [inputs are "T and t (" at basetemperature and batch temperature)]430 Reference temperature = 60 Fo
N/A
API 24A 0 to 300 F Relative density 60/60 F 0.8250 to 1.0760o o
0 to 250 F 0.7795 to 0.8250o
0 to 200 F 0.6110 to 0.7795o
API 24B 0 to 300 F Relative density 60/60 F 0.8250 to 1.0760o o
0 to 250 F 0.7795 to 0.8250o
0 to 200 F 0.6535 to 0.7795o
API 54A -18 to 95 C Density kg/m3 610 to 778 kg/m3o
-18 to 125 C 778 to 824 kg/m3o
-18 to 150 C 824 to 1075 kg/m3o
API 54B -18 to 95 C Density kg/m3 653 to 778 kg/m3o
-18 to 125 C 778 to 824 kg/m3o
-18 to 150 C 824 to 1075 kg/m3o
API 54C N/A None430 Reference temperature = 15 Co
IMP/PEMEX Relative density 20/4 C 0.6495 to 1.0730o
Table 24 (Old) Specific gravity 60/60 F 0.500 to 1.100 (full range).o
Table 54 (Old) Density kg/l 0.500 to 1.100 kg/l (full range).
Petrobras Relative density 20 C/4 C Any temperature and relative density.o o
TP-16 0 to 300 F Relative density 60/60 F 0.8250 to 1.0760o o
0 to 250 F 0.7795 to 0.8250o
0 to 200 F 0.6110 to 0.7795o
CAN 54B -40 to 95 C Density kg/m3 653 to 778 kg/m3o
-40 to 125 C 778 to 824 kg/m3o
-40 to 150 C 824 to 1075 kg/m3o
Note: Density / gravity inputs are not validated by the DanLoad 6000. The table shows the valid density / gravity ranges for the temperaturecompensation selections.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 83
3.7.1 Temperature Correction to a Non-Standard Reference Temperature
TLTemperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature (using existing C tables) has beenimplemented, in particular temperature correction to 86.0°F using API 6B per ESSO Thailand (andothers in South East Asia) is possible.
TLC option Standard ref.
temp.
Correction to non-
standard ref. temp.
Off N/A No
Linear N/A No
API 6A 60.0°F Yes
API 6B 60.0°F Yes
API 6C N/A No
API 24A 60.0°F Yes
API 24B 60.0°F Yes
API 54A 15.0°C Yes
API 54B 15.0°C Yes
API 54C N/A No
IMP 20.0°C Yes
Old 24 60.0°F Yes
Old 54 15.0°C Yes
P'Bras 20.0°C Yes
TP-16 60.0°C Yes
China 20.0°C Yes
6D 60.0°F Yes
54D 15.0°C Yes
4311 1 60.0°F Yes
NH3 60.0°F Yes
CAN 54B 15.0°C Yes
TLA "Yes" in the right-hand column indicates that the C option has a standard reference temperatureand allows temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature. A "No" in the right-hand
TLcolumn indicates that the C option does not have a standard reference temperature.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 84 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
TLIn program mode/setup, if any component's C option (program codes 432, 435, etc.) is modifiedto one that has a standard reference temperature then the reference temperature (program code 430),which is used for all components, is automatically modified to the standard reference temperature
TL TLfor that C option (per the table above). If any component's C option is modified to one that doesnot have a standard reference temperature then the reference temperature is not modified. Thus, if
TLtemperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature using a C option that has a standard
TLreference temperature is required, it is necessary to configure each component's C option prior toconfiguring the reference temperature (program code 430). (Note: The temperature units (program
TLcode 427) must still be configured manually to the appropriate value for the configured C options.)
TL TLWhen a C factor is computed for a C option that has a standard reference temperature, theDanLoad 6000 tests whether the configured reference temperature is equal to the standard reference
TL TLtemperature. If it is equal, the C factor is computed in the usual way, i.e. as the C for the
TL TLcomponent's batch average temperature, otherwise the C factor is computed as the ratio of the C
TLfor the component's batch average temperature to the C for the configured reference temperature
TLwhich requires two calls to the C option's implementation.
It should be noted that the reference temperature (program code 430) can be modified indirectly, i.e.
TL TLby modifying a component's C option, and can affect C options. Program code 430 is weightsand measures protected by default.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 85
Note the following examples using test data:
API 6B, PC 427 = F
Ref. temp. Observedtemp.
Density orgravity
TLC factor
60.0°F 80.9°F 35.10 0.9903
60.0°F 86.0°F 35.10 0.9879
86.0°F 80.9°F 35.10 1.0024
API 24A, PC 427 = F
Ref. temp. Observedtemp.
Density orgravity
TLC factor
60.0°F 56.5°F 0.8760 1.00160
60.0°F 66.5°F 0.8760 0.99710
66.5°F 56.5°F 0.8760 1.00451
API 54A, PC 427 = C
Ref. temp. Observedtemp.
Density orgravity
TLC factor
15.0°C 22.5°C 740.0 0.9916
15.0°C 20.0°C 740.0 0.9944
20.0°C 22.5°C 740.0 0.9972
IMP, PC 427 = C
Ref. temp. Observedtemp.
Density orgravity
TLC factor
20.0°C 6.0°C 0.7210 1.01743
20.0°C 17.5°C 0.7210 1.00311
17.5°C 6.0°C 0.7210 1.01428
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 86 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.8 Mass Loading Using a Mass Flow Meter
When the mass of product is required (for display, data logging or delivery control) there are twooptions; 1) use a mass meter, e.g. a Coriolis effect flow meter, which reports "pulses per unit mass"to the DanLoad 6000, or 2) use a volumetric flow meter, e.g. a turbine meter, which reports "pulsesper unit gross volume" to the DanLoad 6000 and have the DanLoad 6000 compute the mass fromthe gross volume. Both options are possible with the DanLoad 6000. This section describes the firstoption.
The mass flow meter should be interfaced to the DanLoad 6000 via a transmitter (available from themass flow meter's vendor) that converts the raw Coriolis frequency to a scaled pulse stream. Thescaling is usually widely adjustable. The particular type of transmitter used determines the electricalsignal interface; the DanLoad 6000's meter pulse board must be strapped appropriately. Refer toSection 2.2.2 Input/Output Board Description and jumper settings or contact Daniel CustomerService for proper strapping configuration. The transmitter reports pulses per unit mass to theDanLoad 6000, i.e. you can think of the mass meter as having a K-factor defined as the number ofpulses per unit of mass flow, e.g. 10 pulses per kilogram. (Some mass flow transmitters can reportpulses per unit of volume, in which case it can be treated, by the DanLoad 6000, as a volumetric flowmeter which is not discussed here.)
The K-factor (number of pulses per unit of mass flow, program code 171, 182, etc. per component)should be configured on the DanLoad 6000. If the meter's calibration adjustment is via the massflow transmitter, all the meter factors on the DanLoad 6000 should typically be set to 1.0000. If themeter's calibration adjustment is via the DanLoad 6000, the meter factors on the DanLoad 6000should be adjusted based on the observed error during proving runs until the required accuracy isachieved. (It is important to understand that the accuracy achieved depends on the mass flow meter'srepeatability.)
The configured K-factor and meter factor at each flow rate are applied to the input pulse stream inthe same way as for gross volume:
i=1Mass = (E (# pulses at rate i * meter factor for rate i)) / K-factor#factors
Thus, the various gross and standard quantities displayed, printed and reported to an automationsystem are, in fact, mass. All batch, meter and component quantities on the DanLoad 6000,including flow rates, should be interpreted as being in units of mass as determined by the K-factor.Configure the gross and standard product units mnemonics appropriately (program codes 217 and218 respectively). When an operator enters a preset quantity and presses "START" the DanLoad6000 delivers the requested number of mass units of product. The DanLoad 6000 cannot convertfrom mass to volume. No temperature options (program code 432, etc. per component) or pressure
tl ploptions (program code 444, etc. per component) should be configured since the C and C factorscannot be meaningfully applied to mass. However, it is possible for
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 87
the DanLoad 6000 to sample (and calculate mass throughput weighted average values for)temperature (RTD), pressure (4-20 mA) and density (4-20 mA) inputs throughout a batch for display,printing and reporting to an automation system, by configuring the appropriate inputs (per meter),the sample quantity (program code 431) and the density option (program code 456, etc. percomponent). The DanLoad 6000 does not correct the input density to standard conditions. Densitycorrection to standard conditions must be done externally, e.g. by a densitometer or the mass flowtransmitter which can send the "live" value to the DanLoad 6000 via a 4-20 mA output.
3.9 Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter
When the mass of product is required (for display, data logging or delivery control) there are twooptions; 1) use a mass meter, e.g. a Coriolis effect flow meter, which reports "pulses per unit mass"to the DanLoad 6000, or 2) use a volumetric flow meter, e.g. a turbine meter or PD meter, whichreports "pulses per unit gross volume" to the DanLoad 6000 and have the DanLoad 6000 computethe mass from the gross volume. Both options are possible with the DanLoad 6000. This sectiondescribes the second option.
In order to have the DanLoad 6000 compute product mass, the DanLoad 6000 should first beconfigured to compute the standard volume (net volume) in the usual way, i.e. specify temperatureunits, temperature correction option per component, pressure correction option per component,temperature input (RTD) per meter or backup temperature per component, density input (4-20 mA)per meter or backup density per component, etc. See Section 3.7, Temperature and PressureCompensation. The temperature and pressure correction options are likely to dictate the density unitsused by the DanLoad 6000. If a "live" density input is used, the input density should be correctedto standard conditions external to the DanLoad 6000.
Mass computation is enabled by entering a mass computation adjustment factor per component,which causes the standard volume to be recomputed as mass, i.e. for "standard quantity" read "mass".Thus, batch mass, meter mass totalizers, component mass totalizers, etc. can be displayed in thedynamic data display, printed on data logs and requested by an automation system. The meterstandard quantities to 2 decimal places (data codes 147, etc.) are not recomputed as mass, and stillshow the standard volume even when mass computation is enabled. This allows meters to be provedvolumetrically, if required. If meters are proved by mass, i.e. by comparison with a weighscale, thefollowing should be considered:
- The weighscale's resolution/accuracy will contribute to overall inaccuracy.- The meter factor adjustment (program code 175, 177, etc. for component 1) is still applied to the gross volume measured by the DanLoad 6000.- Flow rates on the DanLoad 6000 are in gross volume units per minute.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 88 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The mass computation adjustment factor provides the flexibility to compute mass in almost any units(pounds, kilograms, etc.) from volume and density in almost any units. However, it should be notedthat the DanLoad 6000 displays mass only in (rounded to nearest) whole units, e.g. ±0.5 tons if themass computation adjustment factor computes tons. See program code 68 for more information andexamples. An adjustment for buoyancy in air can be included in the mass computation. See programcode 426 for more information.
It is also possible to preset by mass, e.g. to preset and load a batch of 10,000 kilograms, by enablingmass computation (as described above) and then setting the preset/delivery type to "Std" (standardquantity). See program code 80 in Section 6 for more information.
Care should be exercised when enabling mass computation and, more importantly, when presettingby mass since the number of mass units can be very different from the number of volume units.Small batches should be loading in order to verify the configuration and calculations.
3.10 Additive Injection
From one to six additives, or no additives, can be injected into the loaded product stream. Programcode numbers are indicated in the text in the following manner. One three-digit number indicatesthat the parameter applies globally to all additive injection. Six three-digit numbers separated byslashes (/) indicate that a separate parameter applies to each of the six additives injected. The sixthree-digit program code numbers are in additive numerical order (additive 1 through 6).
The primary features of the additive injection control system are listed below.
# Allows direct control of additive injection (for up to 6 physical additives) via an "additivepanel" (additive meter and on/off valve), thus making so-called "smart" additive injectorsystems obsolete. This also makes the DanLoad 6000 a more attractive economical solutionfor load rack automation when additive injection is required.
# Allows different injection methods (additive injector types) for each logical additive so thatold and new additive injection equipment can be mixed on a single loading arm, e.g. mixadditive panels on the same loading arm.
# Provides multiple injection rates (concentrations) per additive via the "Multi Rate" additiveselection method.
# Provides recipe gross and standard running totalizers and additive running totalizers tofacilitate product and additive inventory management.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 89
# Provides (functional) backward compatibility with previous DanLoad 6000 versions, thoughactual program codes may be different.
# Provides reporting (data logging) capabilities to facilitate product and additive inventorymanagement and configuration.
# Provides an additive meter calibration screen with a step-by-step procedure for computingan additive meter’s K-factor.
Typically, "smart" additive injector systems control the flow of additive into product via an on/offvalve and an additive meter. The "smart" additive injector must be interfaced to an electronic preset(batch controller), PLC or other automation system via hard-wired signals (flow permissive, pulseper gallon, feedback and alarm) or communications (RS-232 or RS-485).
The DanLoad 6000 electronic preset controls and meters additive flow directly, and thus combinesthe functionality of an advanced electronic preset and multiple "smart" additive injector systems.This has the following advantages:
# Overall electronic preset/additive injector system cost is reduced. The saving on "smart"additive injectors may even cover the cost of the electronic preset!
# System installation is simplified due to reduced interfacing requirements. All that is neededis an output to each additive control valve and an input from each additive meter.
# System operation is simplified. The DanLoad 6000 directly controls the flow of product andadditives. Configuration, calibration, alarm processing, diagnostics, etc. all take place at theDanLoad 6000. Some possible causes of alarms (due to interfacing) are eliminated.
# Additive clean line start processing is improved. Unlike existing "smart" additive injectorsystems, the DanLoad 6000 knows the preset volume, which allows injection cycles to bespread over most of the batch and prevents "spurious" over-injection alarms on smallbatches.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 90 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The DanLoad 6000 can control up to six physical additives. One additive ratio output (typically adiscrete output on an AC I/O or enhanced I/O board) and one additive meter input (typically a "lowspeed" or "high speed" discrete input (depending on the pulse width) on a DC I/O board or enhancedI/O board) is required per additive. The additive meter and on/off valve are usually mounted on an"additive panel" which provides additional piping for additive meter calibration. The DanLoad6000's additive ratio output is wired to the on/off valve. The additive meter is wired to the DanLoad6000's additive meter (additive feedback) input. The end user must ensure the additive meter outputdoes not exceed the DanLoad high speed input frequency and minimum pulse width specification.
Additive volume is measured via a K-factor per additive which is used for both authorized andunauthorized additive flow. "Selected" additives become "authorized" when a batch is started,remain authorized while the batch is stopped become "unauthorized" when the batch ends, whichallows an authorized additive to be injected manually when a batch stops due to under-injection.
The "Multi Rate" additive selection method allows multiple additive ratios (concentrations ofadditive) to be configured per additive by configuring an additive ratio per recipe, and can be usedwith any injection method or combination of injection methods. However, since the program codefor a recipe's component 4 percentage is used to configure the recipe's "override" additive ratiovolume, the DanLoad 6000 is limited to a maximum of three components in this configuration.
Recipe and additive running totalizers allow product and additive thruput for a particular customerto be monitored. (The workability of this scheme depends somewhat on there being no more thanone additive per recipe.) The recipe gross and standard running totalizers (data codes 151 through218) and the additive running totalizers (data codes 96 through 101) can be displayed in the dynamicdata display, printed on the data logging printer (via the totalizers data log) or requested viaautomation system communications (command code 22h).
The configuration summary data log (a report showing all program code values) can be printed fromthe diagnostics menu in the manual operating mode. The format is similar to the pages in Setup.For each setup group, the unit address, current date and time and the setup group name is printed.(Within the DanLoad 6000, each setup group is generated as a separate data log so that it is possibleto form feed after each setup group is printed.) For each page in each setup group, the page headingis printed. For each program code in each page in each setup group, the program code, program codedescription and program code value are printed (forty columns wide, just like in Setup).
The DanLoad 6000 application program can verify that the volume of additive measured is withinconfigured limits throughout a batch, and raise an alarm, Additive X failure, where X is the additivenumber 1 to 6, and stop the batch loading if the volume of additive measured is not withinconfigured limits. This provides a low-cost alternative to smart injector systems.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 91
Additive is typically injected in bursts or doses, so that the actual product to additive ratio varieswidely during a batch, particularly near the start of a batch. This is illustrated in the table on thefollowing page, which contains data for an injector that injects 100 cm (0.0264 gallons) of additive3
for every 40 gallons of product delivered.
The DanLoad 6000 is aware of the varying product to additive ratio during loading and does nottrigger erroneous additive injection alarms unless actual ratio errors exist. Additionally, thefollowing two clean line volume parameters affect the rate of additive injection.
# Program code 138 Clean line qty sets the quantity of product to deliver at the end of thebatch loading without additive injection. For sequential blending, the value set by programcode 138 Clean line qty applies to each component in the blend. This function preventsadditive contamination in subsequent product deliveries.
# Program code 714 Clean line qty sets the quantity of pure primary component, set byprogram code 111 Primary component, to deliver at the end of the delivery. This functionprevents product contamination in subsequent product deliveries. If, for a particular batch,the preset quantity is less than or equal to the clean line quantity, the batch is delivered as ifthere were no clean line quantity configured.
Product(gallons)
Additive in Product
Product/additive ratiocm gallons3
39 0 0 4
40 100 0.0264 1515
79 100 0.0264 2992
80 200 0.0528 1515
119 200 0.0528 2254
120 300 0.0793 1513
159 300 0.0793 2083
160 400 0.1057 1514
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 92 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.10.1 Additive Injection Configuration
"044 Additive units". This identifies the units and format in which additive volumes are displayedand printed, i.e. the external additive units, and provides a mnemonic for additive units on data logs.The internal additive units depend on the additive injection method (program codes 141, 146, etc.)per additive and, for the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods, the product units (program code29). Select one of the following:
# "cc". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in cubic centimeters formatted as9999999.99.
# "in3". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in cubic inches formatted as9999999.99.
# "Gal". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in gallons formatted as99999.9999.
# "L". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in liters formatted as 99999.9999.
The default value is "cc".
"136 Selection method". The method by which additives are selected in the manual operating mode.(In the automatic operating mode the additive selection method is determined by the automationsystem. Refer to the Authorize Transaction (06h) command in the DanLoad 6000 CommunicationsSpec.) Select one of the following:
# "External". All configured ("Number of additives") additive ratio outputs are cycled.An additive can be selected by an external contact, e.g. an automation system relayor a key-switch.
# "Prompt". The operator is prompted to select additives at the start of eachtransaction. (Additive selection screen.)
# "Inputs". Configured ("Number of additives") additive ratio outputs are cycled onlyif their corresponding additive selection inputs are closed during a batch. (Similarto external, except the DanLoad 6000 knows which additives are being injected.)
# "Recipe". The additives specified by the last two characters of the recipe name,entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent of an additive "bit map" (see below), areselected automatically. Multiple additives can be selected per recipe.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 93
# "Multi Rate". The additives specified by the last two characters of the recipe name,entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent of an additive "bit map" (see below), areselected automatically, and the recipe's component 4 percentage (truncated fromhundredths to whole units) is interpreted as the additive ratio volume. (This limitsthe DanLoad 6000 to a maximum of three components.) Multiple additives can beselected per recipe.
The default value is "External". The decimal equivalent of the additive "bit map" for the "Recipe"and "Multi Rate" selection methods is computed by adding together the appropriate values from theright-hand column of the following table:
Additive # Value
1 1
2 2
3 4
4 8
5 16
6 32
For example, in order to select additives 3 and 5 to be injected into the midgrade recipe enter"Midgrade______20" for the recipe name. (4 + 16 = 20, the underscore character represents aspace.)
The additive "ratio volume" (per additive) is now in whole units of product. However, if the "MultiRate" additive selection method is used, the recipe's component 4 percentage (truncated fromhundredths to whole units) is used for the additive ratio volume. (The ratio volume in the additivedelivery parameters setup group must still be configured if verification using the volume of additiveper 1000 of product is to be performed.)
"140 Ratio volume" (1 to 9999). The volume (possibly a combination of gross and/or standardquantities through multiple component meters) in product units (program code 29) which controlsone additive injection cycle. The default value is 40.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 94 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
"141 Injection method". The first two injection methods ("Mech" and "Handshake") totalize additivebased on a quantity per pulse, and their internal additive units are cm . The other two injection3
methods ("Meter" and "Control") totalize additive using an additive meter K-factor, and their internaladditive units, i.e. for interpreting the K-factor, are the configured product units (program code 29).For all four injection methods, the DanLoad 6000 converts additive volumes from internal units toexternal units (program code 44) for display and printing. Since the injection method is configuredper additive (program codes 141, 146, etc.), one additive can be injected via a simple mechanicalinjector ("Mech") while another can be injected and measured via an additive panel ("Control"). Select one of the following:
# "Mech". Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed dose per ratio cycle)with feedback. The DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if configured) andtotalizes additive using the quantity per pulse on input (if a feedback input isconfigured) or on output (if not). Additive verification is based on the configuredrequired number of feedback pulses per ratio cycle (program code 247), theconfigured additive error limit (program code 246) and the volume of additive per1000 of product (if configured).
# "Handshake". Additive injection via a handshake cycle (mercaptan). The DanLoad6000 controls the ratio output (if configured) based on the ratio cycle and thefeedback input, and totalizes additive using the volume per pulse on input. Additiveverification is based on a hard-coded one feedback pulse per ratio cycle, theconfigured additive error limit (program code 246), the configured additive feedbackcount (program code 247, interpreted as a number of seconds) and the volume ofadditive per 1000 of product (if configured).
# "Meter". Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed dose per ratio cycle)with additive meter. The DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if configured) andtotalizes additive using the additive K-factor on input (if a feedback input isconfigured). Additive verification is based on the volume of additive per 1000 ofproduct (if configured).
# "Control". Additive control via an on/off valve (variable dose per ratio cycle) withadditive meter. The DanLoad 6000 controls (by manipulating the on/off valve) thevolume of additive per ratio cycle (unlike the other injection methods) and totalizesadditive using the additive K-factor on input (if a feedback input is configured).Additive verification is based on the volume of additive per 1000 of product (ifconfigured). The volume of additive per 1000 of product must be configured for the"Control" injection method.
The default value is "Mech".
Note: The "global" totalizing method (program code 137), e.g. "Out", "Out/Sgl", etc., whichcombined the totalizing method and the feedback method in previous software versions isno longer used.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 95
The ratio cycle "inject %" (program code 137, 0 to 100, default 50) allows the percentage of theadjusted-for-additive-clean-line-start ratio cycle at which injection begins, i.e. the ratio output isswitched on, to be configured. For the "Mech", "Handshake" and "Meter" injection methods,injection ends, i.e. the ratio output is switched off, after 50% of the adjusted-for-clean-line-start ratiovolume has been delivered. For the "Control" injection method, injection ends, i.e. the ratio outputis switched off, when the appropriate volume of additive for the ratio cycle has been metered. Note:Setting the inject percent (program code 137) to 50 and the injection method (program code 141,etc.) to "Handshake" implements the "inject after ratio volume" control required for mercaptaninjection (per Mapco).
"142 Volume/pulse or K-factor" (0.00 to 9999.99). This is used for totalizing additive (bothauthorized and unauthorized additive flow). This is in "internal additive units". For the "Mech" and"Handshake" injection methods it is the volume per pulse in cm . For the "Meter" and "Control"3
injection methods it is the additive meter's K-factor, i.e. pulses per product unit (product units perprogram code 29). Internal additive units can be converted to external additive units via theconfigured additive units (program code 44). The default value is 0.00.
"143 Additive per 1000" (0.0000 to 99999.9999). The required volume of additive in externaladditive units (program code 44) per 1000 units of product. (If the external additive units are "cc",the additive per 1000 is truncated to two decimal places internally, e.g. 50.3456 is truncated to50.34.) When a non-zero value is configured, the DanLoad 6000 verifies that the volume of additiveis within limits (program codes 272, 273 and 278) during a batch and calculates the actual percentageof the required additive per 1000 continuously throughout a batch (data code 239 for additive 1, etc.).Thus, "additive volume verification" can be enabled (somewhat) independently of the additiveinjection method (program codes 141, 146, etc.). An additive failure alarm is raised if the measuredvolume of additive is not within limits during a batch. The default value is 0.0000, i.e. verificationdisabled.
"246 Additive error limit" (1 to 99). For the "Mech" and "Handshake" injection methods this is themaximum number of pulses by which the actual feedback pulse count can differ from the idealfeedback pulse count before an additive failure alarm is raised. The ideal feedback pulse count isbased on the additive feedback count (program code 247) or is 1 (internal default, independent ofconfiguration) for the "Handshake" injection method. The default value is 3.
"247 Additive feedback count" (0 to 9999). The expected number of feedback pulses per additiveratio cycle for the "Mech" additive injection method, e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3 "confirmation pulse",2 for Hyrolec injector. The number of seconds within which the additive feedback input must goon and off again after the additive ratio output has been energized for the "Handshake" additiveinjection method, e.g. 5. The default value is 0.
"271 Unauth additive flow vol (0.0000 to 99999.9999)". The volume (units determined by additiveK-factor) of unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarm is raised for the "Meter"and "Control" injection methods (program codes 141, 146, etc.). Unauthorized additive flow isdetected as a feedback error for the "Mech" and "Handshake" injection methods. Zero disables thealarm. The default value is 0.0000, i.e. disabled.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 96 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
“278 Additive per 1000 error limit" (1 to 99). For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods thisis the number of ratio volumes worth of additive by which the actual volume of additive can differfrom the ideal volume of additive at any point in a batch before an additive failure alarm is raised.The default value is 1.
The last two characters of a recipe's name (program code 481, 487, etc.) specify the additives to beselected for the "Recipe" and "Multi Rate" additive selection method; the last two character's of therecipe's name are not displayed in the recipe selection screen when either one of these additiveselection methods is selected. Two digits must be entered in order to select any additives.
"710 Cutoff hour" (0 to 23). The hour (24-hour clock/military time) at which a cutoff (end of day)processing is run by the DanLoad 6000. Cutoff processing is "postponed" until any batch in progressis ended. Cutoff processing includes storing and printing meter, component, recipe and additivetotalizers. The default value is 0, i.e. cutoff at midnight.
Once a second, the DanLoad 6000 compares the current hour with configured cutoff hour, the currentday with the last cutoff day and the current hour with the last cutoff hour as follows:
if (CurrentHour IS EQUAL TO ConfiguredCutoffHour) BEGIN if ( (CurrentDay IS NOT EQUAL TO LastCutoffDay) OR (CurrentHour IS GREATER THAN LastCutoffHour)) BEGIN RunCutoff() END END
This allows multiple cutoffs per day to be run per day by increasing the configured cutoff hour(program code 710).
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 97
Processing
The processing performed for an additive configured for the "Control" (additive panel) injectionmethod is described below.
Prior to starting a batch, the DanLoad 6000...
# Computes the volume of additive per 1000 of product based on the configured "additive per1000" (for the "External", "Prompt", "Inputs" and "Recipe" selection methods) or theconfigured "ratio volume", "additive per 1000" and "Comp 4 % or ratio volume" (for the"Multi Rate" selection method).
# Computes the ideal volume of additive per additive ratio cycle.
# Compute the adjusted (for clean line start, etc.) additive ratio volume.
# Initializes various "per batch" and "per ratio cycle" variables.
When, during delivery of the batch, the additive control volume, i.e. the volume of product throughthe configured additive control meters, reaches "inject %" of the adjusted additive ratio volume, theDanLoad 6000...
# Computes the number of pulses required to close the additive valve on the previous ratiocycle. (Only one additive valve closure number of pulses is used.)
# Computes the number of pulses required during the current ratio cycle to maintain the idealadditive batch volume.
# Initializes various "per ratio cycle" variables.
# Energizes the additive ratio output, allowing additive to flow, and counts pulses from theadditive meter.
When the number of pulses from the additive meter equals the number of pulses required during thecurrent ratio cycle minus the number of pulses required to close the additive valve on the previousratio cycle, the DanLoad 6000 deenergizes the additive ratio output and continues to count pulsefrom the additive meter.
Additive volume computation and "additive per 1000 verification" (as for all injection methods) issynchronized with the "per meter" volume computations.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 98 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Calculations
The processing indicated on the following page is performed continuously during a batch for eachselected additive with non-zero "additive per 1000 units".
Compute ideal dose of additive per additive ratio quantity.
Ideal add dose = 143 / ... / 168 Additive per 1000 * 140 / ... / 165 Ratio quantity -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1000
Compute the ideal volume of additive for loaded product.
Ideal vol add = Ideal add dose * Actual inj cycles complete
IF Measured vol add < Ideal vol add - (246 Additive error limit * Ideal add dose)
OR Measured vol add > Ideal vol add + (246 Additive error limit * Ideal add dose)
THEN Compute the ideal volume of additive for the current product quantity.
Ideal vol add = Prod vol * Ideal add dose ------------------------------------- 140 / ... / 165 Ratio quantity
Check + and - percentages.
IF Measured vol add < Ideal vol add - (Ideal vol add * 272 Prod/add -%) ------------------------------------------- 100
OR Measured vol add > Ideal vol add + (Ideal vol add * 273 Prod/add +%) -------------------------------------------- 100
THEN Generate an Additive X failure primary alarm. Stop the batch loading.
ENDIF
ENDIF
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 99
3.10.2 Additive Injection Configuration (Typical Examples)
Example 1 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type Sequential
065 Number of components 1
050 Number of meters 1
482 Comp 1 % 100
139 Control meters G
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty 0
111 Primary component 0
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 40.00 10
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 100 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Example 2 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type Sequential
065 Number of components 1
050 Number of meters 1
482 Comp 1 % 100
139 Control meters G
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty 20
111 Primary component 0
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 (400 - 20) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 38.00 10
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 101
Example 3 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type Sequential
065 Number of components 1
050 Number of meters 1
524 Comp 1 % 100
139 Control meters G
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty 0
111 Primary component 10
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 (400 - 10) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 39.00 10
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 102 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Example 4 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type Sequential
065 Number of components 1
050 Number of meters 1
482 Comp 1 % 100
139 Control meters G
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty 20
111 Primary component 10
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 (400 - 10 - 20) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 37.00 10
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 103
Example 5 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type In line
065 Number of components 2
050 Number of meters 2
482483
Comp 1 %Comp 2 %
60.0040.00
067070
Component 1 meter numberComponent 2 meter number
12
139 Control meters GX
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty (additive) 0
111 Primary component 1
714 Clean line qty (component) 0
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Meter 1Gross
Meter 2Gross
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 240 160 40.00 6
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 104 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Example 6 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type In line
065 Number of components 2
050 Number of meters 2
482483
Comp 1 %Comp 2 %
60.0040.00
067070
Component 1 meter numberComponent 2 meter number
12
139 Control meters GX
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty (additive) 60
111 Primary component 1
714 Clean line qty (component) 0
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Meter1
Gross
Meter2
Gross
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 240 160 (240 - 60) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 30.00 6
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 105
Example 7 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type In line
065 Number of components 2
050 Number of meters 2
482483
Comp 1 %Comp 2 %
60.0040.00
067070
Component 1 meter numberComponent 2 meter number
12
139 Control meters GX
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty (additive) 0
111 Primary component 1
714 Clean line qty (component) 30
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Meter1
Gross
Meter2
Gross
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 240 160 (240 - 30) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 35.00 6
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 106 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Example 8 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type In line
065 Number of components 2
050 Number of meters 2
482483
Comp 1 %Comp 2 %
60.0040.00
067070
Component 1 meter numberComponent 2 meter number
12
139 Control meters GX
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty (additive) 60
111 Primary component 1
714 Clean line qty (component) 30
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Meter1
Gross
Meter2
Gross
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 240 160 (240 - 60 - 30) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 25.00 6
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 107
Example 9 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type In line
065 Number of components 2
050 Number of meters 2
482483
Comp 1 %Comp 2 %
60.0040.00
067070
Component 1 meter numberComponent 2 meter number
12
139 Control meters GX
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty (additive) 60
111 Primary component 2
714 Clean line qty (component) 30
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Meter1
Gross
Meter2
Gross
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 240 160 (240 - 60) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 30.00 6
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 108 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Example 10 (Additive injection configuration)
Configuration
ProgramCode
Description Value
026 Unit type In line
065 Number of components 2
050 Number of meters 2
482483
Comp 1 %Comp 2 %
60.0040.00
067070
Component 1 meter numberComponent 2 meter number
12
139 Control meters GG
140 Ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty (additive) 60
111 Primary component 2
714 Clean line qty (component) 30
Test Results
PresetQuantity
Meter1
Gross
Meter2
Gross
Additive Ratio computed by DanLoad 6000
Additiveinjections
400 240 160 (400 - 60 - 30) ÷ (400 - 40) = 31.00 10
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 109
3.10.3 Additive Meter Calibration
The DanLoad 6000's additive meter calibration screen provides a simple, step-by-step procedure forcomputing an additive meter's K-factor using a beaker graduated in cubic centimeters (cm or cc).3
Milliliters (ml) are equivalent units. Typically, product line pressure, i.e. downstream of the additivemeter, should be simulated using a back pressure valve as required per additive panel manufacturerspecifications (typically 35 psi) in order to establish an accurate K-factor for normal loadingconditions.
Prior to using the additive meter calibration screen, the following parameters should be configured:
# Product units (program code 029) to allow the DanLoad 6000 to compute the meteredadditive volume in cm from the additive meter K-factor3
# additive injection method ("Meter" or "Control"); it is important to understand the differencebetween these two methods and configure correctly.
# additive meter K-factor, e.g. the value printed on the additive meter
# additive per 1000 (for the "Control" injection method)
The additive meter calibration screen is accessed by selecting "Additive calibration" from theprogram mode menu. (A supervisor-privileged passcode is required.)
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Program Mode Menu Pg 1 of 2Alarm resetReprint transactionSetupProgram code attributesSet date and timeSet contrast/backlighting More 91234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Program Mode Menu Pg 2 of 2DiagnosticsReprint cutoffCALMON statusAdditive calibrationExit (ALT+CLEAR) More 81234567890123456789012345678901234567890
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 110 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The additive meter calibration screen is displayed:
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890Additive calibrationAdditive _K-factor / GalVol (meter) cc in 0 cyclesVol (prover) cc
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
The DanLoad 6000 prompts for an additive number. The operator should enter a valid additivenumber, i.e. greater than or equal to 1, less than or equal to the configured number of additives(program code 135) and with injection method "Meter" or "Control". If an invalid additive numberis entered the DanLoad 6000 displays "Invalid entry".
When a valid additive number has been entered, the DanLoad 6000 displays the current additivemeter K-factor (from Setup), zeros the metered additive volume ("Vol (meter)"), disables theadditive's usual counters (which disables the additive unauthorized flow alarm), energizes theadditive's pump and block valve outputs (if configured) and prompts "Press START to inject orSTOP to finish", e.g.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890Additive calibrationAdditive 1K-factor 2600.00 / GalVol (meter) 0 cc in 0 cyclesVol (prover) cc
Press START to inject or STOP to finish1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
If the operator presses the "START" key, the DanLoad 6000 displays “Please Wait” (blinking onceevery second) for the configured additive calibration delay (program code 720) which allows theoperator to move from the preset to the additive injector, if necessary. During this delay time, the“STOP” key can be pressed to abort the delay and cancel the additive injection. Once the delay timehas elapsed, the DanLoad displays “Injecting - press stop to cancel”, performs the configured numberof additive injection cycles (program code 661) as described below, and updates the metered additivevolume at the end of each additive injection cycle. The metered additive volume is always computedas cm based on the additive meter's K-factor and the configured product units (program code 29).3
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 111
The processing of an injection cycle depends on the additive's injection method. If the additive'sinjection method is "Meter", the DanLoad 6000 performs an additive injection cycle as follows:
# energizes the additive's ratio output.
# waits for the additive meter pulse frequency to fall to zero, i.e. no pulses in one second, or5 seconds to pass.
# deenergizes the additive's ratio output and waits for the additive meter pulse frequency to fallto zero (some fixed volume injectors inject on both strokes) or 5 seconds to pass.
If the additives's injection method is "Control", the DanLoad 6000 performs an additive injectioncycle as follows:
# computes the required number of pulses for one injection cycle based on the additive's ratiovolume, K-factor and additive per 1000.
# energizes the additive's ratio output.
# waits until the required number of pulses for one injection cycle have been counted.
# deenergizes the additive's ratio output.
# waits for the additive meter pulse frequency to fall to zero.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 112 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
When sufficient injection cycles have been the completed (the total volume of additive requiredusually depends on Weights and Measures and/or company operating procedures), the operatorshould press the "STOP" key. The DanLoad 6000 prompts for the prover additive volume, i.e. thevolume of additive measured in the graduated beaker, in cm .3
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890Additive calibrationAdditive 1K-factor 2600.00 / GalVol (meter) 1869 cc in 31 cyclesVol (prover) _______ cc
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
If the operator enters a non-zero prover additive volume, the DanLoad 6000 computes, stores inSetup and displays the new additive meter K-factor:
new old metered proverK = (K x Vol ) / Vol
The new K-factor computation can be bypassed by entering zero (or simply presses the "ENTER"key) when prompted for the prover additive volume.
The DanLoad 6000 deenergizes the additive's pump and block valve outputs (if configured), andprompts for an additive number so that the additive meter calibration process can be repeated for thesame or another additive. The information from the last run are displayed until a further additivenumber is entered.
3.10.4 Multi-Stream Injection Mode
This paper describes the multi stream additive injection mode of the DanLoad 6000 Preset andaddresses the following points :
# Theory of Operation# Accuracy# Advantages
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 113
# Theory of Operation
# General - The DanLoad 6000 Electronic Preset & Batch Controller can providedirect control of up to 6 additive streams plus a clean line flush stream via a multistream additive panel. This functionality is available in firmware version 5.11 orabove. It eliminates the need for “smart” microprocessor based additive injectors,thus providing the end user with an economical solution for load rack automationrequiring additive injection of 1 or multiple additives.
There are 2 basic designs of a multi stream injection panel. Both designs use justone additive meter. The difference in design is :
# Type 1 - one has 1 additive on/off control valve with a block valve for eachadditive stream and the flush stream
# Type 2 - the other design has 1 additive on/off control valve for each additivestream and the flush stream and no block valves.
Therefore, a typical multi stream panel consists of 1 additive meter, 1 to 7 on / offcontrol valves (6 for additive streams and 1 for flush) or 1 on / off control valve with1 to 7 block valves (6 for additive streams and 1 for flush).
The main characteristic of a multi stream additive panel is the use of just one additivemeter for two or more additive streams. In addition to being able to control, measure,and verify the additive process, the DanLoad 6000 Preset is able to properly accountfor each specific additive stream as well as the flush stream through the one additivemeter. All of this is accomplished with the simple addition of 1 or 2 discrete I/Ocards to the multi slot card cage of the DanLoad 6000.
# Required I/O - The Multi Stream Injection Mode requires 1 high speed DC discreteinput for the additive meter input, 1 to 7 additive ratio outputs (typically AC discreteoutput) to operate the additive on/off control valves, 1 to 6 AC discrete outputs foreach additive block valve , and 1 AC discrete output for the clean line flush blockvalve if required. In addition to these I/O, the DanLoad must also have the necessaryI/O required for product loading (ie..control valve outputs, product pump output,additive pump outputs, meter input, RTD temperature input). The DanLoad has adiscrete I/O capacity of 24 inputs and 28 outputs.
# K-Factor per Additive - Additive volume is measured via an additive meter K-factor per additive. This allows for maximum accuracy since viscosity varies fordifferent additives and affects the meter’s K-factor.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 114 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Configuration - In addition to the normal configuration for typical loading, theDanLoad 6000 requires each additive be configured for parameters such as additivepump output, additive ratio output, additive block valve output, additive meterinput, additive meter K-factor, clean line flush output (PC # 399 - Flush Output),etc. The additive meter will be configured to the same input for each additive. Eachadditive’s injection method (PCs # 141, 146, etc.) should be set to “Control. Theflush pulses (PC # 425) is a configurable program code for entering the minimumnumber of additive meter pulses the DanLoad must read during the flush cycle. Todisable the Flush Pulses alarm, set the minimum pulses to 0.
When the DanLoad sees two or more additive meters (PC # 381..396) configured asthe same input, it automatically assumes the multi stream injection mode ofoperation and properly accounts for each additive according to the additive selected.Therefore, the multi stream injection mode must have 2 or more additives configured.Also, use of the multi stream injection mode precludes the use of the other injectionmodes available with the DanLoad.
# Flush Pump Output - A flush pump might be required to insure enough pressure forthe clean line flush to inject into the main product stream. There are two options foroperating a pump dedicated to the flushing operation. Option 1 is to wire the flushpump in parallel with the Additive Clean Line Output (PC # 398). This runs thepump during the flush mode only. Option 2 is to wire the flush pump to Trip Output#3 (PC # 317) which runs the pump for the entire batch.
# Operation - When the START button is pressed to begin a batch, the DanLoad willcheck to see if an additive is selected. Only one additive can be selected at a time forthe multi stream injection mode of operation. If more than one additive is selected,the DanLoad displays “additive failure” for each selected additive and does not allowthe batch to start. Depending on the type of design of the injection panel, the controlis as follows :
# Type 1 (Panel w/ block valves and 1 additive on/off control valve) - The DanLoadwill control the additive injection by first energizing the appropriate additive blockvalve output and pulsing the additive on/off control valve solenoid. As the end of thebatch is reached and if clean line flush is configured, the DanLoad concludes theadditive injection (reference clean line volume PC #138) and deenergizes the additiveblock valve and the additive on/off control valve solenoids (ie..closes the valves).Then the flush block valve output (PC # 398 - Additive Clean Line Output) will beenergized along with the flush output (PC # 399 - which is wired to the additiveon/off control valve) to allow the flushing operation. If configured, the DanLoad willcheck the clean line pulses (PC # 425) at the end of the batch to verify the clean lineflushing operation took place and alarm if necessary.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 115
# Type 2 (Panel w/ 2 or more additive on/off control valves and no block valves) -The DanLoad will control the additive injection by pulsing the appropriate additiveon/off control valve solenoid. As the end of the batch is reached and if clean lineflush is configured, the DanLoad concludes additive injection (reference clean linevolume PC #138) by deenergizing the additive on/off control valve. Then the flushblock valve output (PC # 398 - Additive Clean Line Output) will be energized alongwith the flush output (PC # 399 - which is wired to the additive on/off control valve)to allow the flushing operation. If configured, the DanLoad will check the clean linepulses (PC # 425) at the end of the batch to verify the clean line flushing operationtook place and alarm if necessary.
# Flush Pulses Alarm - At the end of a batch, if the DanLoad records fewer clean lineflush pulses than the configured clean line flush pulses (PC # 425), the DanLoad willraise an internal alarm and display the message that has been configured for safetycircuit #3 (PC # 254). To disable the Flush Pulses alarm, set the minimum pulsesto 0. The DanLoad will record the actual number of clean line pulses at the end ofeach batch but will reset this register at the start of each batch. The flush pulsescounter can be displayed on the Dynamic Data Display via data code # 223 onfirmware versions 5.11 or above.
# Calibrating the Additive Injectors - No additional electronics or handheldcalibrators are required to calibrate each injector stream. Calibration is accomplishedby using the DanLoad’s diagnostics to energize the discrete output wired to theadditive solenoid valve which allows additive to flow into a test beaker. TheDanLoad’s dynamic data display is used to show the amount of additive measuredby the DanLoad for that calibration cycle and is compared to the amount of additivein the test beaker. A new factor is calculated as follows : New Factor = (MeteredVolume / Beaker Volume) x Old Factor, with the result rounded to 2 decimal places.The new factor is entered as PC # 142..167.
# Accuracy
The DanLoad 6000 is able to measure the injected additive with tremendous accuracy via a highresolution additive meter. At each step of the process the DanLoad constantly reads measuredadditive and adjusts the control cycle accordingly.
# Example : Based on an additive meter with a K-factor of 2600 PPG and a ratio of0.4 gallons of additive per 1000 US gallons of product (400 ppm), there will be 25injections of additive. Each injection will be 0.016 gallons (41.6 pulses per injection)for a total of 1040 pulses for the batch. At the completion of the batch, the DanLoadwill typically be within ±1 pulse of the additive batch volume. This one pulse isequal to 0.000385 gallons.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 116 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Advantages of Using DL6000 with Multi Stream Injection Mode vs. DL6000 with“Smart” Injectors
In addition to cost savings, below are several advantages for using the DanLoad 6000 to directlycontrol a multi stream additive injector panel.
# System installation is simplified and installation costs reduced due to less hardwiringrequirements. An example is the elimination of the communication cable betweenthe automation system and injector.
# System operation is simplified. The DanLoad 6000 directly controls the flow ofproduct and additives and corrects for over or under injection. Configuration,calibration, alarm processing, diagnostics, etc. all take place at the DanLoad 6000.Some possible causes of alarms due to interfacing automation systems and/or presetsto “smart” injectors are eliminated.
# Reduces trouble-shooting and maintenance by utilizing one piece of electronics forboth additive injection, measurement and control functions.
# Provides gross and net running product totalizers and additive running totalizersallowing for product and additive inventory management.
# Provides built-in reporting capabilities to facilitate product and additive inventorymanagement.
# Provides multiple injection rates per additive stream via the DanLoad’s “Multi Rate”additive selection method (ie..five rates for each of six additive streams).
# Overall electronic preset and additive injector cost is reduced because of savingsfrom not buying a “smart” injector.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 117
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 118 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 119
3.10.5 Multi Rate Additive Injection
The DanLoad 6000, using multiple recipies, has the capability of controlling multiple injection ratesthrough a single additive injector. Typically, multiple additive injectors are required when differentrates are needed when using the same additive. The DanLoad allows the user the capability ofpurchasing a minimum of 1 additive injector for a bay when the same additive with multiple ratesare used in multiple recipies. Naturally, the DanLoad will support multiple injectors that requiredifferent rates when multiple additives are required.
Example: Additive injection using Multi-Rate selection and Control method.
1. Program Code (PC) Setup:135 = 1 (Number of additives)136 = Multi Rate (Selection method)140 = 40 (Ratio Quantity. This value is ignored when Multi-Rate is selected).141 = Control (Injection Method)142 = 21 (Volume/Pulse or K factor)143 = 0.4 (Additive per 1000)480 = 2 (Number of recipies)485 = x (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 1)
2. Determine the amount of additive injected per pulse:Vol/pulse = ((PC 140) / 1000) x (PC 143)
3. Determine the additive ratio:Additive ratio = ((Vol/pulse) x 1000) / (Desired Additive per 1000)
4. Enter the new additive ratio into PC 485.
5. If another additive ratio is required, then use the calculation in steps 2 and 3 and enter thevalue into PC 491 (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 2).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 120 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Example: Additive injection using Multi-Rate selection and Meter method.
1. Program Code (PC) Setup:135 = 1 (Number of additives)136 = Multi Rate (Selection method)140 = 40 (Ratio Quantity. This value is ignored when Multi-Rate is selected).141 = Meter (Injection Method)142 = 21 (Volume/Pulse or K factor)143 = 0.4 (Additive per 1000)480 = 2 (Number of recipies)485 = x (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 1)
2. Determine the amount of additive delivered per injection:Vol/pulse = (Total additive injected) / (# of pulses)
3. Determine the additive ratio:Additive ratio = ((Vol/pulse) x 1000) / (Desired Additive per 1000)
4. Enter the new additive ratio into PC 485.
5. If another additive ratio is required, then use the calculation in steps 2 and 3 and enter thevalue into PC 491 (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 2).
In both examples above the DanLoad 6000 also computes the volume/pulse which is also known as1 additive unit. This additive unit is used in additive error checking. If the delivered additive fallsoutside of PC 278 (Additive/1000 error limit) and has also exceeded the parameters of PC 272 andPC 273 (low and high % of the ideal quantity at any point in a batch) the DanLoad 6000 willterminate loading and display an “Additive x failure” message, where x is the additive injector thatfailed.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 121
3.11 Transaction Storage Overview
Data for multiple transactions composed of one or more batch deliveries is stored in non-volatilememory. Storage of transaction and batch delivery data is configured and enabled by program codes834 through 837 and 840 through 901. Transaction storage MUST BE enabled and defined if eitherone or both of the following two cases exist.
# Case 1 A user defined Transaction Ticket will be printed on a pre-printed form. The printcoordinates of selected variables are defined by program codes 920 through 981.
# Case 2 A host computer (Terminal Automation System) gathers data from the DanLoad6000 and it is desired to provide backup storage of transaction data in case the hostcomputer or host computer communications link fails.
*** OR ***A host computer (Terminal Automation System) polls the DanLoad 6000at long time intervals, such as once per day. For this type of operation, thehost computer can upload all transaction data from the DanLoad 6000 onceper day and then the transaction storage memory can be cleared or left intact.If the transaction storage memory is cleared, the DanLoad 6000 reads thedata for the next day beginning at transaction record 0000. If the transactionstorage memory is left intact, the DanLoad 6000 reads the data for the nextday beginning at the last read transaction record + 1.
It is not necessary to define the transaction / batch storage program codes 840 through 901 for anyother case.
Text in this section uses standard programming and database terminology. You do not need tounderstand programming or database concepts to configure transaction storage. Examples areprovided that relate the unique terminology to how data is placed and viewed on a printed page. Ifadditional explanation is required, contact Daniel Automation Field Service Department or anyperson with computer programming experience.
Section 3.10.1 gives an example of transaction data storage definition and formatting a user definedtransaction ticket. This example provides an overview of the required actions. Detailed informationon the transaction data storage program codes and the user defined transaction ticket program codesis provided after the example. The procedures for implementing transaction storage and definingthe format of a user defined transaction ticket are described below.
Section 3.10.2 discusses the default ticket formats available with the DanLoad 6000.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 122 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.11.1 Transaction Storage / Transaction Ticket Setup Procedure (Example)
Refer to Section 3.10.2 for the available preconfigured Standard Ticket Formats.
For the example, assume that the DanLoad 6000 controls gasoline octane blending (midgrade),high octane only, and low octane only gasoline loading to tanker vehicles. The example refers tothe Transaction Ticket (Typical), Figure 3 - 13, the Transaction Storage Code Worksheet(Example), Figure 3 - 14, and the Batch Storage Code Worksheet (Example), Figure 3 - 15.
The Transaction Ticket (Typical) was generated with a word processor program. The bold typeindicates the pre-printed text in the ticket. The regular type indicates data that is obtained from thetransaction storage file and the batch storage file in the DanLoad 6000. The transaction storage filecan only contain data selected from the Transaction Storage Codes (TSC), Table 3 - 4 on page 3-129, and the batch storage file can only contain data selected from the Batch Storage Codes (BSC),Table 3 - 5 on page 3-131. If transaction data storage is defined and a user defined transaction ticketis not required, the print coordinates defined by program codes 920 through 955 and 960 through982 can be ignored.
Steps performed:
1 Design the ticket format using available data defined by transaction storage codes and batchstorage codes. Design the pre-printed text as desired.
2 Use a scale to measure and then mark the approximate row numbers and column numberson the rough draft of the transaction ticket. The printed output from the DanLoad 6000 isnormally 10 characters per inch on each line and 6 rows per inch vertically. The print font(character style and size) is dependent on the data printer or other external device, such asa personal computer driving a printer.
3 Circle each printed variable generated by the DanLoad 6000. Near each circled variable,write the following code to describe the variable.
Type number, row, column, number of bytes stored in transaction or batch record, itemmultiplier
Example: Tnn, rrr, cc, b, m OR Bnn, rrr, cc, b, m
# Type number T for TSC, B for BSC and TSC or BSC number
# rrr three-digit (leading zeros) row number on ticket
# cc two-digit (leading zeros) column number on ticket
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 123
# b The number of bytes stored in the transaction or batch record. Obtainfrom the # bytes/format column in the Transaction Storage Codes(TSC) table on page 3-129 or the Batch Storage Codes (BSC) tableon page 3-131. Note: This number can be less than the number ofcharacters in the formatted printout of the variable.
# m [multiplier] The number of flow meters defined (for TSC 23, 24,25, 26) or the number of components defined (for BSC 10, 11, 12,13, 14, 15). The multiplier is 1 for all other TSC's and BSC's.
4 Enter the TSC number, ticket row / column coordinates, and number of memory storagebytes required for the variable in the Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet.
5 Start with the top TSC entry and calculate record offsets in the following manner.
(bytes times multiplier) plus offset equals the offset for the following line TSC.
In the example, [# bytes for T11 equals 4 times 1 (assumed multiplier)] plus 1 (offset forfirst entry) equals 5 which is entered as the offset for the next line TSC 12.
6 In the Record Length column, manually perform the bytes * m multiplication and write theproduct in the column. Sum all of the values or products in this column. The example sumis 120 bytes storage required in the transaction data storage record. Round this number to150 bytes to allow for minor re-definition of data later. Enter the value 150 in program code834 Transaction record length.
7 Enter the BSC number, ticket row / column coordinates, and number of memory storagebytes required for the variable in the Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet.
8 Start with the top BSC entry and calculate record offsets in the following manner.
(bytes times multiplier) plus offset equals the offset for the following line BSC.
In the example, [# bytes for B2 equals 2 times 1 (assumed multiplier)] plus 1 (offset forfirst entry) equals 3 which is entered as the offset for the next line BSC 7.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 124 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
9 In the Record Length column, manually perform the bytes * M multiplication and write theproduct in the column. Sum all of the values or products in this column. The example sumis 18 bytes storage required in the batch data storage record. Round this number to 30 bytesto allow for minor re-definition of data later. Enter the value 150 in program code 836 Batchrecord length.
NoteTen memory pages (each page stores 8192 bytes) are allocated to store transaction recordsand batch records. Transaction storage pages are allocated by program code 835 Start pageand # pages and batch storage pages are allocated by program code 837 Start page and #pages. If transaction storage is enabled, at least one page must be assigned for transactionstorage records and at least one page must be assigned for batch storage records. The completeblock of ten pages is identified by numbers 600 through 1510, where the last two digits (00through 10) identify the number of pages allocated and the 6 through 15 part of theassignment indicates the start page. (Note: Memory pages 00 through 05 are used internallyby the DanLoad 6000.)
Let's assume that at this tanker vehicle loading facility it is common to load three or fourbatch deliveries grouped into individual transactions.
Here are the known or assumed details:
# Transaction record length = 150
# Batch record length = 30
# Maximum number of batches in each transaction is 6. Because the batches pertransaction should never exceed 6, set program code 047 Batches/transaction = 6 atthis time to limit the number of batches allowed per each transaction.
However, almost all transactions are composed of 4 batches. Typically 4 batchestimes 30 bytes each batch equals 120 bytes per each transaction stored in the batchstorage record. (At the end of transaction, a 150 byte transaction record will also bestored.)
# Let's assume that most transactions are composed of 4 batches. In this case, at eachtransaction close, 150 bytes are stored in the transaction file as the transaction recordfor the completed transaction nnnn. And 120 bytes are stored in the batch file asFOUR batch records that make up the completed transaction nnnn.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 125
# Compare the value of the transaction record length and the sum of all batch recordsstored for each normal transaction.
1 Divide the smaller value by the larger value. In this example, divide 120 by150. The result is 0.8.
2 Multiply the result (0.8) by 5. (Note: 5 is the median page count of the 10pages used to store batch and transaction files.) The result of 0.8 times 5 is4. If the result is a fraction, round the value up to a whole number. Thevalue, 4, is the number of pages in either the transaction file or the batchfile. The file is determined by the smaller value (numerator of the division)that was determined in step 1 above. In this example, 120 (the numerator)is the sum of the bytes in 4 batches (one transaction) so the number of pagescalculated in this step (4) is assigned to the batch file.
3 Set program code 837 Start page and # pages to 1204 (for batch storage).This indicates that the start page is 12 and 4 pages (12, 13, 14, 15) areassigned to the batch file.
4 The remaining 6 pages in the transaction storage group are allocated fortransaction data as follows. Set program code 835 Start page and # pages to606 (for transaction storage). This indicates that the start page is 6 and 6pages (6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11) are allocated to the transaction file.
5 Use the data entered in the Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet and enterthe transaction data record offsets, beginning at 1, in program codes 840through 875, as defined.
6 Use the data entered in the Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter thebatch data record offsets, beginning at 1, in program codes 880 through 901,as defined.
7 [Optional, only if user defined transaction ticket is defined] Use the dataentered in the Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter thetransaction data print coordinates in program codes 920 through 955, asdefined.
8 [Optional, only if user defined transaction ticket is defined] Use the dataentered in the Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter the batch datarecord print coordinates in program codes 960 through 981, as defined.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 126 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Transaction Ticket (Typical)Figure 3-12
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 127
Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example)Figure 3-13
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 128 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example)Figure 3-14
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 129
The data contained in the Transaction Ticket (Typical), Figure 3 - 13, is described below.
Note: The upper area of the ticket contains data obtained from transaction storage codes andtherefore, each defined line is a transaction storage line.
SHIPPER This number (up to eight-digits) is obtained from TSC-11 (Data item 1). This isthe operator entry in response to Prompt #1 (program code 031). Assume that thisprompt has been set to read "Enter shipper I.D. number".
CLIENT This number (up to eight-digits) is obtained from TSC-12 (Data item 2). This isthe operator entry in response to Prompt #2 (program code 032). Assume that thisprompt has been set to read "Enter client I.D. number".
TRANSACTION SEQUENCE NUMBERThe sequence number of the transaction obtained from TSC-2 (Transaction sequencenumber). This number (0 to 9999) is obtained from the internal transaction counterin the DanLoad 6000. The transaction sequence number is readable by program code042 Transaction #.
RECIPE NUMBER / NAMEThe recipe number (1 to 30) is obtained from TSC-3 (Recipe number). Thisnumber is maintained internally by the DanLoad 6000. The sequential recipenumbers are assigned to recipe names which have been defined by program codes inthe recipe setup program code group (program codes 480 to 661).
The recipe name (up to 16 alpha-numeric characters) is obtained from TSC-4(Recipe name). The name is obtained from the setup entry in program code 481Recipe name (and similar program codes in the program code group 480 to 661).
Note: The example Delivery Ticket shows a slash (/) that visually separates therecipe number and recipe name. This (/) slash is part of the pre-printed text.
TRANSACTION CLOSING (DATE/TIME)The date and time that the transaction is ended. This data is obtained from TSC-17(Transaction end date and time). The date format is dependent of the configurationof program code 038 Date format and program code 039 Date separator. The timeformat is always in the hh:mm:ss form.
TRANSACTION OPENING (DATE/TIME)The date and time that the transaction is started. This data is obtained from TSC-16(Transaction start date and time). The date format is dependent of the configurationof program code 038 Date format and program code 039 Date separator. The timeformat is always in the hh:mm:ss form.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 130 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Batch data section of the Delivery Ticket (BATCH:) follows:
The parameters in this group are defined by batch storage codes.
In the example, we will assume that any tanker vehicle can only have a maximum of sixcompartments and that program code 047 Batches/transaction has been set to 6 to limit eachtransaction to no more than six batches. Therefore, we have designed to pre-printed Delivery Ticketwith enough space to print up to six batch records (lines) in this area. If the number of batches pertransaction is not limited by setup (program code 047) or by strict operating procedures, thenumber of batch records printed could over-print the lower area of the pre-printed Delivery Ticket.
SEQ # The batch sequence number is obtained from BSC-2 (Batch sequence number). All batchesthat are part of one transaction will have sequential numbers in the range of 0 to 9999. Thebatch sequence number is readable by program code 043 Batch number.
PRESET The batch preset quantity obtained from BSC-7. This quantity was entered by thelocal operator when the batch delivery operation was setup.
StandardGallons [OCTANE - HIGH]The batch standard quantity, per component, obtained from BSC-11 (Componentbatch standard quantity). In this example, high octane gasoline was defined asComponent 1 at setup time with program codes 066 to 068. In this case, at setuptime, we have set program code 067 Meter to 1 so that the high octane gasoline ismeasured by flow meter 1. This is important in this instance so that we can displaythe flow meter based TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING / OPENING READINGin the same format in the lower area of the Delivery Ticket.
StandardGallons [OCTANE - LOW]The batch standard quantity, per component, obtained from BSC-11 (Componentbatch standard quantity). In this example, low octane gasoline was defined asComponent 2 at setup time with program codes 069 to 071. In this case, at setuptime, we have set program code 070 Meter to 2 so that the low octane gasoline ismeasured by flow meter 2. This is important in this instance so that we can displaythe flow meter based TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING / OPENING READINGin the same format in the lower area of the Delivery Ticket.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 131
TEMP [OCTANE - HIGH]The average temperature is obtained from BSC-12 (Component batch averagetemperature). Since the average temperatures are related to each component that hasbeen defined, the order of printing on the line is component 1 temperature thencomponent 2 temperature. In this case, the pre-printed labels OCTANE - HIGH andOCTANE - LOW identify the corresponding component.
TEMP [OCTANE - LOW]The average temperature is obtained from BSC-12 (Component batch averagetemperature). Since the average temperatures are related to each component that hasbeen defined, the order of printing on the line is component 1 temperature thencomponent 2 temperature. In this case, the pre-printed labels OCTANE - HIGH andOCTANE - LOW identify the corresponding component.
Note: The data obtained from batch storage codes ends here. The remaining lower area of theTransaction Ticket contains only data obtained from transaction storage codes and thereforeeach defined line is a transaction storage line.
TRANSACTION ADDITIVE GROSS VOLUMESThe injected additive gross volumes for the transaction are obtained from TSC-30 toTSC-35 (Additive x transaction gross quantity). We have assumed for the examplethat all six additives have been setup for injection by program codes 380 to 398.Therefore, we have allocated space to print the gross quantities for all six additives.Transaction additive quantities are cumulative each transaction. This means thateach additive will have only one quantity value. If accumulation of additivequantities by batch is required, BSC-16 to BSC-21 can be used to access thesequantities. However, space on the report must be allocated to print a quantity valuefor each additive and each batch. Note: pre-printed additive labels in the exampleare ADD1, ADD2, etc., an actual transaction ticket could use the actual additivenames in place of the generic place holders used in the example.
ALARMS Report space is allocated for up to two primary alarms that occur during thetransaction. The alarm messages are obtained from TSC-28 (Primary alarm duringtransaction) and TSC-29 (Primary alarm during transaction). The alarm messagesthat can be printed are defined by various program codes in the alarms group programcodes 220 to 275. Only Primary alarms are printed by TSC-28 and TSC-29. Twotransaction storage codes are accessible to provide printing capability of up to twoprimary alarms that occur during a transaction.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 132 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
BitMap The alarm bitmap is obtained from TSC-27 [Primary alarms during transaction(bitmap)]. Note: Most organizations will probably not print the bitmap field on apre-printed report. However, the alarm bitmap does provide an historical recordof primary alarms that occur during transaction processing. The alarms bitmapusually has limited utility in a stand alone system because 1) occurrence of primaryalarms indicates a hardware or operational problem that should be correctedimmediately, and 2) interpretation of an alarms bitmap requires an understandingof the binary and hexadecimal numbering schemes. Section 3.10.6 containsinformation on interpreting the alarm bitmap.
TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING READINGThis gross quantity, per flow meter, obtained from TSC-25 (Gross meter totalizerat end of transaction). In this example, high octane gasoline was defined asComponent 1 at setup time with program codes 066 to 068. The low octane gasolinewas defined as Component 2 at setup time with program codes 069 to 070. In thiscase, at setup time, we have set program code 067 Meter to 1 and program code 070Meter to 2 so that the high octane gasoline is measured by flow meter 1 and the lowoctane gasoline is measured by flow meter 2. This is important in this instance sothat we can display all quantities on the Delivery Ticket in the same order.
TRANSACTION GROSS OPENING READINGThis gross quantity, per flow meter, obtained from TSC-23 (Gross meter totalizerat start of transaction). In this example, high octane gasoline was defined asComponent 1 at setup time with program codes 066 to 068. The low octane gasolinewas defined as Component 2 at setup time with program codes 069 to 070. In thiscase, at setup time, we have set program code 067 Meter to 1 and program code 070Meter to 2 so that the high octane gasoline is measured by flow meter 1 and the lowoctane gasoline is measured by flow meter 2. This is important in this instance sothat we can display all quantities on the Delivery Ticket in the same order.
TOTAL GROSS TRANSACTION QUANTITYThis total quantity is obtained from TSC-18 (Transaction gross quantity). Thequantity is calculated by the following formula.
TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING READING (TSC-25) (all meters) minus TRANSACTION GROSS OPENING READING (TSC-23) (all meters) equals TOTAL GROSS TRANSACTION QUANTITY
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 133
FLOW WEIGHTED AVERAGE TEMP.This value is obtained from TSC-20 (Transaction average temperature). The valueis calculated by the following formula.
sum of COMPONENT BATCH AVERAGE TEMPERATURE (for all components) divided by the number of COMPONENT BATCH AVERAGE TEMPERATURE values
DELIVERED Standard quantity AT 60 DEG FThis quantity is obtained from TSC-19 (Transaction standard quantity). Thisquantity is calculated by the following formula.
TOTAL GROSS TRANSACTION QUANTITY times the COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR equals DELIVERED Standard quantity AT 60 DEG F
Note: The COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR is the temperature correctionfactor in this case because pressure compensation is not applied.
DRIVER Space for the tanker vehicle driver to sign for receipt of product.
TERMINAL AUTHORIZATIONSpace for the terminal supervisor or operator to sign for delivery of product.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 134 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.11.2 Default Ticket Formats
Three default ticket formats are preconfigured in the DanLoad. Refer to program code 838 for acomplete description of the Transaction Ticket Format. The basic formats are:
Format #1 - Ticket without batch dataFormat #2 - Ticket with batch dataFormat #3 - Ticket with only batch data
See Figure 3-16 on the following page for an example of these formats.
Note: The first line under each format heading (numbers 1-8) and the very next line are used toindicate the column number (1-80) of the preconfigured ticket format. Transaction storagecodes are in plain type. Batch storage codes are underlined. Field widths are indicated bydots to the right of the storage codes, even though the values may be right-justified withinthe fields.
Reference TSC and BSC codes on pages 3-129 to 3-131 for Field Identifier.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 135
Format 1 - Transaction summary without batch data
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 812345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #) 1.. 5 2... 3. 4............... 18.... 19.... 20...
16............... 17............... 6............................... 11......
23....... 25....... 24....... 26....... <-- Assumes one meter only.
27..................
30........ 31........ 32........ 33........ 34........ 35........12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Format 2 - Transaction summary with batch data
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 812345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #) 1.. 5 2... 3. 4............... 18.... 19.... 20...
16............... 17............... 6............................... 11......
23....... 25....... 24....... 26....... <-- Assumes one meter only.
27..................
30........ 31........ 32........ 33........ 34........ 35........
2... 7..... 8..... 9..... 4.... 6..... 5.....12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Format 3 - Batch data
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 812345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #) 1.. 5 2... 3. 4............... 2... 7..... 8..... 9..... 4.... 6..... 5.....
DanLoad Default Ticket FormatsFigure 3-15
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 136 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.11.3 Transaction Data Storage
The remaining sub-sections in the 3.10.x series contain detailed information on transaction datastorage and user defined transaction tickets.
Transaction / batch data storage parameters are defined by program codes 834 to 838, 840 to 875,and 880 to 901. The function of these codes is independent from transaction ticket printing relatedprogram codes. However, if user defined transaction / batch tickets are printed, an interrelationbetween the different groups of program codes MUST BE established. Part of this interrelationbetween program codes is performed manually at setup time and part is established automaticallyinternally by the DanLoad 6000. Program codes 920 to 981 specify the format of the printed tickets.In addition, program codes 706, 707, and 709 control the actual printing and sequence numberingof transaction tickets.
All other program codes implemented in the DanLoad 6000, except those listed in the previousparagraph, are related to process monitor / control and manner of operation of the DanLoad 6000.However, the transaction / batch storage codes and ticket printer control codes implementprogramming / database methods.
Definitions
Byte The term byte refers to a small space (8 binary bits) in computer memory used tostore one alpha (letter, number, or special) character used as text only or twonumeric (number) characters.
Nybble A nybble is 4 binary bits. A byte contains two nybbles.
Database Terminology (applicable to DanLoad 6000 batch and transaction storage)
Database All of the static (unchanging) and dynamic (changing) data stored in the DanLoad6000.
File In this case, the transaction file and the batch file are database tables. Each file isa block of non-volatile (battery backed) memory that stores batch and transactiondata in logical groups. The file (table) contains groups of similar type data thatmake up part of the database. The groups of data in the file are divided into columnsand rows similar to data entered on paper. The columns are called fields and therows are called records. The batch and transaction files are separate random access(any data variable can be located with a pointer to (address of) the variable) files.See Record definition below.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 137
Field A vertical column that contains similar type data. Each field contains one or morealpha-numeric characters. The Transaction and Batch File Organization table belowindicates the field and record organization of both transaction and batch files. Thefield contents of a transaction record are defined by program codes 840 to 875. Andthe field contents of a batch record are defined by program codes 880 to 901. Thetransaction storage setup process allows the user to define multiple data items thatare grouped as sub-fields in the User Defined field of the Batch Record and theTransaction Record.
Record A row (horizontal string of alpha-numeric characters) that contains various types ofdata, divided into fields. Each of the up to ten-thousand batch records and up to ten-thousand transaction records contains information on one completed batch loading(in the batch file) or one completed transaction (in the transaction file). The lengthof each record in the transaction file is set to a fixed number of bytes by programcode 834 Transaction record length. The length of each record in the batch file isset to a fixed number of bytes by program code 836 Batch record length. Note: Theprocess of defining the contents of the user defined field of a batch record ortransaction record define a template of the record contents. The actual alpha-numericcontents of each record is written into each record during or after a batch loading ortransaction operation.
Record Header
[Note: In the table below, all fields (columns) except the User Defined field(column) are part of the record header.] Record header fields in each record containinformation that is maintained and used internally by the DanLoad 6000. Thisinformation enables the DanLoad 6000 to know where to find each record and whatdata is contained in each record. The records are located by index numbers which aresimilar to page numbers in the index of a book. The record header fields for bothtransaction records and batch records are shown in the following table Transactionand Batch File Organization. The record header fields are maintained internally bythe DanLoad 6000.
When transaction / batch storage is enabled, a non-volatile memory block (file) iscreated for up to 10,000 user definable batch data records and up to 10,000 userdefinable transaction data records. A record is a row in a database table. Columnsin the database table define data fields.
The table below shows the relationship between the data stored each transactionrecord (and file) and the separate data stored in each batch record (and file). Notethat the transaction and batch records are stored in separate batch and transactionfiles. The table shows one transaction record (top) and one batch record (bottom)together for field comparison only.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 138 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Transaction and Batch File Organization(Record Header Fields plus User Defined Field)
Type ofRecord 9
BatchSequenceNumber
TransactionSequenceNumber
StartBatchNumber
Number ofBatches inTransaction
OperatingMode Status
UserDefined
Transaction >
Transactionfile key
<yes> <yes> <yes> <yes> <yes>
Batch >
Batchfile key
<yes> <yes> <yes>
Notes:
# The transaction and batch file keys are not stored in their respective records. The DanLoad6000 maintains these index numbers internally.
# <yes> indicates that this field is stored in the corresponding record type.<blank> indicates that the field is not applicable to the corresponding record type.
The fields contained in each record are defined below.
Batch Sequence Number (internal pointer to batch record)
The Batch Sequence Number is a sequential number between 0000 and 9999 that ismaintained internally by the batch record counter in the DanLoad 6000. This number is notstored in any record field. However, because all batch deliveries and therefore batchnumbers are sequential, the DanLoad 6000 can locate any batch record by setting the batchrecord counter.
Transaction Sequence Number (stored as part of batch record header)
The Transaction Sequence Number is a sequential number between 0000 and 9999 that ismaintained internally by the transaction record counter in the DanLoad 6000. This numberis not stored in transaction records. However, the current Transaction Sequence Number isstored in the record header of each batch record. Because all transactions and thereforetransaction numbers are sequential, the DanLoad 6000 can locate any transaction record bysetting the transaction record counter. The Transaction Record Number stored in the batchrecord header is used to group multiple batches into one transaction.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 139
Start Batch Number (stored as part of transaction record header)
The Start Batch Number is a number between 0000 and 9999 that is saved in a transactionrecord when the first batch delivery of the transaction is started. This number is stored in thetransaction record header. This number, in conjunction with the Number of batches inTransaction number is used to group one or more batch deliveries into one transaction.
Number of Batches in Transaction (stored as part of transaction record header)
The Number of Batches in Transaction is a number between 0001 and 9999 that is saved ina transaction record after the transaction is terminated. This number is stored in thetransaction record. This number, in conjunction with the Start Batch Number is used togroup one or more batch deliveries into one transaction.
Operating Mode (stored as part of transaction record header)
The Operating mode is a number obtained from the state of program code 025 Operatingmode at the start of the current transaction. The possible Operating Modes are listed below.
Operating Mode Number Operating Mode
0 Auto
1 Manual
2 Stand-alone
Status (stored as part of transaction and batch record headers)
The Status is a number that identifies the current state of each record. The possible states arelisted below.
Status Number Record Status
0 record is not allocated and does not contain valid data
1 record is allocated, awaiting data from a batch loading ortransaction in progress
2 completed, the data is valid for the successfullycompleted batch loading or transaction
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 140 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
User Defined (data field that is not part of record header)
[Note: The User Defined field contains multiple data items (sub-fields) that are defined atsetup time.] The complete User Defined field can be from 0 to 250 bytes in length. Thelength of this field is set to a fixed value (record length) for all transaction records byprogram code 834 Transaction record length and is independently set to a fixed value(record length) for all batch records by program code 836 Batch record length. Selecteddata is placed in sub-fields of this field at setup time by program codes 840 through 875 fortransaction records and program codes 880 through 901 for batch records. Data is selectedby Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) for transaction records (file) and Batch StorageCodes (BSC) for batch records (file). The two tables Transaction Storage Codes and BatchStorage Codes contain information on the selectable data definitions.
During setup of transaction storage codes, the following two rules must be observed or thedata will not be stored.
# Each data variable cannot overlay another data variable in storage. Data variablesmust be placed end to end with no overlap.
# Any data variable cannot extend past the last byte of the record as defined byprogram code 834 for transaction records or program code 836 for batch records.
The following example of the User Defined portion of a batch record illustrates applicationof these rules. Assume that program code 836 is set to 50 (batch record length is fixed at50 bytes).
1 2 3 4 5 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 < OFFSET aabbttTTPPPPcccccccccccccccc < good record PPPP < bad record
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 141
The OFFSET is the position in the 50-byte record length set by program code 836. Ifprogram code 836 where set to 0, no memory space is allotted and no data is stored. Datastorage is enabled by setting program code 836 to any value between 1 and 250. Very smallvalues in this variable are not meaningful because of the limitation of data variable storage.Example of good record shows the following assigned data storage.
ProgramCode Variable Storage Length (bytes)
File Pointer + Number ofBytes in Variable
880 Unit address 2 (aa) 1 + 2 bytes(9 start next at byte 3)
881 Batch sequencenumber
2 (bb) 3 + 2 bytes(9 start next at byte 5)
882 Transactionsequence number
2 (tt) 5 + 2 bytes(9 start next at byte 7)
883 Temperature 2 (TT) 7 + 2 bytes(9 start next at byte 9)
884 Pressure 4 (PPPP) 9 + 4 bytes(9 start next at byte 13)
889 Component grossquantity
4 * number of componentsdefined (cccccccccccccccc)
13 + (4 * 4 bytes)(9 start next at byte 29)
A transaction consists of one or more batch deliveries of a single recipe and additive selectioncombination. Process data for transactions is stored by the DanLoad 6000 and can be accessible,depending on the configuration of several program codes.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 142 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Transaction Data Access Program Codes
Program Code Function
696 Enables printing of the PREDEFINED STANDARD Batch SummaryReport on one of up to four selectable printers.
697 Enables printing of the PREDEFINED STANDARD TransactionSummary Report on one of up to four selectable printers.
706 Enables printing of a USER DEFINED Transaction Ticket on a one ofup to four selectable printers.
707 Enables selection and printing of a USER DEFINED Transaction Ticketon one of up to four selectable printers. The selection and re-printingfunction is enabled by manual entry of the transaction sequence numberin the Reprint transaction ___ display. The Reprint transaction ___display is accessible by the second selection in the Program ModeMenu.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 143
The following tables contain information on Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) and Batch StorageCodes (BSC). A description of the data in the tables follows the tables.
Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) Table 3 - 4
TSC Number andDisplay
Record OffsetProgramCode
TicketCoordinatesProgram Code
Time Saved # bytes/format Reference
1 Addr 840 920 start trns 2/nnn DUART address
2 Tr seq # 841 921 start trns 2/nnnn PC 042
3 Recipe # 842 922 start trns 2/nn internal register
4 Recipe name 843 923 start trns 16/(a16) PC 481...
5 Side 844 924 start trns 1/n DC 001
6 Prompt 1 845 925 start trns 32/(a32) PC 031
7 Prompt 2 846 926 start trns 32/(a32) PC 032
8 Prompt 3 847 927 start trns 32/(a32) PC 033
9 Prompt 4 848 928 start trns 32/(a32) PC 034
10 Prompt 5 849 929 start trns 32/(a32) PC 035
11 Data item 1 850 930 start trns 4/nnnnnnnn entry for PC 031
12 Data item 2 851 931 start trns 4/nnnnnnnn entry for PC 032
13 Data item 3 852 932 start trns 4/nnnnnnnn entry for PC 033
14 Data item 4 853 933 start trns 4/nnnnnnnn entry for PC 034
15 Data item 5 854 934 start trns 4/nnnnnnnn entry for PC 035
16 Start date 855 935 start trns 6/ PC 038, 039
17 End date 856 936 end trns 6/ PC 038, 039
18 Gross 857 937 end trns 4/nnnnnn
19 Std 858 938 end trns 4/nnnnnn
20 Temp 859 939 end trns 2/nnn.n
21 Pres 860 940 end trns 4/
22 Dens * 861 941 end trns 4/ PC 457
Table continues on next page.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 144 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) Table 3 - 4 (continued)
TSC Number andDisplay
Record OffsetProgramCode
TicketCoordinatesProgram Code
Time Saved # bytes/format Reference
23 Start gross 862 942 start trns 4 * # of meters/nnnnnnnnn
24 Start std 863 943 start trns 4 * # of meters/nnnnnnnnn
25 End gross 864 944 end trns 4 * # of meters/nnnnnnnnn
26 End std 865 945 end trns 4 * # of meters/nnnnnnnnn
27 Alarm bit map 866 946 end trns 10/(a20)
28 Prim alarm 867 947 end trns 10/(a40)
29 Temp alarm 868 948 end trns 10/(a40)
30 Add 1 869 949 end trns 4/nnnnnnn.nn
31 Add 2 870 950 end trns 4/nnnnnnn.nn
32 Add 3 871 951 end trns 4/nnnnnnn.nn
33 Add 4 872 952 end trns 4/nnnnnnn.nn
34 Add 5 873 953 end trns 4/nnnnnnn.nn
35 Add 6 874 954 end trns 4/nnnnnnn.nn
36 Op mode 875 955 authorize trns 1/n PC 025
37 Gross units 876 956 authorize trns 6/nnnnnn
38 Std units 877 957 authorize trns 6/nnnnnn
* The component 1 backup density/gravity is stored/printed. The individual batch densities/gravitiesare not averaged.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 145
Batch Storage Codes (BSC) Table 3 - 5
BSC Number andDisplay
Record OffsetProgramCode
TicketCoordinatesProgram Code
Time Saved # bytes/format Reference
1 Addr 880 960 start batch 2/nnn DUART address
2 Ba seq # 881 961 start batch 2/nnnn PC 043
3 Tr seq # 882 962 start batch 2/nnnn PC 042
4 Temp 883 963 end batch 2/nnn.n DC 132
5 Pres 884 964 end batch 4/nnnn.n DC 134
6 Dens 885 965 end batch 4/nnnn.n DC 133
7 Preset 886 966 start batch 4/nnnnnn DC 102
8 Gross 887 967 end batch 4/nnnnnn DC 002
9 Std 888 968 end batch 4/nnnnnn DC 003
10 Comp gross 889 969 end batch 4 * # of comp/nnnnnn
DC 072, 078, 084,090
11 Comp std 890 970 end batch 4 * # of comp/nnnnnn
DC 073, 079, 085,091
12 Comp temp 891 971 end batch 2 * # of comp/nnn.n
DC 075, 081, 087, 093
13 Comp dens 892 972 end batch 4 * # of comp/n.nnnn
DC 107, 109, 111,113
14 Comp pres 893 973 end batch 4 * # of comp/nnnn.n
DC 108, 110, 112,114
15 Comp % 894 974 end batch 2 * # of comp/nnn.n
DC 122, 123, 124,125
16 Add 1 895 975 end batch 4/nnnnnnn.nn DC 115
17 Add 2 896 976 end batch 4/nnnnnnn.nn DC 116
18 Add 3 897 977 end batch 4/nnnnnnn.nn DC 177
19 Add 4 898 978 end batch 4/nnnnnnn.nn DC 118
20 Add 5 899 979 end batch 4/nnnnnnn.nn DC 119
21 Add 6 900 980 end batch 4/nnnnnnn.nn DC 120
22 Op mode 901 981 authorize trns 1/n PC 025
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 146 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The tables above contain the following data.
TSC / BSC Number and Display
This column contains the identification number and text displayed when the Record OffsetProgram Code is addressed.
Record Offset Program Code
This column contains the program code that defines the byte offset (1 to 250) within theuser defined area of each transaction or batch record.
Ticket Coordinates Program Code
This column contains the program code that defines the row and column coordinates to printthe data on a user defined transaction ticket. This function is described below in the UserDefined Transaction Ticket section.
Time Data is Saved
This column contains the time, in the transaction time sequence, when the data variable issaved.
Normal Transaction Sequence
Step State Action
1 Authorize transaction[authorize trns]
Select recipe(single recipe setup defaults to recipe # 1)Select additives (if defined)
2 Start transaction[start trns]
Enter preset quantity for first batch to load(go to Step 4)
3 Authorize batch[authorize batch]
Enter preset quantity to load(same as Step 2 for first batch load)
4 Start batch[start batch]
Press START push-button to start any batch loadORPress START push-button to restart a suspended batch loading before presetquantity is delivered
5 Batch in progress Loading is in progress
6 End batch[end batch]
Preset quantity has been delivered [return to step 3 if multiple batch loads aregrouped in this transaction]ORPress STOP/PRINT push-button [restart batch load (go to step 4) if allowed orreturn to step 3 if multiple batch loads are grouped in this transaction]
7 End transaction[end trns]
Press STOP/PRINT push-buttonwith no load in progress
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 147
Sequence Steps 3 through 6 are repeated for multiple batch loads that are grouped into onetransaction.
# bytes/format
This column contains the number of bytes required to store the data variable in thetransaction or batch record and the format of the data printed on a User Defined TransactionTicket. Note that alpha-numeric data, such as the Recipe name and Prompt # is stored in astandard ASCII string without NULL terminator (00 byte). Numeric data is stored in packedbinary (two decimal digits per byte). Fixed format characters, such as decimal points anddate/time field separators, are not stored but are maintained internally by the DanLoad 6000.Several data values are stored and can be printed in groups that are dependent on the numberof flow meters or number of components defined by the system setup. Examples are:
Transaction Storage Code 23 Start Gross, program code 862
Four bytes in printable format nnnnnnnn times the number of flow meters defined. Eachfield is printed on one line with one space between each field.
nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn < example shows three flow meters
Batch Storage Code 10 Comp gross, program code 889
Four bytes, each in printable format nnnnnn, times the number of components defined.Each field is printed on one line with one space between each field.
nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn < example shows three components
Reference
This column contains an addressable program code (PC nnn), data code (DC nnn), or otherreadable point, such as DUART address from address selection switches on DUART, forreading the variable. This reference is not the source of the data variable. But, the referencerefers to an addressable point where the variable can be read.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 148 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.11.4 Relation Between Batch Storage and Transaction Storage Variables
Three batch storage codes and transaction storage codes reference identical data as indicated in thefollowing table.
Common Storage Codes
Batch Storage Code Transaction Storage Code Reference
1 Addr 1 Addr DUART address
3 Tr seq # 2 Tr seq # PC 042
22 Op mode 36 Op mode PC 025
A storage variable can only be defined one time in a batch storage record or a transaction storagerecord. In addition, any one variable can only be assigned one set of print coordinates for a userdefined Transaction Ticket. Therefore, all batch and transaction variables, with the exception ofthe three variables listed above, can only appear once on a Transaction Ticket.
Relation Between Various Batch Storage Codes
Batch storage codes are related to other batch storage codes in the following manner.
Batch Storage Code (BSC) Relations
Batch Storage Code 7 Source Batch Storage Code
4 Temp Average of BSC 12 Comp temp for all defined components in the
batch.
5 Pres Average of BSC 14 Comp pres for all defined components in the
batch.
6 Dens Average of BSC 13 Comp den for all defined components in the
batch.
8 Gross Sum of BSC 10 Comp gross for all defined components in the batch.
9 Std Sum of BSC 11 Comp std for all defined components in the batch.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 149
3.11.5 Relation Between Transaction Storage Codes / Batch Storage Codes / ProgramCodes
Transaction storage codes are related to other transaction storage codes and batch storage codes inthe following manner.
Transaction Storage Code (TSC) Relations
Transaction Storage Code 7 Source Transaction Storage Code
6 Prompt 1 Program code 031 <prompt #1> text for which the operator entered
response is 11 Data item 1 during transaction setup.
6 Prompt 2 Program code 032 <prompt #2> text for which the operator entered
response is 12 Data item 2 during transaction setup.
7 Prompt 3 Program code 033 <prompt #3> text for which the operator entered
response is 13 Data item 3 during transaction setup.
8 Prompt 4 Program code 034 <prompt #4> text for which the operator entered
response is 14 Data item 4 during transaction setup.
9 Prompt 5 Program code 035 <prompt #5> text for which the operator entered
response is 15 Data item 5 during transaction setup.
18 Gross Sum of 25 End gross minus 23 Start gross for each defined flow
meter. (Sum of BSC 8 Gross for all batches in the transaction.)
19 Std Sum of 26 End std minus 24 Start std for each defined flow meter.
(Sum of BSC 9 Std for all batches in the transaction.)
20 Temp Average of BSC 4 Temp for all batches in the transaction.
21 Pres Average of BSC 5 Pres for all batches in the transaction
22 Dens Program code 454 Component 1 backup density/gravity. The
individual densities/gravities are not averaged.
30 Add 1 Sum of BSC 16 Add 1 for all batches in the transaction
31 Add 2 Sum of BSC 17 Add 2 for all batches in the transaction
32 Add 3 Sum of BSC 18 Add 3 for all batches in the transaction
33 Add 4 Sum of BSC 19 Add 4 for all batches in the transaction
34 Add 5 Sum of BSC 20 Add 5 for all batches in the transaction
35 Add 6 Sum of BSC 21 Add 6 for all batches in the transaction
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 150 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The following table describes the relationship between the quantity total accounting for batches andtransactions.
Batch Quantity Totals
Component1 Component2 Component3 Component4
10 Comp gross 10 Comp gross 10 Comp gross 10 Comp gross
BSC 8 Gross is the sum of all defined BSC 10 Comp gross quantities in the batch.
11 Comp std 11 Comp std 11 Comp std 11 Comp std
BSC 9 Std is the sum of all defined BSC 11 Comp standard quantities in the batch.
Transaction Quantity Totals
Meter3
(PC-067)
Meter2
(PC-070)
Meter4
PC-073)
Meter1
(PC-076)
25 End gross 25 End gross 25 End gross 25 End gross
23 Start gross 23 Start gross 23 Start gross 23 Start gross
TSC 18 Gross is the sum of all defined TSC 25 End gross minus TSC 23 Start gross meter
quantities in the transaction. This value is equal to the sum of all BSC 8 Gross quantity
accumulations for the transaction.
26 End std 26 End std 26 End std 26 End std
24 Start std 24 Start std 24 Start std 24 Start std
TSC 19 Std is the sum of all defined TSC 26 End std minus TSC 24 Start std meter quantities
in the transaction. This value is equal to the sum of all BSC 9 Standard quantity accumulations
for the transaction.
Batch and Transaction Quantity Totals Accounting
Batch and transaction quantity accumulations are for deliveries of one recipe which is: singlecomponent quantity without additives, single component quantity with additives, blend quantitywithout additives, or blend quantity with additives.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 151
Components are permanently assigned to flow meters by program codes 067, 070, 073, and 076.The component assignment in the table above is an example only. The example shows that anycomponent can be assigned to any flow meter. The table shows that batch quantities are accumulatedper component and the sum of all component quantity accumulations is added to obtain the totalbatch quantity accumulations (BSC 8 Gross and BSC 9 Std). The table also shows that transactionquantities are accumulated per flow meter and the sum of all flow meter accumulations is added toobtain the total transaction quantity accumulations (TSC 18 Gross and TSC 19 Std). The methodof quantity accumulation allows access to both component quantities, for batches, and flow meterquantities, for transactions, for user defined Transaction Tickets and terminal automation systems.It is obvious that the only quantity accounting device in any tanker vehicle loading installation is theflow meter. The quantity accounting per component is performed by the DanLoad 6000 controlprogram.
As explained later in the Transaction Ticket Configuration section, the component to flow meterassignments determine the print format for multiple components [batch data (BSC 10 / 11 / 12 /13 / 14 / 15)] and flow meters [transaction data (TSC 23 / 24 / 25 / 26)]. Therefore, if the listingorder of multiple batch quantity totals must match the listing order of transaction totals, overallsystem design and setup can be important for user defined Transaction Tickets.
3.11.6 Transaction Ticket Configuration Overview
Selected transaction / batch data can be printed on a pre-printed form. The form can be used as aloading ticket or transaction report. This section contains information on configuration of a userdefined transaction ticket. An example transaction ticket, Figure 3 - 13, is used to illustrate theexample. The bold text signifies the pre-printed part of the form. The regular text signifies the datavariables obtained from transaction storage codes or batch storage codes.
User configurable transaction tickets can be printed on personal computer style data printers. Or thetickets can be transmitted to, and archived in, a personal computer or similar processing device.User configurable transaction tickets are completely independent from the standard format BatchSummaries and Transaction Summaries. Therefore, user definable transaction tickets can be printedregardless of the print status of Batch Summaries and Transaction Summaries. Data LoggingSection 4.4.1 contains information on Batch Summaries and Transaction Summaries.
The reason for the user defined transaction tickets capability is to permit batch and transactionloading data to be printed on a pre-printed loading ticket (transaction Bill of Lading). The processof defining the format of the printed transaction ticket is easy. However, some planning is requiredto insure that the ticket layout is as desired and that the ticket contains the required data.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 152 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.11.7 Transaction Ticket Layout Planning
Although printing user defined data on an existing pre-printed ticket form is certainly possible, itis usually easier to plan the layout of the required printed data from the DanLoad 6000 and thendesign the pre-printed form to fit the printed data format. The data from the DanLoad 6000 isobtained from transaction storage codes (TSC) that have been defined for the transaction storagerecord and batch storage codes (BSC) that have been defined for the batch storage record. A wordprocessor program for a personal computer can generate an example form similar to the exampleTransaction Ticket, Figure 3 - 13. Otherwise, the form can be designed with paper and pencil.Remember that multiple batch data in one transaction prints on consecutive lines. Quantity datafrom transaction storage codes 23 / 24 / 25 / 26 prints variable length lines dependent on the numberof flow meters defined. And data from batch storage codes 10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14 / 15 prints variablelength lines dependent on the number of components defined.
The DanLoad 6000 outputs standard ASCII characters to the printer. The printer determines theappearance (font) of the printed data. Virtually all personal computer style printers default toCourier 10 font. These characters are printed 10 cpi (characters per inch) and 6 lines per inch.Most printers allow manual selection of Courier 12 font which prints characters at 12 cpi and 8 linesper inch. Fonts smaller than Courier 12 are usually not suitable for this type of report.
After the required data for the Transaction Ticket has been selected from the transaction storage fileand the batch storage file, the print coordinates should be defined and a test printout generated onblank paper. Review the test printout. Check for space for the pre-printed areas of the form. Checkfor a clear area of approximately 1-inch (2.5 cm) along the left margin to allow for holes andstorage in a ring binder. Adjust the print coordinates of data items as required so that the data andspacing appears correct on the paper. After adjustments have been made, manually enter the datato be pre-printed with a color pen. You may need to consult with a print shop at this time todetermine if the space allotted for the pre-printed area of the form is sufficient for the desired pre-printed text.
The format of a Transaction Ticket is very flexible. However, the following rules are applicable toformat design.
# Any transaction line (row) of the Transaction Ticket can only contain transaction data. Inother words, if a line of the Transaction Ticket contains a variable assigned by transactionstorage codes 840 through 875, then any other variable displayed on that line must also beassigned by transaction storage codes 840 through 875.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 153
# Any batch line (row) of the Transaction Ticket can only contain batch data. In other words,if a line of the Transaction Ticket contains a variable assigned by batch storage codes 880through 901, then any other variable displayed on that line must also be assigned by batchstorage codes 880 through 901.
# Transaction storage codes 23 / 24 / 25 / 26 assign quantity data storage space in memory forflow meter quantities in the following format.
Meter_1_quantity Meter_2_quantity Meter_3_quantity Meter_4_quantity
The quantity values for each configured flow meter are stored in sequence and will be printedin this sequence if any of these four transaction storage codes is assigned print coordinateson the Transaction Ticket. The values are right justified with leading zeros suppressed. Aminimum of one horizontal space is open between each accumulator value, dependent onthe number of digits in the value.
# Batch storage codes 10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14 / 15 assign quantity, temperature, pressure,density, and quantity percentage data storage space in memory for components in thefollowing format.
Component_1_value Component_2_value Component_3_value Component_4_value
The values for each configured component and variable type are stored in sequence and willbe printed in this sequence if any of these four transaction storage codes is assigned printcoordinates on the Transaction Ticket. The values are right justified with leading zerossuppressed. A minimum of one horizontal space is open between each accumulator value,dependent on the number of digits in the value.
During planning of the Transaction Ticket, we need to know a few things about the configurationof the DanLoad 6000 in order to design a Transaction Ticket properly. The following program codeshave either direct or indirect effect on the data can be printed on the Transaction Ticket.
# Program code 025 Operating modeDefines the operating mode for the DanLoad 6000. The operating mode determines howtransaction and batch records are archived in their respective files. [Operating mode isaccessible by TSC 36 and BSC 22]
# Program code 031 through 035 Prompt for data item #xThe actual text entries for prompts can be printed. The eight-digit operator entries inresponse to these prompts can also be printed. [Prompt test is accessible by TSC 6 to 10]
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 154 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Program code 038 Date format and 039 Date separatorDetermine the format for printing the date. [Date is accessible by TSC 16 and TSC 17]
# Program code 047 Batches/transactionLimits the number of batches in each transaction. [Important for user defined transactiontickets]
# Program code 067 / 070 / 073 / 076 MeterThe component to flow meter assignments determine the order for printing component values(quantities) for transaction storage codes 23 / 24 / 25 / 26.
# Program code 080 Preset/delivery typeDetermines the gross or standard engineering units for BSC-7 Preset quantity
# Program code group 135 through 168 Additive injectionDetermine the maximum number of additive values (Volumes) that can be printed.[See TSC 30 to 35 and BSC 16 to 21]
# Program code group 220 through 268, 274, 275 AlarmsDetermine the primary alarm assignments that are available for printing. Only primary typealarms can be printed. [See TSC 27 / 28 / 29]
# Program code 343 Auto/manual change-overDetermines mode of operation which effects the transaction and batch storage data files.
# Program code 344 Primary alarm resetDetermines when primary alarms are reset by an external input.
# Program code group 380 through 398 Additive injectionDetermines how additive injection volumes are accumulated. [See TSC 30 to 35 and BSC16 to 21]
# Program code group 426 through 479 Temperature/Pressure/DensitySets the process variable engineering units for temperature, pressure, and density. If anyof these values are printed, the pre-printed engineering units labels must match the internallyused engineering units. [See TSC 20 / 21 / 22]
# Program code group 480 through 661 RecipesDefines the recipe names and associates these names with internally maintained recipenumbers. Both recipe names and or recipe numbers can be printed. [See TSC 3 and 4]
# Program code group 663 through 673 Data Communications ParametersDefines the serial data port parameters for interface to a serial input printer or other dataacquisition device.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 155
# Program code 696 Batch summaryDefines printer interface for the STANDARD pre-formatted batch summary report. Thisreport is different from the batch data printed a user defined Transaction Ticket.
# Program code 697 Transaction summaryDefines printer interface for the STANDARD pre-formatted transaction summary report.This report is different from the transaction data printed in the user defined TransactionTicket.
# Program code 706 Transaction ticketDefines printer interface for the user defined Transaction Ticket described in this section.
# Program code 707 Transaction ticket reprintDefines printer interface for re-printing Transaction Tickets manually from the Reprinttransaction display in Program Mode.
# Program code 709 Sequence numbersEnables printing of form sequence numbers (0 to 9999) unique for each printer. Thisfeature allows organization and audit tracking of all forms printed on all printers.
# Program code group 834 through 877, 880 through 901Control and define storage of transaction storage variables and batch storage variables in thetransaction and batch files. Each variable must be stored in its respective file to enableaccess to the variable for printing in the Transaction Ticket.
# Program code group 920 through 957, 960 through 982Define the row and column coordinates, for each transaction and/or batch variable, on theprinted Transaction Ticket.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 156 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.11.8 Alarm BitMap
The alarm bitmap is normally not printed on transaction tickets. However, comparison of alarmactivity for several loading operations can be a useful diagnostic tool.
For the following description we presuppose that the reader does not have programming experiencebut does have some knowledge of number base systems. The common base 10 number system usesdigits 0 through 9 to indicate the value of each digit position. The position decimal weight increasesby 1 power of 10 for each position change in the leftward direction from the decimal point. TheDanLoad 6000, like all digital computers, uses the base 2 number system which uses digits 0 and1 to indicate the value of each position. The position binary weight increases by 1 power of 2 foreach position change in the leftward direction from the binary point. A third number base system,the base 16 (hexadecimal) number system is used solely to make the binary (base 2) numbersystem more readable and manageable for people. The hexadecimal number system uses digits 0to 9, a, b, c, d, e, f. The a through f digits are symbols that are place holders for decimal digits10 through 15. The symbols serve only as single character place holders to represent possiblenumbers in the number system. The bitmap as the name implies is binary based. Each bit stands forone unique alarm. Each bit can be 0 (no alarm occurred) or 1 (alarm occurred). The bitmap istransmitted and read as hexadecimal for ease of use by people. The relation between internal storageof the bitmap and representation is presented below.
BitMap Representation Description
0000000000 7 bytes<through 9>ffffffffffffffffffff 7 hex digits
ten 8-bit bytes (twohexadecimal digits perbyte)
00000000000000000000<through 9>ffffffffffffffffffff
twenty 4-bithexadecimal digits
0 <through 9> f each 4-bit digit (nybble)
8 4 2 1 the bit weight (hexadecimal) foreach 4-bit nybble
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 157
BitMap Character / Bit Weight Translation
PrintedCharacter(1 of 20)
BitWeight8
BitWeight4
BitWeight2
BitWeight1
0
1 TRUE
2 TRUE
3 TRUE TRUE
4 TRUE
5 TRUE TRUE
6 TRUE TRUE
7 TRUE TRUE TRUE
8 TRUE
9 TRUE TRUE
a TRUE TRUE
b TRUE TRUE TRUE
c TRUE TRUE
d TRUE TRUE TRUE
e TRUE TRUE TRUE
f TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
Note: The bit is set TRUE if the corresponding alarm occurs during the transaction. Thecombination of TRUE alarms determines the character printed.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 158 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The alarm bitmap is described on the following pages. The Alarm BitMap for Position:000000000000000000000 table indicates the character position and the bit weight within eachcharacter that is set TRUE when the alarm was active during the transaction. The alarm bitmap isstored, by assignment of TSC 27, as 10 bytes with two-digits in each byte. Each character positioncontains indicators (bits) for 4 alarms. Since each alarm is independent from other alarms, theoccurrence of no alarm or any combination of from 1 to 4 alarms assigned to each character positionwill determine what character is printed in each position of the bitmap. The characters that can beprinted in each character position are 0 through 9, a, b, c, d, e, f. This is the hexadecimalnumbering system. The bitmap is read from right to left for both character position and bit position.
Example: 2 1
09876543210987654321 < bitmap character position number
8421 < bit weights any character position
(example for character position 12)
Read the printed bitmap with the aid of the following tables.
# The leftward 4 character positions (17 through 20) are always zeros because alarms are notassigned to these positions.
# Any non-zero character printed indicates that an alarm occurred during the transaction.Determine the character position, the rightward character is 1 the leftward character is 20.
# Find the corresponding Character Position in the Alarm BitMap for Positions:00000000000000000000 table below.
# Use the BitMap Character / Bit Weight Translation table to determine which bits were setTRUE.
# If the printed character is 1, 2, 4, or 8, then only one alarm in that characterposition group was set TRUE.
# If the printed character is 3, 5, 6, 9, a, or c, then two of the alarms in thatcharacter position group were set TRUE.
# If the printed character is 7, b, d, or e, then three of the alarms in that characterposition group were set TRUE.
# If the printed character is f, then all four of the alarms assigned to that characterposition were set TRUE.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 159
Alarm BitMap for Positions: 00000000000000hhhhhh
Alarm
Character
Position
Bit
Weigh
t
Primary/secondary internal temperature too high/low 1 1
Flow rate too low meter 1 1 2
Flow rate too low meter 2 1 4
Flow rate too low meter 3 1 8
Flow rate too low meter 4 2 1
Flow rate too high meter 1 2 2
Flow rate too high meter 2 2 4
Flow rate too high meter 3 2 8
Flow rate too high meter 4 3 1
Unable to close valve meter 1 3 2
Unable to close valve meter 2 3 4
Unable to close valve meter 3 3 8
Unable to close valve meter 4 4 1
Valve closed early meter 1 4 2
Valve closed early meter 2 4 4
Valve closed early meter 3 4 8
Valve closed early meter 4 5 1
Timed-out - no flow detected meter 1 5 2
Timed-out - no flow detected meter 2 5 4
Timed-out - no flow detected meter 3 5 8
Timed-out - no flow detected meter 4 6 1
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter 1 6 2
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter 2 6 4
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter 3 6 8
Note: The BitMap representation in the title line shows the character positions on this page ashhhhhh. The 0's in the BitMap can be any valid character and are described on other pagesof the table.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 160 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Alarm BitMap for Positions: 00000000hhhhhh000000
Alarm
Character
Position
Bit
Weigh
t
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter 4 7 1
Pulse security error meter 1 7 2
Pulse security error meter 2 7 4
Pulse security error meter 3 7 8
Data memory full 8 1
Comms failure channel A 8 2
Comms failure channel B 8 4
Temperature failure meter 1 8 8
Temperature failure meter 2 9 1
Temperature failure meter 3 9 2
Temperature failure meter 4 9 4
Density failure component 1 9 8
Density failure component 2 10 1
Density failure component 3 10 2
Density failure component 4 10 4
Pressure failure meter 1 10 8
Pressure failure meter 2 11 1
Pressure failure meter 3 11 2
Pressure failure meter 4 11 4
Additive 1 failure 11 8
Additive 2 failure 12 1
Additive 3 failure 12 2
Additive 4 failure 12 4
Additive 5 failure 12 8
Note: The BitMap representation in the title line shows the character positions on this page ashhhhhh. The 0's in the BitMap can be any valid character and are described on other pagesof the table.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 161
Alarm BitMap for Positions: 0000hhhh000000000000
Alarm
Character
Position
Bit
Weigh
t
Additive 6 failure 13 1
Unable to maintain blend 13 2
Unable to close block valve 1 13 4
Unable to close block valve 2 13 8
Unable to close block valve 3 14 1
Unable to close block valve 4 14 2
Circuit 1 alarm 14 4
Circuit 2 alarm 14 8
Circuit 3 alarm 15 1
Circuit 4 alarm 15 2
Circuit 5 alarm 15 4
Circuit 6 alarm 15 8
Circuit 7 alarm 16 1
Circuit 8 alarm 16 2
Storage memory full 16 4
Power failure 16 8
Character positions: hhhh0000000000000000
not used in software version 3.0
17 to 20
Note: The BitMap representation in the title line shows the character positions on this page ashhhh. The 0's in the BitMap can be any valid character and are described on other pages ofthe table.
Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet
Unit: _______Date: _______TransactionStorage Code
Ticket(PC 920 to 955)
Record(PC 840 to 875)
Row ColumnPgmCodeRow/Col
Length(bytes * #) Offset
PgmCodeOffset
1
Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet
Unit: _______Date: _______BatchStorage Code
Ticket(PC 960 to 982)
Record(PC 880 to 902)
Row ColumnPgmCodeRow/Col
Length(bytes * #) Offset
PgmCodeOffset
1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 164 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.12 Component Size Inputs
In the manual operating mode, the authorized [batch] quantity can be determined automatically basedon the state of up to four discrete inputs, each one corresponding to a possible tank or compartmentsize, known as "compartment size inputs". With compartment size inputs configured (program code341), it is often only necessary for the operator to select the compartment size via a multi-wayselector switch and press the "ENTER" and "START" keys, or even just the "START" key (see "startmethod", program code 342). The same functionality can be achieved quite easily in the automaticoperating mode via automation system programming, and is simplified by the fact that the states ofthe safety circuit inputs are included in the response to the Request Status (12h) command. Referto the DanLoad 6000 Comm Spec.
In order to authorize a batch, one compartment size input, indicating the actual compartment size,should be closed prior to entering a preset quantity or simply pressing the "ENTER" key. If the"ENTER" key is pressed without having keyed-in a preset quantity, the authorized quantity enteredis the compartment size. If a preset quantity is keyed-in prior to pressing the "ENTER" key, theauthorized quantity entered is the minimum of the compartment size and the keyed-in presetquantity, i.e:
Authorized qty = min(Compartment size per closed inputs or User-entered preset qty (if any))
Note the "if any" condition on the user-entered preset quantity; if a preset quantity is not keyed-in,the compartment size corresponding to the lowest-numbered compartment size input that is closedis used. For this reason, compartment sizes should be configured (see recipe 28, program codes 644to 647) from smallest to largest in ascending order. If none of the compartment size inputs is closed,it is not possible to authorize a batch even if a preset quantity is keyed-in, i.e. it is necessary to selectthe compartment size even if a preset quantity is to be keyed-in.
The number of compartment size inputs (program code 341) can be configured (0 to 4). Zero meansthat compartment size inputs are not being used. Safety circuits 4 thru 8 inputs serve double ascompartment size inputs. If one or more of them is used as a compartment size input, thecorresponding safety circuit cannot be used and its alarm action (program codes 257, 259, 261, 263)should be set to "Off". The compartment sizes are configured via recipe 28's componentpercentages. Program codes 349/350/351/352 are used to define the physical discrete compartmentsize input and program codes 644/645/646/647 are used to define the physical compartment size inproduct units for the associated input. The actual compartment size value is calculated by theDanLoad as the value, entered in program codes 644/645/646/647, times 100. The maximum presetquantity (program code 078) should not be smaller than the largest configured compartment size.If compartment size inputs are used, the number of recipes (program code 480) must not exceed 26.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 165
If compartment size inputs are used, additional pre-authorization verification of the compartmentsize/preset quantity (in the manual operating mode) and verification of the loaded quantity while abatch is in progress (in any operating mode) can be enabled via the level input (program code 374)and the hatch input (program code 375). The processing associated with the level input wasdeveloped for a specific user, and as such may not provide as much flexibility as you would normallyexpect from the DanLoad 6000; care should be taken to understand the processing fully beforedeciding to use this capability. Refer to the relevant program codes (374, 375 and 650 thru 653) formore information.
3.13 Cutoff (End of Day Processing)
The DanLoad 6000 runs a cutoff (end of day processing) every 24 hours based on the configuredcutoff hour (program code 710). When the time (hour) is equal to the configured cutoff hour, theDanLoad 6000...
# Waits for any batch is progress to end. (Note: A DanLoad 6000 transaction may span twocutoff periods.)
# Saves the previous cutoff data, i.e. cutoff date and time, previous cutoff date and time, meter,component and recipe gross and standard running totalizers and additive running totalizers.
# Saves the new cutoff data.
# Prints the totalizer data log if it is enabled (program code 705) and the DanLoad 6000 is inthe manual operating mode (program code 25).
# Prints the thruput data log if it is enabled (program code 708) and the DanLoad 6000 is inthe manual operating mode (program code 25).
The totalizer and thruput data logs can be reprinted (if they are enabled and the DanLoad 6000 is inthe manual operating mode) using the "Reprint cutoff" option in the program mode menu. Both datalogs show the date and time at which they were printed as well as the date and time of the cutoff.The DanLoad 6000 can reprint the totalizer and thruput data logs only for the most recentlycompleted cutoff, i.e. it does not "archive" cutoff data.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 166 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
3.14 Set Contrast / Backlighting
Access to the Set Contrast / Backlighting display is via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of theProgram Mode Menu, Figure 3 - 1. This display provides the method to change the current contrastand backlighting settings for either the local or remote LCD panel.
Set contrast/backlighting SELECT display Primary
8/9 adjust contrast level n ALT+8/ALT+9 adjust backlight level n
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
Set Contrast / Backlighting DisplayFigure 3 - 16
If only the local display is present, it is preselected and indicated. Use the 8 and 9 arrow keys toadjust the contrast level. A value of 0 is minimum contrast, a value of 15 is maximum contrast.Use the ALT+8 and ALT+9 keys to adjust the backlight level. A value of 0 is backlight off, avalue of 7 is maximum backlight intensity.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 167
3.15 CALMON - Turbine Meter Calibration Monitoring for the DanLoad 6000Electronic Preset
# Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 contains 22 program codes (6 “global” and 4 “per meter”) and 4 data codes (1per meter) that are associated with Calibration Monitoring. 19 program codes (3 “global” and 4 “permeter” are in the “Blending” setup group. 3 program codes (all “global”) are in the “Recipe” setupgroup and are configured via Recipe 30 comp 1%, comp 2% and comp 3%. Calibration Monitoringrelated program and data codes are as follows:
# "731/ 737/ 743/ 749 CALMON analysis method".
# "Fuzzy". Calibration monitoring analysis incorporated “Fuzzy” logic withfour inputs and one output. This is the recommended setting.
# "Heuristic". Analysis operation using a Heuristic method.
# "753 CALMON error limit" (0 to 255): The number of "bad meter analyses" perCALMON reset count (program code 754) calibration monitoring analyses abovewhich a calibration failure alarm is raised for the meter during monitoring. Thedefault value is 25.
# "754 CALMON reset count" (0 to 9999): The “total analyses”, “good meteranalysis” and “bad meter analyses” counters are zeroed every CALMON reset count”calibration monitoring analyses during monitoring. A calibration failure alarm israised for the meter if there are no "good meter analyses" in "CALMON reset count"calibration monitoring analyses during monitoring. This is also the number ofattempts to auto-detect the number of blades (if necessary) and acquire a calibrationsample before a calibration failure alarm is raised for the meter during calibration.The default value is 50.
# 755 Calib fail alarm action": The calibration failure alarm action. The defaultvalue is "Primary". Select one of the following:
# "Off". The alarm is disabled.# "Info". # "Secondary".# “Primary".
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 168 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# "757/ 762/ 767/ 772 Number of blades" (0 to 50): The number of magnetic blades(or buttons) on the meter for calibration monitoring purposes. 0 disables calibrationmonitoring for the meter. Any other value enabled calibration monitoring for themeter. 1 indicates that the number of blades should be auto-detected by the "MPMC"prior to acquiring a calibration sample. The default value is zero, i.e. calibrationmonitoring disabled for the meter. In order to use the calibration monitoring featureit is recommended that this value must be set to 1, if the information on number ofmagnetic blades or buttons is not available.
# "758/ 763/ 768/ 773 Max max char dev" (0 to 65535): The maximum characteristicdeviation computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "badmeter" result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. Thedefault value of 100 detects a 10% blade bent corresponding to an average K-factorchange of 0.3%.
# "759/ 764/ 769/ 774 Max tot char devs" (0 to 65535): The total characteristicdeviation computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "badmeter" result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. Thedefault value of 400 detects a 10 % blade bent corresponding to an average K-factorchange of 0.3% or multiple bent blades, bent by a smaller magnitude.
# "760/ 765/ 770/ 775 Calibration sample": The current calibration sample status.This program code can be used to force acquisition of a new calibration sample. Thedefault value is "Not acquired", i.e. calibration sample not acquired. Select one ofthe following:
# "Not acquired". The calibration sample has not been acquired or is invalid.Calibration sample is requested if the number of blades is greater than 0.
# "Acquired". The calibration sample has been acquired and is valid.
Set this program code to “Not Acquired” to allow the MPMC to acquire or re-acquirecalibration sample.
# "656 Recipe 30, Comp 1 % (Max sample Instability)" The sample instability (%x 100) computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "bad meter"result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. During theinitial start-up this value should be 150 (i.e 1.5 %)
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 169
# "657 Recipe 30, Comp 2 % (Max frequency Instability)"The frequency instability(% x 100) computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "badmeter" result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented.During the initial start-up this value should be set to 250 (i.e 2.5 %)
# "658 Recipe 30, Comp 3 % (Monitoring frequency band)" The frequency band asa % of high flow rate at which a monitoring sample is acquired. A monitoringsample is not acquired if the meter frequency is above or below the monitoringfrequency band. During initial start up this value should be set to 00.10 (i.e 10 %).
# "Data code 219/220/221/222. Mtr Calib status". The current calibration samplestatus for meter 1
# 0 Calibration sample "Not acquired".# 1 Calibration sample "Acquired".
Configure this dynamic data code as item 5 so that the flow rate and the current statusfor the meter is visible.
# Calib fail alarm action". The calibration failure alarm action. The default value is"Primary". Select one of the following:
# "Off". The alarm is disabled.# "Info". When an alarm is reported...# "Secondary". When an alarm is reported...# "Primary". When an alarm is reported...
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 170 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Operation
Calibration sample acquisition
The DanLoad 6000 auto-detects the number of blades, if necessary, and acquires a calibrationsample, which characterizes the meter, when the flow rate reaches the highest configured flow rateduring an authorized load. The status of the calibration sample (“Acquired” or “Not acquired”) maybe viewed in the dynamic data display. In order to acquire a calibration sample perform thefollowing :
# Set the program code 757 "Number of blades" to the number of magnetic blades (orbuttons) on the meter if known or set it to 1 if unknown.
# Set program code 760 "Calibration sample" to "Not Acquired".
# Preset and start a load.
When the batch reaches its high flow section, the DanLoad tries to acquire a “Calibration sample”.The status of the calibration sample may be viewed in the dynamic data display. The status of thecalibration sample in the dynamic data display changes to “Acquired” when a calibration sample isacquired by the DanLoad 6000. The calibration sample may be viewed from the “Calmon status”screen on the DanLoad.
Monitoring sample acquisition
The DanLoad 6000 acquires monitoring samples on subsequent loads and determines the monitoringcharacteristic of the meter
CALMON analysis
A comparison of calibration characteristic and monitoring characteristic results in the monitoringsample being classified as "Good", "Bad" or "Unsure". The DanLoad 6000 reports calibration alarmsdepending on the sample classification and “Calmon error limit” and “Calmon reset count”.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 171
CALMON Status Screen
The calmon status screen contains information on the “Calibration sample”, the “Monitoring sample”and “Calmon analysis”. Following information may be obtained from a characteristic sample:
# Sample frequency: The frequency in Hz at which the characteristic sample wasacquired.
# Frequency instability: Flow rate in-stability during acquisition of a characteristicsample. This value indicates accelerating or decelerating flow, or pulsating flow.
# Mean blade deviation: A value indicating machine inaccuracies of blade spacing andinaccuracies in blade angles.
# Sample instability: A value indicating the condition of the bearing such as damagedor dry bearings.
# Total characteristic deviations: Calculated after acquiring a monitoring sample, it isthe sum of individual blade ratio deviations from the calibration sample.
# Maximum characteristic deviation: Calculated after acquiring a monitoring sample,it is the maximum of the blade ratio deviation from the calibration sample, among theindividual blade ratio deviations.
The characteristic deviations indicate conditions such as single or multiple bent blades orbroken blades.
# Good count: The number of good meter analyses. The number of good meteranalyses are zeroed for every "CALMON reset count" calibration monitoringanalyses.
# Bad count: The number of bad meter analyses. The number of bad meter analyses arezeroed for every "CALMON reset count" calibration monitoring analyses.
# Reset count: is the number of times “Calmon reset count” calibration monitoringanalysis was performed.
# Individual characteristic. The “Calmon status” screen also contains the characteristicof each individual blade samples. The number of samples contained in this screendepends on the number of blades on the meter.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 172 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
# Alarm bitmap. is a 16 bit MPMC alarm bitmap since the DanLoad was last reset.The alarm bitmap includes 4 types of “Calibration monitoring alarms”. TheDanLoad raises a “Calibration failure” alarm for any “Calibration monitoring” alarmreported by the CALMON process.
The following table describes the “Alarm bitmap” that is displayed on the DanLoad 6000“Alarm bitmap” field.
Alarm Flags
Bit # Description
0 Pulse security error meter 1
1 Pulse security error meter 2
2 Program memory checksum
3 RAM check
4 Stack overflow
5 Unexpected interrupt
6 Calibration failure meter 1.
7 Calibration failure meter 2.
8 I/O port error
9 Invalid command (command code or command length).
10 Calibration sample could not be acquired meter 1.
11 Calibration sample could not be acquired meter 2.
12 Monitoring sample could not be acquired meter 1.
13 Monitoring sample could not be acquired meter 2.
14 Calibration checksum invalid meter 1.
15 Calibration checksum invalid meter 2.
Bit 0 is the LSB and bit 15 is the MSB. Alarms corresponding to bits 6,7 and 10, 11, 12,13,14 and15 are raised by the CALMON process.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 173
# Description of Calibrating Monitoring Alarms
There are 4 types of alarms reported, per meter, by the CALMON process. These alarms are:
# "Calibration sample could not be acquired ": "CALMON reset count" attempts weremade to auto-detect the number of blades (if necessary) and acquire a calibrationsample. This condition usually occurs when a steady flow velocity is not maintainedduring calibration sample acquisition.
# "Monitoring sample could not be acquired": A single good meter analysis per"CALMON reset count" calibration monitoring analyses could not be made. Thiscondition is usually caused by either worn or dry bearings, unstable or pulsating flowor debris in the line.
# "Calibration failure": The number of times bad meter analyses per "CALMON resetcount" exceeded "CALMON error limit". This condition is usually caused by bentor broken turbine meter blades or worn bearings or dry bearings.
# "Calibration checksum invalid": Alarm is raised during monitoring indicating thatthe calibration characteristic stored in battery backed memory changed after thecalibration sample was "acquired". This condition may be caused by a failure of thenon-volatile RAM. This alarm may also be raised if MPMC tries to acquire amonitoring sample for a meter for which a calibration sample has not been"acquired".
Calibration monitoring for a meter is disabled following an alarm and may be enabled again by themaster.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 174 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
The following table is a list of calibration failure alarms reported by the MPMC and the probablecause for these alarms.
Calibration Failure Alarms Probable Causes
Calibration sample could not be acquired. Unstable or pulsating flow. Worn or drybearings.Blade count indeterminate.Debris in the liquid line.
Monitoring sample could not be acquired. Unstable or pulsating flow. Worn or drybearings.Debris in the liquid line.
Calibration failure. Bent or broken blade.Worn or dry bearing.
Calibration checksum invalid. Nonvolatile RAM failure.
MPMC tried to acquire a monitoring samplefor a meter for which a calibration samplehas not been acquired.
The following table is a list of common conditions that are responsible for meter calibration failuresand the Characteristic values that are affected by these conditions.
Conditions for Calibration Failures onLiquid Turbine Meters
Characteristic Values Affected
Bent or broken blades. Total characteristic deviations, Maximum characteristic deviation, Mean bladedeviation.
Machine inaccuracies of blades or bladeangles.
Mean blade deviation
Unstable flow Frequency instability.
Debris in liquid line, possibly trappedupstream.
Frequency instability, Sample instability.
Worn or dry bearings or pulsating flow. Sample instability.
_________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 175
3.16 Configuration Parameter Groups
The tables located in Appendix A are provided as a guide to the various program codes (parameters)that determine the configuration of the DanLoad 6000. These tables provide aid in determining ifall required program codes have been correctly configured. Refer to drawings BE-18204 DeviceLinkages - DanLoad 6000 and DE-18201 Program Code to Device Assignments - DanLoad 6000,located in Appendix E for help in understanding the parameter groups.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 176 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
This page intentionally left blank.
Section 4
Operation
Operator Interface
Batch Delivery
Additive Injection
Data Logging
Alarm Analysis
Diagnostics
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 1
This section contains information on operation of the DanLoad 6000 Preset during batch deliveryand multiple batch delivery transactions. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 is defined by programcodes. Program codes consist of a three-digit identification number, a name, and a value orselection. Program codes are configured during the setup procedure described in Section 3 - Setup.Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contains additional information on the function of allprogram codes.
The DanLoad 6000 is used to control and measure the delivery of liquid products to tanker vehicles.Single components or from two to four components can be blended and delivered. Delivery of asingle component, either sequentially or simultaneously with other components, is called a load.A batch consists of one or more component loads.
A batch is defined as the delivery of one single product or a blend consisting of two to fourcomponents, with or without additives. A single batch delivery may constitute a transaction, thatis no more batches will be delivered to this client at this time. A batch delivery begins when the user/ operator presets a quantity to be delivered and initiates the delivery. A batch delivery can besuspended and restarted at any time if the following two limitations are met. All the permissivecircuits are closed (no active permissive alarm condition) and the Remaining quantity is greater thanthe value set in program code 079 Minimum preset qty. The batch delivery is terminated when thelast pulse from the flow meter is detected and the batch delivery cannot be restarted due to one ofthe conditions mentioned above.
A transaction is defined as one or more batch deliveries that are grouped together for accountingpurposes. Transactions are logically the delivery of one or more batches to one client, which wouldbe the case in multiple batches delivered to multiple compartments in a tanker vehicle. TheDanLoad 6000 allows the operator to define the batch deliveries that comprise a transaction. Atransaction is terminated if any of the following conditions occur.
# Loss of power to the DanLoad 6000.
# An end transaction command is received from the terminal automation system.
# The STOP/PRINT key is pressed and a delivery operation is not in progress. If a batchdelivery is temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key, and it is desired tocontinue the batch delivery, the ENTER and START key press sequence will restart thebatch delivery. If while the batch delivery is suspended, the STOP/PRINT key is pressed,the transaction is terminated and either the Recipe Selection Display, the Additive SelectionDisplay, or the Loading Display is presented to the user / operator, depending on the systemconfiguration.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 2 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
A new batch delivery which will be part of a new transaction must be defined before a product orblend of products can be delivered. The batch delivery procedure is described in Section 4.2. Batchdelivery control parameters are preset by the user / operator. The method of delivering andcalculating the quantity the batch delivery are dependent on the preset configuration of the DanLoad6000. The steps listed below indicate the sequence for initiating a batch delivery. Some or all of thesteps are bypassed if the feature is not implemented.
1 A recipe selection: Performed automatically if only one recipe is defined or performedmanually if two or more recipes are defined. The recipe defines the single product or multi-component blending characteristics of the batch delivery. (Section 6 - Program Codes 480to 661).
2 An additive selection: Required if additive injection selection method program code 136Selection method is set to Prompt and the additive is selected program code 143 / 148 / 153/ 158 / 163 / 168 Available.
3 Entry of one to five data items: Each data item can be from zero to eight numeric digits,data items are used by terminal automation systems for batch / transaction accountingpurposes (Section 6 - Program Codes 030 to 037).
All of the batch delivery parameters must be preset before a batch delivery can begin. A transactionmust share all of these parameters for all associated batch deliveries. Therefore, a transaction isrestricted to one or more batch deliveries of a single product or a single blend of components whichhave preselected additive injection parameters. A transaction cannot include multiple recipes, orvarious additive injection combinations.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 3
4.1 Physical Configuration
The display panel, status indicators, and keypad that are mounted in the operator control panelprovide operator interface with the instrument.
Desired functions are controlled via command entries at the keypad in response to displayed data andprompt messages.
4.1.1 Displays and Controls
A LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel and three (red, green, yellow) LED (Light EmittingDiode) status indicators are provided.
4.1.1.1 LED Status Indicators
The three LED status indicators are visible through the vertical window located to the right of theLCD display panel. During normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 in the Manual mode (notconnected to a terminal automation system) the yellow indicator is OFF (manual operating mode).The green indicator is ON if power is applied to TB2 terminal 1 on the power supply board. Thispower usually comes from the permissive power circuit and is not present unless the safety circuitsare enabled. The yellow and red LED’s are pulsed on/off for one second on power-up/reset of theDanLoad 6000.
The indicators provide the following status information.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 4 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
LED Status Function
AUTO/MANUAL(yellow) OFF The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Manual mode (program code 025
Operating mode). (Note: Local operation is identical in either of these twomodes.)
ON The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Auto mode (linked to a host computerand operating as a slave unit) (program code 025 Operating mode).
FLASHING# (Two short pulses every two seconds) Case internal temperature is
too high or the keypad/display is disconnected or power is removedfrom the keypad/display.
# (One short pulse every two seconds) The condition that cased thealarm has returned to normal state. The DanLoad 6000 should bepowered-up or reset to continue using the keypad/display.
# (Rapid flashing) Power failure or low power condition.
PERMISSIVE POWER(green) ON The permissive power circuit is closed (normal state when a batch delivery
is in progress). The function of the green LED indicator is dependent on thestate of the permissive circuit, located on the power supply module, and isnot programmable.
OFF The permissive power circuit is open. This indicates an abnormal state whichis due to permissive power failure or failure of one or more permissivecircuits wired in series (wired AND) with the permissive power source (thefunction of the green LED indicator is dependent on the state of thepermissive circuit and is not programmable).
ALARM STATUS(red) ON A primary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on alarm action).
OFF All alarms are inactive (normal state).
FLASHING A secondary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information onalarm action).
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 5
4.1.1.2 LCD Alpha-numeric / Graphic Data Display
The LCD data display has a back-lighting feature for ease of reading in low ambient light conditions.The intensity of the back-lighting is controlled by the intensity level of ambient light (programcodes 355 to 360).
Data is displayed in up to three basic formats during normal batch delivery setup and deliveryoperations. These three display formats are:
# Recipe Selection Display
This display is presented to the user / operator if more than one recipe has been defined. Ifonly one recipe has been defined, that recipe is selected automatically and the RecipeSelection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on recipe selection and anexample of this display are provided below in this section.
# Additive Selection Display
This display is presented to the user / operator if one or more additives have been defined andthe additive prompt option, program code 136 Selection method set to Prompt. In the casewhere additives have been defined and made available, program code 143 / 148 / 153 / 158/ 163 / 168 Available set to Yes, injection of all additives is always turned off and eachadditive must be manually enabled via operator interaction. If no additives have beendefined, the Additive Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information onadditive injection selection and enabling and an example of this display are provided belowin this section.
# Loading Display
This display is always presented to the user / operator to provide data feedback duringdefinition of a batch delivery operation and during delivery of the batch or group of batches(transaction). Information on batch loading and an example of this display are providedbelow in this section.
# Dynamic Data Display
This display can be manually selected when the loading display is active. This data isparticularly useful during batch loading and meter proving.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 6 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.1.1.3 Keypad
The numeric / function keypad provides the method for the user / operator to select recipes andadditives, enter the desired preset quantity, and control batch deliveries. Some key functions areonly applicable to setup of the DanLoad 6000 while in the Program Mode. These special functionsare not used in normal batch delivery operations and therefore are not covered in this section. Thekeypad layout is indicated in Figure 4 - 1.
Keypad Layout
Figure 4 - 1
NoteThe Weights and Measures switch is the lockable and sealable pushbutton switch located inthe upper left corner of the keypad.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 7
Key Function
0 thru 9 numeric digits for data entry
ENTER accept the manually entered value and continue
CLEAR reject the manually entered value and continue
SELECT toggle the Off / On option for each definedadditive
9 scroll down, move the select box to the next itemin the Recipes Selection Display or the AdditiveSelection Display
8 scroll up, move the select box to the previousitem in the Recipes Selection Display or theAdditive Selection Display
START initiate the batch loading operation after batchsetup data has been entered
STOP/PRINT stop the batch loading operation and print batchand / or transaction report, if enabled
program access to the Program Mode for modification ofnon-restricted program codes and system data
W&M the Weights and Measures security switch
Key Functions (Batch Delivery)Figure 4 - 2
Key functions applicable to batch delivery operations are listed in Figure 4 - 2. The description ofthe batch delivery procedure in Section 4.2 contains in-context information of the function of thevarious keys. The program key and the Weights and Measures switch are not used during normalbatch deliveries. However, the user / operator should be familiar with the functions of the programkey and Weights and Measures switch.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 8 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
# Program key
The program key is used, while operating in the Loading Mode and no batch delivery is inprogress, to access the Program Mode. This action is accomplished by pressing the ALTkey and while maintaining the ALT key depressed, simultaneously press the ENTER /program key. The Enter passcode _________ prompt is displayed on the message line atthis time. The response is for the user / operator to enter their predefined passcode (one tonine digits). If a passcode is not entered within thirty seconds or if an invalid passcode isentered, the message Invalid passcode is displayed on the message line. Press the CLEARkey to re-display the normal loading prompt, Enter preset quantity. Section 3 - Setup andSection 6 - Program Code Definitions contain information on operation of the ProgramMode.
# Weights and Measures security switch
Several parameters, accessible as program codes in the Program Mode, have direct effecton the validity and accuracy of the batch quantity calculations. These parameters werespecified during the setup procedure to have Weights and Measures attributes. Parameterswith the Weights and Measures attributes set have three levels of protection to restrictmodification of their values or options settings. A valid user passcode must be entered, theuser must have supervisor privilege, and the Weights and Measures switch must be open(in the extended position). If the drift pin through the spring loaded switch actuator isvisible, the switch is open. During normal operation, this switch should be closed and wiresealed in the closed position.
Additional information on the Program Mode and the function of the Weights and Measures switchis located in Section 3 - Setup and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 9
4.2 Batch Delivery Procedure
This sub-section contains a description of normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 during batch dataentry, batch delivery, and termination of a batch delivery. The description covers operation of theDanLoad 6000 in either the Stand-alone mode or the Manual mode. Operation in both of thesemodes is identical from the user / operator viewpoint. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 as a slavedevice to a terminal automation system is installation dependent and is covered in the DanLoad 6000Communications Specification, Part Number 9-6000-674.
It is assumed at this point that the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle state, that is no batch delivery is inprogress and no transaction is open. If two or more recipes have been setup, the Recipe SelectionDisplay is displayed at the start of the transaction. If only one recipe has been setup, the singlerecipe is assumed to the active recipe and the Recipe Selection Display is not shown. When a recipeis selected, the availability of each recipe component is checked. The 068 / 071 / 074 / 077Available parameter for all recipe components, located in the Component parameters group, mustbe set to Yes. In the case of sequential blending, the sum of the selected component percentagesspecified by program code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load parameter of the recipe, must be 100.In the case of in-line blending, the sum of the percentages of all four components in the recipe mustbe 100. An example of the Recipe Selection Display is provided below.
Recipes mm/dd/yy hh:mm Regular Gasoline Premium Gasoline Diesel Kerosene
Recipe Selection Display (Typical)Figure 4 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 10 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
To select the product (recipe) for delivery from the Recipe Selection Display by using the 9 or 8key to position the select box over the desired product (recipe), then press the ENTER key.
If one or more additives have been setup and program code 136 Selection method is set to Prompt,the Additive Selection Display is presented to the user / operator for selective enabling of eachadditive. The transaction is authorized after the recipe and additive(s) are selected. However, thetransaction does not start until the START key is pressed to initiate the first batch.
While operating in the Automatic mode, additive injection is controlled by the terminal automationsystem. While operating in the Stand-alone mode or the Manual mode, additive injection isdependent on the option selected for program code 136 Selection method and related factorsdescribed below.
# 136 Selection method = External (default selection) All configured additives are injectedif an external enable contact closure is closed.
# 136 Selection method = Prompt The Additive Selection Display is presented to the operatorfor manual selection of each additive before the start of each transaction. (Note: In AUTOmode, at least one of the additive delivery enable program codes 143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163/ 168 Available, must be set to yes to enable presentation of the Additive Selection Display.)
# 136 Selection method = Inputs Any configured additive is injected if the correspondingexternal enable contact closure (program code 382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394 / 397 Selectioninput) for that particular additive is closed.
# 136 Selection method = Recipe Additive 1 to 6 is selected automatically for thecorresponding recipe 1 to 6. The additive n's ratio output (if configured) is cycled when thecorresponding recipe number is being delivered.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 11
The selected recipe is indicated in the top line of the Additive Selection Display. An example of theAdditive Selection Display is illustrated below.
Premium Gasoline mm/dd/yy hh:mm Additive #1 Off Additive #2 Off Additive #3 Off
Use arrow keys and SELECT
Additive Selection DisplayFigure 4 - 4
To select the additive from the Additive Selection Display use the 9 or 8 keys to position the selectbox over the desired additive, then press the SELECT key to toggle the option from Off to On (orfrom On to Off if an entry error is made). Press the ENTER key after all desired (zero to six)additives have been enabled for injection into the delivered stream.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 12 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
The Loading Display is presented to the user / operator at this time. The Loading Display allowsthe user / operator to enter the preset quantity to be delivered and to monitor the delivery of the batchand transaction. An illustration of the Loading Display is provided below.
Premium Gasoline mm/dd/yy hh:mm 0%
Loaded 0 +)))),
* * * * Preset 0 Gal * * Remaining 0 Gal * * Transaction total 0 Gal .))))-
Enter preset volume
Loading DisplayFigure 4 - 5
The Loading Display, Figure 4 - 5, illustrates several alpha-numeric and numeric fields related tobatch deliveries and a graphic representation of the batch delivery receiving tank. The fieldscontained in the Loading Display are described below.
# Recipe name (Premium Gasoline) field contains the name of the current recipe manuallyselected by the operator or automatically selected if only one recipe is defined. In theexample, this field indicates Premium Gasoline which was defined as the recipe name inprogram code 481 / ... / 655 Recipe name parameter located in the Recipes parameters groupand selected with the Recipe Selection Display.
# Date and time (mm/dd/yy hh:mm) fields contain the current date and time. The format ofthe date is specified by program code 038 Date format and program code 039 Dateseparator program codes. The time is always indicated in the format hh:mm in the range of00:00 to 23:59. The date and time entries are adjusted via the Program Mode Menu > Setdate and time selection. See Section 3 - Setup for date and time modification instructions.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 13
# Loaded field contains the batch quantity of the delivered product. The value in this field isincremented in quantity units until either the preset quantity is reached or the delivery issuspended or terminated.
# Preset field contains the batch quantity to deliver which is manually entered by the user /operator in response to the Enter preset quantity prompt shown on the message line of thedisplay panel.
# Remaining field contains the batch quantity that has not yet been delivered during a batchdelivery. (Preset quantity minus loaded quantity equals remaining quantity)
# Transaction total field contains the total accumulated quantity for the delivery transaction.A delivery transaction can consist of one batch delivery or multiple batch deliveries.
# Product units mnemonic (Gal) field contains the engineering units label used in the displaypanel and in reports. The mnemonic is entered by program code 218 Product unitsmnemonic. Although the default entry is “Gal”, any six-character label may be entered. Notethat this selection is a display label only and does not affect the quantity unit scaling of theflow calculations. See Section 6 - Program Code Definitions for additional information.
# Bar graph percentage display is the rectangle displayed on the right side of the display panel.This display is a bar graph representation of the quantity percentage loaded to the receivingtank. As the Loaded quantity is incremented and the Remaining quantity is decremented,the bar graph percentage is proportionately shaded in black. The black shading representsthe Loaded quantity and the unshaded portion represents the Remaining quantity. Thenumber located at the top of the tank indicates the percentage of the Preset quantity that hasbeen Loaded. The normal range of this number is 0% to 100%. However, percentagesgreater than 100 percent are indicated for a delivery quantity in excess of 100 percent of thepreset quantity.
# Message line is the bottom line of the display panel and is used to display various statusmessages to the user / operator. The content and meaning of the messages are explainedbelow in the Controlling the Batch Delivery section.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 14 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
# Component # n/n (not shown) is displayed below the Loaded field only if more thanone component has been defined for delivery (sequential blending). This field contains thefollowing information.
# Component # Component identification, as shown or the alpha-numericComponent ID assigned in the Component parameters group,program codes 065 to 077.
# n/n The sequence number of the component / total number ofcomponents in the recipe, obtained from program code 486/ ... / 660 Sequence to load and recipe definition located in theRecipes group, program codes 480 to 661.
4.2.1 Controlling the Batch Delivery
If a data item prompt or prompts were defined during the setup procedure the prompts will bedisplayed during batch delivery setup. Data item prompts accept user / operator numeric entries ofup to five eight-digit numeric values that are saved in transaction storage memory or printed in datalog in manual or stand-alone modes. In auto mode, data items are communicated to a terminalautomation system for transaction accounting purposes. Data item entries are not used internally bythe DanLoad 6000. Data item prompts are messages that are presented on the message line of thedisplay panel when the Loading Display is first shown. These prompt messages are defined duringsetup with program codes 030 to 036.
The general format of a data prompt message is:
Enter data item #1 ________
However, note that the message shown above is a default entry which can be changed to ameaningful prompt message during setup. Actual messages that could be displayed are: Enter ordernumber:, Enter driver number:, Enter trailer number:, etc. The response is to enter the desirednumber, from one to eight digits and then press the ENTER key. If program code 036 Prompttime-out (s) has been defined, and no entry is made within the time-out time period, the RecipeSelection Display will be redisplayed to allow restarting the batch delivery setup procedure. If anerror is made during the numeric entry, press the CLEAR key and reenter the number. If an invalidnumber is entered and accepted, press the STOP/PRINT key to terminate and re-start thetransaction. If an entry is not required, press the ENTER key to continue. After all one to five dataitems have either been entered or bypassed, the Loading Display as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with theEnter preset quantity prompt is presented to the user / operator.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 15
If data item entries have not been defined in the setup procedure, the Loading Display is presentedas shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the Enter preset quantity prompt displayed.
The quantity to deliver is entered with the numeric keypad. If an entry error is made, press theCLEAR key to reset the entry and start again. If the entry is correct, press the ENTER key toaccept the entry and continue. If the selected recipe component percentages and componentsspecified by program code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load program code do not equal 100 percent,the message Invalid recipe (percentages) is displayed on the message line at this time. This setuperror condition can be corrected by selecting the Program Mode > Setup Menu > Recipes programcodes and revising either the percentages of the individual components specified by the loadingsequence and / or the loading sequence program code. If the entered value is less than the value ofprogram code 079 Minimum preset qty, the message Invalid entry - less than minimum is displayedon the message line of the display panel. Press the CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again.If the entered value is greater that the value of program code 078 Maximum preset qty, the messageInvalid entry - more than maximum is displayed on the message line of the display panel. Press theCLEAR key to reset the entry and start again.
If the manual entry passes the high and low preset quantity validation checks, the Preset andRemaining field values are set to the entered value, the Delivered value is set to zero, and themessage Press START when ready or STOP to cancel is displayed on the message line of the displaypanel. If the STOP/PRINT key is pressed at this time, the batch delivery that is setup is aborted.The message Please wait is displayed on the message line of the display panel and then the RecipeSelection Display is re-displayed to allow reentry of a new batch delivery definition. Any opentransaction is also terminated by this action.
The green LED ON indicates that the environment is safe for the loading operation. If all permissivecircuits are not in the safe state, the corresponding alarm message (Connect safety circuit, etc.) isdisplayed.
The following message sequence is displayed on the message line of the display panel during anormal batch delivery operation.
# Open block valve - press ENTER
This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)(manual sequential blender).
# Opening block valve
The block valve for the component is being opened.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 16 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
# Line pack delay
The pump for the component is running and the loading line is being packed.
# Ramping up to high flow rate
The flow control valve or valves are opening in stages to increase the flow rate to themaximum predefined flow rate.
# Load in progress
The batch delivery is in progress in a normal manner.
# Ramping down to low flow rate
The flow control valve or valves are closing in stages to decrease the flow rate to thepredefined low flow rate.
# Shutting valve
All open flow control valves are closed. Block valves are closed if the unit is not a manualsequential blender.
# Close block valve - press ENTER
This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)(manual sequential blender).
The following tasks are performed during the batch delivery operation.
# The display panel shows the preset quantity, the delivered quantity (incrementing), thetransaction quantity (incrementing), and the remaining quantity (decrementing). Theseaccumulators indicate either gross or standard quantities dependent on the setup parameters.
# Up to four delivery flow rates can be defined for each flow meter / flow control valvecombination. The DanLoad 6000 always attempts to deliver the product at the maximumdefined flow rate except during low flow startup and shutdown times. The rate of flow iscontrolled automatically without interaction with the user / operator. If the highest definedflow rate cannot be maintained for some reason, the DanLoad 6000 will set the flow rate atthe next highest maintainable flow rate, which is selected in the setup, and periodicallyattempt to increase the flow rate to the maximum defined flow rate.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 17
# Up to six additives can be injected into the delivered batch. The ratio of the quantity of eachadditive to the delivered batch quantity is automatically controlled.
# All permissive inputs are monitored continuously for abnormal conditions. An openpermissive circuit will cause the green LED indicator to turn OFF, indicating no permissivepower, cause an alarm message to appear on the message line of the display panel and maysuspend the batch delivery, depending on the defined control parameters.
# All process variables are monitored continuously and compared to limit setpoints. Abnormalprocess conditions will cause an alarm and the corresponding message to appear on themessage line of the display panel and may suspend the batch delivery, depending on thedefined control parameters.
# Real-time process input data and calculated process data, such as real-time flow rates,average temperatures, etc., can be monitored by the Dynamic Data Display window whichis displayed in the center area of the Loading Display. The SELECT key is pressed toactivate the Dynamic Data Display window. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to changedisplay pages (one to four display pages, with four data items in each display page - for atotal of up to sixteen different items, can be predefined). The CLEAR key removes theDynamic Data Display window and re-displays the standard Loading Display.
# The batch delivery can be temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key. Thebatch delivery can be restarted if the quantity remaining to deliver is greater than theminimum preset quantity and all permissive circuits are closed, indicating that the systemis safe and ready for batch delivery.
# If a power failure occurs during a batch delivery operation, the DanLoad 6000 saves the dateand time of the power failure in non-volatile memory and indicates this in a message on thefirst display presented when power is restored to the instrument.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 18 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
# The DanLoad 6000 ramps down to the low flow rate (or stop rate for an in-line blendingapplication) at a configurable quantity from the end of a batch. The valves are finallycommanded to close (fully), i.e. the “final trip point” is reached, based on the average valueof the five most recently taken “valve closure pulse samples” for the component/valvecombination. A valve closure pulse sample is the number of pulses between commandingthe valve to close (deenergizing the valve solenoids) and the flow rate dropping to zero (zeroflow rate being defined as 2.5 seconds without a single pulse being recorded). If the batchterminates normally, i.e. flow is stable at the low flow rate at the final trip point and there isno alarm (such as “unable to close valve”), a new valve closure pulse sample is taken and anew average is computed to be used for the next batch. NOTE: If the low flow stop quantityis too small it may not be possible for the flow rate to stabilize at the low flow rate, i.e.within the deadband, prior to reaching the final trip point, in which case the flow controlvalve closure sample for that batch will not be used. NOTE 2: The valve closure pulsesamples are stored in non-volatile (battery-backed) memory. NOTE 3: The valve closurenumber of pulses depends on line pressure (particularly for hydraulically operated flowcontrol valves, which close more slowly when line pressure is low) and the repeatability ofthe low flow rate (particularly with two-stage flow control valves).
# When the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle / ready state, the Loading Display is presented to theuser / operator with the prompt Enter preset quantity. The previously delivered quantity isindicated in the Loaded field and the Remaining field indicates 0. The Loading Displayremains in this state until the user / operator initiates a new batch delivery (part of the opentransaction) by entering the quantity to be delivered. Or the open transaction is closed bypressing the STOP/PRINT key without a batch delivery in progress.
Each delivered batch quantity total will be combined in the transaction delivered total untilthe STOP/PRINT key is pressed when a delivery is not in progress.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 19
4.3 Additive Injection
Additives can be automatically injected into the delivered product or component blend. The additivevolume in relation to the delivered product volume is usually very small, typically less than fourpercent of the delivered quantity. The basic features of the additive injection operations are listedbelow.
# Directly control the injection of one to six additives (or no additive). Additive injection isquantity based and determined by the configured ratio, program code 140 / 145 / 150 / 155/ 160 / 165 Ratio qty, of the preset batch quantity and the quantity of additive injected,which is controlled by program code 139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Additive controlmeters. The quantity of additive to inject is reset at the start of each batch delivery operation.Therefore, additive injection is based on batch quantity and not transaction quantity.However, the same additive or additives selection applies to all batches that are part of atransaction.
# Allow one additive to be selected automatically based on the selected recipe number 1 to 6.Delivery of recipe 1 to 6 activates injection of the corresponding additive, 1 to 6. Differentinjection methods (additive injector types) for each logical additive are also permitted.
# Allow additives to be selected from the terminal automation system and / or a discreteselection input for each additive and manual selection with the keypad while viewing theAdditive Selection Display.
# Provide multiple injection rates (concentrations) per additive via the “Multi Rate” additiveselection method.
# (Option) Accumulate and / or verify the quantity totals with data logging of the injectedadditives.
# (Option) Deliver a clean line quantity, without additive injection, at the end of each loadingoperation. Additive injection ratio is maintained correctly with or without clean line loadingimplemented.
# (Option) Inhibit additive injection for part of a batch load.
# The DanLoad 6000 can be configured to provide either an AC or DC control output to self-controlled or automatic additive injection systems that require a one-to-one drive signal. Inaddition, either an AC or DC status input (default Safety circuit #4) can detect an alarmcondition from the additive injector.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 20 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.4 Data Logging
This sub-section contains information on the data logging and reporting capabilities of a DanLoad6000 equipped with an optional DUART board. The data logging feature allows the DanLoad 6000to generate an audit trail for documentation of operation of the loading system. The functionprovides a cost effective manual backup documentation system for use if the terminal automationsystem fails.
The program codes listed below, with the exception of program codes 709 and 710, are used toenable or disable automatic logging of the corresponding data. Program code 709 is used to enableor disable printing of data log sequence numbers on each data log. The sequence numbers are printersequential. If multiple printers are attached to the DanLoad 6000, sequence numbering for eachprinter is independent.
Program Code Log Function
696 Batch summary697 Transaction summary698 Alarm log699 Power fail log700 program mode entry/exit701 W&M switch opened/closed702 Program value change log703 Configuration summary704 Crash memory summary705 Totalizers706 Transaction ticket707 Transaction ticket reprint708 Thruput709 Sequence numbers710 Cutoff hour
Code operated switch attributes are found in Section 6.21.
Data logging usually involves sending the enabled reports / data to a common 80-column dot matrixprinter. However, data logs can be sent to a personal computer or any other data logging device thatcan handle serial input ASCII data with a CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) at the end of eachline of data.
Data is sent from the DanLoad 6000 to the printer or logging device as each event occurs. Thismethod of operation is called event logging. Logs are not stored in the DanLoad 6000. However,if the DanLoad 6000 detects that the printer or logging device is off-line, logs are held in memoryuntil either the printer / logging device becomes on-line, then the stored logs are printed or the logmemory is full. The action taken if the data logging memory becomes full is specified by programcode 235 Data logging alarm action.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 21
Several DanLoad 6000's can share one data printer or logging device. Printer sharing requires aspecial device that accepts the serial data link from each DanLoad 6000 and provides one serial datalink to the printer.
The text language of the data logs is specified by program code 028 Language.
4.4.1 Example Data Logs
An example of each type of data log associated with normal batch deliveries and transactions isprovided below. The Crash memory summary log is described in Section 4.5 - Fault Analysis /Correction. A brief description of the contents of each field follows the data log example.
Batch Summary
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 812345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
9999 <- Data log sequence number (program code 709)Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 -- Batch SummaryTransaction 9999 Side 9 Recipe #1 IDXXXX <-- transaction dataEnter data item #1 99999999ENTER ORDER NUMBER 99999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 99999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 99999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 99999999
Batch 9999 Preset 999999 Gross 999999 Std 999999 <-- batch dataStarted XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 Stopped XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 Gross Std Temp Dens Pres Gal Gal Deg C lb/ft3 psi <-- from PC's 029, 427, 428, 429Component #1 IDX 999999 999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99 <-- Component dataComponent #2 IDX 999999 999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99Component #3 IDX 999999 999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99Component #4 IDX 999999 999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99
XXX <- Additive units per program code 44.Additive #1 9999999.99Additive #2 9999999.99Additive #3 9999999.99Additive #4 9999999.99Additive #5 9999999.99Additive #6 9999999.99 <- Scale depends on additive units (program code 44).
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 22 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
A batch summary is generated automatically at the end of each batch delivery or when power isrestored after a power outage occurred during a batch delivery. The fields contained in the BatchSummary are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optionalDUART board.
# Transaction A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of eachtransaction.
# Side The loading island side where the delivery was made.
# Recipe ## The name of the recipe that controlled the delivery.
# <Enter data item #1>Up the five data prompts and corresponding manually entered numeric data.The number of lines printed is dependent on the number of data promptsdefined by program code 030 Number of data item prompts. Data itemprompts are re-defined by the alpha-numeric entries for parameters 031 to035 (03x Enter data item #x). The corresponding values, printed to the rightof the prompt messages, are the manual entries from the start of the batchdelivery.
# Batch A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of eachbatch delivery, this row (record) also contains the gross quantity deliveredand the standard quantity delivered (sum of all components).
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 23
# Preset The preset quantity obtained from the batch data entry.
# Gross The accumulated gross quantity for the composite batch delivery.
# Std The accumulated standard quantity for the composite batch delivery.
# Started Date and time the delivery started.
# Stopped Date and time the delivery stopped.
# Component #One row (record) for each delivered component, with the following dataindicated:
# Gross quantity delivered of this component, the engineering unitslabel is obtained from program code 029 Product Units.
# Standard quantity delivered of this component, the engineering unitslabel is obtained from program code 029 Product Units.
# Average temperature of this component (negative values areindicated), the engineering units label is obtained from program code427 Temperature units.
# Average density of this component, the engineering units label isobtained from program code 428 Density units.
# Average pressure of this component, the engineering units label isobtained from program code 429 Pressure units.
# Additive # The units and format in which additive volumes are display and printed.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 24 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Transaction Summary
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Transaction SummaryTransaction nnnn Side n Recipe ## aaaaaa Gross nnnnnn Std nnnnnnStarted mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Stopped mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ssEnter data item #1 nnnnnnnnEnter data item #2 nnnnnnnnEnter data item #3 nnnnnnnnEnter data item #4 nnnnnnnnEnter data item #5 nnnnnnnn
Start End Start End gross gross std stdMeter 1 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnMeter 2 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnMeter 3 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnMeter 4 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn
A transaction summary is generated automatically at the end of each transaction consisting of oneor multiple batch deliveries or when power is restored after a power outage occurred while atransaction is in progress. The fields contained in the Transaction Summary are described below.
# Start gross / End gross
Start std / End stdThe gross and standard quantitys are indicated for each active flow meter(Meter m totalizer).
Alarm
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Alarm aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
An alarm log is generated automatically when an alarm condition is detected for alarms which havethe alarm action attribute set to Primary or Secondary. The fields contained in the Alarm log aredescribed below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings o the optionalDUART board.
# <time> Date and time that the alarm condition was detected.
# <message> Alarm message, messages are indicated in Section 4.5.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 25
Power Failure Date and Time
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Power failed mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
A power failure log is generated automatically when power is restored to the DanLoad 6000. Thefields contained in the Power failure log are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optionalDUART board.
# <time> The current date and time and the date and time that power was removedfrom the DanLoad 6000.
Program Mode Entry and Exit
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa entered program modeUnit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa exited program mode
A program mode entry / exit log is generated automatically whenever the program mode is enteredor exited. The fields contained in the program mode entry/exit log are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optionalDUART board.
# <time> Date and time of the event.
# User The user / operator name obtained from program code 002 / ... / 023 User IDparameter entry.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 26 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Weights and Measures Switch
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch openedUnit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch closed
A weights and measures switch log is generated automatically whenever the state of the weights andmeasures switch, located on the operator control panel, is changed. The fields contained in theWeights and measures switch log are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optionalDUART board.
# <time> Date and time of the event.
# <message> The message Weights and measures switch opened orWeights and measures switch closed.
Program Code Value Changed
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Program Code Value ChangedUser aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Value 480 Number of recipes 5
A program code value changed log is generated automatically whenever a program code value ischanged for a program code which has the Data logging attribute set to Yes. (Note: This attributedefaults to Yes for all program codes during initial startup (cold start). The fields contained in theprogram code value changed log are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optionalDUART board.
# <time> Date and time of the event.
# User The user / operator name obtained from program code 002 / ... / 023 User IDparameter entry.
# Value The program code number and name followed by the current program codevalue.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 27
Totalizers
The totalizers data log is generated automatically every 24 hours per the "cutoff hour"(program code 710) or on demand (for the last cutoff) from the program mode menu. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678909999 <- Data log sequence number.Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99-- Totalizers XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 <- Langauge dependent text and cutoff date and time. Gross Std <- Language dependent text. XXX XXX <- Configured units mnemonic.XXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Configured meter ID and gross and std totalizers.XXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # meters (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Configured component ID and gross and std totalizers.XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # components (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Configured recipe ID and gross and std totalizers.XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # recipes (max. 30). XXX <- Configured additive units mnemonic.Additive #1 99999.9999 <- Language-dependent text and totalizer (format depends on additive units).Additive #2 99999.9999Additive #3 99999.9999Additive #4 99999.9999Additive #5 99999.9999Additive #6 99999.9999 <- Depending on configured # additives (max. 6).
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 28 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Thruput
The thruput data log is generated automatically every 24 hours per the "cutoff hour"(program code 710) or on demand (for the last cutoff) from the program mode menu. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678909999 <- Data log sequence number.Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99-- Thruput XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 - XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 <- Language dependent text and start and end dates and times. Gross Std <- Language dependent text. XXX XXX <- Configured units mnemonic.XXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Configured meter ID and gross and std totalizers.XXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # meters (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Configured component ID and gross and std totalizers.XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # components (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Configured recipe ID and gross and std totalizers.XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # recipes (max. 30). XXX <- Configured additive units mnemonic.Additive #1 99999.9999 <- Language-dependent text and totalizer (format depends on additive units).Additive #2 99999.9999Additive #3 99999.9999Additive #4 99999.9999Additive #5 99999.9999Additive #6 99999.9999 <- Depending on configured # additives (max. 6).12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 29
Configuration Summary
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 812345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
9999 <- Data log sequence number (program code 709)Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99**************************************** Security parameters User 1001 Passcode *********002 User ID DanLoad 6000003 Supervisor privilege Yes User 2004 Passcode *********005 User ID006 Supervisor privilege No...024 Supervisor privilege No
9999 <- Data log sequence number (program code 709)Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99**************************************** Unit parameters Unit parameters025 Operating mode Manual026 Unit type Seq. (auto)027 Valve type Std digital...etc.etc.etc.
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 30 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5 Alarm Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests
This sub-section contains information on the analysis and correction of common fault conditions thatcan occur during batch delivery operations.
# Alarm messages and causes of the alarm messages are described in Section 4.5.1. Additionalinformation on alarm parameters and other parameters in located in Section 6 - ProgramCode Definitions.
# Diagnostic tests, available in the Program Mode, are described in Section 4.5.2.
# A Crash memory log is automatically generated, if enabled, if a processor memory erroris detected. Section 4.5.3 contains information on this error log.
Crash memory logs should be saved and the log occurrence reported to:
Daniel Measurement and ControlDaniel Measurement ServicesTelephone: (281) 897-2900FAX: (281) 897-2901After-hours emergency answering service: Electronics: (713) 468-4096
Automation: (713) 464-5715
General information on all alarm conditions and messages is provided on the following pages.Additional information on alarms is provided in the Alarms group, program codes 220 to 279, andthe I/O Parameters group, program codes 280 to 379, in Section 6.
NotePrimary alarms are reset by logging-on with your passcode to activate the Program Mode. Then use the 9 (down arrow) (depending on the firmware version) to select Alarm reset. Press the Enter key to clear individual alarms. After alarms have been cleared, press EXIT(ALT+CLEAR) to return to the Loading Mode.
Secondary alarms are reset automatically after the time period set by program code 220Secondary alarm reset (secs) has elapsed.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 31
4.5.1 Alarm Messages
Flow rate too low meter # Default Range
221 Low flow alarm action Primary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
222 Minimum flow rate 100 0 to 99999
223 Low flow time (secs) 10 5 to 999
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3,4).
# The flow rate units for program code 222 Minimum flow rate aredetermined by the corresponding program code 171 / 182 / 193 /204 Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM, dLPM,BPH, LBH, KGH).
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the component pumpingcircuit, flow control valve circuit, flow meter preamplifier, orflow meter sensor.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 32 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Flow rate too high meter # Default Range
224 High flow alarm action Primary OffInfoPrimary
225 Maximum flow rate 660 0 to 99999
226 High flow time (secs) 10 5 to 999
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3,4).
# The flow rate units for program code 225 Maximum flow rate aredetermined by the corresponding program code 171 / 182 / 193 /204 Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM, dLPM,BPH).
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the component pumpingcircuit, flow control valve circuit, or flow meter circuit.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 33
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Unable to close valve meter # Default Range
--- Overrun limit alarm action Primary <none>
227 Overrun limit qty 2.0 0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# The alarm action is internally set to Primary.
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit. program code 086 / 092 /098 / 104 Low flow stop qty too small, unstableflow rate during low flow stop, K-factor to small (insufficient pulse rateinput for frequency calculation), flow control valve jammed OPEN bydebris or mechanical failure.
# After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need todeliver a minimum of three batches in order to determine the valveclosure time.
Valve closed early meter # Default Range
228 Underflow alarm action Off OffPrimary
229 Underflow limit qty 5.0 0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 34 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Timed-out - no flow detected meter # Default Range
230 No flow time-out alarm action Primary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
231 No flow time-out (secs) 5 1 to 99
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow meter circuit (badpreamplifier or pulse input wiring), pump circuit, the component blockvalve circuit, or the flow control valve circuit, failure of meter pulse boardor main processor board.
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter # Default Range
--- Unauthorized flow limit alarm action Primary <none>
232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 10 0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# The alarm action is internally set to Primary.
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the block valve or flow control valve circuit, such as a mechanical failure (bad O-rings, etc.) of the valve or pulsation of theproduct caused by multiple arms, valves, pumps in the same circuit in use at the sametime. The alarm is also triggered if either the normally closed or normally open stemswitches (stem switches 1 and 2, respectively) or both, are configured (program codes294 and 295 for valve 1, etc.).
# After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need to deliver a minimumof three batches in order to determine the valve closure time.
# See Section 3 and Section 6 for additional information.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 35
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Pulse security error meter # Default Range
--- Pulse security alarm action Primary <none>
233 Error limit (levels B and C) 0 0 to 255
234 Reset count (pulses) 10000 0 to 65535
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# The alarm action is internally set to Primary.
# The pulse security level B is determined by an electronic module installed onthe meter pulse input board. Reference British standard IP 252 or APIstandard MPMS Chapter 5, Section 5 and program code descriptions inSection 6.13 of this manual.
# This alarm is triggered by pulse comparison errors between two pulse traininputs from a single flow meter. Causes of errors are A / B input pulse trainsreversed, preamplifier failure, wiring failure.
# Program code 233 Error limit (pulses) must be set to 0 (zero) to disable thisfunction if dual pulse security is not implemented.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 36 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Data logging memory full Default Range
235 Data logging alarm action Info InfoPrimary
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered when the data logging memory becomes full. Thiscondition is usually caused by the data logging printer being off-line, outof paper, or otherwise not available. The data logging function is enabledor disabled by the Data logging parameters.
Comm failure channel x Default Range
236 Time-out ch. A (s) 10 0 to 300
237 Time-out ch. B (s) 10 0 to 300
Note:
# These program codes set the time-out in seconds for communicationchannels A and B alarms. Zero (0) disables the alarm(s).
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 37
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Temperature failure meter # Default Range
238 Temperature failure alarm action Primary OffInfoPrimary
239 Minimum temperature -40.0 -999.9 to999.9
240 Maximum temperature 110.0 -999.9 to999.9
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the RTD temperature input assigned tothe indicated flow meter. Temperature inputs are assigned by program codes318 / 321 / 324 / 327 Meter x temp input. Some causes of this alarm are: temperature of product out-of-range (can be caused by faulty product heater orproduct remaining in heater too long a time), failure of RTD or failure ofwiring to RTD/
# Fixed temperature values used in case of failure of the live temperature inputsare set by program codes 434 / 437 / 440 / 443 Backup temperature. Thesefixed temperature values are assigned to components, however, the DanLoad6000 relates the current component flow to the current flow meter. The alarmmeter # indicates a specific RTD input.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 38 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Density failure component # Default Range
241 Density fail alarm action Primary InfoPrimary
242 Minimum density/gravity 9.9999 -9.9999 to9.9999
243 Maximum density/gravity 9.9999 -9.9999 to9.9999
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual component number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the density input assigned to theindicated component.
Pressure failure meter # Default Range
--- Pressure failure alarm action Primary <none>
244 Minimum pressure 0.00 0.0 to9999.99
245 Maximum pressure 0.00 0.0 to9999.99
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the pressure input assigned to theindicated flow meter. Possible causes include; input pressure out of range, the
PLdensity or temperature input to the C option is out of range, a pinch backmethod other than “Off” has been configured and the required input is notconfigured, or the pinch back method will not allow the flow control valve tobe properly closed due to insufficient pressure when flowing at the low flowrate.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 39
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Additive # failure Default Range
--- Additive error alarm action Primary <none>
246 Additive error limit 3 1 to 99
247 Additive feedback count 0 0 to 9999
271 Unauthorized additive flow volume 0.0000 0.0000 to
99999.9999
272 Prod/add -% 0 0 to 99
273 Prod/add +% 0 0 to 99
278 Additive per 1000 error limit 1 1 to 99
Notes:
# For the “Mech” and “Handshake” injection methods this is the maximum number of pulses by
which the actual feedback pulse count can differ from the ideal feedback pulse count before an
additive failure alarm is raised. The ideal feedback pulse count is based on the additive
feedback count (program code 247), or is 1 (internal default, independent of configuration) for
the “Handshake” injection method.
# Program code 247 Additive feedback count is the expected number of feedback pulses per
additive ratio cycle for the “Mech” additive injection method, e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3
“confirmation pulse”, 2 for Hydrolec injector. The number of seconds within which the
additive feedback input must go on and off again after the additive ratio output has been
energized for the “Handshake” additive injection method, e.g. 5 (per Mapco).
# Program code 278 Additive per 1000 error limit is the number of ratio quantities worth of
additive by which the actual quantity of additive can differ from the ideal volume of additive at
any point in a batch before the DanLoad 6000 checks for a “low additive” or “high additive”
condition (program codes 272 and 273).
# Each additive failure alarm has a single character alphanumeric “reason code” which can be
accessed as a data code value, e.g. in the dynamic data display or via an automation system.
Data code 233 is the additive failure reason code for additive 1, etc. The possible additive
failure reason codes are as follows:
“M” Multiple additives authorized in multi-stream injection mode.
“F” Feedback input count error for “Mech” or “Handshake” injection method (program
codes 246 and 247).
“T” Ratio output timer expired for “Handshake” injection method (program code 247).
“U” Unauthorized additive flow for “Meter” and “Control” injection methods (program
code 271).
“L” Low additive (or no additive) based on configured additive per 1000 (program codes
272 and 278).
“H” High additive based on configured additive per 1000 (program codes 273 and 278).
The additive failure reason codes are cleared (reset) when a batch is started or restarted.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 40 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Component X block valve not closed Default Range
--- Block valve close fail alarm action Primary <none>
248 Block valve time (s) 10 0 to 99
Notes:
# In the alarm message, X is the actual component number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the corresponding block valve control circuitindicating that the block valve has not closed after the component has beendeselected. The position of the block valve is sensed by program code 401 / 403 / 405 / 407 Block value input, corresponding to one of four component block valves. Component block valves are controlled by program codes 400 / 402 / 404 / 406Block valve output.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 41
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Ground detector open Default Range
249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
250 #1 Ground detector open 7message
1 to 32characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by program code 250 # 1 Grounddetector open can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 345 Safety circuit 1.
Overspill detector open Default Range
251 Circuit 2 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
252 #2 Overspill detector open 7message
1 to 32characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by program code 252 #2Overspill detector open can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 346 Safety circuit 2.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 42 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Permissive power failure Default Range
253 Circuit 3 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
254 #3 Permissive power failure 7message
1 to 32characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by program code 254 #3Permissive power failure can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 347 Safety circuit 3.
Additive injection failure Default Range
255 Circuit 4 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
256 #4 Additive injection failure 7message
1 to 32characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by program code 256 #4 Additiveinjection failure can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assigned toprogram code 348 Safety circuit 4.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 43
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Arm down side 1 Default Range
257 Circuit 5 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
258 #5 Arm down side 1 7message
1 to 32characters
265 Circuit 5 type 1 0 to 2
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by program code 258 #5Arm down side 1 can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 349 Safety circuit 5. The side detect function is controlled byprogram code 265 Circuit 5 type which senses the swing arm side based on theoption selection of program code 312 Side detect method.
# The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependent oneither side.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 44 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Arm down side 2 Default Range
259 Circuit 6 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
260 #6 Arm down side 2 7message
1 to 32characters
266 Circuit 6 type 2 0 to 2
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by program code 260 #6Arm down side 2 can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 350 Safety circuit 6. The side detect function is controlled byprogram code 266 Circuit 6 type which senses the swing arm side based on theoption selection of program code 312 Side detect method.
# The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependent oneither side.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 45
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Walkway down side 1 Default Range
261 Circuit 7 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
262 #7 Walkway down side 1 7message
Up to 32characters
267 Circuit 7 type 1 0 to 2
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by program code 262 #7Walkway down side 1 can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 351 Safety circuit 7. The side detect function is controlled byprogram code 267 Circuit 7 type which senses the swing arm side based on theoption selection of program code 312 Side detect method.
# The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependent oneither side.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 46 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Walkway down side 2 Default Range
263 Circuit 8 alarm action Secondary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
264 #8 Walkway down side 2 7message
Up to 32characters
268 Circuit 8 type 2 0 to 2
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by program code 264 #8Walkway down side 2 can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assignedto program code 352 Safety circuit 8. The side detect function is controlled byprogram code 268 Circuit 8 type which senses the swing arm side based on theoption selection of program code 312 Side detect method.
# The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependent oneither side.
Memory check failed
The DanLoad 6000 continuously calculates and verifies CRC-16 checksums on criticalblocks of memory containing data such as totalizers, calibration factors and flow ratesand temperature calculation parameters. If a checksum does not verify correctly, theDanLoad 6000 raises a “Memory check failed” primary alarm; this problem should bereported to Daniel Customer Service. Additionally, there are two situations in when a“Memory check failed” alarm is raised, both of which are “harmless” and can beignored:
1. Flow meter pulses entering the unit during power-up or reset. Operator action: Reset the alarm and continue to use the unit.
2. Batch started after having modified calibraton factors or flow rates viaautomation system communications without having reset the unit. Operatoraction: Reset the alarm, power-up/reset the unit and continue to use the unit.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 47
Storage memory full Default Range
274 Storage alarm action Off OffPrimary
Note:
# A storage alarm (“Storage memory full”) is raised when enabled (“Primary”)and starting a new transaction or batch in the manual operating mode wouldoverwrite an old transaction or batch (in transaction storage memory) alsoloaded in the manual operating mode.
Power failure Default Range
275 Power failure alarm action Off OffPrimary
Note:
# A power fail alarm (“Power failure”) is raised on power-up when the alarm isenabled (“Primary”) and a power failure or “crash” occurred during a batch,i.e. the DanLoad 6000 was reset during a batch. Following a power failureduring a batch, the batch preset quantity is available (Dynamic Data Display)via data code 245, the batch gross and standard quantities via data codes 130and 131, and the batch remaining quantity via data code 246.
Unable to ramp down Default Range
276 Ramp down alarm action Primary OffPrimary
277 Ramp down time (secs) 4 0 to 9999
Notes:
# Program code 276 selects the response to an Unable to ramp down alarmwhen the DanLoad 6000 cannot reduce the flow rate to a defined lower flowrate within the time period specified by program code 277 sets the time limitfor attempt to ramp down flow rate before triggering an Unable to ramp downalarm.
# When Primary is selected (default) for program code 276, the ramp downalarm function is enabled.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 48 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Calibration failure meter X Default Range
755 Calib fail alarm action Primary OffInfoSecondaryPrimary
Note:
# This program code sets the calibration failure alarm action for calibrationmonitoring. Selections include “Off” which disables the alarm, “Info”,“Secondary” and “Primary”.
The alarm indicates that the flow meter may be out of calibration. Refer tosection 3.15 CALMON -Turbine Meter Calibration Monitoring for theDanLoad 6000 Electronic Preset.
MPMC X failure Default Range
756 FPO 0 0-2
757 Number of blades 0 0-50
Notes:
The MPMC X failure is a primary alarm and is raised when the DanLoad 6000 hasbeen configured to use one or both of the MPMC’s features, i.e. factored pulseoutputs or calibration monitoring, and a batch is started or restarted and the DanLoaddetects the failure of (or non-existence of) the required MPMC board on the indicatedmeter pulse board X.
FPO is the factored pulse output of the “smart” 4-ch. Meter pulse board on which togenerate factored pulses according to the configured FPO basis (program code 752).
The number of magnetic blades (or buttons) on the meter is for calibrationmonitoring purposes. Zero (0) disables calibration monitoring for the meter. Anyother value enables calibration monitoring for the meter. One (1) indicates that thenumber of blades should be auto-detected by the MPMC prior to acquiring acalibration sample. Zero (0) disables calibration monitoring for the meter.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 49
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Primary display failure Secondary display failure Default Range
--- Display failure alarm action Primary <none>
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered if the keypad/display has been disconnected or theinternal temperature of the keypad/display enclosure is too high. Power isremoved from the keypad/display and the upper (yellow) LCD indictor pulsestwice every two seconds. When the condition that caused the alarm no longerexists, the upper (yellow) LED is pulsed once every two seconds. The DanLoad6000 should be powered-up/reset to continue using the keypad/display.
Maximum batches on transaction Default Range
--- Maximum number of batches exceeded alarm action Primary <none>
Notes:
# This message is displayed when an attempt is made to start a batch and themaximum number of batches per transaction (which is configurable via programcode 047 Batches/Transaction) has already been loaded. The new batch is notstarted.
Side not authorized Default Range
--- Unauthorized swing arm configuration alarm action Primary <none>
Notes:
# This message is displayed when an attempt is made to start a batch on a new side(swing arm configurations) when the transaction on the old side has not beenended, e.g. by pressing the STOP key.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 50 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
4.5.2 Diagnostic Tests
RAM (random access memory) diagnostics are run continuously while power is applied to theDanLoad 6000. The RAM diagnostic and several other diagnostics are described in this section.Several of the diagnostic tests are designed for maintenance troubleshooting and have limited usefor operations personnel. However, the operations personnel should be aware of the reaction of theinstrument to some types of failures. These failure indications are described in this sub-section.
A group of diagnostic tests are accessible for manual execution via the Diagnostics selection in theProgram Mode Menu. Access to the Program Mode Menu is described in Section 4.1.1.3. Whenthe Diagnostics selection is activated, the Diagnostics Menu shown below in displayed.
Diagnostics Menu Pg 1 of 2 Firmware versions RAM tests Keypad Display Inputs/Outputs DUART More 9
Diagnostics Menu Pg 2 of 2 ARCNET Crash analysis Show memory Print configuration Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
More 8
Diagnostic MenuFigure 4 - 6
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 51
The following selections in the Diagnostics Menu are available.
# Firmware Versions
The firmware versions of the program for the two CPU's and the message EPROM isdisplayed. The power failure message indicating the date and time of the last power failureis also displayed.
# RAM tests
The passed / failed results of the RAM tests is displayed. If a RAM test fails at any time,all discrete outputs are OPENED, causing all flow control valves and block valves to closeand all pumps to stop running. The cause of the failure must be corrected before theDanLoad 6000 can be used. (Note: The contents of RAM are not modified by the diagnostictests.)
# Keypad
A prompt message Press key to test ... is displayed. The name of any key pressed isdisplayed beside the prompt message. Multiple keys can be pressed until the EXIT(ALT+CLEAR) key is pressed to re-display the Diagnostics Menu.
# Display
The display backlighting level is stepped at one second intervals through the indicatednumeric level range of 0 to 7. The display contrast level is stepped at one second intervalsthrough the indicated numeric level range of 0 to 15. The local display panel and ifconnected, the remote display panel are checked. Both the backlighting and the contrastlevels are restored to their current settings on exit from the display. (Note: Contrast andbacklighting can be manually adjusted via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of theProgram Mode Menu.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 52 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
# Inputs/Outputs
The Input/Outputs diagnostic display indicated below is shown. This display is used to viewthe current live values of the selected input or output point.
Inputs/Outputs Meter input __ #pulses = nnnnn RTD input __ A/D value = hhhh 4-20 mA input __ A/D value = hhhh Discrete input __ state = n Discrete output __ state = n
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
Inputs / Outputs DiagnosticFigure 4 - 7
The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to move the flashing underline cursor to the desired line.The 0 to 9 numeric keys are used to enter any valid input or output number up to themaximum number for that type of input or output. Press the ENTER key to continue. Thevalue of the selected input is displayed. The flashing cursor remains on the same line andother inputs of the same type may be viewed. The input value corresponds to the selectedinput point. The state of a control output can be changed by entering the control outputnumber, pressing the ENTER key, and then when the flashing cursor is positioned at thestate field, press either the 0 key (to turn the output OFF, or the 1 key to turn the outputON, as applicable. The output may be repeatedly toggled at this time with the 0 key and the1 key or may be left in the desired state by pressing the ENTER key with the desired statedisplayed. (Note: #pulses is an accumulated pulse count, A/D value is a four-digithexadecimal number, state is 0 or 1 as described above.)
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 53
# DUART
Serial ports COM1 and COM2 are tested under program control by running the two channelsin local loopback mode. The three-digit address with leading zeros (000 to 255), selectedby the DIP switch on the module is displayed. A nnn% errors result of the test for eachchannel is displayed. (Note: Channel A = COM1, Channel B = COM2.)
The diagnostic tests are performed on the channels configured 'Not used'. Channel A istested first, then channel B is tested. If a channel is configured, the word 'BUSY' isdisplayed and diagnostic tests are not performed. The diagnostic tests are described below.
Local loopback The type SCN2681 DUART in the DanLoad 6000 is tested by the channel 'X'mode register 2. The DanLoad 6000 transmits 256 characters (0 through255) looped back to the receive circuit. A result of 129/256 indicates that129 out of the 256 characters where transmitted and received properly. Thecorrect result is 256/256. If the DUART is not installed or failed completely,the word 'ERROR' is displayed.
External loopback A hardware loopback connector is connected to the RS-232 / RS-485 port.The test function and results are identical as those of the local loopback test.
Ch-A (RS-485) Ch-B (RS-232)
RX+1
RX-2
TX+3
TX-4
RX5
CTS6
TX7 8 9
COM10
.))))))))3)))))))))- * .)))))))))))))))))))-
Loopback Connector Pinout (Reference Drawing CE-12693)
baud rates All eight possible baud rates (from lowest speed to highest speed) are setupand tested. The following ten test characters are used: 00h, 01h, 02h, 04h,08h, 10h, 20h, 40h, 80h, and FFh. The example pass/fail map PPPPPPPFindicates that the lowest seven baud rates passed and the highest baud ratefailed.
data formats Parity bits, stop bits, and data bits are setup and tested. The pass/fail mapindicates the results of the test. For example: PFP indicates that the paritytest passed, the stop bits test failed, and the data bits test passed.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 54 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Interrupts The RxRDY (receive ready), FFULL (receive buffer full), and TxRDY(transmit ready) interrupts are tested. The pass/fail map indicates the resultsof the test. For example: FPF indicates that the RxRDY interrupt test failed,the FFULL interrupt test passed, and the TxRDY interrupt test failed.
DUART 001 Ch. A Ch. B Local loopback 256/256 256/256 External loopback 203/256 52/356 baud rates PPPPPPPF FFFFFFFF data formats PFP PPF interrupts PPP P-- Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
DUART Ports DiagnosticFigure 4 - 8
# LAN
The LAN port is tested under program control. The address (0 to 255), selected by the DIPswitch settings on the module is displayed. The current value in the read only DiagnosticStatus Register and the current value in the read/write Configuration Register are displayed.The values are two-digit hexadecimal numbers. Note: The Arcnet/Lan port option is notavailable on the DanLoad 6000.
ARCNET Address = nnn Diagnostic Status 0xhh Configuration 0xhh
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
LAN Port DiagnosticFigure 4 - 9
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 55
# Crash analysis
A “crash” is an unrecoverable hardware, software or configuration error detected by theprogram. The symptom of a “crash” is that the unit resets itself, i.e. the display goes dark(briefly) as if the unit had been powered off and on again; if product is flowing when thishappens, a “memory check failed” alarm may be raised since the pulse count checksumcannot be verified. If a crash occurs, the program saves crash information so that the causecan be determined. Perform the following steps:
- Go into Diagnostics | Crash anaylsis in program mode and write down the fourcolumns of figures before the unit is powered-off again, since powering off the unitmay cause CPU-2 crash information to be overwritten. (The unit generates a CPU-2crash error code “FADE” whenever it is powered-off.) NOTE: Press the “CLEAR”key to zero the four columns of figures so that you can find out when a new crashoccurs.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890Crash memory CPU 1 CPU2
Stk ptr/prog ctr 4793/2085 7e9d/821eInt mask/int mask 1 004c/0063 0043/00c9WSR/tsk pg 0000/0002 000f/0005Error code/task adr 0000/e742 fff7/83bc
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
- Select Diagnostics | Firmware versions in program mode and write down the threefirmware version numbers, e.g. v5.60. The crash analysis cannot be interpretedwithout the firmware version numbers.
- Contact Daniel Customer Service or your local representative or expert with thecrash analysis and firmware version number information.
The crash analysis in the same format as the Crash memory summary log, Section 4.5.3, isdisplayed. See the description of the Crash memory summary log for details.
A Crash memory summary log indicates an unrecoverable error detected by the control program.This feature is a general purpose detector / logger for critical hardware and software error conditions.The Crash memory summary log should be saved for use in main processor troubleshooting.
If program code 704 Crash memory summary is set On and the data printer is available, a Crashmemory summary log is printed by the logging printer. The example below indicates the format ofthe log.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
4 - 56 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Crash Memory Summary
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Crash Memory Summary CPU #Stk ptr/prog ctr 47n3/2085Int mask/int mask 1 004c/0063WSR/task 0000/0002Error code/task adr 0000/e742
The fields contained in the Crash memory summary log are described below.
# CPU # The # is either 1 (indicating CPU 1 problem) or 2 (indicating CPU 2problem).
# Unit The unit address obtained from the setting of the address DIP switches on theDUART board, range is 0 to 255.
# <time> Date and time of the event.
# Stk ptr/prog ctrThe hexadecimal values of the stack pointer and the program counter.
# Int mask/int mask 1The hexadecimal values of the interrupt mask and the interrupt mask 1.
# WSR/task The Window Select Register / multi-task task number.
# Error code/task adrThe hexadecimal identifier of the critical error code / the address of the activetask.
# Print configuration
The configuration summary data log (a report showing all program code values) can beprinted from the diagnostics menu in the manual operating mode. The data log must beenabled (program code 703). The data log is quite big, and should typically only be printedwhen the unit is not needed for a while and the data logging device is not busy.
# Show memory
Data memory is displayed. The display shows the memory address with data in bothhexadecimal and ASCII formats.
Section 5
Flow Meter Proving
General
Tank Prover Method
Master Meter Method
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 1
This section contains information on flow meter proving using methods specified in API standardsand English measurement units. The general information applies to other standards andmeasurement units as well. Meter proving is the procedure for determining a meter factor for a rackflow meter. Calibration is the procedure for determining a volume of the meter prover and is notcovered in this manual.
Details are provided on manual meter proving by the prover tank method and the master metermethod. The pipe prover method is usually used for proofs of large capacity flow meters in pipelineor tanker ship loading service and is not covered in this manual. Meter proving determines theaccuracy of the flow measurement and therefore the accuracy of quantity and cash accounting fordelivered products. It is strongly recommended that you read this section, all local, regional, andcountry standards, and all company standards applicable to your installation and meter proving,before proving a rack meter or a master meter.
Typical forms used during the meter proving procedure are provided at the end of this section. Theseforms can be copied or used as a guide for development of forms for your organization.
NoteThe flow meter proving procedures described in this section and the typical meter proof forms (Figure 5 -2, Figure 5 -3) are primarily provided to describe the DanLoad 6000 programcodes that affect meter proving and flow measurement accuracy. The method of meter provingand the typical form may require changes before use in your organization. Consult the flowmeasurement accounting department of your organization before conducting flow meterproofs.
A prover tank is a field standard measure which is designed and calibrated by a laboratory that canprovide calibration traceability to the Weights and Measures Office of the National Bureau ofStandards. The calibrated prover tank can be used in either or both of the following meter proofmethods.
# Used periodically to prove individual rack meters.
# Used periodically to prove a master meter. Then the master meter is used to prove theindividual rack meters.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 2 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
The primary American Petroleum Institute standards applicable to meter proving are:
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards (MPMS)
# Chapter 4 - Proving Systems
# Chapter 12 - Calculation of Petroleum Quantities
# Section 2 - Instructions for Calculating Liquid Petroleum QuantitiesMeasured by Turbine or Displacement Meters(contains Tables A-1 and A-2 - Correction Factors for Steel)
# Chapter 11.1 - Volume Correction Factors
Table 6 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees FahrenheitAgainst API Gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Table 24 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees FahrenheitAgainst Specific Gravity 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit
These standards supersede API Standards 1101, 2531, 2533, and 2534 and are widely used in theUSA and several other countries. The volume reduction tables 6 and 24 are also designated: ASTMD 1250, API Standard 2540, and IP 200.
Every flow meter is a unique device. The manufacturer fabricates each flow meter so that it meetsdesign specifications. However, differences within normal fabrication tolerances produceapparently identical flow meters that generate slightly different pulses per volume unit (K-factor).The nominal K-factor [average number of pulses per each volume unit (such as a gallon) that aregenerated by a flow meter] is stamped on the flow meter nameplate. For example, by design theDaniel 4-inch LR turbine meter should produce 23.0 pulses per each gallon measured. Aftermanufacture, each LR turbine meter is proved with water flow at the factory. This initial meterproof of the new flow meter may produce an actual K-factor for that flow meter of 23.403 pulsesper gallon measured. This initial meter proving is normally the only time that the flow meter K-factor is determined by a meter proof. After a meter has been installed on-site, additional meterproofs may be used to determine meter factors. Over the lifetime of a meter, its meter factor maychange due to variations in flow rates, viscosities, wear, and other causes. However, the K-factorwill always remain the same. The K-factor is the gross adjustment factor and the meter factor is thefine adjustment factor. The DanLoad 6000 uses a mathematical combination of the K-factor andthe meter factor to adjust the volume accumulation totalizers to match the actual volume that hasflowed through the meter.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 3
In addition to the type of flow meter and installation design, the product being measured,temperature of the product being measured, the flow rate, and, to a lesser extent, the pressure ofthe product being measured may also affect the accuracy of the flow measurement. (Note: Thepressure effect on the volume of low vapor pressure hydrocarbon liquids, such as gasoline, diesel,kerosine, and fuel oil is usually negligible when these liquids are handled at low pressures (lessthan 100 PSIG) and is ignored in many tanker vehicle loading installations. Pressure compensationand back-pressure control should always be implemented in LPG loading configurations.)
Flow meters can be proved as often as desired. Many organizations have regulations governing thefrequency of meter proofs. These regulations are often based on date, volume of flow through themeter, and / or number of loading operations use the meter. If your organization does not have suchregulations, each meter should be proved periodically and the proof results compared with previousproof results to determine if more frequent or less frequent proofs are required.
The terminology used in this section is defined below and is based on the definitions in the APIstandards.
Term Definition
Gross volume The indicated volume times the meter factor derived from a meter proving ofthe flow meter at a specific flow rate. This is a volume measurement. Thisvolume is displayable as Dynamic Data Element - Mtr m grs load in theDanLoad 6000 and is used to determine the volume measured by the rackmeter during meter proving.Calculation: gross volume = indicated volume times meter factor
Gross standard volumeThe gross volume corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is aquantity measurement.
TLMCalculation: Gross standard volume = gross volume times C(correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in
PLMthe meter) times C (correction factor for the effect ofpressure on the liquid in the meter)
Indicated volume (also called meter registration) The change in the flow meter reading thatOccurs during a product flow measurement operation. This is a volumemeasurement.Calculation: indicated volume = end reading minus start reading
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 4 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
Term Definition
K-factor The pulses per volume unit, such as gallon, generated by a pulse (Systemfactor) output type flow meter. The K-factor is also called the system factor.The nominal value is determined by flow meter design and factory water flowcalibration and is indicated on the flow meter nameplate. The K-factor is aphysical characteristic of the flow meter and is a fixed number.
Master meter A master meter is a turbine meter or positive displacement meter that hasbeen proved previously with a tank prover. The master meter is temporarilyconnected in series with a rack meter to be proved so that all flow passesthrough both meters. A volume of liquid is passed through both meters andthe volume measured by the master meter is considered to be 'correct'. Thedifference between the volume measured by each meter determines the meterfactor for the rack meter. The API standard recommends that a minimumvolume of 10,000 volume unit increments are accumulated during a meterproof and that the minimum duration of a meter proof run be five minutes.
The DanLoad 6000 can display delivered quantities in hundredths of volumeunits, such as vvv.vv gallons. A proof run of 100.00 volume units may besufficient to satisfy the 10,000 volume unit requirement. Meter proofdeliveries of 1500 to 2000 whole volume units are more common.
Meter factor A number used internally by the DanLoad 6000 in flow calculations tocorrect the indicated volume (final flow meter registration minus initial flowmeter registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meterthroughput at operating conditions). The meter factor value is near 1.0000and rounded to four decimal places.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 5
Term Definition
Pipe prover A pipe prover is a calibrated pipe section that contains a sphere made of anelastomer material and a sphere detector switch located at each end of thecalibrated pipe section. The pipe prover has two basic configurations, bi-directional or uni-directional. As the names imply, the sphere can pass ineither direction or only one direction, respectively. The sphere detectorswitches are used to start and stop an external prover counter which can beconnected to a high resolution pulse output from the DanLoad 6000. A meterproof is performed by directing all flow through a flow meter in series withthe pipe prover calibrated pipe section and accumulating the raw pulsesgenerated by the flow meter while the prover sphere moves from the startpulse count gate switch and the stop pulse count gate switch. Since theprecise volume of the calibrated section of the pipe prover is known, theflow meter pulse output corresponds to that precise volume, and eachvolume unit can be calculated.
Quantity (Example: gross standard volume)The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operationaltemperature and pressure, usually indicated in one of the following units:gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.
Tank prover A tank prover is a fixed or portable graduated tank that is calibrated tocontain a precise known volume of liquid. The tank bottom and sides arereinforced so that the weight of the liquid in the tank does not distort the tank.The graduated sight gauge(s) permit determination of the exact volume ofliquid in the tank. The minimum capacity of the tank must be equal to thevolume that passes through the flow meter in one minute. The recommendedcapacity of the tank is 1-1/2 to 2 times the volume that passes through theflow meter in one minute. For example, if the maximum operational flowrate of a flow meter is 600 GPM, the minimum prover tank capacity is 600gallons, and the recommended prover tank capacity between 900 and 1200gallons.
Volume (Example: indicated volume; gross volume)The actual space occupied by the product measured, usually indicated in oneof the following units: gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 6 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
5.1 General Considerations
Program codes that affect the flow measurement accuracy of the DanLoad 6000 may be restrictedfrom modification by the Weights & Measures attributes of those program codes. If these programcodes are set to ON, the value of the program codes can only be changed when the Weights &Measures switch is set OPEN. Therefore, before a flow meter can be proved, the front panelWeights & Measures switch must be set OPEN (extended position).
A DanLoad 6000 can deliver up to four components and each component can be delivered at up tofour different flow rates. The lowest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'low flowrate'. The highest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'high flow rate' which isalso called the 'normal flow rate'. Any other defined flow rates for a component are called 'fall backflow rates' or 'intermediate flow rates'. Each of the component / flow rate combinations has aunique meter factor for a total of sixteen possible meter factors. Installations with less than four flowmeters and less than four flow rates will have fewer meter factors.
The meter factors for each component must be determined and entered in the order shown below.
Component p meter factor 1 Lowest defined flow rate.Component p meter factor 2 Next higher flow rate if more than one flow rate is defined.Component p meter factor 3 Next higher flow rate if more than two flow rates are defined.Component p meter factor 4 Highest flow rate if four flow rates are defined.
The component number p is 1 to 4. The reason for determining meter factors in this order is toprevent any inaccuracies at any lower flow rate from affecting the accuracy of the meter factor fora higher flow rate. Because meter proving is performed during batch delivery, startup and shutdownvolumes delivered at low flow start rate and low flow stop rate, are included in the total proof batch.Therefore, any volume measurement errors occurring during low flow rate times will becompensated in the total proving batch.
In some organizations it is acceptable to use only a low flow and high flow meter factor even whenone or two fall back flow rates are defined. In these cases, the rack meter is proved at the low andhigh flow rate and the meter factor for the high flow rate is also entered as the meter factor for oneor two fall back flow rates.
During meter proving, various parameter values may need to be changed. All associated parametersare not located in the same Setup Menu sub-group. To access a parameter when the Setup Menu isactive, enter the three-digit program code number. The selected parameter is then displayed. Verifyor change the value of the parameter as desired. Then press the EXIT (ALT + CLEAR) key tore-display the Setup Menu and select the next parameter or continue.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 7
Each meter proving run can only determine one meter factor for one component (flow meter) / flowrate combination. Each component defined by the DanLoad 6000 configuration is associated witha meter number by program codes 067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter. Each flow meter is automaticallyassigned a fixed input number (1 to 4) dependent on the pulse meter card slot location and on-boardswitch settings. For example: Component number 1 may be associated with the fixed input formeter number 3.
Unique meter proving recipes should be setup to define each single component for use in controllingthe block valves of a multi-component blending system during meter proving.
Example:
Select an undefined recipe number higher than the last defined operational recipe and set that recipeto deliver 100 percent of component 1, set the next recipe to delivery 100 percent of component 2.Setup from one to four recipes (one for each component) that permit selection and proof deliveryof each component without any blending. The setup could appear as follows.
Example meter proof recipes for a blender system:
Recipe 10:535 Prove Gasoline536 Component 1 % = 100537 Component 2 % = 0538 Component 3 % = 0539 Component 4 % = 0540 Sequence to load 1XXX
Recipe 11:541 Prove Diesel542 Component 1 % = 0543 Component 2 % = 100544 Component 3 % = 0545 Component 4 % = 0546 Sequence to load 2XXX
(Continue to define a third recipe for component 3 and a forth recipe for component 4 meter proofsif required.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 8 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
The gross loaded volume, with the current meter factor applied, that the DanLoad 6000 measuresduring the delivery operation must be displayable after a meter proof is completed. The followingdata element codes are available for this purpose.
Data Code Default Program Code Description
103 Mtr 1 grs load 689 Dynamic Data Display - Element 10 (default)104 Mtr 2 grs load ____ ______________________________105 Mtr 3 grs load ____ ______________________________106 Mtr 4 grs load ____ ______________________________
The table above indicates that only Mtr 1 grs load is displayable if the DanLoad 6000 is in thedefault configuration. If two or more components are defined, the flow meter assignment for eachcomponent must be determined. Once the flow meter / component relationship is determined, theMtr m grs load parameter must be made displayable as a Dynamic Data Display element. This taskis accomplished as follows.
Perform the following steps to activate display of the dynamic data codes required for meter proofmonitoring.
# Enter Setup Mode, select the program codes listed above for each defined component andrecord the flow meter assignment.
# Decide which of the sixteen default dynamic data codes are not of interest for display at yourinstallation. Record the current program code assignment of these data display locations(program codes 680 to 695).
# Select program codes from 680 to 688 or 690 to 695 (do not change program code 689Dynamic data element 10 (Mtr 1 grs load) which is used to monitor the component deliverythrough flow meter number 1).
# Enter the Dynamic Data Codes 104 Mtr 2 grs load, 105 Mtr 3 grs load, and 106 Mtr 4 grsload as required for each defined flow meter / component combination. Only program codesfor defined flow meter / component combinations are displayable.
# The Dynamic Data Display can now display the Mtr m grs load parameter for each definedflow meter / component combination. The value of the active Mtr m grs load parameter isobtained and entered in the meter proof form during a meter proof.
Note: See Section 6 for a complete list of Dynamic Data Codes and see Appendix A for the sixteendefault assignments (program codes 680 through 695).
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 9
Meter Factor Calculation
The method described below for calculating a new meter factor for a DanLoad 6000 generallyfollows the published API method with the following modifications.
# The API standard uses the flow meter registration which is the indicated volume without thecurrent meter factor applied. The DanLoad 6000 parameter Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx is thegross volume with the current meter factor for the active component / flow rate combinationapplied. The meter proof calculations described in this section provide an adjustmentnumber which is multiplied by the current meter factor to determine the value of the newmeter factor. (Note: The meter factor calculation must be performed properly or largeerrors in flow measurement accounting can occur.)
# The API standard uses compensation for the effect of pressure on the on the liquid (factor
PLx PLxC ) which is rarely used at a load rack installation. To ignore C , enter 1.0000 in the
PLxequation. (Note: The handling of C must be determined by local regulations and thepolicy of your organization and clients.)
TLx# The API standard uses compensation for the effect of temperature on the liquid (factor C )
PLxand compensation for the effect of pressure on the liquid (factor C ) for both the mastermeter and the rack meter. Many organizations consider that the master meter and the rackmeter are operating at identical process conditions during meter proving batch deliveries.
TLx PLxTherefore, C and C are ignored and entered as 1.0000 in the equations for both the
TLx PLxmaster meter and the rack meter. (Note: The handling of C and C must be determinedby local regulations and the policy of your organization and clients.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 10 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
The relation between the API volume designations and prover tank, master meter, and rack metervolumes are indicated in the following table.
API Volume Prover Tank Master Meter Rack Meter
indicated volume equal to:indicated volumewhich is equal to:gross volume
equal to:indicated volumewhich is equalto:registered volume
equal to:indicated volumewhich is equal to:registered volume
gross volume equal to:gross volumewhich is equal to:indicated volume
indicated volumex meter factor
indicated volume xmeter factorwhich is obtainedfrom:(Mtr m grs loadxxxx.xx)
gross volume atstandardtemperature
TSPgross volume x C
TLPx Cgross volume x
TLPCgross volume x
TLMC
gross standardvolume
TSPgross volume x C
TLPx Cgross volume atstandardtemperature x
PLPC
gross volume atstandard
PLMtemperature x C
Prover / Meter Volume RelationshipFigure 5 - 1
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 11
The table Prover / Meter Volume Relationship, Figure 5 - 1, shows relation of meter volumes tothe prover tank for information only. Note the following points.
# The prover tank is a fixed volume tank in which the volume is measured at the nominalatmospheric pressure. Therefore, the following factors, which do not apply to the provertank, are ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000.
# meter factor
PSP# C (Effect of pressure on the steel of the vessel.)
PLP# C (Effect of pressure on the volume of the liquid.)
This means that the volume delivered to the prover tank can be considered to be indicatedvolume which is also equal to gross volume because a meter factor is not required to adjustthe prover tank volume. Only temperature correction factors can be applied to the liquidvolume delivered to the prover tank.
PLx# The pressure correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow meter (C )is usually ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000 for rack operations.
# The Dynamic Data Display element Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx in the DanLoad 6000 is anaccumulator for gross volume with a resolution of hundreds of a volume unit, such asgallons.
The meter proof methods described using a rack meter connected to a DanLoad 6000 use valuesobtained from the Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx accumulator. The basic calculation sequence, withouttemperature correction factors, is described below.
Meter proving calculation 1:
Calculate the volume error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the rackmeter measured volume.
rack meter volume error = corrected delivery volume - rack meter corrected gross volume
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 12 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
where:
rack meter volume error The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the proverand the rack meter corrected gross volume.
corrected delivery volume # prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect oftemperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to theprover tank.
# master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,corrected by the master meter meter-factor, the effect oftemperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the effectof pressure on the liquid measured.
rack meter corrected gross volumeThe volume obtained from the Dynamic Data Display element Mtrm grs load, corrected for the effect of temperature on the liquidmeasured and optionally the effect of pressure on the liquid measured.
Meter proving calculation 2:
Calculate the percentage error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and therack meter measured volume.
rack meter volume errorrack meter percent error = --------------------------------- rack meter corrected gross volume
where:
rack meter percent error The percentage of error in the corrected volume delivery.
rack meter volume error The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the proverand the rack meter corrected gross volume (obtained from calculation1).
rack meter corrected gross volumeThe volume obtained from the Dynamic Data Display element Mtrm grs load, corrected for the effect of temperature on the liquidmeasured and optionally the effect of pressure on the liquid measured.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 13
If this calculation produces a percentage error that is within the tolerances of the regulatingorganizations and your organization, the current meter factor is considered to be acceptable and nofurther action is required. The exact value must be determined by the governing regulations.
Example: A typical calculation might produce a result of 0.01 which is equal to one percenterror.
Meter proving calculation 3:
Calculate the adjustment to be applied to the current meter factor, if it has been determined that thepercentage of error (calculation 2) is not acceptable.
prover corrected gross volumeadjustment = --------------------------------- rack meter corrected gross volume
where:
adjustment A mathematical factor that is multiplied by the current rack meterfactor to obtain the new meter factor, this factor is the error in thecurrent meter factor (THIS NUMBER IS NOT THE NEWMETER FACTOR).
prover corrected gross volume# prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of
temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to theprover tank.
# master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,corrected by the master meter factor, the effect oftemperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the effectof pressure on the liquid measured.
rack meter corrected gross volumeThe volume obtained from the Dynamic Data Display element Mtrm grs load, corrected for the effect of temperature on the liquidmeasured and optionally the effect of pressure on the liquid measured.(Note: This volume is the gross volume with the current meter factorapplied. The use of the gross volume in the calculation is the reasonthat the new meter factor cannot be calculated by this step.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 14 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
Meter proving calculation 4:
Calculate the new meter factor which will be manually entered in program code ccc Comp p meterfactor f corresponding to the active program code ccc Comp p flow rate r.
new meter factor = adjustment x rack meter current meter-factor
where:
new meter factor The calculated meter factor that must be manually entered forprogram code ccc Comp p meter factor f to correct the measurementerror in future flow measurement.
adjustment The mathematical adjustment factor obtained from calculation 3above.
rack meter current meter-factorThe current meter factor for the rack meter, obtained from programcode ccc Comp p meter factor f before the meter proof sequence isstarted.
Three examples of meter factor calculations are provided below. The calculations show the relationbetween the measured volumes and the meter factor adjustments required. To simplify the examples,the temperature and pressure corrections are disregarded.
Assume that the volume accumulated Mtr m grs load is 1000.00 gallons and that the rack metercurrent active meter factor is 1.0123 for the component / flow rate combination. Then the indicatedvolume is equal to 987.85 gallons.Equation: 1000.00 987.85 = ------------- 1.0123
Example 1: Correct delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 15
Parameter Value
corrected delivery volume 1000.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load 1000.00 gallons
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR 0 gallons(1000.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR 0 percent(0 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT 1
(1000.00 / 1000.00)
RACK METER CURRENT METER-FACTOR 1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR 1.0123 (no change)(1 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter exactly equals the volumedelivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered correctedgross volume is exactly equal to the rack meter corrected gross volume, the current_meter_factoris correct. The new_meter_factor value is exactly equal to the current_meter_factor value.Therefore, the current meter factor, 1.0123, should not be changed.
Example 2: One percent over delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
Parameter Value
corrected delivery volume 1010.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load 1000.00 gallons
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR 10 gallons(1010.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR 0.01 (1 percent over delivery)(10 / 1000.00)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 16 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
Parameter Value
ADJUSTMENT 1.01(1010.00 / 1000.00)
RACK METER CURRENT METER-FACTOR 1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR 1.0224(1.01 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is less than the volumedelivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered correctedgross volume is greater than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the value of thecurrent_meter_factor is less than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0224) shouldbe manually entered for the value of the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f.
Example 3: One percent under delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
Parameter Value
corrected delivery volume 990.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load 1000.00 gallons
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR -10 gallons(990.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR -0.01 (1 percent under delivery)(-10 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT 0.99(990.00 / 1000.00)
RACK METER CURRENT METER-FACTOR 1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR 1.0022(0.99 x 1.0123)
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 17
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is greater than the volumedelivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered correctedgross volume is less than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the value of thecurrent_meter_factor is greater than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0022)should be manually entered for the value of the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f.
5.1.1 Initial Setup
The examples above do not include temperature compensation calculations. However, during actualmeter proving, these calculations must be performed. Before starting meter proving, obtain a copyof Table A-1 - Temperature Correction Factors for Mild Steel or Table A-2 - TemperatureCorrection Factors for Stainless Steel from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 - Instructions forCalculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities Measured by Turbine or Displacement Meters for use in
TSPcalculating C . And obtain a copy of Table 6A, 6B, 6C, 24A, or 24B from API MPMS Chapter
TLP TLM11.1 - Volume Correction Factors for use in calculating C and C .
Perform the following preliminary steps:
# OPEN the Weights & Measures switch (release to extended position)
# Enter Program Mode (press Program (ALT + ENTER) key)
# Enter Passcode in response to prompt message
# Enter Setup Mode (with box cursor on Setup selection, press ENTER key)
# Access and change program codes as described below (refer to the tables located at the endof this section for program code information)
# If the DanLoad 6000 is a multi-component blender, specify a meter proof recipe as describedabove to select the desired component for proof. If the DanLoad 6000 delivers only onecomponent, recipe number 1, which specifies a one component to one flow meterrelationship, is selected automatically.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 18 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
# 169 Number of factors/componentSet to 1 to force continuous low flow rate for first meter proof (see additional informationbelow).
# 170 Meter factor methodSet to fixed so that meter factor interpolation based on flow rate is disabled.
# 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factorObtain actual meter K-factor from flow meter nameplate and round to nearest tenth, enterresult (example: nameplate K-factor is 23.403, enter 23.4).
# 172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factorDivide program code ccc Nominal K-factor by actual K-factor from nameplate and round tofour decimal places. [Example: 23.4 divided by 23.403 = 0.9999, enter result (0.9999)].(Note: The ccc Master meter factor is used to establish a plus / minus two percent limit forentries in the four program codes ccc Comp p flow rate r of the related component, thisparameter is not used in volume calculations.)
# 173 / 184 / 195 / 206 Stop rateSet the flow rate at which this component is delivered during the component’s configuredlow flow stop volume at the end of an inline batch. The overall flow rate of the blend at theend of a batch is the sum of the stop rates of any flowing components.
# If an existing preset system that uses an effective K-factor for each flow rate is replaced bya DanLoad 6000, the DanLoad 6000 requires a nominal K-factor and meter factor for eachflow rate. Set program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 294 Nominal K-factor as indicated above,enter program code ccc Comp p meter factor f as program code ccc Nominal K-factor dividedby the effective K-factor for the flow rate and rounded to four decimal places.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 19
The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components:
# 174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Comp p flow rate 1This parameter should be set to the desired low flow start / low flow stop flow rate that willbe used in actual loading of the indicated component p. The first flow meter proof willalways be at this flow rate.
# 175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Comp p meter factor 1This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registrationwhen the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding program code ccc Comp p flow rate1. This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meterfactor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.
The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components in a twostage (low flow / normal flow) loading system:
# 176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Comp p flow rate 2This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or first fall back flow rate thatwill be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.
# 177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Comp p meter factor 2This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registrationwhen the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding ccc Comp p flow rate 2 parameter.This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meterfactor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new installation or therack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of program code 172/ 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.
The following four parameter group entries are required for all defined components only inloading systems that define three or four flow rates for loading:
# 178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Comp p flow rate 3This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or second fall back flow rate thatwill be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 20 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
# 179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Comp p meter factor 3This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registrationwhen the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding program code ccc Comp p flow rate3. This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meterfactor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new installation or therack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of program code 172/ 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.
# 180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Comp p flow rate 4This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow rate that will be used in actualloading of the indicated component p.
# 181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Comp p meter factor 4This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registrationwhen the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding program code ccc Comp p flow rate4. This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meterfactor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.
# As mentioned above, the meter factor for program code ccc Comp p factor 1 will always bedetermined first. To assure continued flow at program code ccc Comp p flow rate 1 rate, setprogram code 169 Number of factors/component to 1.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 21
5.2 Tank Prover Method
Rack meters, or a master meter, are proved with a tank prover by loading a batch of one productat one flow rate to the prover tank. The frequency of meter proofs of rack meters must bedetermined by company policy or regional regulations. Rack meters should be proved on eachproduct and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the rack metersprovide a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The correspondingmeter factor is then entered into the DanLoad 6000 and is automatically active when the relatedproduct / flow rate combination is active.
A meter proof is performed by the tank prover method in the following manner.
# A meter proof wetting run should be performed first to wet the prover tank and help stabilizethe temperature in the rack meter / prover tank circuit. The wetting run is a proof runwithout recording data.
# A liquid batch that will fill the tank prover to a liquid level visible in the graduated sectionis defined and delivered to a prover tank.
# Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error betweenthe prover tank volume (corrected for temperature) and the and the flow meter registration(corrected for temperature).
# The volume and percentage error are calculated. If necessary, a new meter factor iscalculated.
# The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into theDanLoad 6000 for the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one ofthe following program codes: 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201/ 203 / 208 / 210 / 212 / 214 dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meterfactor number f (1 to 4).
# The prover tank can be drained and the steps listed above are repeated and the resultsaveraged, if desired.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 22 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
5.2.1 Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 1
For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that eachcomponent is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal (high)flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four component -four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component (flow meter) ateach flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving is not important.
# Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch to theprover tank.
# Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in theprogram codes 480 to 661).
# Set program code 169 Number of factors/component, to 1 to assure that only the low flowrate is used.
# Verify or set the low flow rate with program code 174.
# Exit the Setup Menu
# At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the volume of the prover tank.
# Initiate the batch delivery to the prover tank.
# Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys todisplay item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated volumeunits delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a volume unit.
# After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in acopy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN 1column.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 23
5.2.2 Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 2
At this point the new meter factor, program code 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1, is within toleranceand accepted. The next higher flow rate, program code 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2, is used todetermine the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flowrate that is used as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set 176Comp 1 flow rate 2 to 400.
During the meter proof at the low flow rate, the low flow rate was forced active by setting programcode 169 Number of factors/component to 1 so that the DanLoad 6000 activates the low flow rateonly. Set program code 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the nexthigher flow rate.
The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter proof for component1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp down the flow ratewith the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is determined by the value ofprogram code 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.
Example:
If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop volumes are 50 gallons, the time at low flow isapproximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program codesthat in any way affect the flow rates, volumes, or meter factors at lower flow rates must be set totheir normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates. After the rackmeter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the program codesthat affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is necessary to re-Prove arack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all lower flow rates in flow rateascending order.
5.2.3 Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 3
At this point the new meter factor, program code 177 Comp 1 meter factor 2, is within toleranceand accepted. The next higher flow rate, program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 is used to determinethe meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum (normal)loading flow rate for component 1. Set program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 to 600.
The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 3 is performed similar to the meter proof for component1 flow rate 2.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 24 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
5.2.4 Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 4 (if Required)
If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would beconducted in a similar manner as described above.
5.2.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2
Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2, 3, and 4 (asrequired) have been determined and entered into program codes 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 (as required).In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be disabled andcomponent 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined recipe for provingcomponent 2 (recipe definitions are in the program code group 480 to 661).
The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can nowbe conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.
The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD, Figure5 - 2, are described below.
Field Description
Station Name of station or terminal.Date / Time Date and time of meter proof.Meter Tag Process tag number of flow meter.Meter S/N Serial number of flow meter.Meter Mfg Manufacturer of flow meter.Meter Model Model number of flow meter.Meter Size Diameter of flow meter.Product Product (component) used for meter proof.API Gravity @ 60 F The API gravity of the product.o
From Tank No. Source tank identification.To Prover Tank No. Destination tank identification (prover tank identification).Initial Totalizer Reading Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 25
Prover Tank Volume Data
1 Flow rate The flow rate that is set in the program code ccc Comp p flow rate rcorresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can beverified by accurately timing the period of delivery to the prover tankthen dividing the volume delivered by the time to deliver. Example:2010.36 gallons delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals 564.7gallons per minute.
2 Delivery to Prover Tank The gross volume delivered to the prover tank, obtained from provertank data and neck sight gauge graduation reading.
3 Tank Temp (Avg) F The average temperature of the product in the prover tank, APIo
recommends average of temperature at top, middle, and bottom.
TSP4 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the prover tanksteel, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 - Table A-1or Table A-2.
TLP5 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in theprover tank, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 orTable 24.
P6 CCF Combined correction factor for the prover tank, obtained by
TSP TLPmultiplying C times C .
7 Corrected Delivery VolumeThe volume, corrected for temperature effects, of liquid in theprover tank, obtained by multiplying Delivery to Tank (line 2) times
PCCF (line 6).
Load Rack Meter Data
8 Mtr m grs load (Final) The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meterproof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs load,Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as applicable.(Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with the currentactive meter factor applied.)
9 Mtr m grs load (Initial) The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run isstarted, equal to 0 at start of delivery.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 26 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
10 Rack Meter Measured Gross VolumeThe gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run, obtainedby subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load (Initial).
11 Rack Meter TemperatureThe temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstreamside of the flow meter (usually upstream).
TLM12 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in theflow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
TLMTable 24. (Note: C is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from theflow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input tothe DanLoad 6000.)
13 Rack Meter Pressure The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream sideof the flow meter (usually upstream).
PLM14 C Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flowmeter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the APIMPMS for additional information.
M15 CCF Combined correction factor for the flow meter, obtained from
TLM PLMmultiplying C times C .
16 Rack Meter Corrected Gross VolumeThe temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volumeaccumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained by
Mmultiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCF .
17 Rack Meter Volume ErrorThe difference between the corrected delivery volume to the provertank and the rack meter corrected gross volume.
18 Rack Meter Percent ErrorThe percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume.
19 Adjustment A calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meterfactor.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 27
20 Current Meter Factor The current active meter factor obtained from program code cccComp p meter factor f corresponding to the component / flow ratecombination being proved. (Obtained from: program code 175 / 177/ 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201 / 203 / 208 / 210/ 212 / 214.)
21 New Meter Factor The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run, obtainedby multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.
Test personnel block Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the meterproof runs, form should be altered as required by your company.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 28 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
5.3 Master Meter Method
A master meter is a flow meter that is used as a reference standard for volume measurementcomparison with rack meters. The volume measured by the master meter is determined by provingthe master meter with a tank prover. The frequency of meter proofs of the master meter must bedetermined by company policy or regional regulations. As a minimum, the master meter should beproved twice a year. If the master meter is proved in mid spring and mid fall, the measurementaccuracy of the master meter will be approximately adjusted for seasonal temperature changes thataffect the temperature of the products handled. The master meter must be proved on each productand at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the master meter providea list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The corresponding meterfactor is then used in the calculation when proving a rack meter with the same product / flow ratecombination.
A meter proof is performed by the master meter method in the following manner.
# Set the loading system valves to the proper positions so that all flow through the rack meterto be proved is routed in series with the master meter. Assure that no leakage or bypass pathsare present at either flow meter or interconnecting pipe.
# Connect an electronic prover counter to the raw pulse output of the master meter.
# A meter proof stabilizing run should be performed first to help stabilize the temperature inthe proof meter / master meter circuit. The stabilizing run is a proof run without datarecorded.
# A liquid batch that satisfies the minimum proof batch requirements stated in the definitionof Master Meter Proof at the beginning of this section is defined and delivered to a tank.
# Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error betweenthe master meter volume [corrected for temperature (and optionally pressure)] and the andthe proof flow meter registration [corrected for temperature (and optionally pressure)].
# A new meter factor is calculated by dividing the volume measured through the master meterby the volume registered by the proof flow meter. The measured through the master meterand the volume registered by the proof flow meter are compensated for the effect oftemperature on the liquid, and optionally compensated for the effect of pressure on theliquid. If compensation calculation is performed for either the master meter or the proof flowmeter, a similar compensation calculation must be performed for the other flow meter.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 29
# Under delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load)during the proof run is greater than the volume measured by the master meter, themeter factor value will be decreased to correct the flow meter measurement error.
# Over delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load) duringthe proof run is less than the volume measured by the master meter, the meter factorvalue will be increased to correct the flow meter measurement error.
# The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into theDanLoad 6000 for the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one ofthe following program codes: 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201/ 203 / 208 / 210 / 212 / 214 dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meterfactor number f (1 to 4).
# The prover counter is manually reset to zero and the steps listed above are repeated until thecorrected meter registration is within 0.02 percent of the corrected prover volume.
5.3.1 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 1
For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that eachcomponent is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal (high)flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four component -four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component (flow meter) ateach flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving is not important.
# Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch throughthe master meter by connecting the master meter in series with the rack meter by highintegrity block valves. All flow must pass through both the master meter and the rack meterno bypass leakage is allowed.
# Connect the master meter to a flow totalizer capable of measuring and displaying indicatedvolume units (without internal meter factor or temperature / pressure compensation) to aresolution of one one-hundredth of a volume unit (such as gallons).
# Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in theprogram codes 480 to 661).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 30 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
# Set program code 169 Number of factors/component to 1 to assure that one the low flow rateis used.
# Verify or set the low flow rate with program code 174.
# Exit the Setup Menu
# At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the minimum proving volume required.
# Initiate the batch delivery.
# Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys todisplay item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated volumeunits delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a volume unit.
# After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in acopy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN 1column.
5.3.2 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 2
At this point the new meter factor, program code 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1, is within toleranceand accepted. The next higher flow rate, program code 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2, is used todetermine the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flowrate that is used as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Setprogram code 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2 to 400.
Set program code 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the nexthigher flow rate. The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meterproof for component 1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and rampdown the flow rate with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times isdetermined by the value of program code 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 31
Example:
If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop volumes are 50 gallons, the time at low flow isapproximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program codesthat in any way affect the flow rates, volumes, or meter factors at lower flow rates must be set totheir normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates. After the rackmeter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the program codesthat affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is necessary to re-Prove arack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all lower flow rates in flow rateascending order.
5.3.3 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 3
At this point the new meter factor, program code 177 Comp 1 meter factor 2, is within toleranceand accepted. The next higher flow rate, program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3, is used todetermine the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum(normal) loading flow rate for component 1. Set program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3, to 600.
The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 3 is performed similar to the meter proof for component1 flow rate 2.
5.3.4 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 4 (if Required)
If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would beconducted in a similar manner as described above.
5.3.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2
Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2 , 3, and 4 (asrequired) have been determined and entered into program code 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 (as required).In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be disabled andcomponent 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined recipe for provingcomponent 2 (recipe definitions are in program code 480 to 661).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 32 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can nowbe conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.
The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD, Figure5 - 3, are described below.
Field Description
Station Name of station or terminal.Date / Time Date and time of meter proof.Product Product (component) used for meter proof.API Gravity @ 60 F The API gravity of the product.o
From Tank No. Source tank identification.To Tank No. Destination tank / vehicle identification.Initial Totalizer Reading Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 33
Master Meter Volume Data
1 Flow rate The flow rate that is set in the program code ccc Comp p flow rate rcorresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can beverified by accurately timing the period of delivery then dividing thevolume delivered by the time to deliver. Example: 2010.36 gallonsdelivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals 564.7 gallons per minute.
2 Master Meter Final ReadingThe indicated volume at the end of a rack meter proving run,obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.
3 Master Meter Initial ReadingThe indicated volume at the start of a rack meter proving run,obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.
4 Master Meter Indicated VolumeThe indicated volume measured by the master meter during the meterproving run. Master Meter Final Reading minus Master Meter InitialReading.
5 Master Meter Temperature, degrees FThe temperature of the product in the master meter during the meter
TLPproving run, used to derive C .
TLP6 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in themaster meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 orTable 24.
7 Master Meter Pressure, PSIGThe pressure of the product in the master meter during the meter
PLPproving run, used to derive C .
PLP8 C Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the mastermeter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.2.
9 Master Meter Meter-FactorThe current active meter factor for the master meter obtained from atank prover meter proving of the master meter. The current mastermeter factor should for the same product and flow rate that is used inproving the rack meter. A table is provided at the end of this sectionfor recording master meter factors.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 34 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
Field Description
P10 CCF Combined correction factor for the master meter, obtained by
TLP PLPmultiplying C times C times the master meter meter-factor.
11 Master Meter Corrected Gross VolumeThe volume, corrected for temperature effect (and optionallypressure effect), of liquid in measured by the master meter, obtained
Pby multiplying Master Meter Indicated Volume (line 4 times CCF(line 10).
Rack meter Data
12 Mtr m grs load (Final) The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meterproof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs load,Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as applicable.(Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with the currentactive meter factor applied.)
13 Mtr m grs load (Initial)The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run isstarted. Equal to 0 at start of delivery.
14 Rack Meter Measured Gross VolumeThe gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run, obtainedby subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load (Initial).
15 Rack Meter TemperatureThe temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstreamside of the flow meter (usually upstream).
TLM16 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in theflow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
TLMTable 24. (Note: C is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from theflow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input tothe DanLoad 6000.)
17 Rack Meter Pressure The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream sideof the flow meter (usually upstream).
PLM18 C Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the rackmeter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the APIMPMS for additional information.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 35
M19 CCF Combined correction factor for the rack meter, obtained from
TLM PLMmultiplying C times C .
20 Rack Meter Corrected Gross VolumeThe temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volumeaccumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained by
Mmultiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCF .
21 Rack Meter Volume ErrorThe difference between the Master Meter Corrected Volume and theRack Meter Corrected Gross Volume.
22 Rack Meter Percent ErrorThe percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume.
23 Adjustment A calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meterfactor.
24 Rack Meter Current Meter-FactorThe current active meter factor obtained from program code cccComp p meter factor f corresponding to the component / flow ratecombination being proved. (Obtained from: program code 175 / 177/ 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201 / 203 / 208 / 210/ 212 / 214)
25 New Rack Meter FactorThe new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run, obtainedby multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.
Test personnel block Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the meterproof runs, form should be altered as required by your company.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 36 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
Program codes 169 to 214 are used to calibrate the DanLoad 6000 for each flow meter, component,flow rate combination.
Code ParameterDefaultAttribute
Options /Values
DefaultValue
Value to Use DuringMeter Proof
METER FACTORS
169 Number of factors/component W&M 1 to 4 2 temporarily set to 1
170 Meter factor method W&M FixedLinear
Fixed
COMPONENT 1 FACTORS
171 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 2000.0 23.0 round meter nameplate K-factorto nearest tenth
172 Master meter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 program code 171 / nameplateK-factor
173 Stop rate W&M 0 to 99999 120 set to inline batch end volume
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 1
174 Comp 1 flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200 set to desired low flow rate
175 Comp 1 meter factor 1 W&M see text
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 2
176 Comp 1 flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
177 Comp 1 meter factor 2 W&M see text
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 3
178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
179 Comp 1 meter factor 3 W&M see text
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 4
180 Comp 1 flow rate 4 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
181 Comp 1 meter factor 4 W&M see text
COMPONENT 2 FACTORS
182 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 round meter nameplate K-factorto nearest tenth
183 Master meter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 program code 182 / nameplateK-factor
184 Stop rate W&M 0 to 99999Yes
120 set to inline batch end volume
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 1
185 Comp 2 flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
186 Comp 2 meter factor 1 W&M see text
Code Parameter Attribute Options Default Meter Proof
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 2
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Attribute Options Default Meter Proof
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 37
187 Comp 2 flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
188 Comp 2 meter factor 2 W&M see text
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 3
189 Comp 2 flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
190 Comp 2 meter factor 3 W&M see text
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 4
191 Comp 2 flow rate 4 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
192 Comp 2 meter factor 4 W&M see text
COMPONENT 3 FACTORS
193 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 round meter nameplate K-factorto nearest tenth
194 Master meter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 program code 193 / nameplateK-factor
195 Stop rate W&M 0 to 99999 120 set to inline batch end volume
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 1
196 Comp 3 flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
197 Comp 3 meter factor 1 W&M see text
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 2
198 Comp 3 flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
199 Comp 3 meter factor 2 W&M see text
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 3
200 Comp 3 flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
201 Comp 3 meter factor 3 W&M see text
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 4
202 Comp 3 flow rate 4 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or highflow rate
203 Comp 3 meter factor 4 W&M see text
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 38 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
Code Parameter Attribute Options Default Meter Proof
COMPONENT 4 FACTORS
204 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 round meter nameplate K-factorto nearest tenth
205 Master meter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 program code 204 / nameplateK-factor
206 Stop rate W&M 0 to 99999 120
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 1
207 Comp 4 flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired high flow rate
208 Comp 4 meter factor 1 W&M see text
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 2
209 Comp 4 flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired high flow rate
210 Comp 4 meter factor 2 W&M see text
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 3
211 Comp 4 flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired high flow rate
212 Comp 4 meter factor 3 W&M see text
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 4
213 Comp 4 flow rate 4 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired high flow rate
214 Comp 4 meter factor 4 W&M see text
METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD Report:
S TATIO N M E TE R TAG M E TE R S /N D ATE TIM E
M E TER M FG M E TER M O D E L M E TER SIZE P R O D U C T API G R AVITY @ 60 FO
FR O M TAN K NO . TO P R O VE R TAN K NO . IN ITIAL TO TALIZE R R EAD IN G
P R O V ER TAN K VO LU M E D ATA R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4
1 FLO W R ATE
2 D E LIV ER Y TO P R O VE R TAN K
3 P R O V E R T AN K TE M P E R ATU R E (AV G ), D E G R E E S F
T S P4 C (TAB LE A-1 / A-2)
T L P5 C (TAB LE 6)
P6 C O M B IN E D C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(LIN E 4 X LIN E 5)
7 C OR RE C TE D D ELIV ER Y V O LU M E
(LIN E 2 X LIN E 6)
R AC K M E TE R D ATA [DANLO AD 6000] R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4
8 MTR M G R S LO AD (FIN AL)
9 MTR M G R S LO AD (IN ITIAL)
10 R AC K M ETE R M EAS U RE D G RO SS V O LU M E
(LIN E 8 - L IN E 9)
11 R AC K M ETE R TE M PE R ATU R E , D E G R E E S F
T L M12 C (TAB LE 6)
13 R AC K M ETE R P RE SS U R E , PSIG
P L M14 C (C H AP 11.2)
M15 C O M B IN E D C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(LIN E 12 X LIN E 14)
16 R AC K M ETE R C OR RE C TE D G RO SS V O LU M E
(LIN E 10 X LIN E 15)
17 R AC K M ETE R V O LU M E E R R O R (LIN E 7 - L IN E 16)
18 R AC K M ETE R P ER C EN T E RR O R (LIN E 17 / L IN E 16)
19 ADJU S TM E N T (LIN E 7 / L IN E 16)
20 R AC K M E T E R C U R R E N T M E T E R-FAC TO R
21 N E W M E TE R FAC TO R (LIN E 19 X LIN E 20)
S IG N ATU R E D ATE R E P R E SE N TIN G
E N G IN E E R
W ITN E S S
R E M AR K S
Figure 5 - 2 (Typical)
METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD Report:
S TATIO N : FR O M TAN K NO : TO TAN K NO : D ATE: TIM E:
P R O D U CT: API G R AVITY @ 60 F: IN ITIAL TO TALIZE R R EAD IN G :O
M ASTE R M E TER D ATA M FG : M O D E L: S ER IAL N O: S IZE: K-FAC TO R :
M AS TE R M E TE R V O LU M E D ATA R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4 R U N 5 AV ER AG E
1 FLO W R ATE
2 M AS TE R M E TE R FIN AL R EAD IN G
3 M AS TE R M E TE R IN ITIAL R EAD IN G
4 M AS TE R M ETE R IN DIC ATE D V O LU M E
(LIN E 2 - L IN E 3)
5 M AS TE R M E TE R TE M PE R ATU R E , D E G R E E S F
T L P6 C (TA B L E 6)
7 M AS TE R M E TE R P RE SS U R E , PSIG
P L P8 C (C H A P 11.2)
9 M AS TE R M E T E R M E TE R -FAC TO R
P10 C O M B IN E D C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(LIN E 6 X LIN E 8 X LIN E 9)
11 M AS TE R M ETE R C OR RE C TE D G RO SS V O LU M E
(LIN E 4 X LIN E 10)
R AC K M E TE R V O LU M E D ATA [DANLO AD 6000] R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4 R U N 5 AV ER AG E
12 MTR M G R S LO AD (FIN AL)
13 MTR M G R S LO AD (IN ITIAL)
14 R AC K M ETE R M EAS U RE D G RO SS V O LU M E
(LIN E 12 - L IN E 13)
15 R AC K M ETE R TE M PE R ATU R E , D E G R E E S F
T L M16 C (TA B L E 6)
17 R AC K M ETE R P RE SS U R E, PSIG
P L M18 C (C H A P 11.2)
M19 C O M B IN E D C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(LIN E 16 X LIN E 18)
20 R AC K M ETE R C OR RE C TE D G RO SS V O LU M E
(LIN E 14 X LIN E 19)
21 R AC K M ETE R V O LU M E E R R O R (LIN E 11 - L IN E 20)
22 R AC K M ETE R P ER C EN T E RR O R (LIN E 21 / L IN E 20)
23 ADJU S TM E N T (LIN E 11 / L IN E 20)
24 R AC K M E T E R C U R R E N T M E T E R-FAC TO R
25 N E W R AC K M ETE R FAC TO R (LIN E 23 X LIN E 24)
S IG N ATU R E D ATE R E P R E SE N TIN G
E N G IN E E R
W ITN E S S
R E M AR K S
Figure 5 - 3 (Typical)
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 41
This table contains meter factors for the master meter derived from tank prover proving of the master meteron up to four different products at up to four different flow rates for each product. The master meter meter-factors are related to component / flow rate assignments within the DanLoad 6000 for reference duringproving of rack meters.
MASTER METER:
Manufacturer / model: ___________________________________________________
Size: _________________________________________________________________
Serial number: _________________________________________________________
Nominal K-factor: ______________________________________________________
Product (component)
Meter FactorDate Master Meter Flow Rate Master Meter Meter-Factor
174 Comp 1 flow rate 1 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1
176 Comp 1 flow rate 2 177 Comp 1 meter factor 2
178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 179 Comp 1 meter factor 3
180 Comp 1 flow rate 4 181 Comp 1 meter factor 4
182 Comp 2 flow rate 1 183 Comp 2 meter factor 1
184 Comp 2 flow rate 2 185 Comp 2 meter factor 2
186 Comp 2 flow rate 3 187 Comp 2 meter factor 3
188 Comp 2 flow rate 4 189 Comp 2 meter factor 4
190 Comp 3 flow rate 1 191 Comp 3 meter factor 1
192 Comp 3 flow rate 2 193 Comp 3 meter factor 2
194 Comp 3 flow rate 3 195 Comp 3 meter factor 3
196 Comp 3 flow rate 4 197 Comp 3 meter factor 4
198 Comp 4 flow rate 1 199 Comp 4 meter factor 1
200 Comp 4 flow rate 2 201 Comp 4 meter factor 2
202 Comp 4 flow rate 3 203 Comp 4 meter factor 3
204 Comp 4 flow rate 4 205 Comp 4 meter factor 4
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
5 - 42 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
This page intentionally left blank.
Section 6
Program Codes
Program Code Attributes
Program Codes
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 1
This section contains descriptions of all program codes. Eachprogram code consists of a three-digit number, an identifyingname, a variable that conveys control or numeric configurationdata to the Danload 6000, and four attributes. The variable partof each program code defines a setup, configuration, or databasevalue. Each program code number / name combination identifiesa unique parameter that is either a setpoint, or limit value, or anoption that defines some method or mode of operation. Dataentry in a value / option field is accomplished by prompting theuser to enter a numeric value, enter an alpha-numeric string, orselect an option from a short list of options (pick list).
Each program code has four program code attributes associatedwith it that can be toggled ON or OFF to provide specific securityrestrictions and status information for selected program codes.
Program codes are displayed in the following format when theDanLoad 6000 is operating in the setup option of Program Mode.
ccc aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa vvv
where:
ccc
A three-digit identifier, this number is unique for each programcode. Program codes numbers are from 001 to 991. (Note:Several numbers in the series are not used.)
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
An alpha-numeric name of up to thirty-four characters thatspecifies the function of the program code. Some names arerepeated several times when the parameter type is repeated forsimilar functions, such as different meters, components, oradditives. However, the three digit program code is alwaysunique.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 2
vvv ...
A value assigned to the program code at setup time or modifiedin the field. Note that the data type displayed and acceptableentry in this field is dependent on the program code variable type.These data types are:
# integer
Whole number without a fractional part or decimalseparator. Example:
078 Maximum preset volume 3000
# real number
A number consisting of a whole part, decimal separator,and fractional part. Example:
130 Factor 1.0
# alpha-numeric string
A message consisting of letter and number characters.Example:
066 Component ID Component #1
# selection
A predefined option selected from a scrollable short list ofoptions. Example:
028 Language English
Section 3 - Setup Contains information on the procedures usedto enter data in the various types of data fields mentioned above.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 3
6.1 Program Code Attributes
Program code attributes are characteristics that are associatedwith each program code. There are four program code attributesfor any program code.
Access to program code attributes is by selection of the ProgramCode Attributes option under the Program Mode Menu. It isassumed that the DanLoad 6000 is in the loading mode with theLoading Display active at this time.
Access program code attributes:
# Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key.# Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to
Enter passcode _________ prompt.# Press the ENTER key.# The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is
displayed.# Press the 9 (down arrow) key repeatedly to select (move
the box cursor over the item) Program code attributes(item five in the list).
# Press the ENTER key.
# Enter the three digit program code in response to theEnter program code prompt message. (Note: One or twopreceding zeros must be entered if the program code isless than 100.)
# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) keyto select (move the box outline cursor over the item) thedesired program code attribute.
# Press the SELECT key to toggle the Yes or No status ofthe program code.
Select different program code:
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key.# Perform steps listed above under Access program code
attributes as desired.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 4
6.1 Program Code Attributes (continued)
Exit program code attribute modification mode:
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toprogram code attributes).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toProgram Mode Menu).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toLoading Mode).
The options for program code attributes are described below.
Read only
Prevent modification, in Setup, of the value of the program codevariable. The message, Read only, is displayed on the messageline of the display if this attribute is set to Yes for thecorresponding selected program code. (Note: Some programcodes can only be modified by internal logic or calculations andare always Read only.)
# NoDisable this attribute for this program code.
# YesEnable this attribute for this program code.
Weights and measures
Prevent modification, in Setup and through communications witha terminal automation system, of the value of the program codevalue, unless the Weights and Measures switch located on theoperator control panel is open (out position). The message,Weights and measures, is displayed on the message line of thedisplay if this attribute is set to Yes for the corresponding selectedprogram code.
# NoDisable this attribute for this program code.
# YesEnable this attribute for this program code.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 5
6.1 Program Code Attributes (continued)
Data logging
Automatically log new values of program codes if modified inSetup. The changes are only logged if program code 702Program code value change log is set to any logging printer anddata logging is enabled by program code 668 Ch. B mode.
# NoDisable this attribute for this program code.
# YesEnable this attribute for this program code. This is thedefault value for all program codes at initial startup time.
Value changed
The value of the program code variable was changed in Setup orvia communications. This program code attribute cannot bechanged manually. The program code attribute is set (Yes)internally if the value was changed and can only be reset (No) bya command from a Terminal Automation System. (Refer toDanLoad 6000 Communications Specification, Part Number 3-9000-674)
# NoProgram code has not been changed in Program Mode orvia communications.
# YesProgram code has been changed in Program Mode or viacommunications.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 6
6.2 Program Code Groups
Program codes are grouped according to their logical functions.Program codes are accessed by the Setup Menu. Figure 6 - 1 isa diagram of the complete menu tree. Figure 6 - 2 contains anoverview of the program code groups. Access to the programcodes is allowed while in the Program Mode. Access to theProgram Mode from the Loading Mode is described below. It isassumed at this time that the DanLoad 6000 is in the LoadingMode with either the Recipe Selection Menu, the AdditiveSelection Menu, or the Loading Display active at this time.
Enter Setup Mode:
# Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key.# Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to:
Enter passcode _________ prompt.# Press the ENTER key.# The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is
displayed.# The box cursor is at the first selection Alarm Reset.# Press the 9 (down arrow) to move the cursor to the Setup
selection.# Press the ENTER key.
# The first display page of the Setup Menu is displayed.# The box cursor is at the first selection Security
Parameters.# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key
to select (move the box cursor over the item) the desiredprogram code group from the list of twenty-four groups,divided into four display pages.
# Press the ENTER key.# The first page of the selected program code group is
displayed.Note: Each program code group is divided into pages ofone to six program codes.
# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) keyto select (move the box cursor over the item) the desiredprogram code. Program codes are not displayed forundefined meters, valves, components, additives, etc.For example, if two meters are configured, then programcodes for meters 3 and 4 are not displayed.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 7
6.2 Program Code Groups (continued)
# Note: The displayed data for each program code isentered for the program code value when the EXIT(ALT+CLEAR) key is pressed to exit the program codegroup. Verify that data is correct before exiting aprogram code group.
Exit Setup Mode:
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to SetupMenu).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (displays SetupComplete).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (resets theDanLoad 6000 and returns to the Loading Mode).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 8
Program Mode Menu
Alarm reset 6 Alarm reset display
Reprint transaction 6 Reprint transaction display
Setup - Setup menu | Program code attributes 6 Program code attributes display | | Set date and time 6 Set date and time display | | Set contrast/backlighting 6 Set contrast/backlighting display | | Diagnostics - Diagnostics menu | | | Reprint cutoff - Reprint end-of-day processing data | | CALMON status - Calibration monitoring Diagnostics Menu Setup Menu Firmware versions Security parameters Additive calibration - Additive meter calibration screen RAM tests Unit parameters Keypad Valve parameters EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) Display Meter parameters Inputs/Outputs Component parameters DUART Delivery parameters ARCNET Digital valve parameters Crash analysis Pulse per unit outputs Show memory Additive delivery parameters Print configuration Factors Exit (ALT+CLEAR) Alarms I/O parameters Additive I/O parameters Component I/O parameters Temperature/pressure/density Recipes Data communications Dynamic data display Data logging Blending Additive pumps/block valves LPG/pressure Transaction storage Transaction ticket Analog inputs Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
Menu Tree - Figure 6 - 1
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 9
6.2 Program Code Groups (continued)
Group Name Used For
001 to 018 Security parameters Operation security
023 to 047 Unit parameters Global parameters
048, 049 V Valve parameters Flow control valves
050 to 061 Meter parameters Flow meters
065 to 077 Component parameters Liquid components
078 to 111 Delivery parameters Batch deliveries
112 to 127 Digital valve parameters Digital flow control valves
128 to 134 Pulse per unit outputs Volume pulses to external equipment
135 to 168 Additive delivery parameters Additive injection
169 to 219 Factors Flow meter factors and flow rates
220 to 279 Alarms Actions and limits
280 to 379 I/O parameters Input / output signal assignments
380 to 399 Additive I/O parameters Additive injection signal assignments
400 to 425 Component I/O parameters Component block valve signal assignments
426 to 479 Temperature / pressure / density Standard quantity calculation
480 to 661 Recipes Product / batch deliveries
Parameters List Overview - Figure 6 - 2a
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 10
6.2 Program Code Groups (continued)
Group Name Used For
662 to 672 Data communications Logging / terminal automation system
679 to 695 Dynamic data display Operator data view (programmable)
696 to 710 Data logging Reports to printer
711 to 799 Blending Product blending control
800 to 817 Additive pumps/block valves Additive pump and block valve control
818 to 833 LPG/pressure LPG pressure control
834 to 902 Transaction storage Allocate storage for transaction and batch loadingdata
920 to 982 Transaction ticket Format control for user defined transaction tickets
983 to 991 Analog inputs v2 CPU board calibration for 4-20 mA and RTD
Parameters List Overview (continued) - Figure 6 - 2b
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 11
6.2 Program Code Groups (continued)
How to Use the Program Code List
The list of program codes on the remaining pages in this sectionis divided into groups as they appear in the Setup Menu.
# The tables in each section summarize each group ofprogram codes in the left-hand column and show thepossible Range/Option and Default settings in the right-hand column.
# Some program code groups are sub-divided into severaltables for ease of reading.
# A detailed description of each program code is locatedbelow the corresponding table.
# If a program code number is unique, that number is used.If several program code numbers are used to identifydifferent devices, components, or additives, each numberis separated by a ‘/’ (slash).
# When the list of program code numbers is too long to list,the actual first number and the actual last number areshown with ellipsis to indicate the missing numbers.(Example: nnn / ... / nnn.)
# The vertical columns in the tables indicate the differentsub-groups of parameters and the actual program codenumber that can be obtained from the corresponding table.
Example: If only one flow meter is specified by programcode 050 Number of meters, the program codes related toflow meter 1 (051 to 052) are displayable and programcodes 054 to 062 for flow meters 2, 3, and 4 are notdisplayable.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (001 to 024 Security Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 12
6.3 Security Parameters
PC# / Function(Six Users) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
001 / 004 / 007 / 010 / 013 / 016 Passcode 0 to 999999999 <6000> (001 only)
002 / 005 / 008 / 011 / 014 / 017 User ID 1 to 16 characters <DanLoad 6000> (002 only)
003 / 006 / 009 / 012 / 015 / 018 Supervisor privilege 0 Yes * (003 only)1 No
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (001 to 024 Security Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 13
6.3 Security Parameters (continued)
Security parameters contain data which defines access passcodesand access privileges for selecting menu options and changingparameter values. Security parameters do not affect operation inthe Loading Mode which is active during batch deliveries. Up toeight users / operators, each with unique access privileges, canbe defined. Passcodes should be maintained and recorded by a“supervisor-privileged” user. If all supervisor-privilegedpasscodes are lost of forgotten, it will not be possible to accessthe DanLoad 6000. A “randomly-generated” emergencypasscode is available from Daniel Customer Service. TheDanLoad 6000 is shipped from the factory with the securityparameters for User 1 set to the following default values /selections.
001 Passcode 6000
002 User ID DanLoad 6000
003 Supervisor privilege Yes
001 / ... / 016 Passcode
This program code assigns a numeric value (one to nine digits)that is used as a unique passcode for the user. Duplicatepasscodes, except for zero (which is not a valid passcode), arenot permitted. A minimum of one passcode must be non-zero.
002 / ... / 017 User ID
This program code assigns an alpha-numeric entry (Up to sixteencharacters) that is used to identify the user / operator with ameaningful name. (Example: Operator # 1, John Jones, orsimilar)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (001 to 024 Security Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 14
6.3 Security Parameters (continued)
003 / ... / 018 Supervisor privilege
This program code enables or disables supervisor privilege for thecorresponding user.
# Yes
The corresponding user has supervisor privileges and thus hasaccess to all program mode menu options includingSetup/Security parameters in order to perform passcodemaintenance.
# No
The corresponding user has supervisor privilege disabled and canaccess only the following menu options:
# Alarm reset
# Reprint transaction
# Reprint cutoff
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (001 to 024 Security Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 15
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 16
6.4 Unit Parameters
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
023 Side stream Blending Yes "Side" stream blending enabledNo "Side" Stream blending disabled *
024 Sequential proportional Yes - “Side” stream sequential blending performed using in-lineproportional blending logic No - "Side" Stream sequential blending performed using in-linenon-proportional logic *
025 Operating mode 0 Auto (* for automation systems)1 Manual (* for local control systems)
026 Unit type 0 Seq. (auto) (* for sequential unit types)1 Seq. (manual)2 In-line (* for in-line unit types)3 Off-rack (not used)4 Dispenser
027 Valve type 0 Std digital *1 Std 2-stage2 Stem sw.
028 Language 0 English * 8 Slovak 16 Vietnamese1 English 2 9 Polish2 Spanish 10 Macedonian3 German 11 Italian4 Portuguese 12 Greek5 Dutch 13 Malay6 French 14 Russian7 Norwegian 15 Croatian
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 17
029 Product units 0 Off1 Bbl2 Dek3 L4 Gal *5 lbs6 kgs
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 18
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
Note: The default for Unit Type is dependent on options specifiedduring initial setup.
Unit Parameters contain data which defines various generaloperating characteristics of the DanLoad 6000.
023 Side stream blending
This program code enables or disables the side stream blending.
024 Sequential proportional
This program code specifies whether the blend of side streamcomponent and primary component is performed as an in-lineproportional blend or an in-line non-proportional blend. Thisprogram code is applicable only when the DanLoad is configuredfor sequential blending for primary components.
025 Operating mode
This program code selects the operating mode of the DanLoad6000 for interaction with a terminal automation system. The datalogging feature operates in the Manual mode, only. Data loggingis not available in the Auto mode. The operating modes are:
# Auto
A terminal automation system maintains bi-directionalcommunications with the DanLoad 6000 and performsmonitoring and control of the batch delivery operations.If used, program code 343 Auto/manual changeovershould be CLOSED to select this option.
# Manual
A terminal automation system can maintain bi-directionalcommunications with the DanLoad 6000 and performsmonitoring of the batch delivery operations. Controlfunctions issued from the terminal automation system arenot accepted by the DanLoad 6000. If used, programcode 343 Auto/manual changeover should be OPEN toselect this option.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 19
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
026 Unit type
This program code selects the method of controlling batchdeliveries. The options are:
# Seq. (auto)
Sequential blending is performed. One to fourcomponents are loaded sequentially, one at a time. Theblock valves are controlled automatically.
# Seq. (manual)
Sequential blending is performed. One to fourcomponents are loaded sequentially, one at a time. Theoperator is prompted to open and close block valves.
# In-line
In-line proportional or in-line non-proportional blending(depending on recipe configuration) is performed. One ormore components are loaded simultaneously with eachcomponent flow measured by a separate flow meter andcontrolled by a separate digital flow control valve.
# Off-rack
Not used.
# Dispenser
A dispenser inherits most of the characteristics of an in-line blender. However, the following differences from anin-line blender should be noted:
- The STOP key stops and ends a batch.
- A primary or secondary alarm stops and ends a batch.
Note: A single component DanLoad 6000 can be either asequential or in-line unit type depending on which othercharacteristics of these unit types are of interest.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 20
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
027 Valve type
This program code selects the flow control valve (FCV) type usedin the system. All flow control valves in the system must be thesame type.
# Std digital
The flow control valve is a standard digital type. Theflow rate is automatically adjusted to match a setpointvalue. The DanLoad 6000 can “lock” the flow rate atconfigured values for the best possible accuracy.
# Std 2-stage
The flow control valve is a standard 2-stage type. Thisvalve type can also be used to control simple on-offvalves. The flow rates achieved are a function of linepressure.
# Stem sw.
The flow control valve is a 2-stage type with stemswitches providing inputs to the DanLoad 6000 to controllow flow start and stop (program codes 294 and 295 forvalve 1, etc.). The flow rates achieved are a function ofswitch adjustment and line pressure. The unit type(program code 026) should be set to “Seq. (Auto)” or“Seq. (Manual)” and initial flow time (program code 049)should be 0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 21
028 Language
This program code selects the language used for the LoadingDisplay and data logging.
# English# English 2 (See notes following list on message
codes.)# Spanish# German# Portuguese# Dutch# French# Norwegian# Slovak# Polish# Macedonian# Italian# Greek (Data logging in English)# Malay (Data logging in English)# Russian (Data logging in English)# Croatian (Data logging in English)# Vietnamese (Data logging in English)# Slovenian (Data logging - no accented characters)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 22
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
English2 in the list above has message numbers appended topermit the use of printed code translation card for otherlanguages. In v5.70, the message number for the “Flow rate toohigh” message was changed from 15 to 6. All available messagecodes are shown below:
01 Enter passcode02 Invalid passcode03 Enter preset volume _STR04 Press START when ready or STOP cancel05 Load in progress06 Flow rate too high meter X07 Batch started - testing display08 Line pack delay09 Memory check failure10 Valve closed early meter X11 Invalid entry - more than maximum12 Invalid entry - less than minimum13 Side not authorized14 Please wait15 Safety Circuit 1 message16 Safety Circuit 2 message17 Flow rate too low meter X18 Unable to close valve meter X19 Timed-out - no flow detected meter X
20 Unauth. flow exceeds limit meter X21 Safety circuit 3 message22 Additive X failure23 Pulse security error meter X24 Temperature failure meter X25 Safety circuit 4 message26 Density failure component X27 Component X block valve not closed28 Data logging memory full29 Pressure failure meter X30 Comms failure channel X31 Unable to maintain blend32 Ramping up to high flow rate33 Ramping down to low flow rate34 Shutting valve35 Use arrow keys and SELECT36 Additive #37 Not available38 Opening block valve39 Invalid recipe (percentages)40 Open block valve - press ENTER41 Close block valve - press ENTER42 Primary or secondary display failure43 Supervisor passcode required44 Original passcode required
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 23
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
45 Power failure46 Storage memory full47 Maximum batches on transaction48 Unable to ramp down49 MPMC X failure50 Calibration failure meter X51 Intermediate level input
029 Product units
This identifies the product (component) units so that conversionscan be made when necessary. In particular, converting additivevolumes to cubic centimeters (during additive calibration) andexternal additive units (during loading). The nominal K-factor inthe Factors setup group specifies the number of pulses per unit ofproduct. The product units should typically be set to the units inwhich the K-factor is specified. For example, if the K-factor is inpulses per U.S. gallon, then the product units should be “Gal”.The default value is “Gal”.
# Off
Undetermined units. (Not recommended)
# BblThe product units are barrels.
# DekThe product units are dekaliters.
# LThe product units are liters.
# GalThe product units are U.S. gallons.
# lbsThe product units are pounds.
# kgsThe product units are kilograms.
See also: Gross and standard product unit mnemonics (programcode 217 and 218).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 24
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
030 Number of data items 0 to 5 <0>
031 #1 Prompt for data item #1 32 characters <Enter data item #1>
032 #2 Prompt for data item #2 32 characters <Enter data item #2>
033 #3 Prompt for data item #3 32 characters <Enter data item #3>
034 #4 Prompt for data item #4 32 characters <Enter data item #4>
035 #5 Prompt for data item #5 32 characters <Enter data item #5>
036 Prompt time-out (s) 0 to 9999 <60>
037 Check display 0 Off *1 Start2 Start/Restart
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 25
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
030 Number of data items
This program code sets the number of data prompts in the generalformat Enter data item #1__________, displayed in the messageline of the display panel. These prompts allow the operator toenter up to five numbers of up to eight digits each number,before the first preset quantity is entered in the Loading Display,i.e. prior to authorization of the transaction. The data items canbe printed on the Batch Summary, Transaction Summary andTransaction Ticket data logs. If the DanLoad 6000 is in aterminal automation system network, the data items can betransmitted to the DanLoad 6000 from the terminal automationsystem in the Authorize Transaction command (refer to CommsSpec, part number ___________) for accounting purposes. Dataitem entries are not validated and do not affect the operation ofthe DanLoad 6000.
031 #1 Prompt for data item #1
This program code contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 1. The default message is Enter data item #1which can be modified to a more descriptive prompt.Example: Enter order number:
032 #2 Prompt for data item #2
This program code contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 2. The default message is Enter data item #2which can be modified to a more descriptive prompt.Example: Enter invoice number:
033 #3 Prompt for data item #3
This program code contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 3. The default message is Enter data item #3which can be modified to a more descriptive prompt.Example: Enter driver number:
034 #4 Prompt for data item #4
This program code contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 4. The default message is Enter data item #4which can be modified to a more descriptive prompt.Example: Enter trailer number:
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 26
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
035 #5 Prompt for data item #5
This program code contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 5. The default message is Enter data item #5which can be modified to a more descriptive prompt.Example: Enter permit number:
036 Prompt time-out (s) (0 to 9999)
The time allowed for various operations in loading mode in themanual operating mode, i.e.- Prompting for a data item.- Prompting for a preset quantity. (“Enter preset quantity”.)- Prompting to start or restart a batch. (“Press START whenready or STOP to cancel”.)- Prompting for an additive selection, i.e. the additive selectionscreen. (See program code 136.)- Ending a transaction with no batch in progress. (See programcode 839.) The time-out is not used in program mode.Typically, the automation system controls the time-out in theautomatic operating mode. (Refer to the DanLoad 6000Communications Specification for details.) Zero disables thetime-out. The default value is 60 seconds.
037 Check display
This program code selects the method of verifying the operationof the display panel. The area of the display that is used todisplay the large digits of the batch-loaded quantity ismomentarily darkened then lightened to verify that all pixels thatform the digits are displayable. The current batch-loaded quantityis automatically re-displayed after completion of the test.
# Off
Disable display panel check function.
# Start
When a batch delivery is initially started, perform thedisplay check after displaying Press START when readyor STOP to cancel on the message line while in theLoading Mode.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 27
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
# Start/Restart
When batch delivery is initially started or subsequentlyrestarted, perform the display check after displaying PressSTART when ready or STOP to cancel on the messageline while in the Loading Mode.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 28
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
038 Date format 0 mm/dd/yy *1 dd/mm/yy2 yy/mm/dd
039 Date separator 0 / (slash) *1 . (dot)2 - (stroke)
040 Decimal separator 0 . (dot) *1 , (comma)
041 Display data rate 0 1200 bps1 2400 bps2 4800 bps3 9600 bps4 19200 bps5 28800 bps *
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 29
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
038 Date format
This program code selects the format of the date for display, dateentry, and logging purposes. Selections are indicated in thetable. Displayed / printed ranges are: month - 01 to 12, day - 01to 31, year - 00 to 99.
# mm/dd/yy
# dd/mm/yy
# yy/mm/dd
039 Date separator
This program code selects the character used to separate themonth, day, and year components of the date.
# / <slash>
# . <dot>
# - <hyphen>
040 Decimal separator
This program code selects the character used to separate thewhole part and fractional part of a real number.
# . <dot>
# , <comma>
041 Display data rate
This program code selects the rate that data is transferred from theprocessor to the local and remote display panels. Data to / fromthe display panel is on a dedicated RS-422 serial link. This linkis normally operated at 28800 bps. If data errors are observed,the data speed may be reduced. Operation at reduced data speedshould only be necessary in cases where a display panel islocated a long distance from the CPU board.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 30
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
042 Transaction # 0 to 9999 <9999>
043 Batch # 0 to 9999 <9999>
044 Additive units 0 cc *1 in32 Gal3 L
045 Round method 0 Trunc1 Up *2 Up/odd
046 Density/gravity scale 1 to 4 <4>
047 Batches/transaction 0 to 10000 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 31
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
042 Transaction #
This program code indicates the sequence number of the currentactive transaction if one is in progress. If a transaction is notcurrently in progress, this parameter indicates the sequencenumber of the last completed transaction.
043 Batch #
This program code indicates the sequence number of the currentbatch loading operation if one is in progress. If a batch loadingoperation is not currently in progress, this parameter indicates thesequence number of the last completed batch loading operation.
044 Additive units
This program code selects the engineering units for display andprintout of additive injection volumes. (Internal engineering unitsdepend on the configured additive injection method.)
# cc 0.0 to 9999999.99 cubic centimeters
# in3 0.0 to 9999999.99 cubic inchesInternal calculation:Vol(in3) = Vol(cc) / 16.387064
# Gal 0.0 to 99999.9999 US gallonsInternal calculation:Vol(Gal) = Vol(cc) / 3785.412
# L 0.0 to 99999.9999 litersInternal calculation:Vol(L) = Vol(cc) / 1000
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 32
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
045 Round method
This program code selects the method for rounding the displayedand printed meter and component quantities to whole numbers.
# Trunc, i.e. truncate
Discard accumulated fractions (tenths) of a quantity.
# Up
IF fractional accumulation is GREATER THAN OREQUAL TO xxxxx.5, add 1 to the whole unitsaccumulation and discard the fractional accumulation.
# Up/odd
IF whole units accumulation is even AND IF fractional(tenths) accumulation is GREATER THAN xxxxx.5,add 1 to the whole units accumulation. IF whole unitsaccumulation is odd AND IF fractional (tenths)accumulation is GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOxxxxx.5, add 1 to the whole units accumulation.
046 Density/gravity scale
This program code defines the number of decimal places to usewhen displaying and printing density or gravity.
Value Format Typical Use
1 xxxx.x density in kg/m3
2 xxx.xx API gravity3 xx.xxx4 x.xxxx density in g/cm , relative density or specific3
gravity
WarningThe density /gravity (program code 46) scale must be enteredappropriately for the density/gravity units and CTL/SPL optionsbeing used.
This must be set carefully since the density/gravity scale is alsoused for mass computation. See Mass adjustment (program codes068 / 071 / 074 / 077).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 33
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
047 Batches/transaction
This program code defines the maximum number of batches thatcan be grouped into each transaction. The message “Maximumbatches on transaction” is displayed when an attempt is made toenter the preset quantity for a further batch. The default value 0indicates that the number batches per transaction is unlimited.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (048, 049 Valve Parameters) _______________________________________________ Section 6 - 34
6.5 Valve Parameters
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
048 Number of valves 1 to 4 <1>
049 Initial flow time (s) 0 to 9.999 < 0.200>
Valve Parameters select the configuration of the flow controlvalves.
048 Number of valves
This program code sets the number of flow control valves in thesystem. A minimum of one flow control valve must be defined.
049 Initial flow time (s)
This program code defines the time (in seconds) during whicheach flow control valve remains in its initial state as defined byits Open method (program codes 115 / 119 / 123 / 127).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (048, 049 Valve Parameters) _______________________________________________ Section 6 - 35
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (050 to 063 Meter Parameters) _____________________________________________ Section 6 - 36
6.6 Meter Parameters
PC# / Function(Four Meters) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
050 Number of meters 1 to 4 <1>
051 / 054 / 057 / 060 Meter ID 5 characters <M1>
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve 1 to “number of valves”<depends on initial setup choices>
053/056/059/062 Side Stream Meter (EthanolMeter)
0 to 4 < 0 > 0 No Side Stream meter
063 Midgrade Primary blend stream meter(Midgrade Gasoline Meter)
0 to 4 < 0 > 0 No Side Stream meter
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (050 to 063 Meter Parameters) _____________________________________________ Section 6 - 37
6.6 Meter Parameters (continued)
Meter Parameters contain data which defines from one to fourflow meters. The first parameter in the group, program code 050Number of meters, sets the total number of component flowmeters in the system. Additive meters are configured separately.The remaining parameters are organized in groups related to eachflow meter.
050 Number of meters
This program code sets the total number of flow meters used inthe system. A minimum of one flow meter must be defined.
051 / 054 / 057 / 060 Meter ID
This program code identifies the flow meter for display andlogging purposes.
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve
This program code identifies the flow control valve that controlsflow through this meter. Note that two meters can use the sameflow control valve.
053 / 056 / 059 / 062 "Side" Stream Meter (Ethanol Meter)
These program codes specify the meter number used as a SideStream Meter.
For example, assume meter 1 as the primary premium blendstream meter used for loading Premium and measures the blendof Premium and Ethanol. Meter 2 as the primary regular blendstream meter used for loading Regular and measures the blend ofRegular and Ethanol. Meter 3 as the side stream meter formeasuring the Ethanol component volume.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (050 to 063 Meter Parameters) _____________________________________________ Section 6 - 38
6.6 Meter Parameters (continued)
Program code 053, 056, 059, and 062 correspond respectively topreset meters 1, 2, 3, and 4 set in PC 051, 054, 057, and 060. Inthe above example meter 1 (PC 051) measures the combinedblend volume of both the Premium component and the Ethanolcomponent, and meter 2 (PC 054) measures the combined blendvolume of both the Regular component and the Ethanolcomponent, Meter 3 (PC 057) measures only the Ethanol volume.
As an example, the user sets program code 053 = 3, 056 = 3, and059=0. This configuration indicates that the Ethanol measured byMeter 3 is passing through the Premium meter 1 (053) andthrough the Regular meter 2 (056). Meter 3 (059) is not beingused to measure a final delivered flow, however the volume beingmeasured by meter 3 flows though meter 1 or meter 2.
063 Midgrade Primary blend stream meter (MidgradeGasoline Meter)
This program code defines the meter number where the sidestream (Ethanol stream) passes through in case of more than twoproduct blending.
Note: This program code is applicable only when DanLoad 6000is configured for inline blending.
For example, meter 1 is for Premium, meter 2 is for Regular andmeter 3 is for Ethanol. Set program code value to 1 if thePremium meter (meter 1) is used to pass the Ethanol forMidgrade product (Blending of Premium, Regular and Ethanol)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (065 to 077 Component Parameters) ________________________________________ Section 6 - 39
6.7 Component Parameters
PC # / Function(Four Components)
Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
065 Number of components 1 to 4 <1>
066 / 069 / 072 / 075 Component ID 16 characters <Component #1>
067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter 0 to number of meters <depends onchoices madeduring initialsetup>
068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment 0.000000 to 999.999999 <0.000000>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (065 to 077 Component Parameters) ________________________________________ Section 6 - 40
6.7 Component Parameters (continued)
Component Parameters contain data which defines from one tofour liquid components. The first parameter in the group,program code program code 065 Number of components, sets thetotal number of components for the system. The remainingparameters are organized in groups of three parameters related toeach component.
065 Number of components
This program code sets the number of liquid components used inthe system. A minimum of one component must be defined.
066 / 069 / 072 / 075 Component ID
This program code identifies the component for display andlogging purposes. For example, during delivery of a sequentialblend, the component currently being loaded is displayed.
067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter
This program code identifies the flow meter (1 to 4) used tomeasure this component. The entry of a zero (0) disables thecomponent, making it unavailable for loading. In a sequentialblending application, all components flow through the samemeter, one at a time.
068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment
This program code sets the component’s “mass computationadjustment” factor (1) such that:
Mass = Std volume x (Density - Buoyancy) x 1
Warning
Whereas the standard volume is typically similar in magnitude tothe gross volume, i.e. a similar number of units, the mass may besubstantially different from either. Thus, when preset/delivery isby mass (program code 80), it is recommended that several"small" batches be loaded to ensure that the DanLoad 6000'sconfiguration is correct before attempting to preset a fullcompartment.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (065 to 077 Component Parameters) ________________________________________ Section 6 - 41
6.7 Component Parameters (continued)
Zero disables mass computation. A non-zero value causes the "standard quantity", i.e. the meter, component, batch and running totalizerstandard quantities, to be computed as mass (using the formula above) rather than standard (temperature and/or pressure corrected) volume.Note: The "meter X std load quantity to 2 decimal places" (data codes 147, 148, etc. per meter) is "std volume" even if the DanLoad 6000is configured to compute mass. If the preset/delivery type (program code 80) is "Std" and there is more than one standard product unitper gross product unit, i.e. if mass is larger than volume in magnitude, then the low flow stop quantity (program code 86, etc. percomponent) may need to be increased (because the low flow stop quantity is gross or standard quantity depending on the preset/deliverytype). The default mass computation adjustment factor is 0.000000. (Buoyancy is configured via program code 426.)
Some example mass computation adjustment factors are:Required Vol
Mass Units Dens 1Units per K-Factor Units
kg L @T kg/m @T 0.0010003
kg L @T g/cm @T 1.0000003
kg L @15°C r.d. 15°C/4°C 1.000000
kg L @60°F r.d. 60°F/60°F 0.999012
kg L @60°F °API (141.5 x 0.999012) / ((°API - Buoyancy) x (°API - Buoyancy + 131.5)),
i.e. a function of the API gravity, e.g. 0.013817 (rounded) for
55.00°API
lb U.S. Gal @60°F r.d. 60°F/60°F 8.337161 (rounded)
ton L @T g/cm @T 0.001000 ** WARNING: DL6000 6000 WILL ROUND TO WHOLE TONS! **, e.g. 50003
L / 4 tons
ton L @T kg/m @T 0.000001 ** WARNING: DL6000 6000 WILL ROUND TO WHOLE TONS! **3
For example, if your K-Factor is for U.S gallons, your density is in relative density 60°F/60°F and you wish to compute mass in
lbs, configure the component’s s to 8.337161.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 42
6.8 Delivery Parameters
PC # / Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
078 Maximum preset qty 5 to 999999 <3000>
079 Minimum preset qty 0 to 999999 <50>
080 Preset/delivery type 0 Gross *1 Std
081 Delivery display type 0 Gross *1 Std
082 Stop key action 0 Low flow *1 Immediate
083 Fall back qty 0 to 99999 <1000>
084 / 090 / 096 / 102 Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 <50>
085 / 091 / 097 / 103 Low flow restart qty 0 to 99999 <20>
086 / 092 / 098 / 104 Low flow stop qty 0 to 99999 <50>
087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s) 0 to 99999 <2>
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s) 0 to 999 <30>
089 / 095 / 101 / 107 Block valve delay (s) 0 to 99 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 43
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
Delivery Parameters contain data which define the batch deliverycharacteristics. The first six parameters in the group, programcode 078 to 083 are global parameters that are applicable to allbatch deliveries. The remaining parameters are organized ingroups of six parameters related to each component. DeliveryParameters provide a unique profile for fine tuning the deliveryof each component.
078 Maximum preset qty
This program code sets the maximum quantity (gross or standard,depending on the preset/delivery type), that can be preset in asingle batch. This must be greater than or equal to the minimumpreset quantity, program code 079.
079 Minimum preset qty
This program code sets the minimum quantity (gross or standard,depending on the preset/delivery type), that can be delivered in asingle batch. A batch cannot be started or restarted if theremaining quantity is less than the minimum preset quantity.This must be less than or equal to the maximum preset quantity,program code 078 Maximum preset qty. The default value is 50.The special value zero (0) bypasses preset quantity entry, i.e. themaximum preset quantity is entered automatically when a batchis authorized, and the operator need only press "START" to startthe batch; the operator should press "STOP" followed by"ALT"+"ENTER" (within one second) in order to enter programmode. The special value one (1) suggests, i.e. automatically pre-types in large digits, the maximum preset quantity as the presetquantity, and the operator can press "ENTER" to preset themaximum preset quantity or "CLEAR" to enter a smaller presetquantity.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 44
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
It is possible to preset and deliver by gross quantity, but todisplay "Loaded" by gross or standard quantity. Similarly, it ispossible to preset and deliver by standard quantity, but to display"Loaded" by gross or standard quantity. However, the"Remaining" quantity is always the preset quantity minus theloaded quantity (gross or standard). This is controlled by thefollowing two program codes.
080 Preset/delivery type
This program code selects the quantity used for preset, loaded,and remaining quantities. Ramp up to high flow rate is alwaysbased on gross quantity. Ramp down to low flow rate and flowcontrol valve closure is based on the quantity specified by thisparameter.
# Gross
Delivered quantity based on gross quantity calculation.
# Std
Delivered quantity based on standard quantity calculation,i.e. net volume or mass.
081 Delivery display type
This program code selects the quantity used for display purposes.
# Gross
Display quantity based on gross quantity calculation.
# Std
Display quantity based on standard quantity calculation.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 45
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
082 Stop key action
This program code selects the method used to suspend a batchdelivery operation after the STOP key is pressed. (Note: TheSTOP key function should not be used for an emergencyshutdown because the power to the permissive circuits is notremoved by this function.)
# Low flow
Ramp to low flow rate before finally closing the flowcontrol valve to stop all flow while keeping the pumprunning. This method of shutdown prevents hydraulicshock in the piping system. (Note: The 086 / 092 / 098/ 104 Low flow stop qty is not delivered during thismethod of shutdown.)
# Immediate
Close the flow control valve and stop the pumpimmediately. This method of shutdown may causehydraulic shock in the piping system.
083 Fall back qty
This program code sets the quantity (gross or standard, dependingon the unit type and preset/delivery type), to deliver at a fall backflow rate before the DanLoad 6000 attempts to ramp up flow rateto the next higher flow rate, i.e. recovery from fall back. A fallback quantity greater than or equal to the maximum presetquantity (largest batch) disables this feature.
Preset/delivery type:Gross
Preset/delivery type:Standard
SequentialUnit type
Recovery from fallback is by grossquantity
Recovery from fallback is by standardquantity
In-lineUnit type
Recovery from fallback is by grossquantity
Recovery from fallback is by grossquantity
084 / 090 / 096 / 102 Low flow start qty
This program code sets the quantity to deliver before controllingthe flow control valve to increase the flow rate to the high flowrate.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 46
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
085 / 091 / 097 / 103 Low flow restart qty
This program code sets the quantity to deliver before controllingthe flow control valve to increase the flow rate to the high flowrate after restarting a suspended batch delivery and after the initialprogram code 084 / 090 / 096 / 102 Low flow start volume hasbeen delivered. The default value is 20 units. Can also be usedfor multiple component sequential blending applications; seeprogram code 219.
086 / 092 / 098 / 104 Low flow stop qty
This program code sets the quantity (gross or standard dependingon the preset/delivery type) to deliver at the low flow rate or stoprate before all flow is stopped. The default value is 50 units.(Note: If this quantity is set to a very low value, the DanLoad6000 may not be able to stabilize the flow rate during delivery ofthe Low flow stop quantity. If this happens, the control valueclosure quantity cannot be accurately computed and the presettarget volume will be missed.) It should be remembered that flowcontrol valves that operate using line pressure typically closemore slowly when line pressure is low.
087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s)
This program code sets the time between starting the pump forthis component and opening the flow control valve when a batchis started or restarted. The default value is 2 seconds.
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s)
This program code sets the time between terminating flowthrough the meter and de-energizing the pump for thiscomponent.
089 / 095 / 101 / 107 Block valve delay (s)
This program code sets the time between opening the componentblock valve and opening the component flow control valve duringstartup. The component block valve is closed after flow has beenterminated by the flow control valve, or when a primary alarm israised.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 47
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 48
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
108 Ramp clicks 0 to 999 <30>
109 Maintenance clicks 0 to 999 <30>
110 Additive pump stop (s) 0 to 9999 <10>
111 Primary component 1 to 4 <1>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 49
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
108 Ramp clicks
This program code selects the maximum number of attempts(flow control valve solenoid clicks) to increase flow rate to ahigher flow rate before halting attempts and maintaining currentor fall back flow rate.
109 Maintenance clicks
This program code selects the maximum number of attempts(flow control valve solenoid clicks) to maintain flow rate beforehalting attempts and going to a lower “fall back” flow rate.
110 Additive pump stop (s)
This program code selects the time delay between the load stopand deenergizing the additive pump outputs (program code 800/ 802 / 804 / 806 / 808 / 810 Pump output).
111 Primary component
This program code defines (by component number) the primarycomponent of a blend which is used to determine a blend error ifthe Blend error method (program code 722) is Grsqtydiff orStdqtydiff. In this case there must be a non-zero percentage of theprimary component in every recipe. This program code is alsoused for line flushing at the end of a delivery, in which case thehighest octane component is usually defined to be the primarycomponent.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (112 to 127 Digital Valve Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 50
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters
PC # / Function(Four Digital Valves) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
112 / 116 / 120 / 124 Low flow % error 2 to 10 <5>
113 / 117 / 121 / 125 High flow % error 2 to 10 <2>
114 / 118 / 122 / 126 Maint clickadjustment
0.000 to 0.500 <0.040>
115 / 119 / 123 / 127 Open method 0 Normal *1 Opened2 Closed
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (112 to 127 Digital Valve Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 51
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)
Digital Valve Parameters contain data which defines the methodfor controlling the operation of digitally operated flow controlvalves. The parameters are organized in groups of fourparameters related to each digital flow control valve.
Digital Valve Parameters are not applicable to other types of flowcontrol valves selected by program code 027 Valve type.
112 / 116 / 120 / 124 Low flow % error
This program code sets the percentage of difference in the actuallow flow rate and the programmed low flow rate (setpoint)allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to theflow control valve. This program code defines the deadband andis only in effect when the low flow rate is established and not ineffect when the flow rate is changing to the low flow rate duringstartup or shutdown. The suggested value is 5 percent. Highervalues may affect measurement accuracy since the flow rate willbe allowed to vary over a wider range without being controlled.
113 / 117 / 121 / 125 High flow % error
This program code sets the percentage of difference in the actualhigh flow rate and the programmed high flow rate (setpoint)allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to theflow control valve. A “high flow rate” is any flow rate greaterthan the low flow start rate or the stop rate. This program codedefines the deadband and is only in effect when the high flowrate is established and not in effect when the flow rate isincreasing to the high flow rate setpoint during startup. Thesuggested value is 2 percent. Higher values may affectmeasurement accuracy since the flow rate will be allowed to varyover a wider range without being controlled.
WARNING
Increasing the low or high flow deadbands may reducemeasurement accuracy since product may not flow out at thesame flow rate each time a batch is loaded.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (112 to 127 Digital Valve Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 52
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)
114 / 118 / 122 / 126 Maint click adjustment (s)
This program code sets the time that is added to the “base” timesthat the valve control solenoids are “toggled on” (to increase theflow rate) and “toggled off” (to decrease the flow rate) duringflow rate maintenance. The base times are 20 milliseconds toincrease the flow rate and 40 milliseconds to decrease the flowrate. The default value is 0.040 seconds, i.e. 60 milliseconds toincrease the flow rate and 80 milliseconds to decrease the flowrate. Decrease this value if flow-rate maintenance adjustmentscause the flow rate to oscillate above and below the required flowrate. Increase this value if flow-rate maintenance adjustments donot significantly change the flow rate. Use increments of 0.01seconds, i.e. 10 milliseconds.
115 / 119 / 123 / 127 Open method
This program code sets the method for controlling the flowcontrol valve during the time specified by program code 049Initial flow time. (Note: This feature is intended for use in multi-component blending systems. The purpose is to allow acomponent with low pumping pressure to start flowing beforeother components with higher pumping pressure.)
# Normal
Flow control valve solenoid 2 is energized during program code049 Initial flow time. (Note: The flow control valve may or maynot “crack open” during the initial flow time depending on theorifice sizes exposed by solenoids 1 and 2, and the upstreampressure provided by the pump.)
# Opened
Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are energizedduring program code 049 Initial flow time. (Note: Thecomponent flows during the initial flow time as the valve tries tobecome fully open.)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (112 to 127 Digital Valve Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 53
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)
# Closed
Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are deenergizedduring program code 049 Initial flow time. (Note: Thecomponent does not flow during initial flow time. This effectivelyincreases the line-pack delay. See program codes 087 / 093 / 099/ 105.)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (128 to 134 Pulse per Unit Outputs) _________________________________________ Section 6 - 54
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
128 Number of pulse per unit outputs 0 to 2 <2> for sequential unit type<0> for in-line unit type
129 / 132 Control meters 4 characters <GXXX>(Only G, S and X are valid)
130 / 133 Factor 0.1 to 10.0 <1.0>
131 / 134 Pulse width (ms) 10 to 87 <20>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (128 to 134 Pulse per Unit Outputs) _________________________________________ Section 6 - 55
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)
Pulse Per Unit Outputs contains data which define the method ofprocessing pulsed outputs for each measured product. The firstparameter in the group, program code 128 Number of pulse perunit outputs, sets the number of pulse per unit outputs that areassigned to discrete outputs (program codes 313 and 314). Theremaining parameters are organized in groups of three parametersrelated to each pulse per unit output. Each output can be setup toprovide different outputs derived from the flow measured throughdifferent flow meters and with different scaling.
128 Number of pulse per unit outputs
This program code sets the total number of pulse per unit outputs.(Note: If more than 2 pulse per unit outputs are needed, theadditive ratio outputs: program code 380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392/ 395 Ratio output with the corresponding program code 140 /145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty set to 1.0 can be used forthis purpose.)
129 / 132 Control meters
This program code selects the flow meter or combination of flowmeters and either the gross or standard quantities to drive thisoutput. Access to internal accumulators for flow meters isassigned by a one to four character string, one character positionfor each flow meter, i.e. the first character specifies theaccumulator for meter 1, the second character specifies theaccumulator for meter 2, etc. The selections for each position inthe string are X, G or S using alphanumeric string-type entry.
# X Flow through this meter is not used fordetermining the control quantity.
# G Use the gross quantity through this meter fordetermining the control quantity.
# S Use the standard quantity through this meter fordetermining the control quantity.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (128 to 134 Pulse per Unit Outputs) _________________________________________ Section 6 - 56
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)
# Example: SXGS
The example shows four character positions whichindicates that four flow meters are defined. The numberof character positions in the string is automatically set tothe number of defined flow meters (program code 050Number of meters). The 'SXGS' selections specify thefollowing quantity sum (combination) is used to drivethe assigned discrete output.meter 1 standard + meter 3 gross + meter 4 standard, donot sum quantity from meter 2
130 / 133 Factor
This program code sets the scale factor for the correspondingoutput. A factor of 1.0 causes the output to be pulsed for eachaccumulated unit of product. A factor of 0.1 causes the output topulse for each one-tenth of an accumulated unit of product. Afactor of 10.0 causes the output to pulse one time for each tenaccumulated units of product.
131 / 134 Pulse width (ms)
This program code sets the duration of output ON pulse in tenmillisecond increments. The OFF time is equal to or greater thanthe ON time. The default pulse width is 20 milliseconds (20milliseconds ON / at least 20 milliseconds OFF, a 40millisecond minimum period which allows a maximum of 25pulses per second).
20 ms 20 ms
=20 ms =20 ms =20ms
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (128 to 134 Pulse per Unit Outputs) _________________________________________ Section 6 - 57
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 58
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters
PC # / Function(Six Additives)
Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
135 Number of additives 0 to 6 <0>
136 Selection method 0 External *1 Prompt2 Inputs3 Recipe4 Multi Rate
137 Inject Percentage 0 to 100 <50>
138 Clean line qty 0 to 9999 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 59
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function(Six Additives)
Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Additive control meters 4 characters <GGGG>(only G, S and X are valid)
140 / 145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty 1 to 9999 <40>
141 / 146 / 151 / 156 / 161 / 166 Injection Method 0 Mech *1 Handshake2 Meter3 Control
142 / 147 / 152 / 157 / 162 / 167 Volume/pulse or K-factor 0.00 to 9999.99<0.00>
143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163 168 Additive per 1000 0.0000 to 999999.9999<0.0000>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 60
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
Additive Delivery Parameters contains data which defineautomatic control injection of up to six additives into thedelivered product stream. The first four parameters in the group,program code 135, 136, 137, and 138, define values andselections that are applicable to all additive deliveries. Theremaining parameters are organized in groups of five parametersrelated to each additive.
135 Number of additives
This program code sets the number of logical additives to becontrolled and/or measured. There may be one or more logicaladditives for each physical additive or additive injector. Eachlogical additive has its own batch and running totalizers that canbe displayed in the dynamic data display or printed on variousdata logs.
136 Selection method
This program code selects the method for selecting additiveswhile in the manual mode or if not overridden in the automaticmode. (Note: Additives can be selected by the TerminalAutomation System via the Authorize Transaction command whilein the automatic mode. Refer to the Danload 6000Communications Specification)
# External
All configured (“Number of additives”) additive ratiooutputs are cycled. An additive can be selected by anexternal contact, e.g. an automation system relay or a keyswitch can close the circuit from the additive ratio outputto the injector.
# Prompt
The local operator is prompted, via the Additive selectiondisplay prior to the start of each transaction, to select theadditives to be injected.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 61
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
# Inputs
Configured (“Number of additives”) additive ratio outputsare cycled only if their corresponding additive selectioninputs are closed during a batch.
# Recipe
The additives specified by the last two characters of therecipe name, entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent ofan additive “bit map” (see below), are selectedautomatically. Multiple additives can be selected perrecipe. The ratio quantity defined in the additive deliveryparameters is used.
# Multi Rate
The additives specified by the last two characters of therecipe name, entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent ofan additive “bit map” (see below), are selectedautomatically. Multiple additives can be selected perrecipe. The ratio quantity defined in the recipeparameters (component 4 percentage) is used. For multiple rates per injector, see Section 3.10.5 for furtherexplanation.
The default value is “External”. The decimal equivalent of theadditive “bit map” for the “Recipe” and “Multi Rate” selectionmethods is computed by adding together the appropriate valuesfrom the right-hand column of the following table:
Additive # Value
1 1
2 2
3 4
4 8
5 16
6 32
For example, if additive 3 is to be injected in recipe 1, then 04should be entered as the last two characters of recipe 1's name(program code 481). For additives 2 and 4, 10 would be enteredas the last two characters.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 62
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
137 Inject Percentage
This program code selects the percentage of the adjusted additiveratio cycle at which injection begins, i.e. the ratio output isswitched on. For the “Mech”, “Handshake” and “Meter”injection methods, injection ends, i.e. the ratio output is switchedoff, after 50% of the adjusted additive ratio quantity has beendelivered. For the “Control” injection method, injection ends, i.e.the ratio output is switched off, when the appropriate quantity ofadditive for the ratio cycle has been metered. The default valueis 50.
Setting the inject percent to 100 and the injection method(program code 141, etc.) to “Handshake” implements the “injectafter ratio quantity” control sometimes required for mercaptaninjection.
138 Clean line qty
This program code sets the additive clean line quantity, i.e. thegross or standard quantity (depending on the configuredpreset/delivery type) of product delivered prior to the end of abatch during which no additive injection takes place, so that thenext batch is not contaminated with the previous batch’s additive.This value should be at least as large as the volume of the pipeand loading arm between the point where additive is injected andthe connection to the vehicle.
For example, if the additive ratio quantity is 40 and the clean linequantity is 50, then for a preset quantity of 1000 the additive ratioquantity is adjusted to 38 so that the required 25 injection cyclesare completed with 50 units of product remaining to be delivered.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 63
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Additive control meters
This program code identifies the product flow meters whosemeasured quantities are used to control additive injection cyclesbased on the additive’s ratio quantity. Flow meters are designatedby relative character positions in a one to four-character alphastring (one character position for each configured flow meter).
# X Flow through this meter is not used fordetermining the control quantity.
# G Use the gross quantity through this meter fordetermining the control quantity.
# S Use the standard quantity through this meter fordetermining the control quantity.
Example: SXGS
The example shows four character positions whichindicates that four flow meters are defined. The numberof character positions in the string is automatically set tothe number of defined flow meters (program code 050Number of meters). The 'SXGS' selections specify thefollowing quantity sum (combination) is used to drivethe assigned additive injection output.meter 1 std + meter 3 gross + meter 4 std, do not sumquantity from meter 2
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 64
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
140 / 145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty
The quantity (possibly a combination of gross and/or standardquantities through multiple component meters) in product units(program code 29) which controls one additive injection cycle.The default value is 40 which is suitable when the product unitsare gallons. A value of 100 or 150 is suitable when the productunits are liters.
141 / 146 / 151 / 156 / 161 / 166 Injection Method
The first two injection methods ("Mech" and "Handshake")totalize additive based on a volume per pulse, and their internaladditive units are cm . The other two injection methods ("Meter"3
and "Control") totalize additive using an additive meter K-factor,and their internal additive units are the configured product units(program code 29). For all four injection methods, the DanLoad6000 converts additive volumes from internal units to externalunits (program code 44) for display and printing. Since theinjection method is configured per additive (program codes 141,146, etc.), one additive can be injected via a simple mechanicalinjector ("Mech") while another can be injected and measured viaan additive panel ("Control"). The default value is “Mech”.Select one of the following:
# Mech
Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed doseper ratio cycle) with feedback. The DanLoad 6000controls the ratio output (if configured) and totalizesadditive using the volume per pulse on input (if afeedback input is configured) or on output (if not).Additive verification is based on the configured requirednumber of feedback pulses per ratio cycle (program code247) and the configured additive error limit (programcode 246).
# Handshake
Additive injection via a handshake cycle for (mercaptan).The DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (ifconfigured) based on the ratio cycle and the feedbackinput, and totalizes additive using the volume per pulse oninput. Additive verification is based on one feedbackpulse per ratio cycle, the configured additive error limit(program code 246) and the configured additive feedbackcount (program code 247) which is interpreted as anumber of seconds.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 65
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
# Meter
Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed doseper ratio cycle) with additive meter. The additive metershould be upstream of the injector cylinder. TheDanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if configured)and totalizes additive using the additive K-factor on input(if a feedback input is configured). Additive verificationis based on the volume of additive per 1000 of product (ifconfigured) and the additive per 1000 error limit (programcode 278).
# Control
Additive control via an on/off valve (variable dose perratio cycle) with additive meter. The DanLoad 6000controls (by manipulating the on/off valve) the volume ofadditive per ratio cycle (unlike the other injectionmethods) and totalizes additive using the additive K-factor on input (if a feedback input is configured).Additive dose per ratio cycle and verification is based onthe volume of additive per 1000 of product and theadditive per 1000 error limit (program code 278). Thevolume of additive per 1000 of product must beconfigured for the "Control" injection method.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 66
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
142 / 147 / 152 / 157 / 162 / 167 Volume/pulse or K-factor
This program code is used for totalizing additive (both authorizedand unauthorized additive flow). This is in “internal additiveunits”. For the “Mech” and “Handshake” injection methods it isthe volume per pulse in cm . For the “Meter” and “Control”3
injection methods, it is the additive meter’s K-factor, i.e. pulsesper product unit (Product units per program code 29). Anadditive meter’s nominal K-factor is usually marked on the meter,and provides a good starting value. The additive meter’s actualK-factor can be determined using the additive meter calibrationscreen (accessible from the Program Mode menu). Internaladditive units are converted to external additive units for display,printing and communications via the configured Additive units(program code 044).
The default value is 0.00.
143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163 /168 Additive per 1000
The required volume of additive (in product units specified byprogram code 029) per 1000 units of product. When a non-zerovalue is configured, the DanLoad 6000 verifies that the volumeof additive is within limits (program codes 272, 273 and 278)during a batch and calculates the actual percentage of the requiredadditive per 1000 continuously throughout a batch (data code 239for additive 1, etc.). Thus, “additive volume verification” can beenabled independently of the additive injection method (programcodes 141, 146, etc.). An additive failure alarm is raised if themeasured volume of additive is not within limits during a batch.This is a primary alarm which stops the batch. It is usuallynecessary to correct the problem, end the batch and start a newbatch for the remaining quantity of product.
The default value is 0.0000.
Conversions:
1) Additive PPM = Additive per 1000 x 1000
2) Additive per 1000 = Additive PPM / 1000
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 67
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 68
6.12 Factors
PC # / Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
169 Number of factors/component 1 to 4 <2>
170 Meter factor method 0 Fixed *1 Linear
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor 0.5 to 2000.0 <23.0>
172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor 0.5000 to 2.0000 <1.0000>
173 / 284 / 195 / 206 Stop rate 0 to 99999 <120>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 69
6.12 Factors (continued)
Factors contains data which define the flow meter calibrationcharacteristics for up to four components at up to four differentflow rates for each component. The first two parameters in thegroup, program code 169 and program code 170, apply to thecalculation of all factors; the remaining parameters are organizedin groups of three parameters related to each defined componentand groups of two parameters related to each defined flow rate forthat component, thus allowing different components that flowthrough the same flow meter. e.g. in a sequential blendingapplication, to have different meter factors for that meter.
169 Number of factors/component
[Sequential unit] Number of flow rates at which to control theflow rate and to calibrate each component’s meter.
[In-line units] Number of flow rates at which to calibrate eachcomponent’s meter.
This program code sets the number of meter factors, determinedat different flow rates, available for each flow meter andcomponent combination. The lowest flow rate, for low flowstartup and shutdown, must be entered first
(Component # factor 1), the highest flow rate must be enteredlast (Component # factor 1, 2, 3, or 4).
Each configured flow rate lower than the highest flow rate can beconsidered to be a “fall back flow rate” if the highest flow ratecannot be achieved or maintained.
170 Meter factor method
This program code selects the method used to determine themeter factor used in the flow calculation.
Note: The Meter factor method MUST be set to “Fixed” duringmeter proving.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 70
6.12 Factors (continued)
# Fixed
The meter factor that was determined at a flow rate that is closestto the current flow rate is used. Fixed is normally selected fordigital flow control valves in single component or sequentialblending loading operations.
# Linear
The meter factor is calculated by an interpolation process thatuses the meter factors determined at the next highest flow rate andthe next lowest flow rate from the current flow rate. A ratiobetween the two flow rates and the corresponding two meterfactors is determined. The current meter factor is calculatedassuming that the meter factor value increments are linearbetween the two proved meter factors and based on the currentflow rate and the ratio. Linear is sometimes selected for 2-stageflow control valves or in-line blending when the meter cannot becalibrated at every possible flow rate that will be seen. However,the meter factor method must be set to “Fixed” during meterproving.
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor
This program code sets the nominal pulses per product unitreceived from the flow meter. The K-factor is sometimes referredto as the system factor and is usually printed on the flow meternameplate. The default value is 23.0 which is the nominal pulsesper gallon for a Daniel 4-inch diameter LR turbine meter. Thisentry should always be set to match the K-factor of the actualflow meter and should not be changed during meter proving. AK-factor of at least 10 is recommended, and the meter-pulse inputfrequency at low flow should not be less than 40 Hz, particularlyif a digital flow control valve is used.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 71
6.12 Factors (continued)
172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor
This program code sets the number used internally to verify theprobability of a valid meter factor entry. All meter factors for thiscomponent must be within the ± percent (set by program code215 Master MF %) of this value or the meter factor entry isconsidered to be out of range. The master meter factor is not usedin flow computations.
Example: Assume program code 215 equals 2.00 (2 %). If thisentry is 1.0000, acceptable meter factors for any of thecorresponding program codes 175 / ... / 214 Component # meterfactor # entries are 0.9800 to 1.0200.
173 / 184 / 195 / 206 Stop rate
This program code defines the flow rate at which this componentis delivered during the component’s configured low-flow stopquantity at the end of an in-line batch. Thus, the final closure ofthe flow control valve is always from the same flow rate so that“valve closure averaging” will work correctly, independent of theindividual component blend percentages in the recipes. This alsomeans that the overall flow rate at the end of a batch is the sum ofthe stop rates of any flowing components. The default value is120.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 72
6.12 Factors (continued)
PC # /Function (Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Flow rate 1 0 to 99999 <200>
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Meter factor 1 per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Flow rate 2 0 to 99999 <600>
177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Meter factor 2 per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Flow rate 3 0 to 99999 <0>
179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Meter factor 3 per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Flow rate 4 0 to 99999 <0>
181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Meter factor 4 per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
215 Master MF % 0.00 to 99.99 <2.00>
216 Adjacent MF % 0.00 to 99.99 <0.25>
217 Gross units mnemonic 6 characters <Gal>
218 Std units mnemonic 6 characters <Gal>
219 Use restart qty 0 No *1 Yes
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 73
6.12 Factors (continued)
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Flow rate 1
This program code sets the value in quantity per minute at whichthe meter factor for the low flow rate is established. Engineeringunits for flow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling(program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for thecomponent. The units entered for this parameter are GPM,dLPM, LPM, etc.
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Meter factor 1
This program code sets the meter factor that is used for thecorresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Flow rate 2
This program code sets the value in quantity per minute at whichthe meter factor for the high flow rate, or an intermediate flowrate, is established. Engineering units for flow rates aredetermined by the K-factor scaling (program code 171 / 182 /193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for the component. The unitsentered for this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, etc.
177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Meter factor 2
This program code sets the meter factor that is used for thecorresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 74
6.12 Factors (continued)
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Flow rate 3
This program code sets the value in quantity per minute at whichthe meter factor for the high flow rate, or an intermediate flowrate, is established. Engineering units for flow rates aredetermined by the K-factor scaling (program code 171 / 182 /193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for the component. The unitsentered for this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, etc.
179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Meter factor 3
This program code sets the meter factor that is used for thecorresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Flow rate 4
This parameter sets the value in quantity per minute at which themeter factor for the high flow rate is established. Engineeringunits for flow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling(program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for thecomponent. The units entered for this parameter are GPM,dLPM, LPM, etc.
181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Meter factor 4
This parameter sets the meter factor that is used for thecorresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 75
6.12 Factors (continued)
215 Master MF %
This program code sets the percentage bandwidth for limit checksof the individual Component p meter factor f referenced to theprogram code 172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor. Thedefault value is 2.00 which limits any program code 175 / ... / 214Component p meter factor f entry to ± 2 percent of thecorresponding program code 172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meterfactor for the component (meter).
216 Adjustment MF %
This program code sets the allowable percentage differencebetween any two adjacent meter factors. Adjacent meter factorsare:[program code 175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Component p meter factor1 and program code 177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Component p meterfactor 2]
[program code 177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Component p meter factor2 and program code 175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Component p meterfactor 1 and program code 179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Component pmeter factor 3]
[program code 179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Component p meter factor3 and program code 177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Component p meterfactor 2 and program code 181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Component pmeter factor 4]
[program code 181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Component p meter factor4 and program code 179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Component p meterfactor 3]Entering 0.00 disables the validation.The default value is 0.25 percent.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 76
6.12 Factors (continued)
217 Gross units mnemonic
The gross product units mnemonic independent of the configuredproduct units (program code 29) for display on the loading screenand printing on data logs. This allow the units mnemonic to beentered in any language of local abbreviation. Six characteralphanumeric entry. The default value is “Gal”.
218 Std units mnemonic
The standard quantity units mnemonic independent of theconfigured product units (program code 29) for display on theloading screen and printing on the data logs. This allows theunits mnemonic to be entered in any language or localabbreviation. Six character alphanumeric entry. The defaultvalue is “Gal”.
219 Use restart qty
For sequential unit type, this code indicates whether or not acomponent’s low flow restart quantity should be used for startingup components after loading the first component in the recipe’s“sequence to load”. Select one of the following:
# No
Start up each component by loading its low flow startquantity at its low flow rate.
# Yes
Start up the first component by loading its low flow startquantity at its low flow rate. Start up further componentsby loading their low flow restart quantities at their lowflow rates. This typically reduces the time required toload a sequential blend batch.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 77
6.13 Alarms
The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that alarm. The four possible alarm actionsare described below. The alarm actions for several alarms are limited to less than four selections. Alarm action for several alarms is fixedand not selectable. The allowable alarm action selections for each alarm are listed for each alarm parameter.
Alarm Action Description Reset
Primary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended. A message is displayed on the message line of the display panel.Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared.Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are ON.Alarm discrete output, program code 287 Alarm output 1 is maintained closed (if defined andenabled by program code 269 Alarm o/p 1 mask). Alarm discrete output program code 379 Alarmoutput 2 is maintained closed (if defined and enabled by 270 Alarm o/p 2 mask).
Keypad in program Mode.
Alarm reset discrete input, program code344 Primary alarm reset (if defined).
Terminal automation system.
Secondary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended. A messageis displayed on the message line of the display panel.Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary alarm reset time has elapsed.Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are flashing.Alarm discrete output, program code 287 Alarm output 1 is pulsed (if defined and enabled byprogram code 269 Alarm o/p 1 mask). Alarm discrete output program code 379 Alarm output 2 ispulsed (if defined and enabled by 270 Alarm o/p 2 mask).
Correct cause of alarm
Automatically reset after time value inprogram code 220 Secondary alarm reset(s) has elapsed. The batch can be restarted(“Press START when ready or STOP tocancel”) if the remaining quantity is notless than the min. preset.
Info A message is displayed on the message line of the display panel for ten seconds. Automatically reset after ten seconds haveelapsed.
Off Disable monitoring of this alarm. N/A
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 78
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # /Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
220 Secondary alarm reset (s) 0 to 9999 <300>
221 Low flow alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary3 Primary *
222 Minimum flow rate 0 to 99999 <100>
223 Low flow time (s) 5 to 999 <10>
224 High flow alarm action 0 Off1 Info3 Primary *
225 Maximum flow rate 0 to 99999 <660>
226 High flow time (s) 5 to 999 <10>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 79
6.13 Alarms (continued)
Alarms Parameters contain data which defines the conditions thatgenerate alarms and the method that the DanLoad 6000 respondsto alarms. Multiple alarms can be processed simultaneously.Alarms are processed in the chronological order that they aredetected. The first parameter, program code 220 Secondaryalarm reset (s), is applicable to all alarms that have the alarmaction set to Secondary. All other alarm parameters are related tospecific alarm actions or limits.
The response to any alarm is handled by a specific alarm action.There are up to four possible alarm actions for any alarm. Insome cases, the alarm action is permanently set at one option andcannot be modified. Alarm action selections are located inrelation to associated alarm parameters in the following alarmtables.
220 Secondary alarm reset (s)
This program code sets the elapsed time to allow a secondaryalarm to be active before it is cleared automatically. The defaultvalue is 300 seconds.
221 Low flow alarm action
This program code selects the response to a low flow condition.If Secondary is chosen the batch is stopped without an alarmbeing raised if the flow rate falls below the configured minimumflow rate (program code 222) for the configured low flow time(program code 223). The default selection is Primary.
222 Minimum flow rate
This program code sets the value of the minimum flow ratepermitted for the time period set in program code 223 Low flowtime (s) before the low flow alarm is set. The default entry is 100product units per minute.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 80
6.13 Alarms (continued)
223 Low flow time (s)
This program code sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at orless than the flow rate specified by program code 222 Minimumflow rate before the low flow alarm is set.
224 High flow alarm action
This program code selects the response action to a high flowcondition. The default selection is Primary.
225 Maximum flow rate
This program code sets the value of the maximum flow ratepermitted for the time period set in program code 226 High flowtime (s) before the high flow alarm is set. The default entry is 660product units per minute. (Note: Set this value slightly greaterthan the highest expected flow rate through any single meter.This setting enables the DanLoad 6000 to detect loss of controlof a flow control valve and alarm the condition.)
226 High flow time (s)
This program code sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at orgreater than the flow rate specified by program code 225Maximum flow rate before the high flow alarm is set.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 81
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 82
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
227 Overrun limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <2.0>
228 Underflow alarm action 0 Off *3 Primary
229 Underflow limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <5.0>
230 No flow t-o alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary3 Primary *
231 No flow t-o time (s) 1 to 99 <5>
232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <10>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 83
6.13 Alarms (continued)
227 Overrun limit qty
This program code sets the allowable quantity in excess of thepreset quantity to be delivered before the Unable to close valvemeter # alarm is set.
228 Underflow alarm action
This program code selects the response to an underflowcondition. The default selection is Off.
229 Underflow limit qty
This program code sets the allowable quantity by which theloaded quantity can be less than the preset quantity before theValve closed early meter # alarm is issued.
230 No flow t-o (time out) alarm action
This program code selects the response to a no flow condition. Ifthere is no flow through a meter when there should be flow, i.e.the appropriate flow control valve has been opened, for theconfigured no flow time-out time (program code 231). IfSecondary is chosen, the batch is simply stopped without analarm being raised The default selection is Primary.
WARNINGThe no flow alarm is important for detecting meter pulsestream failures, and should not be disabled without carefulconsideration.
It may be necessary to disable the no flow alarm in applicationswhere the DanLoad 6000 does not operate the flow control valve.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 84
6.13 Alarms (continued)
231 No flow t-o time (s)
This program code sets the elapsed time to allow for no flowpulse input to be detected after opening the flow control valve.The default value is 5 seconds. (Note: This delay can be set to1 or 2 seconds if detection of a meter pulse input failure or othercause of the no flow condition must be detected immediately.)
232 Unauthorized flow limit quantity
This program code sets the allowable quantity to be recorded asunauthorized flow before the Unauthorized flow exceeds limitmeter # primary alarm is issued. The default value is 10 productunits.
If the unauthorized flow quantity is set to “something point 1",e.g. 0.1, 1.1 or 2.1, then a meter’s unauthorized flow counter (theinternal one that causes the alarm to be raised, not the runningtotalizer seen in the dynamic data display or by the automationsystem) is cleared whenever the meter is authorized for a batch;this prevents the “unauthorized flow alarm will eventuallyhappen” problem.
With the dual pulse stream pulse security option, the DanLoad6000 has the ability to eliminate “spurious” unauthorized flowpulses that can occur with turbine or PD meters due to vibrationaleffects.
The default value is 10.0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 85
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 86
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
233 Error limit (pulses) 0 to 255 <0>
234 Reset count (pulses) 0 to 65535 <10000>
The pulse security function provides verification of meter pulseinputs per API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards,Chapter 5 - Metering, Section 5 - Fidelity and Security of FlowMeasurement Pulsed-Data Transmission Systems and IP 252,Part XIII - Fidelity and Security of Measurement-DataTransmission Systems. This function can only be implemented ifthere are two meter pulse train inputs from a single flow meter.The dual meter pulse inputs must be 90 degrees electrically out ofphase. Turbine meters capable of implementing this functionmust have two pick-up coils, 90 degrees electrically out of phase,and two preamplifiers. Positive displacement meters must havedual pulse transmitters.
Pulse stream “A” is used for measuring flow. Pulse stream “B”is used for verification and should trail pulse stream “A” byaround 90 degrees electrically.
A jk_jk_jk_jk_jk_
B jk_jk_jk_jk_jk_
)))))))))6 time
DanLoad 6000 dual pulse security is available per the IP252level-B standard. This is accomplished by monitoring the twometer pulse inputs that are electrically 90° ± 89° out of phase.The algorithm is in the firmware of a Program Logic DeviceIntegrated Circuit (PLD).
The PLD performs a level B security check while a load is inprogress. The Channel A input stream is sent directly to the CPUfor totalizing the product flow.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 87
6.13 Alarms (continued)
Channel B is used as a comparison input stream to determineflow direction and errors. The PLD samples the two inputstreams at 6 MHZ and watches for a state transition in eitherchannel. As soon as one of the channels changes states, the PLDdetermines if it was a forward transition. If the change was not aforward transition, the PLD decrements the error counter by one.As soon as the error counter reaches zero, the meter board triggersan interrupt to the CPU which will halt the load.
While in a no load condition, the PLD will set a REV flag if anyreverse state transitions are seen. This will inhibit channel Aoutput to the CPU. A forward transition will clear the REV flagand enable channel A output to the CPU on the next forwardtransition. This will eliminate any pulses sent by a blade rockingacross a pick-up.
The level-B security-checking PLD is U9 on the 2-Channel MeterPulse board or U9 and U10 on the 4-Channel Meter Pulse board.
Possible Pulse Security Inputs
Meter Pulse BoardsInstalled
MAX # of Meterswith Pulse Security
one 2-channel 1
two 2-channel 2
one 2-channel and one 4-channel 3
two 4-channel 4
233 Error limit (pulses)
This program code sets the error count at which a pulse securityalarm occurs. Pulse security checks are performed only when aload is in progress. This value is used to reload an 8-bit hardwarecounter, which generates an interrupt when it counts down tozero, i.e. error limit exceeded. Zero disables pulse security. Thedefault value is 0, i.e. no pulse security.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 88
6.13 Alarms (continued)
234 Reset count (pulses)
This program code sets the value of raw pulses accumulatedduring pulse error checking before resetting the accumulator tozero. This value defines a window of accumulated raw pulsesthat is used to determine if program code 233 Error limit valueis exceeded. A zero entry resets the error count only at the startof each batch delivery. A value greater than zero indicates thatthe accumulated error count will be cleared each time theaccumulated raw pulses equal the entry. This field is not used ifthe value of program code 233 Error limit is set to zero.
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
235 Data logging alarm action 0 Info *3 Primary
236 Time-out ch. A (s) 0 to 300 <10>
237 Time-out ch. B (s) 0 to 300 <10>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 89
6.13 Alarms (continued)
235 Data logging alarm action
This program code selects the response to a data logging memoryfull condition. This condition is caused by failure to print datalogs due to the logging printer being off-line, out of paper, orsome other disabling condition. Around 10 pages of data logs are“spooled” to battery-backed memory before the alarm is raised,and are printed automatically as soon as the problem with thelogging printer is rectified. The default selection is Info.
236 Time-out ch. A (s)
This program code sets the time-out (in seconds) for the “Commsfailure channel A” alarm, which is a primary alarm. The alarm israised when the DanLoad 6000 is in “Auto” (program code 25)and the channel’s communications mode (program code 663) isconfigured for “Modbus RTU”, i.e. automation systemcommunications, and the DanLoad 6000 does not receive a query(with its communications address) on the channel for theconfigured number of seconds. Zero disables the alarm. Thedefault value is 10.
237 Time-out ch. B (s)
This program code sets the time-out (in seconds) for the “Commsfailure channel B” alarm, which is a primary alarm. The alarm israised when the DanLoad 6000 is in “Auto” (program code 25)and the channel’s communications mode (program code 668) isconfigured for “Modbus RTU”, i.e. automation systemcommunications, and the DanLoad 6000 does not receive a query(with its communications address) on the channel for theconfigured number of seconds. The “Comms failure channel B”alarm can also be raised in the manual operating mode. Seeprogram code 673. Zero disables the alarm. The default value is10.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 90
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
238 Temp fail alarm action 0 Off1 Info3 Primary *
239 Minimum temperature -999.9 to 999.9 <-40.0>
240 Maximum temperature -999.9 to 999.9 <110.0>
241 Density fail alarm action 1 Info3 Primary *
242 Minimum density/gravity -9.9999 to 9.9999 <0.0000>
243 Maximum density/gravity -9.9999 to 9.9999 <0.0000>
244 Minimum pressure 0.0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
245 Maximum pressure 0.0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
246 Additive error limit 1 to 99 <3>
247 Additive Feedback count 0 to 9999 <0>
248 Block valve time (s) 0 to 99 <10>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 91
6.13 Alarms (continued)
238 Temp fail alarm action
This program code sets the temperature to use (live or backup)and selects the response to a temperature out-of-range condition.“Live temperature” refers to temperature read from an RTD input.“Backup temperature” refers to a value in Setup.
# Off
Use backup temperature from program code 434 / 437 /440 / 443 backup temperature entry.
# Info
Use live temperature if in limits of program code 239Minimum temperature and program code 240 Maximumtemperature else use program code 434 / 437 / 440 / 443Backup temperature.
# Primary
Use live temperature only and halt loading if it is out oflimits set by program code 239 Minimum temperature andprogram code 240 Maximum temperature.
239 Minimum temperature
This program code sets the minimum allowable processtemperature input from an RTD before the Temperature failuremeter # alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified byprogram code 427 Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheitor degrees Celsius). The default value is -40.0 degrees.
240 Maximum temperature
This program code sets the maximum allowable processtemperature input from an RTD before the Temperature failuremeter # alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified byprogram code 427 Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheitor degrees Celsius). The default value is +110.0 degrees.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 92
6.13 Alarms (continued)
241 Density fail alarm action
This program code selects the response to a process density inputout of range condition. The default selection is Primary.
242 Minimum density/gravity
This program code sets the minimum allowable process densityinput from a densitometer before the Density failure component# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on theselection of program code 432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperatureoption corresponding to the component. The decimal pointlocation in this field is dependent on the setting in program code046 Density/gravity scale.
243 Maximum density/gravity
This program code sets the maximum allowable process densityinput from a densitometer before the Density failure component# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on theselection in program code 432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperatureoption corresponding to the component. The decimal point
location in this field is dependent on the setting in program code046 Density/gravity scale.
244 Minimum pressure
This program code sets the minimum allowable process pressureinput from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failuremeter # alarm is issued. Refer to Section 4.5.1 Alarm Messagesfor possible minimum pressure failure causes.
245 Maximum pressure
This program code sets the maximum allowable process pressureinput from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failuremeter # alarm is issued. Refer to Section 4.5.1 Alarm Messagesfor possible maximum pressure failure causes.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 93
6.13 Alarms (continued)
246 Additive error limit
For the “Mech” and “Handshake” injection methods this is themaximum number of pulses by which the actual feedback pulsecount can differ from the ideal feedback pulse count before anadditive failure alarm is raised. The ideal feedback pulse countis based on the additive feedback count (program code 247), or is1 for the “Handshake” injection method (independent ofconfiguration). The default value is 3.
247 Additive feedback count
This program code sets the expected number of feedback pulsesper additive ratio cycle for the “Mech” additive injection method,e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3 “confirmation pulse”, 2 for Hyrolecinjector. The number of seconds within which the additivefeedback input must go on and off again after the additive ratiooutput has been energized for the “Handshake” additive injectionmethod, e.g. 5 (per Mapco). The default value is 0.
248 Block valve time (s)
This program code sets the time period allowed for anycomponent block valve to close. The default value is 10 seconds.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 94
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
249 Circuit 1 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
250 #1 <message> Up to 32 characters<Ground detector open>
251 Circuit 2 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary 3 Primary *
252 #2 <message> Up to 32 characters<Overspill detector open>
253 Circuit 3 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
254 #3 <message> Up to 32 characters<Permissive power failure>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 95
6.13 Alarms (continued)
Safety Circuit Alarm Action
Note: Refer to Section 4.5.1 for alarm message and alarm actionconfiguration.
Alarm program codes 249 to 268 define the operation of eightconfigurable safety circuit inputs (permissive circuits). All eightsafety circuits are configurable to be either side independent ordedicated to side 1 or dedicated to side 2. The safety circuit 3 and4 alarms have alternate uses as the “end” and “recipe selection”alarms respectively. Safety Circuit #3 can also be used as theadditive meter flush alarm in multi-stream injection mode, if soconfigured.
The physical discrete inputs for the safety circuits are assignedwith program codes 345 to 352.
249 Circuit 1 alarm action
This program code selects the response (either primary orsecondary alarm action) to an OPEN state for the discrete inputassigned to this function by program code 344 Safety circuit 1.
# Off
The associated input, if any, is read, and its current statusis made available in the dynamic data display (ifconfigured) and via the automation system Request Statusand Enhanced Request Status commands. The DanLoad6000 performs no other processing on the input. Thisallows an automation system to process discrete inputsindependently of the DanLoad 6000 with nocommunications overhead.
# Info
If the associated input (safety circuit input or “redirected”input) is open at any time in loading mode, i.e. in therecipe selection screen, the additive selection screen or theloading screen, and there is no “higher priority”(secondary or primary) alarm active then the associatedalarm message is displayed for the first 10 seconds ofevery 15 second period. If multiple informational safetycircuit alarms are active, the associated alarm messagesare displayed in rotation, i.e. a new message every 15seconds.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 96
6.13 Alarms (continued)
An informational safety circuit alarm neither prevents a batchfrom being started nor stops a batch in progress. There is nodiscrete output (alarm output) associated with an informationalsafety circuit alarm. Safety circuits may be side-dependent evenif configured as informational.
# Secondary
# Primary
The default is “Secondary”.
250 #1 <Ground detector open>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
251 Circuit 2 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 346Safety circuit 2.
See program code 249 for options and descriptions. The defaultvalue is “Primary”.
252 #2 <Overspill detector open>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
253 Circuit 3 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 347Safety circuit 3 and program code 424 End input. See programcodes 249, 423 and 425 for multi-purpose options anddescriptions. The default value is “Secondary”.
254 #3 <Permissive power failure>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit, the default message is indicated above.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 97
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 98
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
255 Circuit 4 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
256 #4 <message> Up to 32 characters <Additive injection failure>
257 Circuit 5 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
258 #5 <message> Up to 32 characters <Arm down side 1>
259 Circuit 6 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
260 #6 <message> Up to 32 characters <Arm down side 2>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 99
6.13 Alarms (continued)
255 Circuit 4 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 348Safety circuit 4. If program code 348 Safety circuit 4 is set to 0,then program codes 361 through 366 Recipe X input are enabled.See program code 249 for options and descriptions. The defaultvalue is “Secondary”.
256 #4 <Additive injection failure>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
257 Circuit 5 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 349Safety circuit 5. See program code 249 for options anddescriptions. The default value is “Secondary”.
258 #5 <Arm down side 1>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
259 Circuit 6 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 350Safety circuit 6. See program code 249 for options anddescriptions. The default value is “Secondary”.
260 #6 <Arm down side 2>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 100
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
261 Circuit 7 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
262 #7 <message> Up to 32 characters <Walkway down side 1>
263 Circuit 8 alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary *3 Primary
264 #8 <message> Up to 32 characters <Walkway down side 2>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 101
6.13 Alarms (continued)
261 Circuit 7 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 351Safety circuit 7. See program code 249 for options anddescriptions. The default value is “Secondary”.
262 #7 <Walkway down side 1>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
263 Circuit 8 alarm action
This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by program code 352Safety circuit 8. See program code 249 for options anddescriptions. The default value is “Secondary”.
264 #8 <Walkway down side 2>
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 102
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
265 Circuit 5 type 0 to 2 <1>
266 Circuit 6 type 0 to 2 <2>
267 Circuit 7 type 0 to 2 <1>
268 Circuit 8 type 0 to 2 <2>
Safety Circuit Program Code
5 265
6 266
7 267
8 268
1 830
2 831
3 832
4 833
All safety circuits have an associated “safety circuit type” whichcontrols special processing. Note that Safety Circuits 1 through4 are defined by program codes 830 through 833.Type 0 is standard processing, i.e. the safety circuit is checked forthe purpose of alarming independently of the swing-arm side ifthe safety circuit’s alarm action is “Info”, “Secondary” or“Primary”.Type 1 means that the safety circuit is checked for the purpose ofalarming only while the swing-arm side is 1 if the safety circuit’salarm action is “Info”, “Secondary” or “Primary”.Type 2 means that the safety circuit is checked for the purpose ofalarming only while the swing-arm side is 2 if the safety circuit’salarm action is “Info”, “Secondary” or “Primary”. Thus thesafety-circuit type provides flexibility for double-sided (swing-arm) applications.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 103
6.13 Alarms (continued)
265 Circuit 5 type
This program code sets the side assignment for safety circuitnumber 5.
# 0 = side independent# 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1# 2 = enabled only if loading at side 2
Side is determined by the swing arm position inputs.
266 Circuit 6 type
This program code sets the side assignment for safety circuitnumber 6.
# 0 = side independent# 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1# 2 = enabled only if loading at side 2
Side is determined by the swing arm position inputs.
267 Circuit 7 type
This program code sets the side assignment for safety circuitnumber 7.
# 0 = side independent# 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1# 2 = enabled only if loading at side 2
Side is determined by the swing arm position inputs.
268 Circuit 8 type
This program code sets the side assignment for safety circuitnumber 8.
# 0 = side independent# 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1# 2 = enabled only if loading at side 2
Side is determined by the swing arm position inputs.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 104
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask 0 to 16777215 <16777215>
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask 0 to 16777215 <0>
271 Unauth additive flow vol 0.0000 to 99999.9999 <0.0000>
272 Prod/add - % 0 to 99 <0>
273 Prod/add + % 0 to 99 <0>
274 Storage alarm action 0 Off *3 Primary
275 Power fail alarm action 0 Off *3 Primary
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 105
6.13 Alarms (continued)
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask
To enable the alarm output 1 and/or 2 capability, enter thedecimal sum of the values corresponding to the alarm types fromthe Alarm Type Mask Values table.
Including an alarm type’s mask value in the sum configures thealarm output to respond per the alarm’s configured action, i.e.primary or secondary.
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask
To enable the alarm output 1 and/or 2 capability, enter thedecimal sum of the values corresponding to the alarm types fromthe Alarm Mask Bit-Map table found on the following page.
Note
In the Alarm Mask Bit-Map that follows, Alarm Type 15 (ifenabled) will activate the alarm output if any of theconfigured safety circuits go into an alarm state during theloading process.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 106
6.13 Alarms (continued)
Alarm Type Mask Values
Alarm Type Mask Value
0 = Display failure 1
1 = Comms failure 2
2 = Unable to maintainblend
4
3 = Flow rate to low 8
4 = Flow rate too high 16
5 = Valve closed early 32
6 = Timed out - not flowdetected
64
7 = Unauthorized flowexceeds limit
128
8 = Pulse security error 256
9 = Temperature failure 512
10 = Pressure failure 1024
11 = Unable to shut valve 2048
Alarm Type Mask Values
Alarm Type Mask Value
12 = Density failure 4096
13 =
Unable to close blockvalve
8192
14 = Additive failure 16384
15 = Safety circuit 32768
16 = Data logging memory full 65536
17 = Memory check failed 131072
18 = Storage memory full
262144
19 = Power failure 524288
20 = Unable to ramp down 1048576
21 = MPMC failure 2097152
22 = Calibration failure 4194304
23 = Intermediate level input 8388608
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 107
6.13 Alarms (continued)
271 Unauthorized Additive flow volume
The volume (units determined by additive K-factor) ofunauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarmis raised for the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods(program codes 141, 146, etc.). Unauthorized additive flow isdetected as a feedback error for the "Mech" and "Handshake"injection methods. Zero disables the alarm. The default value is0.0000, i.e. disabled.
272 Prod/add -%
For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods 143 / 148 / 153/ 158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000, this is the percentage of theideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch (determined fromthe actual number of injection cycles, the configured additiveratio quantity and the configured volume of additive per thousandof product) below which an additive failure alarm is raised. Thedefault value is 0.
Note:Due to discrete (dosed) injection of additive, program codes272 and 273 will be checked only after program code 278Additive per 1000 error limit has been exceeded.
273 Prod/add + %
For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods 143 / 148 / 153/ 158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000, this is the percentageof the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch(determined from the actual number of injection cycles, theconfigured additive ratio quantity and the configured quantity ofadditive per thousand of product) above which an additive failurealarm is raised. The default value is 0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 108
6.13 Alarms (continued)
274 Storage alarm action
Enable triggering of a transaction storage memory full alarm.This alarm is raised if starting a new transaction or batch inmanual mode would cause an overwrite of previously archivedtransaction / batch records. The default is “Off”, i.e. the storagememory full alarm is disabled.
275 Power fail alarm action
Enable triggering of a power fail alarm. This alarm is raisedduring power-up if a power failure or processing crash occurredduring the last batch delivery. Following a power failure duringa batch, the batch preset quantity is available (Dynamic DataDisplay) via data code 245, the batch gross and standardquantities via data codes 130 and 131, and the batch remainingquantity via data code 246. The default is “Off”, i.e. the powerfail alarm is disabled.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 109
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 110
6.13 Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
276 Ramp down alarm action 0 Off3 Primary *
277 Ramp down time (s) 0 to 9999 <4>
278 Additive per 1000 error limit 1 to 99 <1>
279 End time (s) 0 to 9999 <180>
276 Ramp down alarm action
This program code selects the response to an Unable to rampdown alarm when the DanLoad 6000 cannot reduce the flow rateto a defined lower flow rate within the time period specified byprogram code 277 Ramp down time (s).
This alarm is intended to stop a batch of LPG when there isinsufficient line pressure to “pinch back” using a line-pressureoperated control valve.
For non-LPG applications, a good value for the ramp down timeis the time that would be required to load 3/4 of the low flow stop
quantity at the high flow rate.
# Off Disable function.
# Primary Enable function based on time periodspecified by program code 277 Rampdown time (s).
277 Ramp down time (s)
[For program code 026 Unit type equal to sequential or in-linetype.] Sets time limit for attempt to ramp down flow rate beforetriggering an Unable to ramp down alarm.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 111
6.13 Alarms (continued)
278 Additive per 1000 error limit
For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods this is thenumber of injection cycles worth of additive, i.e. ideal doses ofadditive, by which the actual volume of additive can differ fromthe ideal volume of additive at any point in a batch before the±percentages (program codes 272 and 273) are checked for thepurpose of raising an alarm. For the “Control” injection methoda value of 1 is recommended; larger values may be required forthe “Meter” injection method depending on required tolerancesand additive meter calibration accuracy. The default value is 1.
279 End time (s)
The end batch/transaction, depending on the configured endoutput method (program code 373), time in seconds. See "endoutput" program code 423 for more information. The defaultvalue is 180.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 112
6.14 I/O Parameters
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
280 Slot 1 board 0 Empty1 DC I/O2 AC I/O3 8-Ch. Analog Input4 2-Ch. Pulse Input5 Enhanced I/O6 2-Ch. Analog Input7 4-Ch. Pulse Input
281 Slot 2 board <same as above>
282 Slot 3 board <same as above>
283 Slot 4 board <same as above>
284 Slot 5 board <same as above>
285 Slot 6 board <same as above>
286 Slot 7 board <same as above>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 113
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
I/O Parameters contain data which defines the type of processinput / output signal card that is inserted in each card cage slot.Physical I/O points are assigned logical functions by logical I/Opoints.
NOTERefer to Section 2.2.2 Input/Output Board Descriptions andJumper Settings for detailed information about board types,uses, configurations and connections. Appropriate drawingsare also referenced in Section 2.2.2 and can be found inAppendix E.
280 / 281 / 282 / 283 / 284 / 285 / 286 Slot # board
This program code indicates the type of board located in slot J#,and is automatically detected on power-up/reset. The J numberfor the input / output board connector is the same as the # in theparameter name.
# Empty No card present.
# DC I/O DC Voltage discrete input / output board.
# AC I/O AC Voltage discrete input / output board.
# 8-Ch. Analog Input 8-channel analog input board.
# 2-Ch. Pulse Input 2-channel meter pulse input board.
# Enhanced I/O Enhanced input / output board.
# 2-Ch. Analog Input 2-channel analog input board.
# 4-Ch. Pulse Input 4-channel meter pulse input board
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 114
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
287 Alarm output 1 0 to number of discrete outputs <4>
287 Alarm output 1
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe general alarm control output logical function. This output ispulsed ON (CLOSED) when a Secondary alarm is active and issteady ON (CLOSED) when a Primary alarm is active. Theoutput is enabled per alarm type by program code 269 Alarm o/p1 mask. (Note: See also program code 379 Alarm output 2.)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 115
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function
(Four Product Pumps)
Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
288 / 289 / 290 / 291 Pump control output 0 to number of discrete outputs <see table below>
288 / 289 / 290 / 291 Pump control output
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe product pump control output logical function. This output isnormally OFF and is maintained ON to run a product pumpmotor or to indicate “component in use”. See also componentline pack delay (program code 87, etc. per component) and pumpstop delay (program code 88, etc. per component).
Recommended discrete output assignments:
Component Program Code Discrete Output
1 288 3
2 289 7
3 290 11
4 291 15
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 116
6.14 I / O Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function(Four Flow Control Valves) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
292 / 297 / 302 / 307 Solenoid 1 (upstream) 0 to number of discrete outputs <1>
293 / 298 / 303 / 308 Solenoid 2 (downstream) 0 to number of discrete outputs <2>
294 / 299 / 304 / 309 Stem switch 1 0 to number of discrete inputs,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
295 / 300 / 305 / 310 Stem switch 2 0 to number of discrete inputs,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input 0 to number of discrete inputs,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
Recommended discrete output assignments:
Flow ControlValve
Solenoid 1Program Code
DiscreteOutput
Solenoid 2Program Code
DiscreteOutput
1 292 1 293 2
2 297 5 298 6
3 302 9 303 10
4 307 13 308 14
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 117
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
292 / 297 / 302 / 307 Solenoid 1 (upstream)
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe corresponding solenoid 1 logical function. This output is usedto control the normally open pilot on a digital flow control valveor 2-stage flow control valve.
293 / 298 / 303 / 308 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe corresponding solenoid 2 logical function. This output is usedto control the normally closed pilot on a digital flow control valveor 2-stage flow control valve.
294 / 299 / 304 / 309 Stem switch 1
The low flow start (normally closed) stem switch input. TheDanLoad 6000 “locks” the flow control valve when this inputopens while ramping up to low flow.
An unauthorized flow alarm is raised for a meter if the associatedflow control valve’s stem switch 1 input is open when the meteris not authorized. This provides a method of
detecting leakage even if the meter pulse stream has failed, e.g.preamp or pulse transmitter failure. The stem switch should beinstalled such that it provides a “closed” (1) input to the DanLoad6000 when the flow control valve is closed, and an “open” (0)input otherwise. Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e.the actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state (openor closed) is inverted.
295 / 300 / 305 / 310 Stem switch 2
The low flow stop (normally open) stem switch input. TheDanLoad 6000 “locks” the flow control valve when this inputcloses while ramping down to low flow.
An unauthorized flow alarm is raised for a meter if the associatedflow control valve’s stem switch 2 input is closed when the meteris not authorized. This provides a method of detecting leakageeven if the meter pulse stream has failed, e.g. preamp or pulsetransmitter failure. The stem switch should be installed such thatit provides an open (0) input to the DanLoad 6000 when the flowcontrol valve is open, and a closed (1) input otherwise. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input numberis the input number minus 50, but the state (open or closed) isinverted.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 118
Note: Stem switches 1 and/or 2 can be used to monitor theposition of the flow control valve when the meter is notauthorized independent of the flow control valve type (programcode 027).
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thecorresponding close input logical function. This input is used tosense some external condition or permissive circuit whichcontrols the state of the flow control valve. If assigned, thisinput must be CLOSED during batch deliveries. An OPEN inputon this circuit closes the flow control valve. Input numbers 51and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is the input numberminus 50, but the state (open or closed) is inverted.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 119
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 120
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
312 Side detect method 0 Sgl w/o sw. *1 Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)2 Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)3 Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)4 Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)5 Dbl 2 sw.
313 Pulse per unit output 1 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
314 Pulse per unit output 2 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
315 Trip 1 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
316 Trip 2 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
317 Trip 3 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 121
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
312 Side detect method
This program code selects the method of detecting one of threepossible positions of the product loading swing arm, based oninputs from one or two swing arm position switches. Swing armswitch input is connected to two physical discrete contact closureinputs, accessible at the three connector terminal board on themain processor board (v1 CPU board) [SWING1 is swing arminput 1 which is the rightward terminal on the main processorboard] [SWING2 is swing arm input 2 which is the leftwardterminal on the main processor board] [COMMON is thecommon connection for both inputs and in the center terminal onthe main processor board]. (Note: The connections are labeledon the aluminum board retainer plate.)
Discrete input swing-arm switches can also be used as perprogram codes 376 and 377. The v2 CPU board does not havededicated swing-arm inputs.
Sgl = single-sided load spot; Dbl = double-sided load spotSW1 = right terminal to center (common) terminal or discreteinput per program code 376.SW2 = left terminal to center (common) terminal or discreteinput per program code 377.
Swing Arm Switch Status
Side Detect
Method
Side 1 Side 2 Parked
Sgl w/o sw Enabled N/A N/A
Sgl 1 sw (SW2) SW2
CLOSED
N/A SW2
OPEN
Sgl 1 sw (SW1) SW1
CLOSED
N/A SW1
OPEN
Dbl 1 sw (SW2) SW2
CLOSED
SW2
OPEN
N/A
SW1 must be OPEN
Dbl 1 sw (SW1) SW1
CLOSED
SW1
OPEN
N/A
SW2 must be OPEN
Dbl 2 sw SW2
CLOSED
SW2
OPEN
SW2
OPEN
SW1
OPEN
SW1
CLOSED
SW1
OPEN
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 122
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
# Sgl w/o sw.
Single side without swing arm switch. Side 1 forcedactive at all times.
# Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)
Single side with one swing arm switch.SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = parked).
# Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)
Single side with one swing arm switch.SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = parked.
# Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)
Double side with one swing arm switch.SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = side 2;(SW1 must be OPEN).
# Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)
Double side with one swing arm switch.SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = side 2;(SW2 must be OPEN).
# Dbl 2 sw.
Double side with two swing arm switches,SW2 CLOSED and SW1 OPEN = side 1;SW2 OPEN and SW1 CLOSED = side 2;SW2 OPEN and SW1 OPEN = parked.
Note that the v2 CPU board does not have dedicatedswing-arm inputs. Discrete input swing-arm switches perprogram codes 376 and 377 should be used. The v2 CPUboard simulates “SW2 closed, SW1 open” so that side 1will be detected for all values of program code 312 except“Sgl 1 switch (SW1)” and “Dbl 1 switch (SW1)” ifneither program code 367 nor 377 is configured.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 123
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
313 Pulse per unit output 1
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe pulse per unit output 1 logical function. The drive logic forthis output is setup by program code 128 Number of pulse perunit outputs, 129 Control meters, 130 Factor, 131 Pulse width(ms).
314 Pulse per unit output 2
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe pulse per unit output 2 logical function. The drive logic forthis output is setup by program code 128 Number of pulse perunit outputs, 132 Control meters, 133 Factor, 134 Pulse width(ms).
315 Trip 1 output
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe trip 1 output logical function. Output is ON during low flowstartup (indicates low flow startup phase to external device).
316 Trip 2 output
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe trip 2 output logical function. Output is ON during low flowstartup and high flow (indicates low flow startup and high flowphases to external device).
317 Trip 3 output
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe trip 3 output logical function. Output is ON from start ofdelivery to final trip (OFF at same time as Solenoid 1 forsequential unit type) (indicates delivery phase to external device).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 124
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function(Four Meters) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
318 / 324 / 330 / 336 Meter X temp input 0 to number of RTD inputs
319 / 325 / 331 / 337 Meter X offset (Ohms) -20.00 to +20.00
320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input 0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdc inputs
321 / 327 / 333 / 339 Meter X dens input 0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdc inputs
322 / 328 / 334 / 340 Meter X flow input 0 to max. discrete input,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
318 / 324 / 330 / 336 Meter X temp input
This program code assigns a physical RTD process temperatureinput, corresponding to a flow meter, to the RTD input logicalfunction.
319 / 325 / 331 / 337 Meter X offset (Ohms)
This program code sets the resistance compensation for wiringbetween the RTD and the DanLoad 6000 RTD input terminals.The offset is applied only to RTD inputs on the 2- and 8-channelanalog inputs boards, not to the RTD input on the v2 CPU board.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 125
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input
This program code assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter pressure logicalfunction.
321 / 327 / 333 / 339 Meter X dens input
This program code assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter density logicalfunction.
322 / 328 / 334 / 340 Meter X flow input
This program code, if configured, disables the “authorized flowalarms” (no flow detected, flow rate too low and flow rate toohigh) for the meter while the input is open, i.e. deenergized, andcan be used to prevent spurious “authorized flow alarms” in anapplication where the DanLoad 6000 does not have direct controlof the valve. Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. theactual input is the input number minus 50, but the state (“open”or closed”) is inverted. Zero indicates “not used”. The defaultvalue is zero, i.e. not used.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 126
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
341 # cpmt inputs 0 to 4 <0>
342 Start method 0 Normal *1 Immed.
343 Auto/manual change-over 0 to max. discrete input,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
344 Primary alarm reset 0 to max. discrete input,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
341 # cmpt inputs
See section 3.12 for a summary of operating instructions. This isthe number of compartment size inputs. Safety circuit 4 input isused as compartment size input 1, safety circuit 5 input is used ascompartment size input 2, etc. Using safety circuit inputs ascompartment size inputs prevents their use as safety circuitinputs. The alarm action of any safety circuit that is used as acompartment size input should be set to "Off". Specialprocessing is performed if the configured number of
compartment size inputs is greater than zero. If the configurednumber of compartment size inputs is greater than zero, the
preset quantity is calculated (when the "ENTER" key is pressedwhile the DanLoad 6000 is prompting for a preset quantity INTHE MANUAL OPERATING MODE) as the minimum of thequantity entered by the operator (if any) and the smallestcompartment size indicated by any compartment size inputs thatare closed. There is a two-second delay after the "ENTER" keyis pressed to allow the compartment size inputs to be scanned.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 127
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
CompartmentSize Input
CompartmentSize
Program Codefor Physical
Discrete Input
Program Codefor Alarm
Action
CompartmentSize Low
Limit
CompartmentSize High
Limit
1 PC 644 x 100 349 257 NA NA
2 PC 645 x 100 350 259 PC 650 x 100 PC 651 x 100
3 PC 646 x 100 351 261 NA NA
4 PC 647 x 100 352 263 PC 652 x 100 PC 653 x 100
"Error conditions" on the compartment size inputs are handled as follows: If multiple compartment size inputs are closed, the DanLoad6000 uses the lowest compartment size indicated by the closed inputs, e.g. if compartment size inputs 2 and 4 are closed, the compartmentsize corresponding to compartment size input 2 is used. If none of the compartment size inputs is closed, the compartment size in"undefined" and a batch cannot be authorized.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 128
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
342 Start method
This program code defines the method by which a batch isstarted. The default value is "Normal". Select one of thefollowing:
# "Normal". A batch is started by punching in a [valid]preset quantity and pressing the "ENTER" key (at whichpoint the preset quantity is validated) followed by the"START" key.
# "Immed.". Immediate. A batch is started by punching ina [valid] preset quantity and pressing the "START" key orthe "ENTER" key. When the DanLoad 6000 is promptingfor a preset quantity, the "ENTER" key and the "START"key do the same thing. This method is useful where theoperator does not have direct access to the DanLoad6000's keypad and the "START" key has been wired to a"remote start push-button", e.g. attached to the loadingarm, via a "START/STOP interface only" or"START/STOP remote display interface" board (partnumbers 3-6000-147 and -149 respectively).
343 Auto/manual change-over
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for theauto/manual mode change-over logical function. This inputselects the Auto Mode or Manual Mode of operation (inputCLOSED = Auto Mode, input OPEN = Manual Mode). Thefunction is used to enable manual operation of the DanLoad 6000in case of a failure of the terminal automation system. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted. Reference program code 025 for operating mode.
344 Primary alarm reset
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for theprimary alarm reset logical function. Normal state = OPEN, amomentary CLOSE of the input circuit resets oldest activeprimary alarm. All primary alarms can be reset in this manner.Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual inputis the input number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 129
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 130
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
345 Safety circuit 1 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
346 Safety circuit 2 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
347 Safety circuit 3 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
348 Safety circuit 4 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
349 Safety circuit 5 orcompartment size input 1
0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
350 Safety circuit 6 orcompartment size input 2
0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
351 Safety circuit 7 orcompartment size input 3
0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
352 Safety circuit 8 orcompartment size input 4
0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
353 RTD range 0 Std *1 Hi 2 Low
354 Delay after outputs (msec)
0 to 9999 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 131
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
345 Safety circuit 1
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 1 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 249 and 250. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted.
346 Safety circuit 2
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 2 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 251 and 252. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted.
347 Safety circuit 3
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 3 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 253, 254 and 425.
Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual inputis the input number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted.
348 Safety circuit 4 or Recipe selection input
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 4 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 255 and 256. Anadditional function of this parameter is to enable the six recipeselection inputs program code 361 / 362 / 363 / 364 / 365 / 366Recipe x input. To enable this feature, set program code 348Safety circuit 4 to 0 and assign program code 361 / 362 / 363 /364 / 365 / 366 Recipe x input to discrete inputs as required by theinstallation configuration. Input numbers 51 and above are“inverted”, i.e. the actual input is the input number minus 50, butthe state (“open” or closed”) is inverted. Zero indicates “redirectto recipe selection inputs” for recipes 1 through 6.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 132
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
349 Safety circuit 5 or compartment size input 1
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 5 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 257, 258, and 265. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted. This can also be used as compartment size input 1 (seeprogram code 341 for details and special considerations).
350 Safety circuit 6 or compartment size input 2
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 6 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 259, 260, and 266. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted. This can also be used as compartment size input 2 (seeprogram code 341 for details and special considerations).
351 Safety circuit 7 or compartment size input 3
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 7 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 261, 262, and 267. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted. This can also be used as compartment size input 3 (seeprogram code 341 for details and special considerations).
352 Safety circuit 8 or compartment size input 4
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 8 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by program codes 263, 264, and 268. Inputnumbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is theinput number minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) isinverted. This can also be used as compartment size input 4 (seeprogram code 341 for details and special considerations).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 133
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
353 RTD range
This program code matches the type of RTD inputs on the analoginputs board for various temperature ranges. All the RTD inputson a DanLoad 6000's analog inputs board must be the sametemperature range. The RTD input on the v2 CPU board isalways -20 to 55 degrees Celsius. Select one of the following:
# Std
Analog inputs board with RTD inputs from - 40 degreesto + 110 degrees Celsius.
# Hi
Analog inputs board with RTD inputs from + 50 degreesto + 200 degrees Celsius.
# Low
Analog inputs board with RTD inputs from -200 degreesto -50 degrees Celsius.
354 Delay after outputs
Delay in milliseconds between energizing the recipe andcomponent combination outputs and checking the safety circuitinputs. Enables an automation system to energize an outputbased on status of inputs it receives from the DanLoad 6000.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 134
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
355 Primary LCD type 0 Unknown 1 Standish2 Optrex *3 Old Optrex
356 Primary LCD min light 0 to 1023 <455>
357 Primary LCD max light 0 to 1023 <405>
358 Secondary LCD type 0 Unknown1 Standish2 Optrex *3 Old Optrex
359 Secondary LCD min light 0 to 1023 <455>
360 Secondary LCD max light 0 to 1023 <405>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 135
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
355 / 358 <Primary / Secondary> LCD type
This program code identifies the type of LCD (Liquid CrystalDisplay) installed in the local DanLoad 6000. When the LCDtype is known, this information is used to “auto-adjust” theLCD’s contrast for internal temperature variations and alsoenables the display failure alarm, i.e. keypad/displaydisconnected, or internal temperature too high. There is no needto detect an internal temperature too-low condition. The defaultvalue is “Optrex". A few early DanLoad 6000's had “Old Optrex"LCD’s marked “Y-LY” on the back of Optrex’s LCD board (noton Daniel’s display board attached to the Optrex display board).Most DanLoad 6000's shipped since 1993 have “Optrex" LCD’s,usually marked “YJ-LY” on the back of the Optrex LCD board,although a few of the earlier “Optrex" LCD’s had the same markas the “Old Optrex" LCD’s. Select one of the following:
# Unknown
Automatic contrast adjustment, automatic backlightingadjustment and display failure alarm disabled.
# Standish
The Standish LCD has a maximum internal temperatureof 70 degrees Celsius with the temperature sensor locatedjust below the top edge of the display.
# Optrex
The Optrex extended range (maximum internaltemperature = 70 degrees Celsius) LCD has thetemperature sensor located just below the top edge of thedisplay. This is the usual setting. Post-1996 Optrex“extended range” LCD’s may be of the transflective type.
# Old Optrex
Standard range (maximum internal temperature = 60degrees Celsius) LCD with the temperature sensor locatedjust below the top edge of the display.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 136
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
356 / 359 <Primary / Secondary> LCD minimum light
This program code sets the relative level of ambient light used toset the backlighting of the display to maximum brightness.
# 0 to 1023
A relative number related to the level of ambient light (default is455).
357 / 360 <Primary / Secondary> LCD maximum light
This program code sets the relative level of ambient light used toset the backlighting of the display to minimum brightness(backlighting off).
# 0 to 1023
A relative number related to the level of ambient light (default is405).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 137
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 138
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
361 Recipe 1 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
362 Recipe 2 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
363 Recipe 3 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
364 Recipe 4 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
365 Recipe 5 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
366 Recipe 6 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
367 Recipe 1 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
368 Recipe 2 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
369 Recipe 3 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
370 Recipe 4 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
371 Recipe 5 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
372 Recipe 6 output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
373 End output method 0 Ba only *1 Tr only2 Both
374 Level input 0 to max. Discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. Discrete input) <0>
375 Hatch input 0 to max. Discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. Discrete input) <0>
376 Swing 1 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
377 Swing 2 input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
378 Low flow input 0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
379 Alarm output 2 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 139
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
361 / 362 / 363 / 364 / 365 / 366 Recipe X input
This program code selects the physical discrete input that is usedto allow or permit the corresponding recipe. This feature permitsmanual switch or relay selection of one of six recipes from aremote source (input CLOSE = recipe allowed; input OPEN =recipe not allowed). Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”,i.e. the actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state(“open” or closed”) is inverted.If for recipes 1 through 6 only, safety circuit 4's input (programcode 348 Safety circuit 4) is not configured and a recipe’sselection input is configured, the recipe can be loaded only if therecipe’s selection input is closed. If the recipe’s selection inputis open, the DanLoad 6000 behaves as if safety circuit 4's input isconfigured and open, i.e. safety circuit 4's input is “redirected” tothe recipe selection input determined by the selected recipe.
367 / 368 / 369 / 370 / 371 / 372 Recipe X output
This program code selects a physical discrete output that isenergized during an active batch load when that recipe is selected.The corresponding output is energized at batch start or restart (before the pump delay) and deenergized at batch endafter flow has stopped.
373 End output method
Configures whether the end output (program code 423), end input(program code 424) and end time (program code 279) processing(see program code 423 for details) is performed only at the end ofa batch, only at the end of a transaction, or both at the end of abatch and at the end of a transaction. The default value is “Baonly”. Select one of the following:
# Ba only
Perform end output processing only at the end of a batch.
# Tr only
Perform end output processing only at the end of atransaction.
# Both
Perform end output processing both at the end of a batchand at the end of a transaction. (The timer is not restartedif it is already running.)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 140
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
374 Level input
If configured, the DanLoad 6000 performs “intermediate levelinput” logic. This logic works specifically with compartment sizeinputs 1, 2 and 4 as described in the pseudo code descriptionbelow. Input numbers 51 and above are "inverted", i.e. the actualinput is “input number minus 50" but the state ("open" or"closed") is inverted. Zero indicates "not used". The defaultvalue is zero. If the level input is closed, only a preset quantityless than 1000 can be authorized.
The pre-authorization batch check is performed only in manualmode after a preset quantity has been entered/calculated and priorto authorizing a batch:////
IF Operating mode is manualAND Compartment size inputs are being usedAND Level input is configuredAND Level input is closedAND Preset quantity >= Compartment size 1 THEN BEGIN Display "Intermediate level input" briefly Do not authorized batch ENDELSE BEGIN DO AUTHORIZATION BATCH ENDEND IF
////
i.e. if the level input is closed, only a preset quantity less than 1000 can be authorized.
During batch delivery in auto or manual, each and every time the level input closes ("edgetriggered", if you like):
////IF Compartment size inputs are being usedAND Level input is closed BEGIN IF (Batch gross loaded quantity < 900) // Hard-coded! OR ((Cpmt size 2 lo < Gross loaded qty < Cpmt size 2hi) AND (Cpmt size <= Cpmt size 2)) OR ((Cpmt size 4 lo < Gross loaded qty < Cpmt size 4hi) AND (Cpmt size <= Cpmt size 4)) THEN Allow batch to continue ELSE Raise "Level input" secondary alarm
IF (Level input was closed at < 900)
AND (Level input is still closed at < 900)
/* i.e. (which is the same as saying) “If the
level input
is closed at 900" */
Raise "Level input" secondary alarm
END
ELSE
Raise "Level input" secondary alarm
////
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 141
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
Compartment size 1 and 3 low and high limits do not exist. Thecompartment size 2 low (lo) and high (hi) limits are programcodes 650 and 651 respectively (x 100). The compartment size4 low (lo) and high (hi) limits are program codes 652 and 653respectively (x 100). There is also an automation systemcommunications status bit that indicates that the batch wasstopped due to a level input alarm. Refer to the DanLoad 6000Communications Spec.
NOTE: The pre-authorize batch check is performed only inmanual, whereas the during batch delivery check is performed inauto and manual. The pre-authorized batch check is performedonly if compartment size input are being used. The during batchdelivery check performed is different depending on whether ornot compartment size inputs are being used; if compartment sizeinputs are not being used, the during batch delivery check actssimilarly to an "inverted safety circuit" (input "open" =safe/condition) with hard-coded secondary alarm action and hard-coded, language-dependent message text.
375 Hatch input
If configured and compartment size inputs are being used, theDanLoad 6000 performs “hatch sensor input” logic. Inputnumbers 51 and above are "inverted", i.e. the actual input is“input number minus 50", but the state ("open" or "closed") isinverted. Zero indicates "not used".
The default value is zero. The “hatch sensor input” logic allowsbatch to be authorized for compartment size 4 only ifcompartment size input 4 is closed and the hatch input is closed.Compartment size 4 is program code 647.
376 Swing 1 input
This program code selects the discrete input swing-arm switch 1input. When used, it corresponds to “Swing 1" (TB2-3) on theCPU board. Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. theactual input is the input number minus 50, but the state (“open”or “closed”) is inverted. Zero indicates “not used”.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 142
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
377 Swing 2 input
This program code selects the discrete input swing-arm switch 2input. When used, it corresponds to “Swing 2" (TB2-1) on theCPU board. Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. theactual input is the input number minus 50, but the state (“open”or “closed”) is inverted. Zero indicates “not used”.
378 Low flow input
This program code defines the “stay in low flow input”. Whenconfigured, the batch is delivered in low flow, i.e. at the low flowstart flow rate, if the input is closed when the batch is started orrestarted. (This is achieved by overriding, i.e.
temporarily increasing the low flow start quantity internally. Fora sequential unit type, the low flow start quantity is percomponent. For an in-line unit type the low flow quantity is forthe batch.) Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. theactual input is “input number minus 50", but the state (“open” or“closed”) is inverted. Zero indicates “not used”.
379 Alarm output 2
Assign this discrete output to one of the physical discrete outputs.This output is triggered based on enabling by program code 270Alarm o/p 2 mask, the assigned action for the mask enabledalarm, and the alarm in the active state.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________ Section 6 - 143
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (380 to 399 Additive I/O Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 144
6.15 Additive I/O Parameters
PC# / Function(Six additives) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392 / 395 Ratio/valve output 0 to number discrete outputs <0>
381 / 384 / 387 / 390 / 393 / 396 Feedback/meter input 0 to number discrete inputs <0>
382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394/ 397 Selection input 0 to max. discrete input,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
398 Clean line output 0 to number discrete outputs <0>
399 Flush output 0 to number discrete output <0>
Additive I/O Parameters contain data which defines control of automatic injection of one to six additives.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (380 to 399 Additive I/O Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 145
6.15 Additive I/O Parameters (continued)
380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392 / 395 Ratio/valve output
The output which is cycled according to the additive injectpercentage (program code 137) and the additive's configured ratioquantity (program code 140) and injection method (program code141). This output would normally be connected to an injector"pak", additive flow control solenoid or a PLC. Zero indicates"not used". The default value is zero.
381 / 384 / 387 / 390 / 393 / 396 Feedback/meter input
The input which is used to verify additive injection or totalizeadditive (possibly for volumetric verification) using a pulse pervolume or an additive meter K-factor. This input would normallybe connected to an additive "pak's" feedback switch, a "smart"injector's verification pulse or an additive meter's pulse output.Zero indicates "not used". The default value is zero.
382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394 / 397 Selection input
For the "Inputs" additive selection method (program code 136)this is the input which is used to select the additive either prior toor during loading. The additive remains selected while the inputremains closed. Input numbers 51 and above are “inverted”, i.e.the actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state(“open” or closed”) is inverted. Zero indicates "not used". Thedefault value is zero.
398 Additive clean line output
This program code assigns a discrete control output that isenergized during delivery of the quantity set by program code 138Additive clean line qty at the end of a batch delivery. A typicaluse for this output is to connect the clean line volume to a smart(microprocessor controlled) additive injector that over-injects atthe start of a batch and stops injecting prior to the end of thebatch. Another use is with a multi-stream injector where theadditive clean line output should be connected to the block valvethat allows product to flow to the (shared) additive ratio solenoid.Zero indicates “not used”.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (380 to 399 Additive I/O Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 146
6.15 Additive I/O Parameters (continued)
399 Flush output
This program code selects the output to be energized duringdelivery of the (additive clean line quantity - 10) product units atthe end of a batch. This output is intended to be used in multi-stream injection mode, but is available independent of theinjection mode. In multi-stream injection mode (multipleadditives with the same non-zero meter input), the additive flushoutput is energized only if an additive has been authorized. Zeroindicates “not used”.
Note: The additive flush output is energized approximately 10product units after the additive clean line output isenergized, so the additive clean line quantity (programcode 138) should be greater than 10 product units whenusing the additive flush output.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (380 to 399 Additive I/O Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 147
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 148
6.16 Component I/O Parameters
PC# / Function(Four components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
400 / 402 / 404 / 406 Block valve output 0 to number discrete outputs
401 / 403 / 405 / 407 Block valve input 0 to max. discrete input,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
Component I/O Parameters contain data which define automaticcontrol and monitoring of component block valves, typically usedin sequential blending applications. Block valve control discreteoutputs can be assigned for single components or combinationsof two, three, or four components.
400 / 402 / 404 / 406 Block valve output
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output forthe corresponding component block valve output logical function.
The function of the block valve is changed in the followingmanner for “Side” stream in-line blending.
For "Side" stream In-line Blending, the user should assign anoutput to open a block valve to allow the side stream component(e.g. Ethanol) to blend with the wild stream component (e.g.Gasoline). For two component blending (One component mustbe the side stream component) the block valve output will be"Closed" when corresponding wild stream component is used.For more than two component blending ( One Component mustbe the side stream component) the block valve output will be"Closed" when the recipe is defined with a corresponding wildstream component and that component uses the Midgrade primaryblend stream meter defined in program code 063.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 149
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
401 / 403 / 405 / 407 Block valve input
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for thecorresponding block valve input logical function. Input numbers51 and above are “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is the inputnumber minus 50, but the state (“open” or closed”) is inverted.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 150
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
408 1 1XXX 0 to number discrete outputs
409 2 X2XX 0 to number discrete outputs
410 3 12XX 0 to number discrete outputs
411 4 XX3X 0 to number discrete outputs
412 5 1X3X 0 to number discrete outputs
413 6 X23X 0 to number discrete outputs
414 7 123X 0 to number discrete outputs
415 8 XXX4 0 to number discrete outputs
416 9 1XX4 0 to number discrete outputs
417 10 X2X4 0 to number discrete outputs
418 11 12X4 0 to number discrete outputs
419 12 XX34 0 to number discrete outputs
420 13 1X34 0 to number discrete outputs
421 14 X234 0 to number discrete outputs
422 15 1234 0 to number discrete outputs
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 151
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
Note
Component combination outputs indicate which componentsare included in the recipe being loaded. Recipe outputs(program codes 367 to 372) indicate which recipe is beingloaded (recipes 1 to 6 only).
408 1 1XXX
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[component 1 only]
409 2 X2XX
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[component 2 only]
410 3 12XX
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1 and 2]
411 4 XX3X
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[component 3 only]
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 152
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
412 5 1X3X
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe)[components 1 and 3]
413 6 X23X
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 2 and 3]
414 7 123X
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1, 2, and 3]
415 8 XXX4
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[component 4 only]
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 153
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
416 9 1XX4
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1 and 4]
417 10 X2X4
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 2 and 4]
418 11 12X4
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1, 2, and 4]
419 12 XX34
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 3 and 4]
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 154
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
420 13 1X34
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1, 3, and 4]
421 14 X234
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 2, 3, and 4]
422 15 1234
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1, 2, 3, and 4]
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 155
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 156
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
PC# / Function Range < Default> OR Option (* = Default)
423 End output 0 to 24 <0>
424 End input 0 to max. discrete input,51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
425 Flush pulses 0 to 999999999 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 157
6.16 Component I/O Parameters (continued)
423 End output
The end output (if configured) is energized at the end of abatch/transaction, depending on the configured end outputmethod (program code 373), if the end input (program code 424)is open (deenergized) or not configured when thebatch/transaction ends (not when a batch stops and is restartable).The end output remains energized until the end input closes or a"safety circuit 3" alarm is raised. A "safety circuit 3" alarm israised if the end input does not close within "end time" (programcode 279) seconds of the end batch output being energized.Safety circuit 3 is used so that the alarm message (program code254) can be configured, which allows the end output and input tobe used for a variety of purposes. One application is controllingthe mercaptan vessel fill for LPG loading. Zero indicates "notused". The default value is zero.
424 End input
See "End output" (program code 423) for details. Zero indicates"not used". The default value is 0. Input numbers 51 and aboveare “inverted”, i.e. the actual input is input number minus 50, butthe state (“open” or “closed”) is inverted.
425 Flush pulses
This program code sets the minimum number of pulses requiredfrom the additive meter during additive meter flushing, i.e. whilethe additive flush output (program code 399) is energized at theend of a batch, in order to prevent a safety circuit 3 alarm, e.g.“Additive meter flush failure”, from being raised. Note that theSafety circuit 3 alarm is shared with the safety circuit 3 input, and“end” alarm processing. The additive meter flush pulse count(data code 223) is checked only at the end of a batch, notcontinuously during additive meter flushing so that a batch willnot be stopped (or ended) with a small number of units of productremaining. In multi-stream injection mode (multiple additiveswith the same non-zero meter input), the additive meter flushpulse count is checked only if more than one additive isauthorized. It is important to understand that additive meterpulses are not added to the additive meter flush pulse count (datacode 223) until the additive meter flush output (program code339) has been energized. Zero disables “additive meter flushpulses” checking.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 158
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density
PC# /Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
426 Buoyancy -9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>
427 Temperature units 0 C (Celsius) *1 F (Fahrenheit)
428 Density units 0 lb/ft3 *1 kg/m32 g/cm33 60/60 F4 15/4 C5 20/4 C
429 Pressure units 0 psi *1 Pa2 in. H2O3 in. Hg4 bar5 mbar6 kPa7 kg/cm2
430 Reference temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <15.0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
PC# /Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 159
431 Sample qty 0 to 9999 <100>
432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature option 0 Off *1 Linear2 API 6A3 API 6B4 API 6C5 API 24A6 API 24B7 API 54A8 API 54B9 API 54C10 IMP [Mexico (Pemex)]11 Old 2412 Old 5413 P’bras [Brazil (Petrobras)]14 TP-1615 China16 API 6D17 API 54D18 4311 119 CAN 54B
433 / 436 / 439 / 442 Alpha 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 <0.0005100>
434 / 437 / 440 / 443 Backup temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <15.0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 160
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters contain data that
tldefines the calculation methods used to compute the values of C
pl(correction for the effect of temperature of the liquid) and C(correction for the effect of pressure of the liquid).
426 Buoyancy
This program code sets the density adjustment for bouancy in air.The position of the “floating decimal point” depends on thedensity/gravity scale (program code 46).
427 Temperature units This program code selects the temperature units to be used incalculations, displays, and logs. The default value is “C”.
# C Celsius
# F Fahrenheit
428 Density units
This program code selects the density units mnemonic to be usedin calculations, displays, printing and logs.
# lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot
# kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter
# g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter
# 60/60 F relative density 60 deg. F / 60 deg. F
# 15/4 C relative density 15 deg. C / 4 deg. C
# 20/4 C relative density 20 deg. C / 4 deg. C
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 161
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
429 Pressure units
This program code selects the pressure units mnemonic used incalculations, displays, printing and logs.
# psi Pounds per square inch
# Pa Pascals
# in. H2O Inches water column
# in. Hg Inches mercury
# bar Bar
# mbar Millibar
# kPa KiloPascals
# kg/cm2 Kilograms per centimeter square
430 Reference temperature
(Note: See program code 432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperatureoption.) This program code sets the reference temperature for theLinear equation or API tables 6C or 54C. (Note: Normalreference temperature for API tables 6C is 60.0 degreesFahrenheit. Normal reference temperature for API table 54C is15.0 degrees Celsius. This program code allows a non-standardreference temperature to be used.)
431 Sample qty
This program code sets the quantity-based temperature samplingfrequency used during a batch delivery. The process temperatureis sampled at the start of a batch delivery and thereafter each timethe quantity of units indicated by this parameter have beenaccumulated.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 162
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature option
This program code selects the method of temperaturecompensation of the process liquid.
NoteDaniel Industries, Inc. and Daniel Measurement and ControlProducts (“Daniel”) shall not be held responsible or liable inany way for loss or damage, including, but not limited to,consequential damage, resulting from the use of volumecorrection tables or related mathematical relationships or forviolation of any federal, state, or municipal laws,regulations, or practices of the United States or of anyforeign country.
60For pure MTBE, API recommends either Table 6C with " =
15789.0 x 10 / F or Table 54C with " = 1420.2 x 10 / C. For-6 o -6 o
60ethanol, API recommends Table 6C with " = 580.0 x 10 / F.-6 o
# Off
Disable temperature compensation. If the meter pulseinput is not temperature compensated at the flow meter,
the DanLoad 6000 calculations produce API grossquantity which is the indicated quantity (meterregistration) times the meter factor.
# Linear
The following linear equation is used to calculatetemperature compensation.
TL TC = 1 - ((t - T) * " )
where:
TLC = Correction for the effect of temperature ona liquid.
t = Observed temperature from an RTD inputor the fixed entry in program code434/437/440/443 Backup temperature.
T = Reference temperature from program code430 Reference temperature.
T" = Coefficient of thermal expansion for theliquid at base temperature, from programcode 433/436/439/442 Alpha.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 163
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# API Temperature Compensation Tables:
# API 6A
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# API 6B
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# API 6C
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# API 24A
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# API 24B
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# API 54A
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 164
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# API 54B
Standard reference temperature: 15 degrees C.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# API 54C
# IMP
Instituto Mexicano del Petroleo programaCorreccion de Volumen por Temperatura de losProductos Petroliferos Evaluados a 20 gradosCelsius
Tables 1A/1B through 20A/20B are supported.Since IMP’s method uses six significant digitswith single precision floating point, the volumecorrection factor can vary by +/- 1 in the leastsignificant digit. Standard reference temperature:20 degrees C. Temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature via program code430.
# Old 24
Old ASTM-IP Table 24 “Reduction of Volumeto 60 degrees F against Specific Gravity 60/60degrees F” (ASTM D 1250, IP 200, API 2540).
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
Note: This table is not functional when the Sidestream blending (Program code 023) is set to“YES”.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 165
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# Old 54
Old ASTM-IP Table 54 “Reduction of Volumeto 15 degrees C against Density at 15 degreesC” (ASTM D 1250, IP 200, API 2540).
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.
# P’bras (Petrobras - Brazil)
Petrobras Departamento Comercial - Divisão deControle das Movimentações -- Biblioteca Geralde Aplicativos para a Área de Movimentações deProduto - Módulo 4: Programa para Cálculo deDensidade 20 C/4 C e Fator de Correção deo o
Volume para 20 C, July 1988. Only part 3,o
Cálculo do Fator de Correção de Volume para20 C, is implemented.o
The component density (program codes 457, etc.per component) should be relative density 20/4degrees C. Standard reference temperature: 20degrees C. Temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature via program code430.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 166
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# TP-16
TPLGPA TP-16 C factors for LPG’s, i.e. TP-16-1through TP-16-5. An appropriate relative density60/60 degrees F (0.5010, 0.5050, etc.) Should beconfigured. For TP-16-1 through TP-16-5, i.e.
plpropanes and butanes, the C option should beAPI 11.2.2 and the vapor pressure method shouldbe TP-15. The published TP-16 assumes TP-15with atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psia (seeprogram code 822). “TP-16" actually selects OldTable 24, except that the component averagetemperature is rounded to the nearest 0.5 degrees
tlF, and if necessary, two C factors from Old Table24 (which is defined in 1 degree F intervals) areaveraged. Standard reference temperature: 60degrees F. Temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature via program code430.
Note: This table is not functional when the Sidestream blending (Program code 023) is set to“YES”.
GPA TP-16-6 for natural gasoline (relative
tpldensity 60/60 degrees F = 0.664) give C factors
TLcomputed from the C factor given by API 24A
PLand the C factor given by the API 11.2.2. TheDanLoad 6000 computes TP-16-6 by configuringthe appropriate temperature and pressurecorrection options.
# China
Standard reference temperature: 20 degrees C.Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature via program code 430.Similar to “Linear” CTL method, but uses a look-up table for the coefficient of thermal expansion
20(" ) based on component density at 20 degrees C.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 167
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# API 6D
API Table 6D for lubes: -10 to 45 degrees API, 0to 300 degrees F. Standard reference temperatureis 60.0 degrees F. Temperature correction to anon-standard reference temperature is done viaprogram code 430.
Note: This table is not functional when the Sidestream blending (Program code 023) is set to“YES”.
# API 54D
API Table 54D for lubes: 800 to 1064 kg/m , -203
to 150 degrees C. Standard reference temperatureis 15 degrees C. Temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature is done viaprogram code 430.
Note: This table is not functional when the Sidestream blending (Program code 023) is set to“YES”.
# 4311 1
ASTM D 4311 Table 1 for asphalts. Less than orequal to 34.9 degrees API, or greater than or equalto 0.850 specific gravity 60 F/60 F, 0 to 500o o
degrees F. The input is degrees API if the densityscale (program code 046) is 2, otherwise it isspecific gravity. Standard reference temperatureis 60.0 degrees F. Temperature correction to anon-standard reference temperature is via programcode 430.
Note: This table is not functional when the Sidestream blending (Program code 023) is set to“YES”.
# NH3
Note: This table is not functional when the Sidestream blending (Program code 023) is set to“YES”.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 168
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# CAN 54B
Standard reference temperature: 15 degrees C. Temperature correction to a non-standardreference temperature is via program code 430.
433 / 436 / 439 / 442 Alpha
TThis program code sets the coefficient of thermal expansion (" )used by the linear equation or the API tables 6C or 54C. Thedefault value is 0.0005100
434 / 437 / 440 / 443 Backup temperature
This program code sets the fixed temperature value to use for thecorresponding component in case of a failure of the livetemperature input from the RTD. The backup temperature can beset at any time by an automation system or can be enteredmanually in program mode/setup. (The backup temperature is percomponent to simplify the interface to an automation system, butcould actually be per meter.) If a backup temperature is requiredand the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multiple-component
sequential blender, i.e. more than one component through thesame meter, then the backup temperature must be entered for allconfigured components.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 169
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 170
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
The Pressure options are not functional when the side stream blending is enabled (Program Code 023 set to “YES”).
PC#/ Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option 0 Off *1 Const2 11.2.13 11.2.24 11.2.1M5 11.2.2M6 P’bras7 P’bras LPG8 NH3
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000 0 to 999999999 <0>
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Backup pressure 0.0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
PC#/ Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 171
456 / 458 / 460 / 462 Density/gravity option 0 Off *1 DT2 5A3 5B4 23A5 23B6 53A8 53B9 L110 L2
457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backup density/gravity -9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>Entry and scale dependent on program code 046Density/gravity scale:1 nnnn.n2 nnn.nn3 nn.nnn4 n.nnnn
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 172
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option
Program code 444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option selects themethod of pressure compensation.
NoteDaniel Industries, Inc. and Daniel Measurement and ControlProducts (“Daniel”) shall not be held responsible or liable inany way for loss or damage, including, but not limited to,consequential damage, resulting from the use of volumecorrection tables or related mathematical relationships or forviolation of any federal, state, or municipal laws,regulations, or practices of the United States or of anyforeign country.
The following selections are available.
# Off
Disable pressure compensation.
# Const
The following linear equation is used to calculate
pressure compensation.
1
P LC = [1 - (operating pressure - equilibrium pressure) F-factor]
where:
PLC = Correction for the effect ofpressure on a liquid.
operatingpressure = The pressure obtained from a
pressure transmitter.equilibriumpressure = The equilibrium vapor pressure
obtained from program code 446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Pe pressure.
F-factor = The compressibility factor for theliquid obtained from program code445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X1000000000.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 173
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# API Pressure Compensation Tables:
# 11.2.1
Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume to 0 poundsper square inch against API gravity at 60 degreesFahrenheit. The table inputs are API gravity at 60 degreesFahrenheit obtained live or from program code 457 / 459/ 461 / 463 Backup density/gravity and the F-factorobtained from program code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000 and the operating pressure obtainedfrom a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:
API Gravity Temp.(deg.F) Pressure (PSI)
0 to 90 -20 to +200 0 to 1500
# 11.2.2
Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume to 0pounds per square inch against relative density 60/60degrees Fahrenheit. The table inputs are relative densityat 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or fromprogram code 457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backupdensity/gravity and the F-factor obtained from programcode 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000 and theoperating pressure obtained from a pressure transmitter,ranges for the table are:
Rel.Density Temp.(dg.F) Press(PSI)
0.350 to 0.637 -50 to +140 0 to 2200
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 174
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# 11.2.1M
Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume to 0kiloPascals against absolute density at 15 degrees Celsius.The table inputs are absolute density at 15 degrees Celsiusobtained live or from program code 457 / 459 / 461 / 463Backup density/gravity and the F-factor obtained fromprogram code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X1000000000 and the operating pressure obtained from apressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:
Abs.Dns.(kg/m3) Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)
638 to 1074 -30 to +90 0 to 10300
# 11.2.2M
Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volumeto 0 kiloPascals against absolute density at 15degrees Celsius. The table inputs are absolutedensity at 15 degrees Celsius obtained live orfrom program code 457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backupdensity/gravity and the F-factor obtained fromprogram code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X1000000000 and the operating pressure obtainedfrom a pressure transmitter, ranges for the tableare:
Abs.Dns(kg/m3) Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)
350 to 637 -46 to +60 0 to 15200
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 175
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
# P’bras
Pressure correction using degrees C and relativedensity 20/4 degrees C per Petrobras, Brazil. Therelative density is converted and API Table11.2.1M is used.
# P’bras LPG
Pressure correction for LPG’s using degrees C andrelative density 20/4 degrees C per Petrobras,Brazil. The temperature and relative density areconverted and API Table 11.2.2 is used.
The default value is “Off”.
# NH3
This option is available only in speciallyprogrammed DanLoad 6000 units. Thesupporting calculations, though not the selection,is disabled in the standard DanLoad 6000.
This option is specific to anhydrous ammonia(NH3), and as such the component density is
eimplicit. The P method (program code 819)should be configured as “NH3". The temperaturerange is 0 to 100 F (inclusive). Note programo
codes 239 and 240. The pressure range is 50 to350 psig (inclusive). Note program codes 244 and245. The pressure option has been programmedsuch that the CTL, CPL and CTPL factors will beset to 1.0 and a pressure failure alarm will beraised if the input pressure is less than thecalculated vapor pressure.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 176
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000
This program code sets the constant F-factor used in pressurecompensation calculations (CPL). The entry value is multipliedby 10 by the DanLoad 6000. This entry is only used if program9
PLcode 444 Pressure option is set to Const, since the other Coptions calculate the F-Factor based on the temperature anddensity.
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Backup pressure
This is the component's backup pressure in pressure unitsappropriate to the configured pressure correction option (kPa forAPI Table 11.2.1M, psi for API Table 11.2.1, etc.), interpreted as
m deither static pressure (P ) or differential pressure (P ) dependingon the configured PT type (program code 818). A non-zero valueis used in standard quantity computations (pressure correction)only, i.e. not for valve control. The effect on standard quantitymeasurement accuracy should be considered very carefully beforeusing a backup pressure. The default value is 0.00, i.e. don't usebackup pressure.
456 / 458 / 460 / 462 Density/gravity option
This program code selects the status of using density inputs in theflow calculations.
# Off Use configured backup density (program codes457, etc.).
# DT Use density from density transmitter input(program codes 321, etc.).
# 5A Not used# 5B Not used# 23A Not used# 23B Not used# 53A Not used# 53B Not used# L1 From an LNG table, density (lb/ft3) against
pressure (45 to 201 psia) for pure methane(Liquified Natural Gas).
# L2 From an LNG table, density (lb/ft3) againsttemperature (-230.7 to -177.8 degrees F) for puremethane (Liquified Natural Gas).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 177
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backup density/gravity
This program code sets the value of the density (or gravity) toused in calculations when a live analog input is not available.Entries in this field are validated in the following manner:
Temperature Option Valid Entry
6A, 6B, 6C 0.00 to 100.00 API gravity
24A, 24B 0.6110 to 1.0760relative density
Off, Linear, 610.5 to 1075.0 kg/m354A, 54B, 54C
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________ Section 6 - 178
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
PC# / Function(Four Meters) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
464 / 468 / 472 / 476 Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
465 / 469 / 473 / 477 Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
466 / 470 / 474 / 478 Density @4 mA -9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>
467 / 471 / 475 / 479 Density @20 mA -9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 179
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)
464 / 468 / 472 / 476 Pressure @4 mA
Zero scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering unitspecified by program code 429 Pressure units.
465 / 469 / 473 / 477 Pressure @20 mA
Full scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering unitsspecified by program code 429 Pressure units.
466 / 470 / 474 / 478 Density @4 mA
Zero scale for density input from transmitter. The position of the“floating decimal point” depends on the density/gravity scale(program code 46).
467 / 471 / 475 / 479 Density @20 mA
Full scale for density input from transmitter. The position of the“floating decimal point” depends on the density/gravity scale(program code 46).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 180
6.18 Recipes
PC# / Function(Recipes 1 through 10)
Range <Default> OROption (* = Default)
480 Number of recipes 0 to 30 <1>
481 / 487 / 493 / 499 / 505 / 511 / 517 / 523 / 529 / 535 Name 1 to 16 chars <Recipe #1>
482 / 488 / 494 / 500 / 506 / 512 / 518 / 524 / 530 / 536 Comp 1 % 0 to 100 <100>
483 / 489 / 495 / 501 / 507 / 513 / 519 / 525 / 531 / 537 Comp 2 % 0 to 100
484 / 490 / 496 / 502 / 508 / 514 / 520 / 526 / 532 / 538 Comp 3 % 0 to 100
485 / 491 / 497 / 503 / 509 / 515 / 521 / 527 / 533 / 539 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0 to 300
486 / 492 / 498 / 504 / 510 / 516 / 522 / 528 / 534 / 540 Sequence or low proportion nnnn
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 181
6.18 Recipes (continued)
PC# / Function(Recipes 11 through 20)
Range <Default> OROption (* = Default)
541 / 547 / 553 / 559 / 565 / 571 / 577 / 583 / 589 / 595 Name 1 to 16 chars
542 / 548 / 554 / 560 / 566 / 572 / 578 / 584 / 590 / 596 Comp 1 % 0 to 100
543 / 549 / 555 / 561 / 567 / 573 / 579 / 585 / 591 / 597 Comp 2 % 0 to 100
544 / 550 / 556 / 562 / 568 / 574 / 580 / 586 / 592 / 598 Comp 3 % 0 to 100
545 / 551 / 557 / 563 / 569 / 575 / 581 / 587 / 593 / 599 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0 to 300
546 / 552 / 558 / 564 / 570 / 576 / 582 / 588 / 594 / 600 Sequence or low proportion nnnn
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 182
6.18 Recipes (continued)
PC# / Function(Recipes 21 through 30)
Range <Default> OROption (* = Default)
601 / 607 / 613 / 619 / 625 / 631 / 637 / 643 / 649 / 655 Name 1 to 16 chars
602 / 608 / 614 / 620 / 626 / 632 / 638 / 644 / 650 / 656 Comp 1 % 0 to 100
603 / 609 / 615 / 621 / 627 / 633 / 639 / 645 / 651 / 657 Comp 2 % 0 to 100
604 / 610 / 616 / 622 / 628 / 634 / 640 / 646 / 652 / 658 Comp 3 % 0 to 100
605 / 611 / 617 / 623 / 629 / 635 / 641 / 647 / 653 / 659 Comp 4 % or ratio qty 0 to 300
606 / 612 / 618 / 624 / 630 / 636 / 642 / 648 / 654 / 660 Sequence or low proportion nnnn
661 # add calib cycles 1 to 9999 <1>
NOTE: 1. PC#’s 644/645/647 (compartment sizes) are used in conjunction with PC#’s 349/350/351/352 (compartment sizeinputs) when PC# 341 (# cmpt inputs) is configured.
2. PC#’s 650/651/652/653 are the low and high limits for compartment sizes 2 and 4 respectively. Compartment sizes1 and 3 do not have low and high limits associated with them.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 183
6.18 Recipes (continued)
Recipe Parameters contain data which defines the percentage ofeach of one to four components that can be blended into acomposite liquid for deliveries. Single components are assignedrecipe names so that the component can be referred to by acommon name (example: Gasoline in place of Component 2). Inthe case of a single component delivery, program code 482 / .../ 656 Component # % value for that component is 100 percent.
480 Number of recipes
This program code sets the total number of recipes. At least onerecipe must be defined.
481 / ... / 655 Name
This program code contains the name used in displays and logs toidentify the recipe. The last two characters in this field can alsobe used to select the additive using the configured additiveselection method.
482 / ... /656 Component 1 %
This program code sets the percentage of this component used inthe delivered blend. Zero means component is not used.
483 / ... / 657 Component 2 %
This program code sets the percentage of this component used inthe delivered blend. Zero means the component is not used.
484 / ... / 658 Component 3 %
This program code sets the percentage of this component used inthe delivered blend. Zero means the component is not used.
485 / ... / 659 Component 4 % or ratio volume
This program code sets the percentage of this component used inthe delivered blend or the additive ratio quantity for the “Multi-Rate” additive selection method (which limits the DanLoad 6000to a maximum of three components). Zero means that thecomponent is not used in the recipe.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 184
6.18 Recipes (continued)
486 / ... / 660 Sequence or low proportion
Note: Applicable to Unit type (026) = Seq. (Auto or Man)
This program code selects the sequence to deliver thecomponents. The sum of the recipe selected componentpercentages must equal 100 percent.
Example: Sequence to load = 312 means component 3 is loaded,then component 1 is loaded, then component 2 is loaded. If theDanLoad 6000 is configured for only one component, this valuemust be “1".
Note: Applicable to Unit type (026) = In-line
A '0' or a '1' in each component position (nnnn = 1234)indicates that the corresponding component is either a high-proportion component (0) or a low-proportion component (1).
Example: Sequence to load = 0100 means that component 2 is alow-proportion component for a 4-component blend. If theDanLoad 6000 is configured for only one component, this valuemust be “0".
Low-proportion components must be indicated so that theDanLoad 6000 can load these components at the normal flowrates during the first part of the loading time period. This methodof loading is performed because the DanLoad 6000 cannot keepa constant blend ratio correct without allowing the flow rate of alow-proportion component to fall below the minimum flow rateof the component’s meter. Therefore, as the loading progresses,the quantity of the low-proportion components exceeds thequantity desired by the batch ratio. The high-proportioncomponents continue to be loaded throughout the total timeperiod of the batch delivery. At the end of the batch delivery, theblend ratio is correct.
Low proportion products are those whose flow rates, if allowedto be loaded proportionally (in proper blend ratio throughout theload), would fall below the minimum rating of the meter. Thesecomponents are therefore loaded at a specific rate (refer toproduct code 715) which is within the meter’s rating. TheDanLoad 6000 calculates the quantity of this required component,allows the primary component(s) to load the Low Flow Startquantity, then loads the low-proportional component at thespecified rate. When this quantity has been loaded, the valve forthis component closes and the batch continues normally for theother component(s). The blend ratio will not be correct until theend of the batch delivery.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 185
6.18 Recipes (continued)
661 # add calib cycles
The number of additive injection cycles that are performed when“START” is pressed in the additive calibration screen (refer toAdditive Meter Calibration - Section 3.10.3). The default valueis 1, i.e. one additive injection cycle each time the “START” keyis pressed in the additive calibration screen.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (662 to 672 Data Communications Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 186
6.19 Data Communications
PC#
Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)Ch. A Ch. B
662 662 Address 0 to 255 <0>
663 668 Mode 0 Not used *1 Modbus RTU2 ASCII 3 Data logging (ch. B only)
664 669 Data Rate 0 300 bps1 600 bps2 1200 bps3 2400 bps4 4800 bps5 9600 bps6 19200 bps7 38400 bps
665 670 Word Size 0 5 bits1 6 bits2 7 bits3 8 bits
666 671 Stop Bits 0 1 bit1 1-1/2 bits2 2 bits
667 672 Parity 0 None1 Odd2 Even
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (662 to 672 Data Communications Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 187
6.19 Data Communications (continued)
Data Communications Parameters contain data which definesoperating parameters for the one or two serial ports and thenetwork port. Serial ports can be used for communications witha Terminal Automation System, host computer, and data loggingprinter or device. The network port can be used forcommunications with a Terminal Automation System or otherhost computer. On the v1 CPU board, the DUART is on adaughter board with an address switch that is read on power-up.On the v2 CPU board, the DUART is built-in and is addressed viaprogram code 662.
662 Address
The communications address for the Modbus RTU protocol andto identify the unit on data logs. This should typically bemodified from the default value prior to placing the unit inservice. The default value is 0 in order to avoid conflict withanother unit on the same multidrop.
663 / 668 Mode
This program code selects the protocol used for datacommunications with an external device, such as a data printer,a terminal automation system, or other host computer.
# Not used
This port is not assigned.
# Modbus RTU
Modicon Modbus RTU (binary) protocol.
# ASCII
Not used.
# Data logging
Send data logs to this port, can be connected to an alpha-numeric data printer or other data logging device. (For usewith RS-232 channel B only.)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (662 to 672 Data Communications Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 188
6.19 Data Communications (continued)
664 / 669 Data rate
This program code selects the bits per second data rate used bythis port.
Note: If 38400 bps is selected for Channel B then 19200 bps isnot available on Channel A. This is due to the SCN2681'sAuxiliary Control Register’s Baud Rate Generator Set Select. Onthe DanLoad 6000, Channel B controls the available set of baudrates. 38400 bps is not intended for normal operational use.
665 / 670 Word size
This program code selects the data word length in bits.
666 / 671 Stop bits
This program code selects of the number of stop bits used inserial data transmission.
667 / 672 Parity
This program code selects the parity checking method.
# None
Parity checking in not performed.
# Odd
Odd parity checking is performed.
# Even
Even parity checking is performed.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (662 to 672 Data Communications Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 189
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 190
6.20 Dynamic Data Display
PC# / Function Range <Default> OROption (* = Default)
679 Mode OffStandard *All
680 Line 1 data code 3 digit data display code
681 Line 2 data code 3 digit data display code
682 Line 3 data code 3 digit data display code
683 Line 4 data code 3 digit data display code
684 Line 5 data code 3 digit data display code
685 Line 6 data code 3 digit data display code
686 Line 7 data code 3 digit data display code
687 Line 8 data code 3 digit data display code
PC# / Function Range <Default> OROption (* = Default)
688 Line 9 data code 3 digit data display code
689 Line 10 data code 3 digit data display code
690 Line 11 data code 3 digit data display code
691 Line 12 data code 3 digit data display code
692 Line 13 data code 3 digit data display code
693 Line 14 data code 3 digit data display code
694 Line 15 data code 3 digit data display code
695 Line 16 data code 3 digit data display code
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 191
6.20 Dynamic Data Display (continued)
Dynamic Data Display Parameters contain program codes whichdefine data values that can be viewed when the DanLoad 6000 isprompting for a preset quantity or a batch delivery is in progress.The viewable data lines are displayed in pages with four lines ineach page. The data variables that can be assigned to each lineare selected by entry of a one to three digit identifying number(Dynamic Data Display Data Code). These Data Codes are listedin Section 6.20.1.
679 Mode
This program code controls how the dynamic data display itemsare presented. The default value is “Standard”.
# Off
The dynamic data display is disabled.
# Standard
The dynamic data display can be invoked by pressing the“SELECT” key in the loading screen. Four pages, each with fourdata codes (identified by program codes 680 through 695), aredisplayed.
# All
The dynamic data display can be invoked by pressing the"SELECT" key in the loading screen. Four pages, each with fourdata codes (identified by program codes 680 thru 695), aredisplayed, plus additional pages for data codes 1 thru<maximum> in ascending order.
Example: Four configurable pages
1 Grs batch qty 150
2 Std batch qty 152
3 Mtr 1 grs total 23838017
4 Mtr 1 std total 23839223
5 Mtr 1 grs batch 150
6 Mtr 1 std batch 152
7 Mtr 1 grs unauth 0.0
8 Mtr 1 flw rate 597
9 Mtr 1 factor 1.0000
10 Mtr 1 grs ld 149.72
11 Mtr 1 pls cnt 3821
12 Mtr 1 max flw rate 602
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 192
6.20 Dynamic Data Display (continued)
13 Mtr 1 curr temp 42.6
14 Cmp 1 ave temp 42.6
15 Cmp 1 ave vlv cls 230
16 Arm position 1
Data codes 1 through <maximum>
001Arm position 1
002Grs batch qty 150
003Std batch qty 152
004Mtr 1 grs total 23838017
005Mtr 1 std total 23839223
006Mtr 1 grs batch 150
007Mtr 1 std batch 152
008Mtr 1 flw rate 597
etc.
680 Line 1 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 1, line 1 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
681 Line 2 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 1, line 2 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
682 Line 3 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 1, line 3 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
683 Line 4 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 1, line 4 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 193
6.20 Dynamic Data Display (continued)
684 Line 5 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 2, line 1 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
685 Line 6 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 2, line 2 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
686 Line 7 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 2, line 3 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
687 Line 8 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 2, line 4 inthe Dynamic Data Display..
688 Line 9 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 3, line 1 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
689 Line 10 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 3, line 2 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 194
6.20 Dynamic Data Display (continued)
690 Line 11 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 3, line 3 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
691 Line 12 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 3, line 4 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
692 Line 13 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 4, line 1 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
693 Line 14 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 4, line 2 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
694 Line 15 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 4, line 3 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
695 Line 16 data code
This program code selects display of the description and datavalue associated with the specified data code at page 4, line 4 inthe Dynamic Data Display.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 195
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes
Up to sixteen of the Dynamic Data Display Data Codes listedbelow can be selected for inclusion in the Dynamic Data Display.The label and the current value of these variables can bedisplayed in a window, superimposed in the center area of theLoading Display. Up to four windows, each window containingfour dynamic data lines can be defined. The dynamic data isdisplayable while in the Loading Mode by pressing the SELECTkey. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to change the displaypages. The CLEAR key removes the Dynamic Data Displaywindow from the Loading Display.
Code Display Data Function
Batch Data001 Arm position swing arm position indicator002 Grs batch qty gross batch quantity003 Std batch qty standard batch quantity
Flow Meter 1 Data004 Mtr 1 grs total gross totalizer quantity005 Mtr 1 std total std totalizer quantity006 Mtr 1 grs batch gross batch quantity007 Mtr 1 std batch std batch quantity008 Mtr 1 flw rate instantaneous flow rate009 Mtr 1 CCF combined correction factor010 Mtr 1 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch011 Mtr 1 factor meter factor012 Mtr 1 pls cnt pulse count total (resets at 65535)
Code Display Data Function 013 Mtr 1 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate (for load)014 Mtr 1 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2 (for load)015 Mtr 1 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3 (for load)016 Mtr 1 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4 (for load)017 Mtr 1 grs unauth unauthorized gross quantity018 Mtr 1 std unauth unauthorized std quantity019 Mtr 1 grs start start gross quantity020 Mtr 1 std start start std quantity
Flow Meter 2 Data021 Mtr 2 grs total gross totalizer quantity022 Mtr 2 std total std totalizer quantity023 Mtr 2 grs batch gross batch quantity024 Mtr 2 std batch std batch quantity025 Mtr 2 flw rate instantaneous flow rate026 Mtr 2 CCF average flow rate027 Mtr 2 max flwrate maximum flow rate this batch028 Mtr 2 factor meter factor029 Mtr 2 pls cnt pulse count total (resets at 65535)030 Mtr 2 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate (for load)031 Mtr 2 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2 (for load)032 Mtr 2 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3 (for load)033 Mtr 2 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4 (for load)034 Mtr 2 grs unauth unauthorized gross quantity035 Mtr 2 std unauth unauthorized std quantity036 Mtr 2 grs start start gross quantity037 Mtr 2 std start start std quantity
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 196
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes(continued)
Code Display Data Function
Flow Meter 3 Data038 Mtr 3 grs total gross totalizer quantity039 Mtr 3 std total std totalizer quantity040 Mtr 3 grs batch gross batch quantity041 Mtr 3 std batch std batch quantity042 Mtr 3 flw rate instantaneous flow rate043 Mtr 3 CCF average flow rate044 Mtr 3 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch045 Mtr 3 factor meter factor046 Mtr 3 pls cnt pulse count total (resets at 65535)047 Mtr 3 pls flrt1 pulse count - low flow rate (for load)048 Mtr 3 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2 (for load)049 Mtr 3 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3 (for load)050 Mtr 3 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4 (for load)051 Mtr 3 grs unauth unauthorized gross quantity052 Mtr 3 std unauth unauthorized std quantity053 Mtr 3 grs start start gross quantity054 Mtr 3 std start start std quantity
Code Display Data Function
Flow Meter 4 Data055 Mtr 4 grs total gross totalizer quantity056 Mtr 4 std total std totalizer quantity057 Mtr 4 grs batch gross batch quantity058 Mtr 4 std batch std batch quantity059 Mtr 4 flw rate instantaneous flow rate060 Mtr 4 CCF average flow rate061 Mtr 4 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch062 Mtr 4 factor meter factor063 Mtr 4 pls cnt pulse count total (resets at 65535)064 Mtr 4 pls flrt1 pulse count - low flow rate (for load)065 Mtr 4 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2 (for load)066 Mtr 4 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3 (for load)067 Mtr 4 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4 (for load)068 Mtr 4 grs unauth unauthorized gross quantity069 Mtr 4 std unauth unauthorized std quantity070 Mtr 4 grs start start gross quantity071 Mtr 4 std start start std quantity
Component 1 Data072 Cmp 1 grs batch component gross quantity, batch073 Cmp 1 std batch component std quantity, batch074 Mtr 1 curr temp component current temperature075 Cmp 1 ave temp component batch average temp076 Cmp 1 ave vlv cls comp. average FCV closure time077 Cmp 1 batch % component # % from recipe
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 197
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes(continued)
Code Display Data Function
Component 2 Data078 Cmp 2 grs batch component gross quantity, batch079 Cmp 2 std batch component std quantity, batch080 Mtr 2 curr temp component current temperature081 Cmp 2 ave temp component batch average temp082 Cmp 2 ave vlv cls comp. average FCV closure time083 Cmp 2 batch % component # % from recipe
Component 3 Data084 Cmp 3 grs batch component gross quantity, batch085 Cmp 3 std batch component std quantity, batch086 Mtr 3 curr temp component current temperature087 Cmp 3 ave temp component batch average temp088 Cmp 3 ave vlv cls comp. average FCV closure time089 Cmp 3 batch % component # % from recipe
Component 4 Data090 Cmp 4 grs batch component gross quantity, batch091 Cmp 4 std batch component std quantity, batch092 Mtr 4 curr temp component current temperature093 Cmp 4 ave temp component batch average temp094 Cmp 4 ave vlv cls comp. average FCV closure time095 Cmp 4 batch % component # % from recipe
Code Display Data Function
Additive Injection Data (Batch) 096 Add 1 total accumulated additive volume097 Add 2 total accumulated additive volume098 Add 3 total accumulated additive volume099 Add 4 total accumulated additive volume100 Add 5 total accumulated additive volume101 Add 6 total accumulated additive volume
Delivery Quantity Data102 Preset quantity preset entry103 Mtr 1 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)104 Mtr 2 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)105 Mtr 3 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)106 Mtr 4 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)
Pressure and Density Data107 Cmp 1 ave dens average density, component 1108 Cmp 1 ave pres average pressure, component 1109 Cmp 2 ave dens average density, component 2110 Cmp 2 ave pres average pressure, component 2111 Cmp 3 ave dens average density, component 3112 Cmp 3 ave pres average pressure, component 3113 Cmp 4 ave dens average density, component 4114 Cmp 4 ave pres average pressure, component 4
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 198
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes(continued)
Code Display Data Function
Additive Data for Batch115 Add 1 batch additive 1 volume this/last batch116 Add 2 batch additive 2 volume this/last batch117 Add 3 batch additive 3 volume this/last batch118 Add 4 batch additive 4 volume this/last batch119 Add 5 batch additive 5 volume this/last batch120 Add 6 batch additive 6 volume this/last batch
Total Flow Rate121 Flow rate load flow rate
Component Blend Ratio122 Cmp 1 adjust % comp 1 % for blend ratio adj123 Cmp 2 adjust % comp 2 % for blend ratio adj124 Cmp 3 adjust % comp 3 % for blend ratio adj125 Cmp 4 adjust % comp 4 % for blend ratio adj
Quantity Correction Factor for Load126 Mtr 1 CTL meter 1127 Mtr 2 CTL meter 2128 Mtr 3 CTL meter 3129 Mtr 4 CTL meter 4
Batch Data130 Power fail grs bch gross delivered vol. at power fail time131 Power fail std bch std delivered qty at power fail time132 Batch temperature average temperature during load133 Batch density average density during load134 Batch pressure average pressure during load
Code Display Data Function
Current Meter Pressure135 Mtr 1 curr pres meter 1136 Mtr 2 curr pres meter 2137 Mtr 3 curr pres meter 3138 Mtr 4 curr pres meter 4
Pressure Correction Factor for Load139 Mtr 1 CPL meter 1140 Mtr 2 CPL meter 2141 Mtr 3 CPL meter 3142 Mtr 4 CPL meter 4
Current Meter Density143 Mtr 1 curr dens meter 1144 Mtr 2 curr dens meter 2145 Mtr 3 curr dens meter 3146 Mtr 4 curr dens meter 4
Delivery Volume Data
147 Mtr 1 std ld accumulated total (n.nn)148 Mtr 2 std ld accumulated total (n.nn)149 Mtr 3 std ld accumulated total (n.nn)150 Mtr 4 std ld accumulated total (n.nn)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 199
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes(continued)
Code Display Data Function
Component Quantity Totals151 Cmp 1 grs total component 1 gross quantity, total152 Cmp 1 std total component 1 std quantity, total153 Cmp 2 grs total component 2 gross quantity, total154 Cmp 2 std total component 2 std quantity, total155 Cmp 3 grs total component 3 gross quantity, total156 Cmp 3 std total component 3 std quantity, total157 Cmp 4 grs total component 4 gross quantity, total158 Cmp 4 std total component 4 std quantity, total
Recipe Quantity Totals159 Rec 1 grs tot Recipe 1 gross quantity, total160 Rec 1 std tot Recipe 1 std quantity, total161 Rec 2 grs tot Recipe 2 gross quantity, total162 Rec 2 std tot Recipe 2 std quantity, total163 Rec 3 grs tot Recipe 3 gross quantity, total164 Rec 3 std tot Recipe 3 std quantity, total165 Rec 4 grs tot Recipe 4 gross quantity, total166 Rec 4 std tot Recipe 4 std quantity, total167 Rec 5 grs tot Recipe 5 gross quantity, total168 Rec 5 std tot Recipe 5 std quantity, total169 Rec 6 grs tot Recipe 6 gross quantity, total170 Rec 6 std tot Recipe 6 std quantity, total171 Rec 7 grs tot Recipe 7 gross quantity, total172 Rec 7 std tot Recipe 7 std quantity, total173 Rec 8 grs tot Recipe 8 gross quantity, total174 Rec 8 std tot Recipe 8 std quantity, total175 Rec 9 grs tot Recipe 9 gross quantity, total176 Rec 9 std tot Recipe 9 std quantity, total177 Rec 10 grs tot Recipe 10 gross quantity, total178 Rec 10 std tot Recipe 10 std quantity, total179 Rec 11 grs tot Recipe 11 gross quantity, total180 Rec 11 std tot Recipe 11 std quantity, total
Code Display Data Function
181 Rec 12 grs tot Recipe 12 gross quantity, total182 Rec 12 std tot Recipe 12 std quantity, total183 Rec 13 grs tot Recipe 13 gross quantity, total184 Rec 13 std tot Recipe 13 std quantity, total185 Rec 14 grs tot Recipe 14 gross quantity, total186 Rec 14 std tot Recipe 14 std quantity, total187 Rec 15 grs tot Recipe 15 gross quantity, total188 Rec 15 std tot Recipe 15 std quantity, total189 Rec 16 grs tot Recipe 16 gross quantity, total190 Rec 16 std tot Recipe 16 std quantity, total191 Rec 17 grs tot Recipe 17 gross quantity, total192 Rec 17 std tot Recipe 17 std quantity, total193 Rec 18 grs tot Recipe 18 gross quantity, total194 Rec 18 std tot Recipe 18 std quantity, total195 Rec 19 grs tot Recipe 19 gross quantity, total196 Rec 19 std tot Recipe 19 std quantity, total197 Rec 20 grs tot Recipe 20 gross quantity, total198 Rec 20 std tot Recipe 20 std quantity, total199 Rec 21 grs tot Recipe 21 gross quantity, total200 Rec 21 std tot Recipe 21 std quantity, total201 Rec 22 grs tot Recipe 22 gross quantity, total202 Rec 22 std tot Recipe 22 std quantity, total203 Rec 23 grs tot Recipe 23 gross quantity, total204 Rec 23 std tot Recipe 23 std quantity, total205 Rec 24 grs tot Recipe 24 gross quantity, total206 Rec 24 std tot Recipe 24 std quantity, total207 Rec 25 grs tot Recipe 25 gross quantity, total208 Rec 25 std tot Recipe 25 std quantity, total209 Rec 26 grs tot Recipe 26 gross quantity, total210 Rec 26 std tot Recipe 26 std quantity, total211 Rec 27 grs tot Recipe 27 gross quantity, total212 Rec 27 std tot Recipe 27 std quantity, total
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 200
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes (continued)
Code Display Data Function
213 Rec 28 grs tot Recipe 28 gross quantity, total214 Rec 28 std tot Recipe 28 std quantity, total215 Rec 29 grs tot Recipe 29 gross quantity, total216 Rec 29 std tot Recipe 29 std quantity, total217 Rec 30 grs tot Recipe 30 gross quantity, total218 Rec 30 std tot Recipe 30 std quantity, total
Meter Calibration Status219 Mtr 1 calib stat meter 1220 Mtr 2 calib stat meter 2221 Mtr 3 calib stat meter 3222 Mtr 4 calib stat meter 4223 Flush pls cnt Multi-Stream Additive Injection Flush pulse count
Current safety circuit state224 Safety 1 State of safety circuit 1225 Safety 2 State of safety circuit 2226 Safety 3 State of safety circuit 3227 Safety 4 State of safety circuit 4228 Safety 5 State of safety circuit 5229 Safety 6 State of safety circuit 6230 Safety 7 State of safety circuit 7231 Safety 8 State of safety circuit 8232 Cpmt qty Compartment quantity based on
compartment size inputs233 Add 1 fail code Additive 1 failure reason code234 Add 2 fail code Additive 2 failure reason code235 Add 3 fail code Additive 3 failure reason code236 Add 4 fail code Additive 4 failure reason code237 Add 5 fail code Additive 5 failure reason code238 Add 6 fail code Additive 6 failure reason code239 Add 1% Additive #1 % of required additive240 Add 2% Additive #2 % of required additive241 Add 3% Additive #3 % of required additive242 Add 4% Additive #4 % of required additive243 Add 5% Additive #5 % of required additive244 Add 6% Additive #6 % of required additive245 Power fail preset Power fail preset quantity246 Power fail remain Power fail remaining quantity
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________ Section 6 - 201
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________ Section 6 - 202
6.21 Data Logging
Program Code / FunctionRange <Default> OROption (* = Default)
696 Batch summary 0 Off *
1 PR
2 PRFF
3 PR1
4 PR1FF
5 PR2
6 PR2FF
7 PR3
8 PR3FF
9 PR4
10 PR4FF
697 Transaction summary
698 Alarm log
699 Power fail log
700 Program mode entry/exit
701 W&M switch opened/closed
702 Program value change log
703 Configuration summary
704 Crash memory summary
705 Totalizers
706 Transaction ticket
707 Transaction ticket reprint
708 Throughput
709 Sequence Numbers 0 Off *
1 On
710 Cutoff hour 0 to 23 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________ Section 6 - 203
6.21 Data Logging (continued)
Data Logging program codes are used to control printing ofseveral types of reports or event / alarm logs. Program codes 696through 708 enable data printing to one of four printers or disablethe printing of the related report. program code 709 Sequencenumbers enables or disables printing of report sequence numberson all reports. See Section 4.4 for a description of data spoolingand printing with a code operated switch.
Data logging program codes with common option selections.
696 Batch summary
This program code controls spooling and printing of the fixedformat batch summary report.
697 Transaction summary
This program code controls spooling and printing of the fixedformat transaction summary report.
698 Alarm log
This program code controls spooling and printing of single linealarm logs.
699 Power fail log
This program code controls spooling and printing of single linepower fail logs.
700 Program mode entry/exit
This program code controls spooling and printing of single lineprogram mode change logs.
701 W&M switch opened/closed
This program code controls spooling and printing of single lineW&M switch status logs.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________ Section 6 - 204
6.21 Data Logging (continued)
702 Program code value change log
This program code controls spooling and printing of programcode value change logs.
703 Configuration summary
The configuration summary data log (a log showing all programcode values) can be printed from the diagnostics menu in themanual operating mode. The printer on which to print (via aCode Operated Switch) and form feed control can be configured.
704 Crash memory summary
This program code controls spooling and printing of the Crashmemory summary.
705 Totalizers
This program code enables/disables automatic printing every 24hours (per program code 710 and manual reprinting (from theprogram mode menu) of meter, component, recipe and additiverunning totalizers. The printer on which to print (via a Code
Operated Switch) and form feed control can be configured.
706 Transaction ticket
This program code controls spooling and printing of the currentuser defined transaction ticket. See Section 3.10 for a completedescription of transaction data storage and user definedtransaction tickets.
707 Transaction ticket reprint
This program code controls spooling and printing of a copy of acompleted user defined transaction ticket from the archive of upto 10,000 transaction tickets. See Section 3.10 for a completedescription of transaction data storage and ticket printing.
708 Recipe throughput
This program code controls spooling and printing of the RecipeThroughput report every 24-hours.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________ Section 6 - 205
6.21 Data Logging (continued)
The following option selections apply to each of the programcodes 696 through 708.
# Off
Disable spooling and printing for this data log.
# PR
Enable spooling and printing for this data log. (No codeoperated switch)
# PRFF
Same as PR above, except send form feed control toprinter at end of report.
# PR1
Enable spooling for this report and direct this report toprinter number 1 via control code to code operated switch.
# PR1FF
Same as PR1 above, except send form-feed control toprinter at end of report.
# PR2
Enable spooling for this report and direct this report toprinter number 2 via control code to code operated switch.
# PR2FF
Same as PR2 above, except send form-feed control toprinter at end of report.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________ Section 6 - 206
6.21 Data Logging (continued)
# PR3
Enable spooling for this report and direct this report toprinter number 3 via control code to code operated switch.
# PR3FF
Same as PR3 above, except send form-feed control toprinter at end of report.
# PR4
Enable spooling for this report and direct this report toprinter number 4 via control code to code operated switch.
# PR4FF
Same as PR4 above, except send form-feed control toprinter at end of report.
709 Sequence numbers
This program code globally enables or disables printing of datalog sequence numbers on all reports. Up to four counters, onefor each data printer enabled, are maintained by the DanLoad6000. Each counter maintains the current sequence number ofany report printed to one data printer. The sequence is 0000 to9999 with automatic rollover to 0000 after report 9999 is printed.Sequence numbers are generated on a per printer basis and eachprinted report or alarm / event printed line is assigned a sequencenumber which is printed ifthis function is enabled. Note that the report sequence numbersare not related to transaction or batch sequence numbers.
# Off (default)
Enable printing of report sequence numbers on eachreport.
# On
Disable printing of report sequence numbers.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________ Section 6 - 207
6.21 Data Logging (continued)
710 Cutoff hour
The hour (24-hour clock/military time) at which a cutoff (end of day) processing is run by the DanLoad 6000. Cutoff processing is“postponed” until any batch in progress is ended. Cutoff processing includes storing and printing meter, component, recipe and additivetotalizers. The default is 0, i.e. cutoff at midnight.
Once a second, the DanLoad 6000 compares the current hour with the configured cutoff hour, the current day with the last cutoff day andthe current hour with the last cutoff hour as follows:
if (CurrentHour IS EQUAL TO ConfiguredCutoffHour)BEGINif ( (CurrentDay IS NOT EQUAL TO LastCutoffDay)
OR (CurrentHour IS GREATER THAN LastCutoffHour))BEGINRunCutoff( )END
END
This allows multiple cutoffs per day to be run per day by increasing the configured cutoff hour (program code 710).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 208
6.22 Blending
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
711 Ramp down % 0 to 100 <50>
712 Rate reduction 0 to 9999 <100>
713 Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 <50>
714 Clean line qty 0 to 9999 <0>
715 Low prop fac 1 to 4 <1>
716 Correct after qty 0 to 9999 <100>
717 Alarm after qty 0 to 9999 <200>
718 Adjustment qty 0 to 9999 <50>
719 Comp % display 0 Gross *1 Std
720 Add calib delay (s) 0 to 9999 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 209
6.22 Blending (continued)
Blending Parameters, program codes 710 to 770 are used todefine the method of handling a product blending process.Various parameters in this group interact with other parameters,dependent on the type of blending process defined by programcode 026 Unit type. Details on configuration of each type ofblending operation are contained in Section 3 - Setup.
711 Ramp down %
The percentage of the blend’s desired flow rate to which theblend’s flow rate is initially reduced when there is insufficientpressure to maintain the blend’s desired flow rate during an in-line blend. The blend’s flow rate is not reduced below the blend’slow flow rate. The default value is 50.
712 Rate reduction
This program code defines the flow rate reduction [high(normal) flow rate minus program code 712 Rate reduction] thatis used if the high flow rate cannot be maintained.
713 Low flow start qty
This program code defines the quantity to load at the low flowrate before increasing the flow rate to high (normal) flow rate.
714 Clean line qty
This program code defines the quantity of the primary componentto load at the end of the batch delivery to purge the blend fromthe loading lines. If, for a particular batch, the preset quantity isless than or equal to the clean line quantity, the batch is deliveredas if there were no clean line quantity configured. The defaultvalue is 0.
715 Low prop fac
This program code defines the calibration point flow rate at whichto deliver those components that are configured as low-proportioncomponents in a recipe. The default value is 1.
716 Correct after qty
This program code defines the quantity of the blend to deliverbefore blend adjustment begins. The default value is 100.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 210
6.22 Blending (continued)
717 Alarm after qty
This program code defines the quantity of the blend to deliverbefore enabling the checking and action of the blend ratio alarmfunction that generates the message: Unable to maintain blend.The default value is 200.
718 Adjustment qty
This program code defines the blend quantity to consider whenadjusting the flow, via flow control valves, to maintain the blendratio. A small value for this parameter causes the DanLoad 6000to issue more clicks (adjustment commands) to flow controlvalves to correct errors in the blend ratio. The default value is 50.
719 Comp % display
This program code defines the display form for the quantities ofthe blend components, defined by the active recipe. The defaultis “Gross”.
# Gross
# Std
720 Add calib delay (s)
In the additive meter calibration screen (see Additive MeterCalibration - Section 3.10.3), this is the time (in seconds)between pressing the “START” key and the beginning of the firstadditive injection cycle. This program code is intended to givethe operator time to move from the preset to the additive injector,if necessary. The default value is 0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 211
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 212
6.22 Blending (continued)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
722 Blend error method 0 Grspctbatch *1 Stdpctbatch2 Grsqtydiff3 Stdqtydiff4 Grspctsmpl5 Stdpctsmpl6 Flrtsmpl
723 Max dev % 0 to 999 <2>
724 Blend tol % 0 to 999 <5>
725 Max dev qty 0 to 9999 <20>
726 Blend tol qty 0 to 9999 <40>
727 Blend sample qty 0 to 9999 <10>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 213
6.22 Blending (continued)
722 Blend error method
This program code defines the method for computing blend ratioadjustments and sensing blend ratio error conditions.
# Grspctbatch
Gross quantity percentages of each blend component are used inbatch delivery calculations.
# Stdpctbatch
Standard quantity percentages of each blend component are usedin the batch delivery calculations.
# Grsqtydiff
Gross quantity difference between each blend component are usedin the batch delivery calculations.
# Stdqtydiff
Standard quantity difference between each blend component areused in the batch delivery calculations.
# Grspctsmpl
Samples of the gross quantity percentages of each blendcomponent, relative to the gross quantity of the primarycomponent set by program code 111 Primary component, areused in the batch delivery calculations.
# Stdpctsmpl
Samples of the std quantity percentages of each blend component,relative to the std quantity of the primary component set byprogram code 111 Primary component, are used in the batchdelivery calculations.
# Flrtsmpl
The sampled flow rates of each blend component are used in thebatch delivery calculations.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 214
6.22 Blending (continued)
723 Max dev %
This program code defines the maximum percentage deviation forthe blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component ofthe blend. When the value is program code 723 Max dev % isreached, a blend ratio adjustment is performed.
724 Blend tol %
This program code defines the maximum percentage toleranceallowed for the blend before generating an Unable to maintainblend alarm.
725 Max dev qty
This program code defines the maximum quantity deviation forthe blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component ofthe blend.
726 Blend tol qty
This program code defines the maximum quantity toleranceallowed for the blend before generating an Unable to maintainblend alarm.
727 Blend sample quantity
This program code defines the blend quantity to deliver betweencalculations of blend ratio by percentage methods ('Grspctsmpl'and 'Stdpctsmpl').
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 215
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 216
6.22 Blending (continued)
PC# / Function(Four Meters) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
728 / 734 / 740 / 746 Flow adj fac 0.00 to 9.99 <1.00>
729 / 735 / 741 / 747 Ratio adj fac 1.00 to 9.99 <1.00>
730 / 736 / 742 / 748 Ramp % 0 to 110 <85>
731 / 737 / 743 / 749 CALMON analysis method Fuzzy *Heuristic
PC# / Function MPMC Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
752 FPO basis Raw *GrossNet
753 CALMON error limit 0 to 255 <25>
754 CALMON reset count 0 to 9999 <50>
755 Calib fail alarm action 0 Off1 Info2 Secondary3 Primary *
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 217
6.22 Blending (continued)
PC# / Function(Four Components) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
756 / 761 / 766 / 771 FPO 0 to 2 <0>
757 / 762 / 767 / 772 Number of blades 0 to 50 <0>
758 / 763 / 768 / 773 Max max char dev 0 to 65535 <100>
759 / 764 / 769 / 774 Max tot char devs 0 to 65535 <400>
760 / 765 / 770 / 775 Calibration sample 0 Not acquired *1 Acquired
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 218
6.22 Blending (continued)
728 / 734 / 740 / 746 Flow adj fac
This program code defines a factor for each flow meter used inthe blend. The factor provides fine tuning of individual flow ratesfor blend ratio adjustment. Reduce the value if the ramp up tonormal flow rate is too fast. Increase the value if the ramp up tonormal flow rate is too slow.
729 / 735 / 741 / 747 Ratio adj fac
This program code defines a factor for each component of theblend. The factor provides fine tuning for individual componentsfor blend ratio adjustment.
730 / 736 / 742 / 748 Ramp %
[Sequential blending / digital flow control valves]Percentage of desired flow rate to ramp up by a single click of thedownstream solenoid valve, before switching to flow ratemaintenance.
731 / 737 / 743 / 749 CALMON analysis method
This program code selects the “logic” used to perform a“calibration monitoring analysis” with a MPMC board installed.The default value is “Fuzzy”.
# Fuzzy
Calibration monitoring analysis incorporates “Fuzzy”logic with four inputs and one output. This is therecommended setting.
# Heuristic
Analysis operation using the Heuristic method.
In the DanLoad 6000's "Blending" setup group (setup group 20)there are twenty-three program codes (three "global" and five "permeter") associated with the "smart" 4-ch. meter pulse board's (4-ch. meter pulse board with MPMC installed) factored pulseoutput (FPO) and calibration monitoring (CALMON) features.Factored pulse outputs are supported by DanLoad 6000.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 219
6.22 Blending (continued)
752 FPO basis
The factor that is applied to the meter pulse inputs ("A" streams)in order to generate the factored pulse outputs (FPO's). Thedefault value is "Raw". Select one of the following:
# "Raw". One-to-one, i.e. the factor is 1.0000. Thisis required for compatibility with the "proveroutputs" on 2-ch. meter pulse boards.
# "Gross". The factor is the (current) meter factor.
# "Net". The factor is the (current) meter factormultiplied by the combined correction factor(CCF).
753 CALMON error limit
The number of "bad meter analyses" per CALMON reset count(program code 754) calibration monitoring analyses above whicha calibration failure alarm is raised for the meter duringmonitoring. The default value is 10.
754 CALMON reset count
The "total analyses", "good meter analyses" and "bad meteranalyses" counters are zeroed every "CALMON reset count"calibration monitoring analyses during monitoring; a calibrationfailure alarm is raised for the meter if there are no "good meteranalyses" in "CALMON reset count" calibration monitoringanalyses during monitoring. This is also the number of attemptsto auto-detect the number of blades (if necessary) and acquire acalibration sample before a calibration failure alarm is raised forthe meter during calibration. The default value is 50.
755 Calib fail alarm action
This program code sets the calibration failure alarm action forcalibration monitoring. Refer to MPMC v2.00 (“CalibrationMonitoring”) specifications for more information about this alarmand the pertinent operating conditions. Selections include “Off”which disables the alarm, “Info”, “Secondary” and “Primary”.Primary is the default.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 220
6.22 Blending (continued)
756 / 761 / 766 / 771 FPO
The factored pulse output on the "smart" 4-ch. meter pulse boardon which to generate factored pulses according to the configuredFPO basis (program code 752). The default value is zero, i.e.FPO disabled.
757 / 762 / 767 / 772 Number of blades
The number of magnetic blades (or buttons) on the meter forcalibration monitoring purposes. 0 disables calibrationmonitoring for the meter. Any other value enables calibrationmonitoring for the meter. 1 indicates that the number of bladesshould be auto-detected by the MPMC prior to acquiring acalibration sample. The default value is zero, i.e. calibrationmonitoring disabled for the meter.
758 / 763 / 768 / 773 Max max char dev
The maximum signature deviation computed during a calibrationmonitoring analysis above which a "bad meter" result may beindicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. Thedefault value (100) detects a 10% blade deviation correspondingto an average K-factor change of 0.3%.
759 / 764 / 769 / 774 Max tot char devs
The sum signature deviation computed during a calibrationmonitoring analysis above which a "bad meter" result may beindicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. Thedefault value (400) detects a 10% blade deviation correspondingto an average K-factor change of 0.3%.
760 / 765 / 770 / 775 Calibration sample
The current calibration status (according to DanLoad 6000's pointof view). This program code can be used to force acquisition ofa new calibration sample. The default value is "Not acquired".Select one of the following:
# Not acquired - The calibration sample has notbeen acquired or is invalid. (Calibration sample isrequested if the number of blades is greater than0.)
# Acquired - The calibration sample has beenacquired and is valid.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 221
6.22 Blending (continued)
The calibration monitoring (CALMON) status screen is selected using the "CALMON status" option in the program mode menu. TheDanLoad 6000 prompts for a meter number.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
CALMON status
Meter 9 <- Enter meter number.
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Enter a valid meter number or press "ALT"+"CLEAR" to return to the program mode menu. (A valid meter number is any configuredmeter, i.e. 1 <= meter number <= program code 50.) If there is no 4-ch. MP and MPMC v2.00 board associated with the meter, or if themeter’s configured number of blades is zero, then zeros are displayed for all calibration monitoring data. If there is an error reading fromthe MPMC board, then the maximum possible value is displayed for unsigned values and -1 is displayed for signed values. The DanLoad6000 displays the calibration sample (two pages), the monitoring sample (two pages) and the calibration monitoring analysis (one page).Use the "8" and "9" keys (as indicated on the display) to move up and down through the 5 pages. Use "ALT"+"CLEAR" to return to the"Enter meter number" screen. Numbers are displayed in decimal (base 10) except for the blade ratios which are in hexadecimal (base 16).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 222
6.22 Blending (continued)
Calibration sample (two pages)
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Calibration sample Not acquired <- Meter ID, heading and calibration sample status
Sample freq 99999 <- unsigned int
Freq stability x 100 99999 <- unsigned int (max. rot dev)
Mean blade dev x 100 99999 <- unsigned int
Sample stability x 100 99999 <- unsigned int (max. blade ratio diff)
Sample count 99999 <- unsigned int
91234567890123456789012345678901234567890
The maximum blade ratio (ratios) has (have) a plus sign to the right of it (them). The minimum blade ratio (ratios) has (have) a minus signto the right of it (them).
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Calibration sample Not acquired <- Meter ID, heading and calibration sample status
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX <- Up to 50 blade ratios x 1000 (unsigned int) in hex
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX 891234567890123456789012345678901234567890
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 223
6.22 Blending (continued)
Monitoring sample (two pages)
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Monitoring sample <- Meter ID and heading
Sample freq 99999 <- unsigned int
Freq stability x 100 99999 <- unsigned int (max. rot dev)
Mean blade dev x 100 99999 <- unsigned int
Sample stability x 100 99999 <- unsigned int (max. blade ratio diff)
Sample count 99999 <- unsigned int
891234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Monitoring sample <- Meter ID and heading
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX <- Up to 50 blade ratios x 1000 (unsigned int) in hex
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX 891234567890123456789012345678901234567890
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 224
6.22 Blending (continued)
Calibration monitoring analysis (one page)
If a "blade 1 fit", i.e. alignment of the monitoring sample with the calibration sample, was not possible then the MPMC sets "Max chardev" and "Tot char devs" to 65535.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX CALMON analysis <- Meter ID and heading
Working number of blades 99 <- unsigned char
Freq stability x 100 99999 <- unsigned int (sum max. rot dev)
Max char dev 99999 <- unsigned int
Tot char devs 9999999999 <- long
Good 99999 Bad 99999 Reset 99999 <- unsigned int, unsigned int, unsigned int
MPMC board 9 MPMC alarms XXXX <- int, unsigned int (bonus data!)
81234567890123456789012345678901234567890
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 225
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 226
6.22 Blending (continued)
PC# / Function[(Recipes 1 through 10), (11 to 20), (21 to 30)] Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
776 / 778 / 780 / 782 / 784 / 786 / 788 / 790 / 792 / 794 /796 / 798 Low flow rate
0 to 99999 <200>
777 / 779 / 781 / 783 / 785 / 787 / 789 / 791 / 793 / 795 /797 / 799 High flow rate
0 to 99999 <600>
776 / ... / 798 Low flow rate
This program code defines the low flow rate setpoint for the batchrecipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each haveindependent low flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20 shareone low flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through 30 share one lowflow rate setpoint.
777 / ... / 799 High flow rate
This program code defines the high flow rate setpoint for thebatch recipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each haveindependent high flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20share one common high flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through30 share one common high flow rate setpoint.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 227
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (800 to 816 Additive Pump/Block Valve Parameters) _________________________ Section 6 - 228
6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves
PC# / Function(Six Additives) Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
800 / 803 / 806 / 809 / 812 / 815 Pump output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
801 / 804 / 807 / 810 / 813 / 816 Block valve output 0 to number of discrete outputs <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (800 to 816 Additive Pump/Block Valve Parameters) _________________________ Section 6 - 229
6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves (continued)
This group of parameters is used to assign the discrete controloutputs which control additive injector pumps and additive lineblock valves. Assigned and active additive pumps and controlvalves are opened when the batch load is started. Additives arethen injected under control of program code 380 / 383 / 386 / 389/ 392 / 395 Ratio output for each additive. An additive blockvalve is closed after the last program code 380 / 383 / 386 / 389/ 392 / 395 Ratio output for the batch delivery is completed. Anadditive pump is stopped at the time the batch delivery is stopped.
800 / 803 / 806 / 809 / 812 / 815 Pump output
This program code assigns a physical discrete output forcontrolling RUN / STOP of an additive injector pump. Thedefault value is 0.
801 / 804 / 807 / 810 / 813 / 816 Block valve output
This program code assigns a physical discrete output forcontrolling OPEN / CLOSE of an additive line block valve. Thedefault value is 0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 230
6.24 LPG / Pressure
This group of parameters contains program codes that control thepressure control function used when loading liquefied petroleumgas. Pressure control is intended to maintain sufficient operatingpressure in the meter stack to prevent flashing (vaporizing) of theliquid due to the pressure drop created by the devices in the meterstack. The general equation for the minimum back pressurerequired for light hydrocarbon liquids is stated below.
MIN WATER TMAXBP = (2 * DP ) + (1.25 * AVP )
where:
MINBP = Minimum back pressure required
WATERDP = pressure drop flowing water at maximumflow rate(. 4 PSIG for turbine meters)
TMAXAVP = absolute vapor pressure of the liquid atmaximum temperature
Refer to Appendix C for an example of a “LPG LoadingConfiguration Checklist”.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 231
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 232
6.24 LPG / Pressure (continued)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
818 PT type 0 Pm - Static pressure inputs *1 Pd - Differential pressure inputs
819 Pe method 0 Const Pe - Constant Pe1 2 point - Use Pe for T1 and T22 3 point - Use Pe for T1, T2, and T33 Hillburn - Correlation for Pe per Hillburn (1968)4 TP-15 - Correlation for Pe per Reid *
820 Pinch back method 0 Off - Disable pressure control1 Sw - 2 Pm3 Pd
821 Pinch back pressure 0 to 9999.99
822 Atmospheric pressure 0 to 9999.99
823 Pinch back qty 0 to 999999 <0>
824 T1 -999.9 to +999.9 <0.0>
825 Pe at T1 0.0 to 9999.99 <0.0>
826 T2 -999.9 to +999.9 <0.0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
PC# / Function Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 233
827 Pe at T2 0.0 to 9999.99 <0.0>
828 T3 -999.9 to +999.9 <0.0>
829 Pe at T3 0.0 to 9999.99 <0.0>
830 Circuit 1 type 0 to 2 <0>
831 Circuit 2 type 0 to 2 <0>
832 Circuit 3 type 0 to 2 <0>
833 Circuit 4 type 0 to 2 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 234
6.24 LPG / Pressure (continued)
This group of parameters is used to define the method for back-pressure control. The flow control valve is used to pinch back theflow in order to maintain a preset or calculated minimum back-pressure in the meter stack. The back-pressure is necessary toprevent very light hydrocarbon liquids, such as LPG (liquifiedpetroleum gas) from flashing (vaporizing) due to the pressuredrop present in the piping system.
818 PT type
This program code defines the type of pressure transmitter inputs.
# Pm
The pressure inputs are static pressure. The DanLoad 6000calculates Pd = Pm - Pe for pressure correction and valve control.
# Pd
The pressure inputs are pressure differential (Pm - Pe).
819 Pe method
This program code defines the method of back-pressurecalculation.
# Const Pe
Program code 825 is the vapor pressure.
# 2 point
Vapor pressure is determined via program codes 824 to 827.
# 3 point
Vapor pressure is determined via program codes 824 to 829.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 235
6.24 LPG / Pressure (continued)
# Hillburn
Old correction for Pe per Hillburn (1968). Program code 825 isthe vapor pressure at 100 degrees F.
# TP-15
New correlation for Pe per Reid. Vapor pressure is computed viaGPA TP-15 with temperature (degrees F) and relative density60/60 degrees F as inputs.
820 Pinch back method
This program codes selects the method to use to maintain theminimum back-pressure setpoint specified by program code 821Pinch back pressure.
With pressure control enabled, response to a low pressurecondition also depends on:
026 Unit type027 Valve type
# Off
Disable pressure control
# Sw
Pressure switch inputs, assigned by program codes 296 / 301 /306 / 311 Close input, control the OPEN / CLOSE state of theflow control valves.
# Pm
A static pressure input for each meter us used to implementpressure control. Flow meters are assigned pressure transmittersby program codes 320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input.
# Pd
A pressure differential input for each meter is used to implementpressure control. Flow meters are assigned pressure transmittersby program codes 320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 236
6.24 LPG / Pressure (continued)
821 Pinch back pressure
The static or differential pressure, depending on program code820, below which the DanLoad 6000 ramps down to a lower("fall back") flow rate or raises a pressure failure alarm whenpressure maintenance is configured (program code 820).
822 Atmospheric pressure
This is used to convert absolute pressures to gage pressures, e.g.the output from GPA TP-15 (vapor pressure computation). Thedefault value is 14.70, which is the "standard atmosphericpressure" for GPA TP-16 (which uses GPA TP-15).
API's standard atmospheric pressure is 14.73, so GPA's matchesthis rounded to one decimal place. The "normal" atmosphere is14.696 psia and the "technical" atmosphere is 14.223 psia.
The six program codes below define three temperature and vaporpressure pairs for two or three point linearization. Values shouldbe entered in order of increasing temperature, i.e. T1 < T2 < T3.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 237
6.24 LPG / Pressure (continued)
823 Pinch back qty
The gross quantity at the start of a batch for which pressurecontrol (see program code 820) is disabled. This can be used tosuppress problems starting a batch, such as alarms due to "surge"and "flashing", when the pressure in the receiving tank is muchlower than in the loading arm and supply pipe.
* The DanLoad raises a pressure alarm when the sampledpressure is not within the pressure tables specified by “PressureOption” (program code 444). This alarm is also disabled at thestart of the batch, and is enabled after the “Pinch back qty” hasbeen delivered.
WARNING: It should be understood that entering a non-zerovalue simply suppresses the alarm, and may hide a real problemthat should possibly be solved by other means. The default valueis zero.
824 T1
1Temperature 1, i.e. T . The default value is 0.0.
825 Pe at T1
e 1P at temperature T . The default value is 0.0.
826 T2
2Temperature 2, i.e. T . The default value is 0.0.
827 Pe at T2
e 2P at temperature T . The default value is 0.0.
828 T3
3Temperature 3, i.e. T . The default value is 0.0.
829 Pe at T3
e 3P at temperature T . The default value is 0.0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 238
6.24 LPG / Pressure (continued)
830 Circuit 1 type
See program code 265 for more information. The default valueis 0, i.e. check safety circuit independent of side, for compatibilitywith older versions.
831 Circuit 2 type
See program code 265 for more information. The default valueis 0, i.e. check safety circuit independent of side, for compatibilitywith older versions.
832 Circuit 3 type
See program code 265 for more information. The default valueis 0, i.e. check safety circuit independent of side, for compatibilitywith older versions.
833 Circuit 4 type
See program code 265 for more information. The default valueis 0, i.e. check safety circuit independent of side, for compatibilitywith older versions.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 239
6.25 Transaction Data Storage
Program Code Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
834 Transaction record length 0 to 250 bytes <0>
835 Start page and # pages 600 to 1510 pages divided asstart/# 6/00 to 15/10 <602>
836 Batch record length 0 to 250 bytes <0>
837 Start page and # pages 600 to 1510 pages divided asstart/# 6/00 to 15/10 <808>
838 Tr tk format 0 Lock *1 Clear2 Fmt 13 Fmt 24 Fmt 3
839 Time out tr No *Yes
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 240
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Transaction data storage program codes allocate random accessmemory space and assign data variables in the DanLoad 6000 forstorage of various parameters that define loading transactions andbatch operations. A detailed description of this group of programcodes is provided in Section 3.10. This group of program codesMUST BE defined if transaction storage is required when theDanLoad 6000 is a slave unit in a terminal automation system orwhen user defined transaction tickets are printed.
834 Transaction record length
This program code allocates memory storage area for fixed lengthtransaction records. The value of this program code can only bedetermined after the transaction storage codes have been selectedand located with program codes 840 to 875. The default value of0 disables storage of any transaction records.
NoteWhen entering the “start page” and “# pages” for thetransaction (tr) and batch (ba) files in program codes 835 and837, the DanLoad 6000 simply verifies that the start page isbetween 6 and 15 and the # pages is between 0 and 10 foreach file, i.e. no cross validation is performed. However, onpower-up/reset the DanLoad 6000 validates the start pagesand # pages for both files. The # pages must be an exactdivisor of 10,000.
835 Start page and # pages
The memory start page (between 6 and 15) and the number ofmemory pages to allocate for the transaction file which holds thetransaction records. Each page is 8192 bytes in size. The # pagesdefines the number of pages to allocate for the transaction file.The default value is 602 which allocated two memory pages,starting with page 6, to the transaction file. A total of 16,384bytes are allocated for storage. An entry of 600 (no pagesallocated) disables transaction storage.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 241
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
836 Batch record length
This program code allocates memory storage area for fixed lengthbatch records. The value of this program code can only bedetermined after the batch storage codes have been selected andlocated with program codes 880 to 901. The default value of 0disables storage of any batch records.
837 Start page and # pages
The memory start page (between 6 and 15) and the number ofmemory pages to allocate for the batch file which holds the batchrecords. Each page is 8192 bytes in size. The # pages defines thenumber of pages to allocate for the batch file. The default valueis 808 which allocated eight memory pages, starting with page 8,to the transaction file. A total of 65,536 bytes are allocated forstorage. An entry of 600 (no pages allocated) disablestransaction storage.
838 Tr tk format
This program code defines control of the user defined transactionticket storage area in memory. Three internally definedtransaction ticket formats are also selectable by this programcode. The internally defined transaction ticket formats are usefulfor obtaining quick printouts of predefined data on blank sheets.Formatting actual user defined transaction tickets is described inSection 3.10.
# Lock <default option>
Prevents the selected default Fmt 1, Fmt 2, orFmt 3 internally defined ticket formats fromoverwriting a modification of one of these formatsduring power-up.
# Clear
Command to clear the transaction storage memoryand transaction ticket configuration.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 242
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
# Fmt 1, Fmt 2, Fmt 3
Automatic configuration of transaction storageand transaction ticket per internally definedconfigurations. (Fmt 1 is ticket without batchdata; Fmt 2 is ticket with batch data; Fmt 3 isticket with only batch data) All three defaultformats assume that only one component isconfigured.
839 Time out tr
This program code determines whether or not a transaction inprogress in the manual operating mode, that has neither a batchin progress nor a primary alarm active, should be timed out andended automatically after prompt time-out (program code 036)seconds. The time-out is useful when working with a"monitoring only" ticket printing system if theoperator/user/driver is likely to forget to press the "STOP" key toend the transaction after the last batch on the transaction has beenloaded. Note that when the time-out is enabled, a transaction maybe ended prematurely, i.e. prior to the last batch being loaded, inwhich case a further transaction would be required to completeloading. The default value is "No" for compatibility with earlierversions. Select one of the following:
# "No". Don't time out and end a transaction inprogress automatically.
# "Yes". Time out and end a transaction in progressautomatically.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 243
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
840 1 Addr 0 to 250 bytes <0>
841 2 Tr seq # 0 to 250 bytes <0>
842 3 Recipe # 0 to 250 bytes <0>
843 4 Recipe name 0 to 250 bytes <0>
844 5 Side 0 to 250 bytes <0>
845 6 Prompt 1 0 to 250 bytes <0>
846 7 Prompt 2 0 to 250 bytes <0>
847 8 Prompt 3 0 to 250 bytes <0>
848 9 Prompt 4 0 to 250 bytes <0>
849 10 Prompt 5 0 to 250 bytes <0>
850 11 Data item 1 0 to 250 bytes <0>
851 12 Data item 2 0 to 250 bytes <0>
852 13 Data item 3 0 to 250 bytes <0>
853 14 Data item 4 0 to 250 bytes <0>
854 15 Data item 5 0 to 250 bytes <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 244
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
855 16 Start date 0 to 250 bytes <0>
856 17 End date 0 to 250 bytes <0>
857 18 Gross 0 to 250 bytes <0>
858 19 Std 0 to 250 bytes <0>
859 20 Temp 0 to 250 bytes <0>
860 21 Pres 0 to 250 bytes <0>
861 22 Dens (Comp 1 backup density/gravity) 0 to 250 bytes <0>
862 23 Start gross 0 to 250 bytes <0>
863 24 Start std 0 to 250 bytes <0>
864 25 End gross 0 to 250 bytes <0>
865 26 End std 0 to 250 bytes <0>
866 27 Alarm bit map 0 to 250 bytes <0>
867 28 Prim alarm 0 to 250 bytes <0>
868 29 Temp alarm 0 to 250 bytes <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 245
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
869 30 Add 1 0 to 250 bytes <0>
870 31 Add 2 0 to 250 bytes <0>
871 32 Add 3 0 to 250 bytes <0>
872 33 Add 4 0 to 250 bytes <0>
873 34 Add 5 0 to 250 bytes <0>
874 35 Add 6 0 to 250 bytes <0>
875 36 Op mode 0 to 250 bytes <0>
876 37 Gross units 0 to 250 bytes <0>
877 38 Std units 0 to 250 bytes <0>
840 to 874 <name>
Program codes in this group define the start locations within theuser defined transaction record template for storing thecorresponding variables. The default value <0> disables storageof the corresponding variable. The first actual storage startlocation is 1. The process is described in detail in Section 3.9.
875 to 877 <name>
The offset from the start of the user-configurable part of thetransaction record at which to store the value associated withtransaction storage codes 036 through 038 respectively, i.e. thegross product units mnemonic (program code 218).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 246
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Program Code (Batch Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
880 1 Addr 0 to 250 bytes <0>
881 2 Ba seq # 0 to 250 bytes <0>
882 3 Tr seq # 0 to 250 bytes <0>
883 4 Temp 0 to 250 bytes <0>
884 5 Pres 0 to 250 bytes <0>
885 6 Dens 0 to 250 bytes <0>
886 7 Preset 0 to 250 bytes <0>
887 8 Gross 0 to 250 bytes <0>
888 9 Std 0 to 250 bytes <0>
889 10 Comp gross 0 to 250 bytes <0>
890 11 Comp std 0 to 250 bytes <0>
891 12 Comp temp 0 to 250 bytes <0>
892 13 Comp dens 0 to 250 bytes <0>
893 14 Comp pres 0 to 250 bytes <0>
894 15 Comp % 0 to 250 bytes <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 247
6.25 Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Program Code (Batch Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
895 16 Add 1 0 to 250 bytes <0>
896 17 Add 2 0 to 250 bytes <0>
897 18 Add 3 0 to 250 bytes <0>
898 19 Add 4 0 to 250 bytes <0>
899 20 Add 5 0 to 250 bytes <0>
900 21 Add 6 0 to 250 bytes <0>
901 22 Op mode 0 to 250 bytes <0>
902 23 CCF 0 to 250 bytes <0>
880 to 902 <name>
Program codes in this group define the start locations within theuser defined batch record template for storing the correspondingvariables. The default value <0> disables storage of thecorresponding variable. The first actual storage start location is1. The process is described in detail in Section 3.9.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 248
6.26 Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates)
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
920 1 Addr rrrcc <0>
921 2 Tr seq # rrrcc <0>
922 3 Recipe # rrrcc <0>
923 4 Recipe name rrrcc <0>
924 5 Side rrrcc <0>
925 6 Prompt 1 rrrcc <0>
926 7 Prompt 2 rrrcc <0>
927 8 Prompt 3 rrrcc <0>
928 9 Prompt 4 rrrcc <0>
929 10 Prompt 5 rrrcc <0>
930 11 Data item 1 rrrcc <0>
931 12 Data item 2 rrrcc <0>
932 13 Data item 3 rrrcc <0>
933 14 Data item 4 rrrcc <0>
934 15 Data item 5 rrrcc <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 249
6.26 Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates) (continued)
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
935 16 Start date rrrcc <0>
936 17 End date rrrcc <0>
937 18 Gross rrrcc <0>
938 19 Std rrrcc <0>
939 20 Temp rrrcc <0>
940 21 Pres rrrcc <0>
941 22 Dens (Comp 1 backup density/gravity) rrrcc <0>
942 23 Start gross rrrcc <0>
943 24 Start std rrrcc <0>
944 25 End gross rrrcc <0>
945 26 End std rrrcc <0>
946 27 Alarm bit map rrrcc <0>
947 28 Prim alarm rrrcc <0>
948 29 Temp rrrcc <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 250
6.26 Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates) (continued)
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)Range <Default> OROption (* = Default)
949 30 Add 1 rrrcc <0>
950 31 Add 2 rrrcc <0>
951 32 Add 3 rrrcc <0>
952 33 Add 4 rrrcc <0>
953 34 Add 5 rrrcc <0>
954 35 Add 6 rrrcc <0>
955 36 Op mode rrrcc <0>
956 37 Gross units rrrcc <0>
957 36 Std units rrrcc <0>
920 to 957 <name>
Program codes in this group define the row (rrr) and column(cc) coordinates to print the corresponding transaction storagecode variables on user defined transaction tickets. See Section3.10 for a detailed description of transaction ticket format. Thedefault value of 0 disables printing of the corresponding variable.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 251
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 252
6.26 Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates) (continued)
Program Code (Batch Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
960 1 Addr rrrcc <0>
961 2 Ba seq # rrrcc <0>
962 3 Tr seq # rrrcc <0>
963 4 Temp rrrcc <0>
964 5 Pres rrrcc <0>
965 6 Dens rrrcc <0>
966 7 Preset rrrcc <0>
967 8 Gross rrrcc <0>
968 9 Std rrrcc <0>
969 10 Comp gross rrrcc <0>
970 11 Comp std rrrcc <0>
971 12 Comp temp rrrcc <0>
972 13 Comp dens rrrcc <0>
973 14 Comp pres rrrcc <0>
974 15 Comp % rrrcc <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 253
6.26 Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates) (continued)
Program Code (Batch Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
975 16 Add 1 rrrcc <0>
976 17 Add 2 rrrcc <0>
977 18 Add 3 rrrcc <0>
978 19 Add 4 rrrcc <0>
979 20 Add 5 rrrcc <0>
980 21 Add 6 rrrcc <0>
981 22 Op mode rrrcc <0>
982 23 CCF rrrcc <0>
960 to 981 <name>
Program codes in this group define the row (rrr) and column(cc) coordinates to print the corresponding batch storage codevariables on user defined transaction tickets. See Section 3.10 fora detailed description of transaction ticket format. The defaultvalue of 0 disables printing of the corresponding variable.
982 CCF
Combined correction factor for temperature and presssurecompensation of the liquid components.
TL PLC times C
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (983 to 991 Analog Inputs) ________________________________________________ Section 6 - 254
6.27 Analog Inputs
Program Code (Batch Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
983 RTD Alpha 0 3850 *
1 3902
984 LL cnt (4-20 mA input) 0 to 9999 <0>
985 LH cnt (4-20 mA input) 0 to 9999 <0>
986 HL cnt (4-20 mA input) 0 to 9999 <0>
987 HH cnt (4-20 mA input) 0 to 9999 <0>
988 LL cnt (RTD input) 0 to 9999 <0>
989 LH cnt (RTD input) 0 to 9999 <0>
990 HL cnt (RTD input) 0 to 9999 <0>
991 HH cnt (RTD input) 0 to 9999 <0>
This section is specific to RTD inputs and 4-20 mA inputs on the v2 CPU board. The v2 CPU board’s 4-20 mA and RTD inputs each usetwo A/D channels on the CPU-2 microcontroller. An input’s overall range is subdivided with low input values handled by the “low” A/Dchannel and high input values handled by the “high” A/D channel. The A/D channel to use, and its value, are determined using thechannel’s low and high calibration values. Program codes 984 to 987 are for the 4-20 mA input, and program codes 988 to 991 apply tothe RTD input.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (983 to 991 Analog Inputs) ________________________________________________ Section 6 - 255
6.27 Analog Inputs (continued)
983 RTD Alpha
The alpha value is set for temperature calculations. All RTD’sconnected to the DanLoad 6000's CPU board and analog inputsboards must have the same alpha. There are two possibleselections:
“3850" BS 1904:1984 and DIN 43760" = 0.003850
“3902" " = 0.003902
984 LL cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s 4-20 mA input’sLow channel’s Low calibration point, i.e. 4 mA. Enter valuefrom label on CPU board (see Section 2) or calibrate using theprocedure below.
985 LH cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s 4-20 mA input’sLow channel’s High calibration point, i.e. 12 mA.
986 HL cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s 4-20 mA input’sHigh channel’s Low calibration point, i.e. 12 mA.
987 HH cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s 4-20 mA input’sHigh channel’s High calibration point, i.e. 20 mA.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Program Code Definitions (983 to 991 Analog Inputs) ________________________________________________ Section 6 - 256
6.27 Analog Inputs (continued)
988 LL cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s RTD input’s Low
-20°Cchannel’s Low calibration point, i.e. R .
989 LH cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s RTD input’s Low
18°Cchannel’s High calibration point, i.e. R .
990 HL cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s RTD input’s High
18°Cchannel’s Low calibration point, i.e. R .
991 HH cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU board’s RTD input’s High
55°Cchannel’s High calibration point, i.e. R .
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration ________________________________________ 6-257
6.28 CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration
Step 1. Equipment Required
A. Digital Voltmeter-- At least 4 digit
B. 4-20 mA - Current source or voltage equivalent, must drive 425S to 8.5volts. An adjustable power supply with fine and course adjustments maybe substituted for a current source.
C. RTD simulator -- 100 S R-Box with 0.01 S steps
Step 2. Setup
A. Go into setup and enter a zero (0) into the following Program Codes:
C PC 984 lolo (4-20 mA) = 0C PC 985 lohi (4-20 mA) = 0C PC 986 hilo (4-20 mA) = 0C PC 987 hihi (4-20 mA) = 0C PC 988 lolo (RTD) = 0C PC 989 lohi (RTD) = 0C PC 990 hilo (RTD) = 0C PC 991 hihi (RTD) = 0
B. Program Codes 318 = 1, 320 = 1 (Select Temperature and Pressure Meter 1)
NOTE: Record the following program codes: 464, 465and 695 then re-enter them when finished with the calibration.
C. Program Codes 464 = 9.00, 465 = 45.00 (Pressure Zero and Fullscale)
D. Program Code 695 = 135 (live pressure- Dymanic Data Display)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
6-258 ________________________________________ CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration
Program Codes Calibration Values
PC 984 4-20 mA LoLo
PC 985 4-20 mA LoHi
PC 986 4-20 mA HiLo
PC 987 4-20 mA HiHi
PC 988 RTD LoLo
PC 989 RTD LoHi
PC 990 RTD HiLo
PC 991 RTD HiHi
Copy this page and record values.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration ________________________________________ 6-259
Step 3. Analog Calibration Low Range
A. Connect a Voltmeter across TP1-TP2.
B. With the test setup shown in Figure 1, adjust the 4-20 mA to 0.900Vacross TP1-TP2.
C. Go to Program Menu to Input Output in the diagnostics, select 1 for the 4-20 mA input. Record the number on the DanLoad 6000 Displayfor 0.900 Volts. (Example 4-20 mA lo lo = 141)
D. Adjust the 4-20ma signal to 2.700 volts across TP1-TP2. Record thenumber displayed for 2.700 Volts. (Example 4-20 ma lo hi = 956)
E. Set the R-Box to 92.16 S " = 0.00385 (-20°C.)
F. In the diagnostics, select 1 for the RTD input. Record the number for -20°C.(Example RTD lo lo = 92)
G. Set the R-Box to 107.02 S " = 0.00385 (18°C).
H. Record the number displayed for 18 degrees. (Example RTD lo hi = 992)
I. Go into Setup, select the following program codes(PC) to enter the values previously recorded.
J. 4-20 mA lo lo reading into PC 984 = (example 141)
K. 4-20 mA lo hi reading into PC 985 = (example 956)
L. RTD lolo reading into PC 988 = (Example 92)
M. RTD lohi reading into PC 989 = (Example 992)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
6-260 ________________________________________ CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration
Step 4. Analog Calibration High Range
A. Exit setup, and re-enter diagnostics and select 1 for 4-20 mA
B. With the Voltage still set to 2.700 volts across TP1-TP2. Record thedisplayed number. (Example 4-20 mA hi lo = 41)
C. Adjust the 4-20 mA signal until 4.50 volts is across TP1-TP2. Record thedisplayed number. (Example 4-20 mA hi hi = 858)
D. In the Diagnostics, select 1 for RTD.With the R-Box still set to 107.02 S,Record the number for 18 °C. (Example: RTD hi lo = 76)
E. Set the R-Box to 121.32 S " = 0.00385 (55° C.)
F. Record the number for 55 °C. (Example RTD hi hi = 998)
G. Go into Setup, select the following program codes to enter the valuespreviously recorded.
H. 4-20 mA hi lo reading into PC 986 = (example 41)
I. 4-20 mA hi hi reading into PC 987 = (example 858)
J. RTD hi lo reading into PC 990 = (Example 76)
K. RTD hi hi reading into PC 991 = (Example 998)
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration ________________________________________ 6-261
Step 5. Check Temperature Calibration
A. Exit out of Setup, Go to the load menu and press Select. Scroll down intothe Dynamic Data Display until Mtr 1 curr temp and Mtr 1 curr pres areDisplayed.
B. With the R-Box still set at 121.32 S, the displayed Current Temperature
should read 55.0°C ± 0.1 °C.
C. Adjust the R-Box to 107.02 S. The displayed Current Temperatue shouldread 18.0°C ± 0.1 °C.
D. Adjust the R-Box to 92.55 S. The displayed Current Temperature shouldread -19.0°C ± 0.1 °C.
Step 6. Check Pressure Calibration
A. With the Voltage still set to 4.500 volts across TP1-TP2. The displayedCurrent Pressure should read 45.00 ± 0.05 psi.
B. Adjust the 4-20 mA input to 2.700 volts across TP1-TP2. The displayedCurrent Pressure should read 27.00 ± 0.05 psi.
C. Adjust the 4-20 mA input to 1.000 volts across TP1-TP2. The displayedCurrent Pressure should read 10.00 ± 0.05 psi.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
6-262 ________________________________________ CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration
CPU v2 Analog Calibration Set Up Figure 6-3
Appendix A
Installation Worksheets
Input / Output Signal
Configuration
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 1
This appendix contains several tables that can be photocopied and used to enter parameter settingsfor records of DanLoad 6000 installations. The tables can be used as an aid in generating wire listsand drawings for the installations.
Daniel drawing BE-18204, Device Linkages - DanLoad 6000, shows the relationship betweensystem devices, liquid components, and additives. Daniel drawing DE-18201, Program Code toDevice Assignments - DanLoad 6000, shows all devices that can be monitored and controlled by aDanLoad 6000. In actual installations, only some of the devices will be installed. The programcodes indicated in the drawing are the primary parameters that relate the devices to the proper flowmeter / meter stream. Many additional parameters define and modify the operation of each device.Use the program codes indicated in the drawing to reference the device parameters Tables A - 11 toA - 28. These tables contain brief descriptions of the device related parameters. See Section 6 fora complete description of each parameter.
The flow meter is considered the primary device in the system. All other accessory devices, liquidcomponents, and additives are assigned to a meter stream by either direct reference or indirectreference. Interrelations between physical devices, liquid components, and additives are establishedin the following manner.
# Any liquid component can flow through any flow meter and from two to four components,can flow, one at a time, through the same flow meter. This function is the reason that themeter factors (program codes 169 through 216) are assigned to the components. The meterfactors are automatically applied to the active flow meter when the selected component isflowing through that flow meter.
# Pumps and block valves for liquid components are enabled specifically for each componentby assigning corresponding physical discrete outputs (and discrete inputs in the case of blockvalves). Drawing DE-18201, Program Code to Device Assignments, indicates sequentialnumbering of all devices for ease of drawing layout. Note however, if component 1 wereassigned to meter 3 (program code 067 Meter set to 3) then the pump for component 1 (P-1)and the block valve for component 1 (BV-1) are also assigned to meter stream 3. Actualdevice tags and system drawings for each unique installation should show this assignmentcorrectly.
# Flow rate through any flow meter can be controlled by any one flow control valve and fromtwo to four flow meters can share the same flow control valve. Drawing DE-18201,Program Code to Device Assignments, indicates sequential numbering of all devices for easeof drawing layout. Note however, meter 1 could be assigned to flow control valve 3(program code 052 Valve to be controlled set to 3) and meter 2 could be assigned to flowcontrol valve 3 (program code 055 Valve to be controlled set to 3). Actual device tags andsystem drawings for each unique installation should show these assignments correctly.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 2 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
# Resistive temperature devices (RTD), pressure transmitters (PT), and density transmitters(DT) are enabled specifically for each meter stream by assigning corresponding physicalanalog inputs.
# Pumps and block valves for additives are enabled specifically for each additive by assigningcorresponding physical discrete outputs (and discrete inputs in the case of block valves).Daniel drawing DE-18201, Program Code to Device Assignments - DanLoad 6000, showsadditive injection on each meter stream. In actual installations, additive injection is usuallyimplemented in the primary component meter stream only.
Tables A - 1a to A - 9 can be used to provide a record of input / output signal assignments. TablesA - 11 to A - 28 contain lists of all program codes (parameters) organized in device or functionalgroups. An overview of the tables is provided below.
Table Description Slot Number
A-1a 2-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring J5 or J6
A-1b 4-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring J5 or J6
A-2 AC I/O Board Wiring J1 or J2
A-3a Enhanced I/O Board Wiring (Old) J1 or J2
A-3b Enhanced I/O Board Wiring (New) J1 or J2
A-4 DC I/O Board Wiring J3 or J4
A-5a 2-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring J7
A-5b 8-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring J7
A-6 Power Supply Wiring J0
A-7 Swing Arm Input Wiring CPU board
A-8 DUART Module Wiring CPU module
A-9 LAN Module Wiring Not implemented
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 3
Table Description Setup
A-10 Base Level Program Codes for System Items
A-11 General Configuration Parameters Required
A-12 Flow Meter Parameters Required
A-13 Flow Control Valve Parameters Required
A-14 Component Parameters Required
A-15 Component Block Valve / Pump Parameters Required
A-16 Delivery Parameters Required
A-17 Blending Parameters Optional
A-18 Temperature Compensation Parameters Optional
A-19 Pressure Compensation Parameters Optional
A-20 Density Compensation Parameters Optional
A-21 Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters Optional
A-22 Additives Parameters Optional
A-23 LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Optional
A-24 Dynamic Data Display Parameters / Codes Optional
A-25 Communications / Data Logging Parameters Optional
A-26 Transaction Storage Parameters Optional
A-27 Transaction Ticket Parameters Optional
A-28 Alarm Parameters Optional *
A-29 Analog Input Parameters (for v2 CPU) Optional
Notes:
# Only enabled and applicable program codes in each group are required to be configured.
# * Alarm parameters are set to default values. Some of these values and / or limits mayrequire adjustment to prevent erroneous alarms.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 4 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
A.1 Physical Configuration of the DanLoad 6000
The following inputs and outputs are fixed and are not reconfigurable.
# One to four meter pulse inputs to meter pulse boards
# Two swing arm status inputs to main processor board (not present on v2 CPU)
# Two high-resolution pulse outputs from 2-channel meter pulse board (only with MPMCboard on 4-channel meter pulse board)
Maximum physical input channels:
# 4 each RTD process temperature (5 for v2 CPU)
# 8 each 4 to 20 mAdc process pressure or density (9 for v2 CPU)
# 24 each discrete status functions
Maximum physical output channels:
# 28 each discrete control functions
NoteThe number of functions that can be assigned to physical discrete input and output channels isgreater than the number of available physical discrete channels. Some logical discrete inputand output functions are mutually exclusive and cannot be active at the same time. The v2CPU board (1997) has one 4-20 mA input, one RTD input and a DUART built in.
The unit number assigned to each DanLoad 6000 is derived as follows. If the DanLoad 6000communicates with a data logging device or terminal automation system, each instrument must beassigned a unit number. This assignment is accomplished by DIP switches located on the DUART(v1 CPU board) or by program code 662 (v2 CPU board). The range of the unit number is 1 to 255.A Multi-drop network implemented with the RS-485 port (DUART) has an electrical limit of 32units to one RS-485 master port. However, the unit numbers of these 32 units can be any uniquenumber within the range of 1 to 255. If neither communications module is installed, it is advisableto use the same number range (1 to 255) for unit assignment numbers. Using numbers in this rangemay avoid the need to renumber the units if data logging and / or terminal automation systemcommunications are added in the future.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 5
Input and output signal channel identification numbers can be entered into the tables using thefollowing channel number labels.
Input / Output Signal Identification
Process Tag Channel Number Description
FT-# (1 to 4) Meter pulse input
TE-# (1 to 4) RTD input
PT-# / DT-# (1 to 4) 4 to 20 mAdc analog input
ACI-# (1 to max AC inputs) Discrete Vac input
ACO-# (1 to max AC outputs) Discrete Vac output
DCI-# (1 to max DC inputs) Discrete Vdc input
DCO-# (1 to max DC outputs) Discrete Vdc output
The initial setup procedure should be performed at this time. Section 3 provides information on theinitial setup procedure. After the initial setup procedure has been performed, the assigned physicalhardware channel for each input / output channel can be determined in the following manner. Whileoperating in the Program Mode, press the ALT+0 key to display the physical hardwareconfiguration of the instrument. The first display page shows the type of boards installed in slots J1through J7. Scroll through the I/O assignment display pages using the 9 and 8 arrow keys.Manually enter the assigned hardware channels indicated in the leftward column of the display pagesinto the Assigned Channel column of the corresponding Tables A - 1a through A - 22. Also enterthe DanLoad 6000 Unit number and the physical slot, Jn number, where the board is located. Thenumber and type of these assigned hardware channels determine the fixed input / output signalcapability of the individual DanLoad 6000.
# Enter the power supply wiring information into Table A - 7.
# Enter the swing arm wiring information into Table A - 8. Enter a descriptive identificationof the loading side, such as north, west, etc.
# Enter the wiring information for the DUART, Table A-9 at this time.
# The final step is to review and record the settings of the applicable program codes listed inTables A - 11 to A - 28.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 6 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
The following two rules apply to assignment of a physical channel to an input or output function:
# The type of input / output signal board for the desired function must be installed in theDanLoad 6000.
# The physical input or output channel should typically not have been previously assigned tosome other function.
Physical input / output channel assignments are made, while in Program Mode, by using the 9 or8 arrow key to place the box cursor over a physical channel number (rightward column)corresponding to a function displayed to the left of the physical channel number. The currentlyassigned physical channel identification number, obtained from Tables A - 1a through A - 22, isthen verified or changed. Press the ENTER key to accept the assignment or the CLEAR key toreject the assignment and re-enter a number. If the entry is a valid assignment, the box cursorautomatically steps to the next parameter in the group. If the hardware is not installed to support thisphysical channel or the number of supported physical channels is exceeded, the message Point doesnot exist is displayed on the message line.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 7
A.2 Functional Configuration of the DanLoad 6000
Table A - 10, Base Level Program Codes for Physical Components of the System, containsinformation on the primary program codes that enable devices, components, and additives. Severaladditional program code settings are required to fully configure the operation of the DanLoad 6000.These additional program codes are organized in device and functional groups and listed in TablesA - 11 to A - 28. Several program codes can be listed at several points within one table or can belisted in more than one table. This multiple listing is done for clarity due to the cross function ofsome program codes. In general, program code settings are used to enable and assign devices,components, and additives in the following manner.
# Program codes define the number of devices, components, and additives in the system. Thisdefinition controls the activation of the correct number of similar parameters dependent onthe number of devices, components, and additives defined.
# Individual program codes for each device, component, and additive configure links or crossassignments between the devices, components, and additives.
# Individual program codes for each device, component, and additive assign actual physicalinput and output signal circuits to the logical devices, components, and additives. With theexception of meter pulse inputs, high resolution pulse outputs, and swing-arm status inputs,all input and output signals can be assigned to any available physical circuit of thecorresponding type. (Note: Meter pulse inputs were assignable to meters in Version 3.0 andbelow of the DanLoad 6000.)
The minimal device configuration for a DanLoad 6000 is stated below. This configuration is for aone component sequential blender.
Minimal Configuration
Program code Value
050 Number of meters 1
048 Number of valves 1
052 Valve for meter 1 1
065 Number of components 1
067 Meter for component 1 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 8 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
This minimal configuration, though valid, is not typical. Normally, many other parameters will beconfigured, such as, a component pump defined by program code 288 Pump control output. Thebase DanLoad 6000 has one 4-Channel Meter Pulse board and one AC I/O board. Additionalfeatures such as additive injection control, volume correction for temperature / pressure / density,and pulse per unit outputs can be enabled as required.
Tables A - 11 to A - 29 contain additional information related to the basic Table A - 10. Thecorresponding program codes for each function implemented should be verified during initial setupof the DanLoad 6000. Section 6 of the manual contains detailed descriptions of each program code.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 9
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Meter 1 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 1
Meter 1 pulse input 2 1 or 3
Meter 1 preamp common 3
Meter 2 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 4
Meter 2 pulse input 5 2 or 4
Meter 2 preamp common 6
Meter 1 pulse output + 7 1 or 3
Meter 1 pulse output - 8 1 or 3
Meter 2 pulse output + 9 2 or 4
Meter 2 pulse output - 10 2 or 4
Control 2 switched + Vdc 11 2
Control 2 return - Vdc 12
Control 1 switched + Vdc 13 1
Control 1 return - Vdc 14
P / S common 15
P / S common 16
2-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring (Slot J5 / J6)(Drawing DE-12694)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 1a
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 10 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Meter preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 1
Meter 1A pulse input 2 1, 3, 5
Meter 1A preamp common 3
Meter preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 4
Meter 1B pulse input 5 2, 4, 6
Meter 1B preamp common 6
Meter 1 pulse output + 7 1, 3, 5
Meter 1 pulse output - 8 1, 3, 5
Meter 2 pulse output + 9 2, 4, 6
Meter 2 pulse output - 10 2, 4, 6
Control 2 switched + Vdc 11 2
Control 2 return - Vdc 12
Control 1 switched + Vdc 13 1
Control 1 return - Vdc 14
START (proof) 15
P / S common 16
Meter 2A pulse input 17 3, 5, 7
Meter 2A preamp common 18
Meter 2B pulse input 19 4, 6, 8
Meter 2B preamp common 20
4-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring (Slot J5 / J6)(Drawing CE-15532)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 1b
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 11
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Status 2 switched Vdc/Vac 1 2
Status 2 common 2
Status 1 switched Vdc/Vac 3 1
Status 1 common 4
Control 8 supply Vac 5
Control 8 switched Vac 6 8
Control 7 supply Vac 7
Control 7 switched Vac 8 7
Control 6 supply Vac 9
Control 6 switched Vac 10 6
Control 5 supply Vac 11
Control 5 switched Vac 12 5
Control 4 supply Vac 13
Control 4 switched Vac 14 4
Control 3 supply Vac 15
Control 3 switched Vac 16 3
Control 2 supply Vac 17
Control 2 switched Vac 18 2
Control 1 supply Vac 19
Control 1 switched Vac 20 1
AC I/O Board Wiring (Slot J1 / J3)(Drawing CE-12695)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 2
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 12 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Status 6 switched Vdc/Vac 1 6
Status 5/6 common 2
Status 5 switched Vdc/Vac 3 5
Status 4 switched Vdc/Vac 4 4
Status 3/4 common 5
Status 3 switched Vdc/Vac 6 3
Status 2 switched Vdc/Vac 7 2
Status 1/2 common 8
Status 1 switched Vdc/Vac 9 1
Control 6 switched Vac 10 6
Control 5/6 supply Vac 11
Control 5 switched Vac 12 5
Control 4 switched Vac 13 4
Control 3/4 supply Vac 14
Control 3 switched Vac 15 3
Control 2 switched Vac 16 2
Control 1/2 supply Vac 17
Control 1 switched Vac 18 1
Enhanced I/O (Additive Injector) Board Wiring (Slot J1 / J2)(Drawing CE-12697 or CE-19021)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:__________
Table A - 3
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 13
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Status 6 supply Vdc 1
Status 6 switched Vdc 2 6
Status 5 supply Vdc 3
Status 5 switched Vdc 4 5
Status 4 supply Vdc 5
Status 4 switched Vdc 6 4
Status 3 supply Vdc 7
Status 3 switched Vdc 8 3
Status 2 supply Vdc 9
Status 2 switched Vdc 10 2
Status 1 supply Vdc 11
Status 1 switched Vdc 12 1
Control 4 switched + Vdc 13 4
Control 4 return - Vdc 14
Control 3 switched + Vdc 15 3
Control 3 return - Vdc 16
Control 2 switched + Vdc 17 2
Control 2 return - Vdc 18
Control 1 switched + Vdc 19 1
Control 1 return - Vdc 20
DC I/O Board Wiring (Slot J3 / J4)(Drawing CE-12696)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 4
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 14 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Transmitter 1 power (24 Vdc) 1
Transmitter 1 input 2 1
Transmitter power common 3
+ Vsource 4
RTD 1 + 5 2
RTD 1 - 6 2
RTD current source 7
2-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring (Slot J7)(Drawing BE-12707)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:____________
Table A - 5
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 15
Function TBBoardChannel
AssignedChannel
Transmitter 1/2 power (24 Vdc) 1
Transmitter 1 input 2 1
Transmitter 2 input 3 2
Transmitter 3/4 power (24 Vdc) 4
Transmitter 3 input 5 3
Transmitter 4 input 6 4
Transmitter power common 7
+ Vsource 8
RTD 1 + 9 5
RTD 1 - 10 5
RTD loop tie point 11
RTD 2 + 12 6
RTD 2 - 13 6
RTD loop tie point 14
RTD 3 + 15 7
RTD 3 - 16 7
RTD loop tie point 17
RTD 4 + 18 8
RTD 4 - 19 8
RTD current source 20
8-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring (Slot J7)(Drawing CE-12698)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:____________
Table A - 6
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 16 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
Function TB Source /Destination
Vac power hot TB1-1
Vac safety ground TB1-2
Vac neutral (230 Vac hot) TB1-3
Space heater Vac hot (supply) TB1-4
Space heater Vac neutral TB1-5
Vac permissive power input TB2-1
Vac permissive power neutral TB2-2
Vac permissive power output (fused) TB2-3
Power Supply Wiring (Slot J0)(Drawing CE-12692)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 7
Function TBPhysicalChannel
ActualSide Per programcode 312
Swing arm switch 1 1 1 (SW1)(right)
Swing arm common 2 (center)
Swing arm switch 2 3 2 (SW2)(left)
Swing Arm Input Wiring (CPU Board)(Drawing CE-12693 and BE-12789)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 8
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 17
Function TB Destination
Channel A, RS-485 Rx+ 1
Channel A, RS-485 Rx- 2
Channel A, RS-485 Tx+ 3
Channel A, RS-485 Tx- 4
Channel B, RS-485 Rx+orChannel B, RS-232 RxD
5
Channel B, RS-485 Rx-orChannel B, RS-232 CTS (clear to send)
6
Channel B, RS-485 Tx+orChannel B, RS-232 TxD
7
Channel B, RS-485 Tx- 8
Channel B, RS-232 RTS (request to send) 9 <not used>
Channel B, RS-232 common 10
DUART Module Wiring (CPU Module)(Drawing CE-12693)
Location:__________ Unit:_______ Date:__________
Table A - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix A - 18 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
Device Assignment Program Codes
AssignmentDevice / Component / Additive Program Code
Name1 2 3 4 5 6
LOADING ARM ³ (at)
METERS *
050 Number of meters
ENABLE FCV’s * 048 Number of valves
flow control valve ³ meter(s) * 052 055 058 061 -- -- Valve to be controlled
ENABLE COMPONENTS * 065 Number of components
meter ³ component(s) * 067 070 073 076 -- -- Meter
block valve ³ component 400 402 404 406 -- -- Block valve output
block valve ³ component(s) 408 to 422 Component combination
block valve ³ component 401 403 405 407 -- -- Block valve input
pump ³ component 288 289 290 291 -- -- Pump control output
RTD x ³ meter x 318 324 330 336 -- -- Meter x temperature input
PT x ³ meter x 320 326 332 338 -- -- Meter x pres input
DT x ³ meter x 321 327 333 339 -- -- Meter x dens input
ENABLE PULSE OUTPUTS 128 Number of pulse
per unit outputs
pulse output ³ meter(s) 129 132 -- -- -- -- Control meters
ENABLE ADDITIVES 135 Number of additives
additive ³ meter(s) 139 144 149 154 159 164 Additive control meters
block valve ³ additive 801 804 807 810 813 816 Block valve output
pump ³ additive 800 803 806 809 812 815 Pump output
Base Level Program Codes for Physical Components of the System
Table A - 10
Notes:
# * In the assignment column indicates that these parameters must be defined in allinstallations.
# Tables A - 11 to A - 29 follow this page.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 19
A.3 General Configuration Parameters Setup
TABLE A -11 General Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Global
001 / 004 / 007 / 010 / 013 / 016 / 019 / 022Passcode
Numeric passcode entry for operators and supervisors. 6000
217 Passcode per transaction Required passcode entry per each transaction (not implemented)
002 / 005 / 008 / 011 / 014 / 017 / 020 / 023User ID
Configurable user name
003 / 006 / 009 / 012 / 015 / 018 / 021 / 024Supervisor privilege
Enable supervisor data access
025 Operating mode Select manual / auto mode for unit Manual / Auto
026 Unit type Select type of blending Seq. (auto)
027 Valve type Select type of flow control valve Std digital
028 Language Select language for unit English
030 Number of data item prompts Select quantity of prompts to user 0
031 / 032 / 033 / 034 / 035 #x Prompt Configurable prompt text <message>
036 Prompt time-out (s) Set time to display prompt 60
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -11 General Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 20
037 Check display Display diagnostic Off
038 Date format Select date format mm/dd/yy
039 Date separator Select date units separator ‘/’
040 Decimal separator Select decimal separator ‘.’
041 Data display rate Select data display rate 28000
280 Slot 1 board Type of input / output board installed in J1 Auto-detect
281 Slot 2 board Type of input / output board installed in J2 Auto-detect
282 Slot 3 board Type of input / output board installed in J3 Auto-detect
283 Slot 4 board Type of input / output board installed in J4 Auto-detect
284 Slot 5 board Type of input / output board installed in J5 Auto-detect
285 Slot 6 board Type of input / output board installed in J6 Auto-detect
286 Slot 7 board Type of input / output board installed in J7 Auto-detect
312 Side detect method Swing-arm switch input sensing method ( v2 CPU does not have swing arm inputs) Sgl w/o sw
315 Trip 1 output ON during low-flow startup 0
316 Trip 2 output ON during low-flow startup and high-flow 0
317 Trip 3 output ON from start of loading to end of loading 0
343 Auto/manual change-over Input CLOSED = automatic mode / input OPEN = manual mode 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -11 General Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 21
355 Primary LCD type Type of LCD display installed Optrex
356 Primary LCD minimum light Controls LCD backlighing intensity based on low ambient light level 455
357 Primary LCD maximum light Controls LCD backlighing intensity based on high ambient light level 405
358 Secondary LCD type Type of LCD display installed Optrex
359 Secondary LCD minimum light Controls LCD backlighing intensity based on low ambient light level 455
360 Secondary LCD maximum light Controls LCD backlighting intensity based on high ambient light level 405
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 22
A.4 Flow Meter Parameters Setup
TABLE A -12 Flow Meter Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
050 Number of meters ENABLE 1 to 4 METERS FOR LOAD SPOT User input
Global Parameters
029 Product units Label for volume units. Gal
045 Round method Select the method for rounding volume accumulations. Up
Individual Meter Configuration
051 / 054 / 057 / 060 Meter ID Assign identification label to flow meter. M# Not used
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve to be controlled Assign flow control valve to meter stream
Pulse Security
233 Error limit (pulses) Accumulation of pulse errors to allow before triggering a Pulse security error meter xalarm. Set to 0 to disable feature.
0
234 Reset count (pulses) Accumulated value of error counts at which the error counter is reset to zero. Thiscounter is always reset to zero at the start of a loading operation.
10000
Alarms
222 Minimum flow rate Low flow rate setpoint for alarm trigger. 100
223 Low flow time (s) Time period to ignore low flow rate before triggering alarm. 10
221 Low flow alarm action Action in response to low flow rate alarm. Primary
225 Maximum flow rate High flow rate setpoint for alarm trigger. 660
226 High flow time (s) Time period to ignore high flow rate before triggering alarm. 10
224 High flow alarm action Action in response to high flow rate alarm. Primary
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -12 Flow Meter Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 23
227 Overrun limit qty Quantity over preset that can be delivered before triggering an Unable to close valvemeter x alarm. This alarm is a Primary alarm.
2.0
229 Underflow limit qty Quantity under preset that can be delivered before triggering a Valve closed earlymeter x alarm.
5.0
228 Underflow alarm action Action in response to an underflow alarm. Off
231 No flow t-o time (s) Time period allowed with no flow when flow is expected before triggering a Timed-out - no flow detected meter x alarm.
5
230 No flow t-o alarm action Action in response to a no flow time-out alarm. Primary
232 Unauthorized flow limit qty Quantity allowed to be measured when flow is not expected before triggering anUnauthorized flow exceeds limit meter x alarm.
10.0
269 Alarm o/p mask 1 Enable alarms to output 1 (bit mask) 16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign alarm output 1 to a discrete output. 4
270 Alarm, o/p mask 2 Enable alarms to output 2 (bit mask) 0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign alarm output 2 to a discrete output. 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 24
A.5 Flow Control Valve Parameters Setup
TABLE A -13 Flow Control Valve Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
048 Number of valves ENABLE 1 to 4 FLOW CONTROL VALVES
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve to be controlled Assign flow meter(s) to flow control valve[flow control valve » flow meter(s)]
Delivery Parameters - Global
027 Valve type Select type of valve Std digital
049 Initial flow time (s) Startup time at initial state before beginning flow control 0.200
Delivery Parameters - Individual Components
108 Ramp clicks Maximum attempts to ramp-up flow rate before maintaining lower flow rate 30
109 Maintenance clicks Maximum attempts to maintain flow rate before falling back to a lower flow rate 30
114 / 118 / 122 / 126Maint click adjustment (s)
Normal valve control ON time plus the time specified by this parameter 0.040
112 / 116 / 120 / 124 Low flow % error Variation from low flow rate allowed before adjustment attempt is made 5
113 / 117 / 121 / 125 High flow % error Variation from high flow rate allowed before adjustment attempt is made 2
115 / 119 / 123 / 127 Open method Method to control FCV during initial flow time set by program code 049 Initial flowtime (s)
Normal
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -13 Flow Control Valve Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 25
292 / 297 / 302 / 307Solenoid 1 (upstream)
NO solenoid on FCV 1
293 / 298 / 303 / 308 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
NC solenoid on FCV 2
Inputs
294 / 299 / 304 / 309Stem Switch 1
Unauthorized flow through FCV 0
295 / 300 / 305 / 310Stem Switch 2
Not used 0 Not used
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input Pressure control (“pinch back”) 0
Alarms
276 Ramp down alarm action Action in response to loss of CLOSE control of the flow control valve. Primary
277 Ramp down time (s) Time period allowed to reduce flow rate without response before issuing an alarm.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 26
A.6 Component Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 14 Component Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
065 Number of components ENABLE 1 to 4 COMPONENTS (PRODUCTS) 1 or more
067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter Assign component(s) to flow meter[flow meter » component(s)]
Global Parameters
026 Unit type Specify loading / blending configuration Seq.(auto)
045 Round method Select method for mathmatical rounding of accumulated totals Up
111 Primary component Component for blend error detection and / or line flushing 1
215 Master MF % Maximum percent variance of any meter factor to corresponding master meter factor 2.00
216 Adjacent MF % Maximum percent variance of any meter factor to adjacent meter factors. 0.25
066 / 069 / 072 / 075 Component ID Assign identification label to component Component #n
068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment The component’s “mass computation adjustment factor” 0.000000
Meter Factors
169 Number of factors/component Specify the number of flow rate / meter factor combinations for the componentthrough it’s flow meter
2
170 Meter factor method Select use of fixed or linearized meter factors Fixed
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor Pulses per engineering unit rounded to one decimal place. Obtained from meternameplate.
23.0
172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor Median value of meter factor for use in validation by program code 215 Master MF%
1.0000
173 / 184 / 195 / 206 Stop rate Comp x Set the flow rate for low-flow stop quantity at end of inline batch 120
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 14 Component Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 27
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Flow rate 1 Low calibration flow rate 200
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Meter factor 1 Meter factor for low calibration flow rate 1.0000
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Flow rate 2 High or fallback calibraiton flow rate 600
177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Meter factor 2 Meter factor for calibration flow rate 2 1.0000
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Flow rate 3 High or fallback calibration flow rate 0
179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Meter factor 3 Meter factor for calibration flow rate 3 1.0000
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Flow rate 4 High calibraton flow rate 0
181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Meter factor 4 Meter factor for high calibration flow rate 1.0000
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 28
A.7 Component Block Valve / Pump Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 15 Block Valve / Pump Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Block Valve Control Parameters
400 / 402 / 404 / 406 Block valve output Assign discrete output for block valve control[block valve » component]
0
408 to 422 Component combination nn (cccc) Assign discrete output for block valve control[block valve » component(s)]
0
026 Unit type DanLoad 6000 unit assignment for general control of block valves Seq.(auto)
089 Block valve delay (s) Time between opening block valve and opening the FCV
354 Delay after outputs Time between energizing recipe and component combination outputs and checkingsafety circuits (used in conjunction with an automation system).
0
486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load Block valve control sequence
Block Valve Status Parameters
401 / 403 / 405 / 407 Block valve input Assign discrete input for block valve status[block valve » component]
0
Recipes
480 Number of recipes Total number of recipes enabled 1
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 15 Block Valve / Pump Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 29
481 / ... / 655 Name Configurable name for recipe Recipe rr
482 / ... / 656 Component 1 percentage Percentage of Component 1 to load for Recipe rr
483 / ... / 657 Component 2 percentage Percentage of Component 2 to load for Recipe rr
484 / ... / 658 Component 3 percentage Percentage of Component 3 to load for Recipe rr
485 / ... / 659 Comp 4 percent or ratio qty Percent of Component 4 to load for Recipe rr or additive ratio quantity “Multi-rate”
486 / ... / 660 Sequence or low proportion [Sequential blending] Order to load components.[In-line blending] High / low proportion component
0
Pump Control Parameters
288 / 289 / 290 / 291 Pump control output Assign discrete output for pump control[pump » component]
8 / ...
087 Line pack delay (s) Time between pump start and FCV opening 2
088 Pump stop delay (s) Time between FCV closing and pump stop 30
Alarms
248 Block valve time (s) Time allowed for a block valve to close after deenergizing the block valve controloutput.
10
269 Alarm o/p mask 1 Enable alarm to output 1 (bit mask) 16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Discrete output for alarm mask 1 4
270 Alarm o/p mask 2 Enable alarm to output 2 (bit mask) 0
379 Alarm output 2 Discrete output for alarm mask 2 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 30
A.8 Delivery Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 16 Delivery Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
078 Maximum preset qty Maximum quantity that can be preset in a single batch 3000
079 Minimum preset qty Minimum quantity that can be preset 50
080 Preset/delivery type Use uncompensated or compensated quantity in computing delivery quantity Gross
081 Delivery display type Display delivery quantity as uncompensated or compensated quantity Gross
082 Stop key action Select method for terminating a batch delivery with the STOP key Low flow
083 Fall back qty Quantity to flow at a fall back flow rate before attempting to increase flow rate tohighest flow rate
1000
108 Ramp clicks Number of attempts to increase flow rate before maintaining fall back flow rate 30
109 Maintenance clicks Number of attempts to maintain flow rate before decreasing flow rate to a fall backflow rate
30
110 Additive pump stop (s) The time between stopping delivery and deenergizing additive pump outputs 10
111 Primary component Primary component for blend ratio error detection and / or line flushing 1
341 #cmpt inputs Specify the number of “compartment size inputs” 0
342 Start method Define the method used to start a batch delivery. Normal
Component X
084 / 090 / 096 / 102 Low flow start qty [Sequential delivery only] Quantity to load at startup flow rate before increasing tohigh flow rate
50
085 / 091 / 097 / 103 Low flow restart qty [sequential delivery only] Quantity to load at startup flow rate after restart from asuspended delivery operation. Active only if the Low flow start quantity has beendelivered.
20
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 16 Delivery Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 31
086 / 092 / 098 / 104 Low flow stop qty [Sequential delivery] Quantity to load at the Flow rate 1 at the end of a delivery.** OR **[In-line delivery} Quantity to load at the component stop rate.
50
087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s) Time between component pump energization and opening the flow control valves 2
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s) Time between flow control valves closing and component pump deenergization 30
089 / 095 / 101 / 107 Block valve delay (s) Time between opening the component block valve and opening the flow controlvalve.
Recipes
480 Number of recipes Specify the number of recipes defined. 1
481 / ... / 655 Recipe name Configurable alpha-numeric name of recipe. Recipe XX
482 / ... / 656 Component 1 percentage Percentage of component 1 used in blend. 100
483 / ... / 657 Component 2 percentage Percentage of component 2 used in blend. 0
484 / ... / 658 Component 3 percentage Percentage of component 3 used in blend. 0
485 / ... / 659 Comp 4 percent or ratio qty Percentage of component 4 used in blend or additive ratio quantity for “Multi Rate” 0
486 / ... / 660 Sequence or low proportion [Sequential delivery] Sequence to load components.[ In-line delivery] Specify high / low proportion components.
Recipe Selection Inputs
348 Safety circuit 4 Must be set to 0 to enable the six nnn Recipe X input functions below. 0
361 Recipe 1 input Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 1 0
362 Recipe 2 input Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 2 0
363 Recipe 3 input Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 3 0
364 Recipe 4 input Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 4 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 16 Delivery Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 32
365 Recipe 5 input Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 5 0
366 Recipe 6 input Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 6 0
Recipe Selection Outputs
367 Recipe 1 output Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 1. 0
368 Recipe 2 output Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 2. 0
369 Recipe 3 output Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 3. 0
370 Recipe 4 output Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 4. 0
371 Recipe 5 output Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 5. 0
372 Recipe 6 output Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 6. 0
373 End output method Determine processing method for end of batch or transaction Ba only
374 Level input Assign discrete input for ESSO Japan’s intermediate level logic 0
375 Hatch input Assign discrete input for ESSO Japan’s hatch sensor logic 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 33
A.9 Blending Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 17 Blending Parameters Setup Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Global Parameters
341 #cmpt inputs Define the number of “compartment size inputs” 0
342 Start method Determine the method for starting batch delivery (not implemented) Normal
711 Ramp down % Percent of desired flow rate to ramp to if unable to maintain blend do to low pressure 50
712 Rate reduction Reduction if flow rate when high flow rate cannot be maintained 100
713 Low flow start qty Quantity to load at low flow rate before ramping to high flow rate 50
714 Clean line qty Quantity of program code 111 Primary component to load at end of batch 0
715 Low prop fac [In-line blending] Flow rate to deliver low-proportion components set by programcode 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load
1
716 Correct after qty Quantity of blend to load before beginning blend ratio adjustment 100
717 Alarm after qty Quantity of blend to load before checking blend ratio for purpose of generatingUnable to maintain blend alarm
200
718 Adjustment qty Quantity segment of blend used to correct the blend ratio 50
719 Comp % display Quantity accumulation type for display of batch component percentages Gross
720 Add calib delay (s) Time between pressing “START” and beginning of first additive injection cycle 0
722 Blend error method Method of computing blend ratio error for adjustment and alarms Grspctbatch
723 Max dev % Maximum allowed percent deviation in the blend ratio 2
724 Blend tol % Maximum allowed percent tolerance in the blend 5
725 Max dev qty Maximum allowed quantity units variation in the blend 20
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 17 Blending Parameters Setup Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 34
726 Blend tol qty Maximum allowed quantity tolerance in the blend 40
727 Blend sample qty The delivered blend quantity segment used to calculate blend ratio 10
Flow Meter Parameters
728 / 734 / 740 / 746 Flow adj fac Factor for rate of adjustment of flow rate during an in-line blend 1.00
729 / 735 / 741 / 747 Ratio adj fac Factor for rate of adjustment of blend ratio (for correction) during an in-line blend 1.00
730 / 736 / 742 / 748 Ramp % [Sequential blending with digital flow control valve(s)]: Percentage of flow rate toramp up with one ‘click’ before switching to flow rate maintenance mode.
85
731 CALMON analysis method “Logic” to use for calibration monitoring analysis Fuzzy
752 FPO basis Factor applied to meter pulse inputs to generate factored pulse outputs Raw
753 CALMON error limit Number of bad analyses per CALMON reset count calibration monitoring 10
754 CALMON reset count All analyses counters are zeroed out at this interval 50
756 / 761 / 766 / 771 FPO The factored pulse output on the “smart” 4-ch meter pulse board 0
757 / 762 / 767 / 772 Number of blades The number of magnetic blades on the meter for calibration purposes 0
758 / 763 / 768 / 773 Max max char dev Maximum signature deviation computed during a calibration analyses 100
759 / 764 / 769 / 774 Max tot char devs Sum signature deviation computed during a calibration analyses 400
760 / 765 / 770 / 775 Calibration status Select calibrated or not calibrated - can be used to force recalibration Not calibrated
Batch Profile Parameters
776 / 778 / 780 / 782 / 784 / 786 / 788 / 790 /792 / 794 / 796 / 798 Low flow rate
Low flow rate for Recipe n - Batch Profile n 300
777 / 779 / 781 / 783 / 785 / 787 / 789 / 791 /793 / 795 / 797 / 799 High flow rate
High flow rate for Recipe n - Batch Profile n 600
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 35
A.10 Temperature Compensation Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 18 Temperature Compensation Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
318 / 324 / 330 / 336 Meter x temp input ENABLE AND ASSIGN RTD TEMPERATURE INPUTS TO FLOW METER STREAM[RTD » meter stream]
0
Global Parameters
353 RTD range Specify range of RTD inputs on analog input board(s) Standard
427 Temperaure units Engineering units: determine how meter temp is computed and control labeling C
430 Reference temperature Linear equation reference temperature:Table 6C and 24C use 60.0 degrees F.Table 54C uses 15.0 degrees C.Entering a non-standard reference temperature causes correction to same.
15.0
431 Sample qty Measured quantity units between temperature readings to obtain temperatureaverages.
100
Individual RTD Configuration
319 / 325 / 331 / 337 Meter x offset (Ohms) 3-wire RTD interconnecting wire resistance (not recommended) 0
TL432 / 435 /438 / 441 Temperature option Select method for calculation of C Off
433 / 436 / 439 / 442 Alpha Coefficient of thermal expansion:
T" for linear equation and API tables 6C and 54C0.0005100
434 / 437 / 440 / 443 Backup temperature Fixed temperature used if RTD input fails. 15.0
Alarms
239 Minimum temperature Low temperature setpoint for alarm trigger -40.0
240 Maximum temperature High temperature setpoint for alarm trigger 110.0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 18 Temperature Compensation Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 36
238 Temp fail alarm action Action in response to temperature alarm Primary
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask Enable temperature failure alarm to output 1.(Bit mask value = 512)
16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign a discrete output to alarm output 1. 4
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask Enable temperature failure alarm to output 2.(Bit mask value = 512)
0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign a discrete output to alarm output 2. 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 37
A.11 Pressure Compensation Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 19 Pressure Compensation Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter x pres input Enable and assign pressure analog input to flow meter stream[pressure transmitter » meter stream]
0
Global Parameters
429 Pressure units Engineering units psi
Individual PT Configuration
464 / 468 / 472 / 476 Pressure @4 mA Pressure at zero scale transmitter input. 0.00
465 / 469 / 473 / 477 Pressure @20 mA Pressure at full scale transmitter input. 0.00
PL444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option Select method for calculation of C Off
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000 Compressibility factor times 10 in volume units per pressure units. 09
Alarms
244 Minimum pressure Low pressure setpoint for alarm trigger. 0.00
245 Maximum pressure High pressure setpoint for alarm trigger. 0.00
Note: Action in response to pressure alarm is always Primary.
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask Enable pressure failure alarm to output 1.(Bit mask value = 1024)
C388607
287 Alarm output 1 Assign a discrete output to alarm output 1. 4
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask Enable pressure failure alarm to output 2.(Bit mask value = 1024)
0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign a discrete output for alarm output 2. 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 38
A.12 Density Compensation Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 20 Density Compensation Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
321 / 327 / 333 / 339 Meter x dens input Enable and assign density analog input to flow meter stream[density transmitter » meter stream]
0
Global Parameters
428 Density units Engineering units for density measurements. 16/ft3
426 Buoyancy Density adjustment for buoyancy in air for mass calculation 0.0000
046 Density/gravity scale Specify the number of digits following the decimal separator in density / gravityvalues.
4
Individual DT Configuration
466 / 470 / 474 / 478 Density @4 mA Density at zero scale transmitter input. 0
467 / 471 / 475 / 479 Density @20 mA Density at full scale transmitter input. 0
456 / 458 / 460 / 462 Density/gravity option Chose an available option or disable. Off
457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backup density/gravity Fixed density/gravity used when live input is not available. 0
Alarms
242 Minimum density/gravity Low density/gravity setpoint for alarm trigger. 0
243 Maximum density/gravity High density/gravity setpoint for alarm trigger. 0
241 Density fail alarm action Action in response to density alarm. Primary
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask Enable density failure alarm to output 1.(Bit mask value = 4096)
16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign alarm output 1 to a discrete output. 4
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 20 Density Compensation Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 39
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask Enable density failure alarm to output 2.(Bit mask value = 4096)
0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign alarm output 2 to a discrete output. 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 40
A.13 Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 21 Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
128 Number of pulse per unit outputs ENABLE 1 or 2 PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUTS 0
129 / 132 Control meters Assign flow meters to pulse per unit output[pulse per unit output » flow meter(s)]
G per meter
Individual Pulse Per Unit Output Configuration
130 / 133 Factor Output pulse = measured quantity / Factor 1.0
131 / 134 Pulse width (ms) Pulse output ON time (milliseconds) 20
Outputs
313 Pulse per unit output 1 Assign output 1 to a discrete output 0
314 Pulse per unit output 2 Assign output 2 to a discrete output 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 41
A.14 Additive Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 22 Additives Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
135 Number of additives ENABLE ADDITIVE INJECTION 0
139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Control meters
Assign combined flow meters to additive injectors[additives » meter(s)]
G per meter
Global Parameters
044 Additive units Engineering units for display and printing. cc
136 Selection method Specify how additives are selected External
137 Inject % % of cycle at which injection begins 50
138 Clean line qty Specity quantity of product to load without additives at end of batch. 0
398 Clean line output Output energized during delivery of the quantity specified by program code138 Clean line qty
0
110 Additive pump stop (s) Delay between load stop and additive pumps stop 10
Individual Additive Configuration
140 / 145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty
Quantity of product measured per each additive ratio output 40
141 / 146 / 151 / 156 / 161 / 166 Injection method
Select injection method: Mech, Handshake, Meter or Control Mech
142 / 147 / 152 / 157 / 162 / 167 Volume per pulse or K-factor
Measure additive volume (depends on injection method) 0.00
143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000
Additive units injected per 1000 units of product. 0.0000
869 / 870 / 871 / 872 / 873 / 874 Add x Assign space in transaction storage record for additive total 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 22 Additives Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 42
949 / 950 / 951 / 952 / 953 / 954 Add x Assign coordinates in transaction ticket for additive totals for transaction 0
895 / 896 / 897 / 898 / 899 / 900 Add x Assign space in batch storage record for additive total 0
975 / 976 / 977 / 978 / 979 / 980 Add x Assign coordinated in transaction ticket for additive totals for batch 0
Outputs
380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392 / 395 Ratio/valve outputs
Assign additive injection control to a discrete output 0
800 / 803 / 806 / 809 / 812 / 815 Pump output
ENABLE AND ASSIGN DISCRETE OUTPUT TO ADDITIVE PUMP 0
801 / 804 / 807 / 810 / 813 . 816 Block valve output
ENABLE AND ASSIGN DISCRETE OUTPUT TO ADDITIVE BLOCK VALVE 0
398 Clean line output Energized during delivery of the quantity set by program code 138 Clean line qty 0
Inputs
382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394 / 397 Selection input
External input to select additive 0
381 / 384 / 387 / 390 / 393 / 396 Feedback/meter input
Verify and/or measure injected additive 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 22 Additives Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 43
247 Additive feedback count Expected # feedback pulses/cycle “Mech” method or maximum feedback “on time”“Handshake” injection in seconds.
Alarms
246 Additive error limit Accumulated additive injection error count for triggering Additive x failure alarm(Mech and Handshake)
3
247 Additive feedback count Maximum number of counts that an additive feedback input can be ON before analarm is generated.
0
271 Unauth additive flow vol Volume of unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarm is raisedfor the meter and control injection methods.
0
272 Prod/add -% The low (minus) setpoint referenced to the value of program code 143 / 148 / 153 /158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000 that triggers an additive failure alarm
0
273 Prod/add +% The high (plus) setpoint referenced to the value of program code 143 / 148 / 153 / 158/ 163 / 168 Additive per 1000 that triggers an additive failure alarm
0
269 Alarm o/p mask 1 Enable additive failure alarm to output 1 16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign alarm output 1 to a discrete output 4
270 Alarm o/p mask 2 Enable additive failure alarm to outpt 2 0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign alarm output 2 to a discrete output 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 44
A.15 LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 23 LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
820 Pinch back method ENABLE BACK-PRESSURE CONTROLANDSELECT SOURCE OF PRESSURE MEASUREMENT FOR CONTROL
Off
821 Pinch back pressure Low pressure setpoint to maintain by closing the flow control valve to a lower fallback flow rate setting
0
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input Assign discrete input for each flow control valve if pressure switch is used. 0
818 PT type Select static pressure or differential pressure input type Pm
819 Pe method Select method of vapor pressure calculation TP-15
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Backup pressure Component backup pressure in kPa, psi, etc.Used for quantity computation correction if > 0.
0.0
822 Atmospheric pressure Constant used for absolute / gauge pressure conversion 14.70
823 Pinch back qty Define the batch startup gross quantity for which pressure control is disabled 0
026 Unit type Select type of blender Seq.(auto)
027 Valve type Select type of flow control valve Std. digital
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 23 LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 45
824 T1 Temperature for low Pe 0.0
825 Pe at T1 Low pressure Pe at temperature T1 0.0
826 T2 Temperature for high Pe (2-point linearization)ORTemperature for mid Pe (3-point linearization)
0.0
827 Pe at T2 High pressure Pe at temperature T2 (2-point linearization)ORMid pressure Pe at temperature T2 (3-point linearization)
0.0
828 T3 Temperature for high Pe (3-point linearization) 0.0
829 Pe at T3 High pressure Pe at temperature T3 (3-point linearization) 0.0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 46
A.16 Dynamic Data Display Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 24 Dynamic Data Display Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Dynamic Data Display Configuration
680 Line 1 data code Grs batch vol 002
681 Line 2 data code Std batch vol 003
682 Line 3 data code Mtr 1 grs total 004
683 Line 4 data code Mtr 1 std total 005
684 Line 5 data code Mtr 1 grs batch 006
685 Line 6 data code Mtr 1 std batch 007
686 Line 7 data code Mtr 1 grs unauth 017
687 Line 8 data code Mtr 1 flw rate 008
688 Line 9 data code Mtr 1 factor 011
689 Line 10 data code Mtr 1 grs load 103
690 Line 11 data code Mtr 1 pls cnt 012
691 Line 12 data code Mtr 1 max flw rate 010
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24 Dynamic Data Display Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Dynamic Data Display Configuration
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 47
692 Line 13 data code Mtr 1 curr temp 074
693 Line 14 data code Cmp 1 ave temp 080
694 Line 15 data code Cmp 1 ave vlv cls 075
695 Line 16 data code Arm position 001
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 48
TABLE A - 24 Data Codes per Device
Device Function Description
Global Variables
001 Arm position 0, 1, or 2 indicates the parked, side 1, or side 2 position of the loading arm.
002 Grs batch qty Sum of the accumulated quantitys accessible by data codes 072 / 078 / 084 / 090 Cmp x grs batch. Gross quantity of the batch in whole numbers (0 to 999,999 quantity units).
003 Std batch qty Sum of the accumulated quantitys accessible by data codes 073 / 079 / 085 / 091 Cmp x std batch. Standard quantity of the batch in whole number (0 to 999,999 quantity units).
102 Preset quantity Batch quantity to load.
121 Flow rate Total (loading arm delivery) flow rate (0 to 99,999 quantity units per hour).
130 Power fail grs bch Accumulated gross quantity of the batch delivered at power fail time (0 to 999,999 quantity units).
131 Power fail std bch Accumulated standard quantity of the batch delivered at power fail time (0 to 999,999 quantityunits).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24 Data Codes per Device
Device Function Description
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 49
132 Batch temperature The flow weighted average temperature of the product during the batch delivery.
133 Batch density The flow weighted average density of the product during the batch delivery.
134 Batch pressure The flow weighted average pressure of the product during the batch delivery.
223 Flush pulse count Pulse count accumulation for flush action.
Meter Flow Meters Variables
004 021 038 055 Mtr x grs total Accumulated gross quantity total (non-reset) for meter x (0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
005 022 039 056 Mtr x std total Accumulated standard quantity total (non-reset) for meter x (0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
006 023 040 057 Mtr x grs batch Accumulated gross quantity for the current batch delivery (0 to 999,999 quantity units). Value isrounded per program code 045 Round method.
007 024 041 058 Mtr x std batch Accumulated standard quantity for the current batch delivery (0 to 999,999 quantity units). Valueis rounded per program code 045 Round method.
008 025 042 059 Mtr x flow rate Current instantaneous flow rate for meter x (0 to 99,999 quantity units per hour).
009 026 043 060 Mtr x CCF Combined correction factor for meter x.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24 Data Codes per Device
Device Function Description
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 50
010 027 044 061 Mtr x max flw rate The maximum flow rate for meter x.
011 028 045 062 Mtr x factor The current meter factor for meter x.
012 029 046 063 Mtr x pls count Total pulse accumulation = Mtr x pls flrt1 + Mtr x pls flrt2 + Mtr x pls flrt3 + Mtr x pls flrt4
013 030 047 064 Mtr x pls flrt1 Pulse accumulation at Mtr x flow rate 1 (0 at start of load)
014 031 048 065 Mtr x pls flrt2 Pulse accumulation at Mtr x flow rate 2 (0 at start of load)
015 032 049 066 Mtr x pls flrt3 Pulse accumulation at Mtr x flow rate 3 (0 at start of load)
016 033 050 067 Mtr x pls flrt4 Pulse accumulation at Mtr x flow rate 4 (0 at start of load)
017 034 051 068 Mtr x grs unauth Accumulated unauthorized gross quantity for meter x.
018 035 052 069 Mtr x std unauth Accumulated unauthorized standard quantity for meter x.
019 036 053 070 Mtr x grs start Accumulated gross quantity at start of batch ( 0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
020 037 054 071 Mtr x std start Accumulated standard quantity at start of batch (0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24 Data Codes per Device
Device Function Description
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 51
074 080 086 092 Mtr x curr temp The current temperature (live or fixed) for meter stream x.
103 104 105 106 Mtr x grs load Accumulated gross quantity for the batch (0.0 to 999,999.99). These values are displayed to thehundredth of a quantity unit resolution for use in meter proving.
126 127 128 129 Mtr x Ctl The internally calculated or fixed value of Ctl (correction factor for the affect of temperature on thequantity of the liquid).
135 136 137 138 Mtr x curr pres The current pressure (live or fixed) for meter stream x.
139 140 141 142 Mtr x Cpl Internally calculated or fixed value of Cpl (correction factor for the effect of pressure on thequantity of the liquid).
143 144 145 146 Mtr x curr dens The current density (live or fixed) for meter stream x.
147 148 149 150 Mtr x std ld data The delivery accumulted total volume data for meter x standard load.
219 220 221 222 Mtr x calib stat Meter calibration status for up to 4 meters.
Component Component Variables
072 078 084 090 Cmp x grs batch Accumulated gross quantity of component x for the batch delivery. Value is rounded per programcode 045 Round method.
073 079 085 091 Cmp x std batch Accumulated standard quantity of component x for the batch delivery. Value is rounded perprogram code 045 Round method.
075 081 087 093 Cmp x ave temp Flow weighted average temperature of component x for the batch delivery.
076 082 088 094 Cmp x ave vlv cls Average flow control valve closure time when flowing component x.
077 083 089 095 Cmp x batch % The percentage of component x in the current batch delivery. Quantitys are independent from theselection of program code 722 Blend error method.
107 109 111 113 Cmp x ave dens Flow weighted average density of component x for the batch delivery. Format dependent onprogram code 046 Density/gravity scale.
108 110 112 114 Cmp x ave pres Flow weighted average pressure of component x for the batch delivery.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24 Data Codes per Device
Device Function Description
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 52
122 123 124 125 Cmp x adjust % Percentage of component x, used to adjust blend ratio. Values are dependent on the selection ofprogram code 722 Blend error method in the following manner.Grspctbatch and Stdpctbatch use accumulated component quantity percentages of the batch foradjustment and alarm purposes.Grspctsmpl and Stdpctsmpl use instantanous component quantity percentages, computed withquantitys specified by program code 727 Blend sample quantity, for adjustment and alarmpurposes.Flrtsmpl uses one second samples of the component flow rate for component percentagecomputations.
151 153 155 157 Cmp x grs total Accumulated gross total quantity for component x
152 154 156 158 Cmp x std total Accumulated standard total quantity for component x
Recipe Function Description
159171183195207
161173185197209
163175187199211
165177189201213
167179191203215
169181193205217
Rec x grs tot Recipe x gross total quantity for delivery. Refer to program codes 480-661 for recipe parametersfor up to 30 recipes.
160172184196208
162174186198210
164176188200212
166178190202214
168180192204216
170182194206218
Rec x std tot Recipe x standard total quantity for delivery. Refer to program codes 480-661 for recipeparameters for up to 30 recipes.
Safety Circuit Function Description
224230
225231
226 227 228 229 Circuit x safety state State of safety circuit x (up to 8 safety circuits).
Additive Additive Variables
096 097 098 099 100 101 Add x total Accumulated quantity of additive for transaction. (0 to 9,999,999 additive quantity units specifiedby program code 044 Additive units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24 Data Codes per Device
Device Function Description
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 53
115 116 117 118 119 120 Add x batch Accumulated quantity of additive for batch. (0 to 9,999,999 additive quantity units specified byprogram code 044 Additive units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 54
A.17 Communications / Data Logging Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 25 Communications Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Data Port Configuration
663 / 668 Mode Ch. A / B Data protocol selection Not used
664 / 669 Data rate Ch. A / B Baud selection 9600
665 / 670 Word size Ch. A / Ch. B Bits in data word selection 8
666 / 671 Stop bits Ch. A / Ch. B Stop bits selection 1
667 / 672 Parity Ch. A / Ch. B Parity type selection EVEN
236 Time-out ch. A (s) Time-out in seconds for comms failure on channel A. 10
237 Time-out ch. B (s) Time-out in seconds for comms failure on channel B. 10
269 Alarm o/p mask 1 Enable alarms to output 1 (bit mask value = 2)) 16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign alarm output 1 to discrete output 4
270 Alarm o/p mask 2 Enable alarms to output 2 (bit mask value = 2) 0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign alarm output 2 to a discrete output 0
Data Logging
696 Batch summary Configure printer output for standard Batch Summary report Off
697 Transaction summary Configure printer output for standard Transaction Summary report Off
698 Alarm log Configure printer output for Alarm logging Off
699 Power fail log Configure printer output for Power Fail logging Off
700 Program mode entry/exit Configure printer output for Entry / Exit of Program Mode logging Off
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 25 Communications Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 55
701 W&M switch open/closed Configure printer output for OPEN / CLOSE W&M switch logging Off
702 Program code value change log Configure printer output for modification of program code value logging Off
703 Configuration summary Configure printer output for configuration summary printing Off
704 Crash memory summary Configure printer output for program crash memory logging Off
705 Totalizers Enable / disable automatic printing every 24 hours OR manual printing Off
706 Transaction ticket Configure printer output for printing user defined Transaction Ticket Off
707 Transaction ticket reprint Configure printer output for reprinting user defined Transaction Ticket Off
708 Thruput Enable / disable automatic printing every 24 hours of change in totalizers Off
709 Sequence numbers Enable / disable printing of report / log sequence numbers on each report / log on aper printer basis.
Off
710 Cutoff hour The hour at which a cutoff (end of day) processing run is to be run. 0 (midnight)
Alarms - Data Logging
235 Data logging alarm action Action in response to a Data logging memory full alarm Info
269 Alarm /p mask 1 Enable alarms to output 1 16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign alarm output 1 to discrete output 4
270 Alarm o/p mask 2 Enable alarms to output 2 0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign alarm output 2 to a discrete output 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 56
A.18 Transaction Storage Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 26 Transaction Storage Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Transaction Storage - Global
042 Transaction # Transaction sequence number (0000 to 9999) 9999
043 Batch # Batch sequence number (0000 to 9999) 9999
047 Batches/transaction Maximum allowed batches in each transaction (0 to 10000) 0 = unlimited 0
217 Passcode per transaction Prompt for passcode entry for each transaction (not implemented) No
834 Transaction record length Number of memory bytes allocated for each stored transaction record. 0
835 Start page and # pages Allocation of the start page and number of pages in the transaction file. 602
836 Batch record length Number of memory bytes allocated for each stored batch record. 0
837 Start page and # pages Allocation of the start page and number of pages in the batch file. 0
838 Tr tk format Specify default transaction ticket Lock
839 Time out tr Specify whether or not a transaction should be timed out automatically No
Transaction Record Storage Allocation
840 1 Addr Record offset for storage Unit Address 0
841 2 Tr seq # Record offset for storage of Transaction Sequence Number 0
842 3 Recipe # Record offset for storage of Recipe Number 0
843 4 Recipe name Record offset for storage of Recipe Name 0
844 5 Side Record offset for storage of Swing-arm side 0
845 6 Prompt 1 Record offset for storage of Prompt 1 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26 Transaction Storage Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 57
846 7 Prompt 2 Record offset for storage of Prompt 2 0
847 8 Prompt 3 Record offset for storage of Prompt 3 0
848 9 Prompt 4 Record offset for storage of Prompt 4 0
849 10 Prompt 5 Record offset for storage of Prompt 5 0
850 11 Data item 1 Record offset for storage of Data item 1 0
851 12 Data item 2 Record offset for storage of Data item 2 0
852 13 Data item 3 Record offset for storage of Data item 3 0
853 14 Data item 4 Record offset for storage of Data item 4 0
854 15 Data item 5 Record offset for storage of Data item 5 0
855 16 Start date Record offset for storage of Transaction Start Date 0
856 17 End date Record offset for storage of Transaction End Date 0
857 18 Gross Record offset for storage of accumulated gross total for the tansaction 0
858 19 Std Record offset for storage of accumulated std total for tjhe transaction 0
859 20 Temp Record offset for storage of average temperature for the tansaction 0
860 21 Pres Record offset for storage of average pressure for the transaction 0
861 22 Dens Record offset for storage of average density for the transaction 0
862 23 Start gross Record offset for storage of the accumulated gross total at the start of the transaction 0
863 24 Start std Record offset for storage of the accumujlated std total at the start of the transaction 0
864 25 End gross Record offset for storge of hte accumulated gross total at hte end of the transaction 0
865 26 End std Reocord offset for storage of the accumulated std total at te end of th transaction 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26 Transaction Storage Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 58
866 27 Alarm bit map Record offset for storage of a bit map of the alarms that occured during thetransaction
0
867 28 Prim alarm Record offset for storage of a Primary alarm that occurred during the transaction 0
868 29 Temp alarm Record offset for storage of a Temperature alarm that occured during the transaction 0
869 30 Add 1 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantity of additive 1 during thetransaction
0
870 31 Add 2 Record offset for storage of te accumulated quantity of additive 2 during thetransaction
0
871 32 Add 3 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantity of additive 3 during thetransaction
0
872 33 Add 4 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantity of additive 4 during thetransaction
0
873 34 Add 5 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantity of additive 5 during thetransaction
0
874 35 Add 6 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantity of additive 6 during thetransaction
0
875 36 Op mode Record offset for storage of the operating mode during the transaction 0
876 37 Gross units Record offset for storage of the operating mode during the transaction 0
877 38 Std units Record offset for storage of the operating mode during the transaction 0
Batch Record Storage Allocation
880 1 Addr Record offset for storage of the Unit Address 0
881 2 Ba seq # Record offset for storage of the Batch Sequence Number 0
882 3 Tr seq # Record offset for storage of the Transaction Sequence Number 0
883 4 Temp Record offset for storage of the average temperature during the batch 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26 Transaction Storage Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 59
884 5 Pres Record offset for storage of the average pressure during the batch 0
885 6 Dens Record offset for storage of the average density during the batch 0
886 7 Preset Record offset for storage of the Preset value for the batch 0
887 8 Gross Record offset for storage of the accumulated gross quantity for the batch 0
888 9 Std Record offset for storage of hte accumulated standard quantity for the batch 0
889 10 Comp gross Record offset for storage of the accumulated gross quantities of each component inthe batch
0
890 11 Comp std Record offset for storage of the accumulated standard quantitys of each component inthe batch
0
891 12 Comp temp Record offset for storage of the average temperature of each component in the batch 0
892 13 Comp dens Record offset for storage of the average density of each component in the batch 0
893 14 Comp pres Record offset for storage of the aveerage pressure of each component in the batch 0
894 15 Comp % Record offset for storage of the percentage of each component in the batch 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26 Transaction Storage Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 60
895 16 Add 1 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 1 for the batch 0
896 17 Add 2 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 2 for the batch 0
897 18 Add 3 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 3 for the batch 0
898 19 Add 4 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 4 for the batch 0
899 20 Add 5 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 5 for the batch 0
900 21 Add 6 Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 6 for the batch 0
901 22 Op mode Record offset for storage of the operation mode during the batch 0
902 23 CCF Record offset for storage of the combined correction factor during the batch 0
Alarms
274 Storage alarm action Action in response to a memory full condition for transaction storage or batch storagememory.
Off
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 61
A.19 Transaction Ticket Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 27 Transaction Ticket Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Ticket Coordinates for Transaction Storage Codes
920 1 Addr Transaction ticket coordinates for Unit Address 0
921 2 Tr seq # Transaction ticket coordinates for the Transaction Sequence Number 0
922 3 Recipe # Transaction ticket coordinates for the Recipe Number 0
923 4 Recipe name Transaction ticket coordinates for the Recipe Name 0
924 5 Side Transaction ticket coordinates for the Swing-Arm Side 0
925 6 Prompt 1 Transaction ticket coordinates for Prompt 1 0
926 7 Prompt 2 Transaction ticket coordinates for Prompt 2 0
927 8 Prompt 3 Transaction ticket coordinates for Prompt 3 0
928 9 Prompt 4 Transaction ticker coordinated for Prompt 4 0
929 10 Prompt 5 Transaction ticket coordinates for Prompt 5 0
930 11 Data item 1 Transaction ticket t coordinates for Data item 1 0
931 12 Data item 2 Transaction ticket coordinates for Data item 2 0
932 13 Data item 3 Transaction ticket coordinates for Data item 3 0
933 14 Data item 4 Transaction ticket coordinates for Data item 4 0
934 15 Data item 5 Transaction ticket coordinates for Data item 5 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 27 Transaction Ticket Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 62
935 16 Start date Transaction ticket coordinates for Start Transaction Date 0
936 17 End date Transaction ticket coordinates for End Transaction Date 0
937 18 Gross Transaction ticket coordinates for accumulated gross quantity for the transaction 0
938 19 Std Transaction ticket coordinates for accumulated standard quantity for the transaction 0
939 20 Temp Transaction ticket coordinates for average temperature for the transaction 0
940 21 Pres Transaction ticket coordinates for average pressure for the transaction 0
941 22 Dens Transaction ticket coordinates for average pressure for the transaction 0
942 23 Start gross Transaction ticket coordinates for the gross totalizer reading at start of transaction 0
943 24 Start std Transaction ticket coordinates for th std totalizer reading t start of transaction 0
944 25 End gross Transaction ticket coordinates for the gross totalizer reading at end of transaction 0
945 26 End std Transaction ticket coordinates for the std totalizer reading at end of transaction 0
946 27 Alarm bit map Transaction ticket coordinates for the alarm bit map 0
947 28 Prim alarm Transaction ticket coordinate for a Primary alarm 0
948 29 Temp alarm Transaction ticket coordinates for the Temperature alarm 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 27 Transaction Ticket Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 63
949 30 Add 1 Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 1 quantity for the transaction 0
950 31 Add 2 Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 2 quantity for the transaction 0
951 32 Add 3 Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 3 quantity for the transaction 0
952 33 Add 4 Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 4 quantity for the transaction 0
953 34 Add 5 Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 5 quantity for the transaction 0
954 35 Add 6 Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 6 quantity for the transaction 0
955 36 Op mode Transaction ticket coordinates for the Operation Mode during the transaction 0
956 37 Gross units Transaction ticket coordinates for the Operation Mode during the transaction 0
957 38 Std units Transaction ticket coordinates for the Operation Mode during the transaction 0
Ticket Coordinates for Batch Storage Codes
960 1 Addr Transaction ticket coordinates for the Unit Address during batch 0
961 2 Ba seq # Transaction ticket coordinates for the Batch Sequence Number 0
962 3 Tr seq # Transaction ticket coordinates for the Transaction Sequence Number 0
963 4 Temp Transaction ticket coordinates for the average temperature during the batch 0
964 5 Pres Transaction ticket coordinates for the average pressure during the batch 0
965 6 Dens Transaction ticket coordinates for the average density during the batch 0
966 7 Preset Transaction ticket coordinates for the batch Preset quantity 0
967 8 Gross Transaction ticket coordinates for the batch gross quantity 0
968 9 Std Transaction ticket coordinates for the batch standard quantity 0
969 10 Comp gross Transaction ticket coordinates for the component gross quantities for the batch 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 27 Transaction Ticket Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 64
970 11 Comp std Transaction ticket coordinates for the component standard quantities for the batch 0
971 12 Comp temp Transaction ticket coordinates for the average temperatures of the components for thebatch
0
972 13 Comp dens Transaction ticket coordinations for the average density of the components for thebatch
0
973 14 Comp pres Transaction ticket coordinates for the average pressure of the components for thebatch
0
974 15 Comp % Transaction ticket coordinates for the component percentages for the batch 0
975 16 Add 1 Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 1 quantity for the batch 0
976 17 Add 2 Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 2 quantity for the batch 0
977 18 Add 3 Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 3 quantity for the batch 0
978 19 Add 4 Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 4 quantity for the batch 0
979 20 Add 5 Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 5 quantity for the batch 0
980 21 Add 6 Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 6 quantity for the batch 0
981 22 Op mode Transaction ticket coordinates for the Operation Mode during the batch 0
982 23 CCF Transaction ticket coordinates for the Combined Correction Factor during the batch 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 65
A.20 Alarm Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 28 Alarm Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Safety Circuit Configuration
220 Secondary alarm reset (s) Time period to allow a secondary alarm to be active before it is reset automatically. 300
222 Minimum flow rate Setpoint for Flow rate too low meter x alarm trigger. 100
223 Low flow time (s) Time allowed at flow less than setpoint before triggering alarm. 10
221 Low flow alarm action Response to low flow alarm. Primary
225 Maximum flow rate Setpoint for Flow rate too high meter x alarm trigger. 660
226 High flow time (s) Time allowed at flow greater than setpoint before triggering alarm. 10
224 High flow alarm action Response to high flow alarm. Primary
227 Overrun limit qty Setpoint for Unable to close valve meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY) 2.0
229 Underflow limit qty Setpoint for Valve closed early meter x alarm trigger. 5.0
228 Underflow alarm action Response to underflow alarm. Off
231 No flow t-o time (s) Setpoint for Timed-out - no flow detected meter x alarm trigger. 5
230 No flow t-o alarm action Response to no flow time-out alarm. Primary
232 Unauthorized flow limit qty Setpoint for Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY) 10.0
233 Error limit (pulses) Setpoint for Pulse security error meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY) 0
234 Reset count (pulses) Pulse error accumulation before RESET counter is issued. 10000
235 Data logging alarm action Response to Data logging memory full alarm. Info
236 Time-out ch. A (s) Set time out in seconds for Comms failure channel A 10
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 28 Alarm Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 66
237 Time-out ch. B (s) Set time out in seconds for Comms failure channel B 10
239 Minimum temperature Low setpoint for Temperature failure meter x alarm trigger. -40.0
240 Maximum temperature High setpoint for Temperature failure meter x alarm trigger. 110.0
238 Temp fail alarm action Response to temperature failure alarm. Primary
242 Minimum density/gravity Low setpoint for Density failure component x alarm trigger.
243 Maximum density/gravity High setpoint for Density failure component x alarm trigger.
241 Density fail alarm action Response to density failure alarm. Primary
244 Minimum pressure Low setpoint for Pressure failure meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY) 0.00
245 Maximum pressure High setpoint for Pressure failure meter x alarm trigger. 0.00
246 Additive error limit Setpoint for Additive x failure alarm trigger. (PRIMARY) 3
247 Additive feedback count Expected number of feedback pulses per additive ratio cycle. 0
248 Block valve time (s) Setpoint for Unable to close block valve x alarm trigger. 10
Safety Circuit Configuration
345 Safety circuit 1 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
249 Circuit 1 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 1 Secondary
250 #1 Ground detector open Configurable message for Safety circuit 1 <as indicated>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 28 Alarm Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 67
346 Safety circuit 2 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
251 Circuit 2 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 2 Primary
252 #2 Overspill detector open Configurable message for Safety circuit 2 <as indicated>
347 Safety circuit 3 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
253 Circuit 3 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 3 Secondary
254 #3 Permissive power failure Configurable message for Safety circuit 3 <as indicated>
348 Safety circuit 4 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
255 Circuit 4 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 4 Secondary
256 #1 Additive injection failure Configurable message for Safety circuit 4 <as indicated>
349 Safety circuit 5 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
257 Circuit 5 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 5 Secondary
258 #5 Arm down side 1 Configurable message for Safety circuit 5 <as indicated>
265 Circuit 5 type Enable / disable / define swing-arm side checking for this circuit. 1
350 Safety circuit 6 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
259 Circuit 6 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 6 Secondary
260 #6 Arm down side 2 Configurable message for Safety circuit 6 <as indicated>
266 Circuit 6 type Enable / disable / define swing-arm side checking for this circuit. 2
351 Safety circuit 7 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
261 Circuit 7 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 7 Secondary
262 #7 Walkway down side 1 Configurable message for Safety circuit 7 <as indicated>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 28 Alarm Parameters Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 68
267 Circuit 7 type Enable / disable / define swing-arm side checking for this circuit. 1
352 Safety circuit 8 Assign discrete input to alarm 0
263 Circuit 8 alarm action Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 2 Secondary
264 #8 Walkway down side 2 Configurable message for Safety circuit 2 <as indicated>
268 Circuit 8 type Enable / disable / define swing-arm side checking for this circuit. 2
Discrete Control Output for Alarms
269 Alarm o/p mask 1 Enable alarms to output 1 (bit mask). 16777215
287 Alarm output 1 Assign alarm output 1 to a discrete output. 4
270 Alarm o/p mask 2 Enable alarms to output 2 (bit mask). 0
379 Alarm output 2 Assign alarm output 2 to a discrete output. 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 69
TABLE A - 29 Analog Inputs Location: Unit: Date:
Program Code Function Default Actual
Analog Inputs Configuration
983 RTD Alpha Set the alpha value for temperature calculations 3850
984 LLcnt Set A/D value for Low channel Low calibration point for 4-20 mA input 0
985 LH cnt Set A/D value for Low channel High calibration point for 4-20 mA input 0
986 HL cnt Set A/D value for High channel Low calibration point for 4-20 mA input 0
987 HH cnt Set A/D value for High channel High calibration point for 4-20 mA input 0
988 LL cnt Set A/D value for Low channel Low calibration point for RTD input 0
989 LH cnt Set A/D value for Low channel High calibration point for RTD input 0
990 HL cnt Set A/D value for High channel Low calibration point for RTD input 0
991 HH cnt Set A/D value for High channel High calibration point for RTD input 0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 70
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix B
Configuration Record
Configuration Record for a
DanLoad 6000 Installation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 1
The table on the following pages is intended to provide an easy method for documenting the currentconfiguration of a DanLoad 6000 Preset. The table contains a numerical sequential list of allprogram codes. The table can be photocopied and the current value or selection for each parametercan be manually entered.
Manually enter the Location, the Unit ID, and the Date.
Enter the Program Mode and scroll through or select the program codes of interest. Manually enterthe indicated value or selection of each program code in the Value / Selection column.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix B - 2 _____________________________________________ Configuration Record
Location: Unit ID: Date:
Code Parameter Value / Selection
USER 1
001 Passcode
002 User ID
003 Supervisor privilege
USER 2
004 Passcode
005 User ID
006 Supervisor privilege
USER 3
007 Passcode
008 User ID
009 Supervisor privilege
USER 4
010 Passcode
011 User ID
012 Supervisor privilege
USER 5
013 Passcode
014 User ID
015 Supervisor privilege
USER 6
016 Passcode
017 User ID
018 Supervisor privilege
UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>
023 "Side" Stream Blending
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 3
024 “Sequential” proportional
UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 2>
025 Operating mode
026 Unit type
027 Valve type
028 Language
029 Product Units
UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 3>
030 Number of data items
031 #1 Enter data item #1
032 #2 Enter data item #2
033 #3 Enter data item #3
034 #4 Enter data item #4
035 #5 Enter data item #5
UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 4>
036 Prompt time-out (s)
037 Check display
038 Date format
039 Date separator
040 Decimal separator
041 Display data rate
UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 5>
042 Transaction #
043 Batch #
044 Additive units
045 Round method
046 Density/gravity scale
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 4 _____________________________________________ Configuration Record
047 Batches/transaction
VALVE PARAMETERS
048 Number of valves
049 Initial flow time (s)
METER PARAMETERS
050 Number of meters
METER 1 PARAMETERS
051 Meter ID
052 Valve to be controlled
053 "Side" Stream Meter
METER 2 PARAMETERS
054 Meter ID
055 Valve to be controlled
056 "Side" Stream Meter
METER 3 PARAMETERS
057 Meter ID
058 Valve to be controlled
059 "Side" Stream Meter
METER 4 PARAMETERS
060 Meter ID
061 Valve to be controlled
062 "Side" Stream Meter
METER PARAMETERS
063 Midgrade Primary blend stream meter
COMPONENT PARAMETERS
065 Number of components
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 5
COMPONENT 1
066 Component ID
067 Meter
068 Mass adjustment
COMPONENT 2
069 Component ID
070 Meter
071 Mass adjustment
COMPONENT 3
072 Component ID
073 Meter
074 Mass adjustment
COMPONENT 4
075 Component ID
076 Meter
077 Mass adjustment
DELIVERY PARAMETERS
078 Maximum preset qty
079 Minimum preset qty
080 Preset/delivery type
081 Delivery display type
082 Stop key action
083 Fall back qty
COMP 1 DELIVERY PARAMETERS
084 Low flow start qty
085 Low flow restart qty
086 Low flow stop qty
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 6 _____________________________________________ Configuration Record
087 Line pack delay (s)
088 Pump stop delay (s)
089 Block valve delay (s)
COMP 2 DELIVERY PARAMETERS
090 Low flow start qty
091 Low flow restart qty
092 Low flow stop qty
093 Line pack delay (s)
094 Pump stop delay (s)
095 Block valve delay (s)
COMP 3 DELIVERY PARAMETERS
096 Low flow start qty
097 Low flow restart qty
098 Low flow stop qty
099 Line pack delay (s)
100 Pump stop delay (s)
101 Block valve delay (s)
COMP 4 DELIVERY PARAMETERS
102 Low flow start qty
103 Low flow restart qty
104 Low flow stop qty
105 Line pack delay (s)
106 Pump stop delay (s)
107 Block valve delay (s)
DELIVERY PARAMETERS (continued)
108 Ramp clicks
109 Maintenance clicks
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 7
110 Additive pump stop (s)
111 Primary component
DIGITAL VALVE 1 PARAMETERS
112 Low flow % error
113 High flow % error
114 Maint click adjustment (s)
115 Open method
DIGITAL VALVE 2 PARAMETERS
116 Low flow % error
117 High flow % error
118 Maint click adjustment (s)
119 Open method
DIGITAL VALVE 3 PARAMETERS
120 Low flow % error
121 High flow % error
122 Maint click adjustment (s)
123 Open method
DIGITAL VALVE 4 PARAMETERS
124 Low flow % error
125 High flow % error
126 Maint click adjustment (s)
127 Open method
PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUTS
128 Number of pulse per unit outputs
PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUT 1
129 Control meters
130 Factor
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 8 _____________________________________________ Configuration Record
131 Pulse width (ms)
PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUT 2
132 Control meters
133 Factor
134 Pulse width (ms)
ADDITIVE PARAMETERS
135 Number of additives
136 Additive Selection method
137 Inject percentage
138 Clean line qty
ADDITIVE 1 PARAMETERS
139 Control meters
140 Ratio qty
141 Injection method
142 Volume/pulse or K-factor
143 Additive per 1000
ADDITIVE 2 PARAMETERS
144 Control meters
145 Ratio qty
146 Injection method
147 Volume/pulse or K-factor
148 Additive per 1000
ADDITIVE 3 PARAMETERS
149 Control meters
150 Ratio qty
151 Injection method
152 Volume/pulse or K-factor
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 9
153 Additive per 1000
ADDITIVE 4 PARAMETERS
154 Control meters
155 Ratio qty
156 Injection method
157 Volume/pulse or K-factor
158 Additive per 1000
ADDITIVE 5 PARAMETERS
159 Control meters
160 Ratio qty
161 Injection method
162 Volume/pulse or K-factor
163 Additive per 1000
ADDITIVE 6 PARAMETERS
164 Control meters
165 Ratio qty
166 Injection method
167 Volume/pulse or K-factor
168 Additive per 1000
METER FACTORS
169 Number of factors/component
170 Meter factor method
COMPONENT 1 FACTORS
171 Nominal K-factor
172 Master meter factor
173 Stop rate
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 10 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 1
174 Flow rate 1
175 Meter factor 1
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 2
176 Flow rate 2
177 Meter factor 2
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 3
178 Mlow rate 3
179 Meter factor 3
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 4
180 Flow rate 4
181 Meter factor 4
COMPONENT 2 FACTORS
182 Nominal K-factor
183 Master meter factor
184 Stop rate
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 1
185 Flow rate 1
186 Meter factor 1
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 2
187 Flow rate 2
188 Meter factor 2
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 3
189 Flow rate 3
190 Meter factor 3
COMPONENT 2 FACTOR 4
191 Flow rate 4
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 11
192 Meter factor 4
COMPONENT 3 FACTORS
193 Nominal K-factor
194 Master meter factor
195 Stop rate
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 1
196 Flow rate 1
197 Meter factor 1
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 2
198 Flow rate 2
199 Meter factor 2
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 3
200 Flow rate 3
201 Meter factor 3
COMPONENT 3 FACTOR 4
202 Flow rate 4
203 Meter factor 4
COMPONENT 4 FACTORS
204 Nominal K-factor
205 Master meter factor
206 Stop rate
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 1
207 Flow rate 1
208 Meter factor 1
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 2
209 Flow rate 2
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 12 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
210 Meter factor 2
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 3
211 Flow rate 3
212 Meter factor 3
COMPONENT 4 FACTOR 4
213 Flow rate 4
214 Meter factor 4
MF VALIDATION
215 Master MF %
216 Adjacent MF %
217 Gross units mnemonic
218 Std units mnemonic
219 Use restart qty
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>
220 Secondary alarm reset (s)
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 2>
221 Low flow alarm action
222 Minimum flow rate
223 Low flow time (s)
224 High flow alarm action
225 Maximum flow rate
226 High flow time (s)
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 3>
227 Overrun limit qty
228 Underflow alarm action
229 Underflow limit qty
230 No flow t-o alarm action
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 13
231 No flow t-o time (s)
232 Unauth flow qty
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 4>
233 Error limit (pulses)
234 Reset count (pulses)
235 Data logging alarm action
236 Time-out ch. A (s)
237 Time-out ch. B (s)
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 5>
238 Temp fail alarm action
239 Minimum temperature
240 Maximum temperature
241 Density fail alarm action
242 Minimum density/gravity
243 Maximum density/gravity
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 6>
244 Minimum pressure
245 Maximum pressure
246 Additive error limit
247 Additive feedback count
248 Block valve time (s)
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 7>
249 Circuit 1 alarm action
250 #1 Ground detector open
251 Circuit 2 alarm action
252 #2 Overspill detector open
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 8>
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 14 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
253 Circuit 3 alarm action
254 #3 Permissive power failure
255 Circuit 4 alarm action
256 #4 Additive injection failure
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 9>
257 Circuit 5 alarm action
258 #5 Arm down side 1
259 Circuit 6 alarm action
260 #6 Arm down side 2
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 10>
261 Circuit 7 alarm action
262 #7 Walkway down side 1
263 Circuit 8 alarm action
264 #8 Walkway down side 2
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 11>
265 Circuit 5 type
266 Circuit 6 type
267 Circuit 7 type
268 Circuit 8 type
269 Alarm o/p 1 mask
270 Alarm o/p 2 mask
ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 12>
271 Unauth additive flow vol
272 Prod/add -%
273 Prod/add +%
274 Storage alarm action
275 Power fail alarm action
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 15
276 Ramp down alarm action
277 Ramp down time (s)
278 Additive per 1000 error limit
279 End time (s)
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>
280 Slot 1 board
281 Slot 2 board
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 2>
282 Slot 3 board
283 Slot 4 board
284 Slot 5 board
285 Slot 6 board
286 Slot 7 board
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 3>
287 Alarm output 1
COMPONENT 1 I/O
288 Pump control output
COMPONENT 2 I/O
289 Pump control output
COMPONENT 3 I/O
290 Pump control output
COMPONENT 4 I/O
291 Pump control output
VALVE 1 I/O
292 Solenoid 1 (upstream)
293 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
294 Stem switch 1 (normally closed)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 16 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
295 Stem switch 2 (normally open)
296 Close input
VALVE 2 I/O
297 Solenoid 1 (upstream)
298 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
299 Stem switch 1 (normally closed)
300 Stem switch 2 (normally open)
301 Close input
VALVE 3 I/O
302 Solenoid 1 (upstream)
303 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
304 Stem switch 1 (normally closed)
305 Stem switch 2 (normally open)
306 Close input
VALVE 4 I/O
307 Solenoid 1 (upstream)
308 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
309 Stem switch 1 (normally closed)
310 Stem switch 2 (normally open)
311 Close input
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 12>
312 Side detect method
313 Pulse per unit output 1
314 Pulse per unit output 2
315 Trip 1 output
316 Trip 2 output
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 17
317 Trip 3 output
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 13>
318 Meter 1 temp input
319 Meter 1 offset (Ohms)
320 Meter 1 pres input
321 Meter 1 dens input
322 Meter 1 flow input
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 14>
324 Meter 2 temp input
325 Meter 2 offset (Ohms)
326 Meter 2 pres input
327 Meter 2 dens input
328 Meter 2 flow input
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 15>
330 Meter 3 temp input
331 Meter 3 offset (Ohms)
332 Meter 3 pres input
333 Meter 3 dens input
334 Meter 3 flow input
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 16>
336 Meter 4 temp input
337 Meter 4 offset (Ohms)
338 Meter 4 pres input
339 Meter 4 dens input
340 Meter 4 flow input
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 17>
341 #cpmt inputs
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 18 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
342 Start method
343 Auto/manual change-over
344 Primary alarm reset
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 18>
345 Safety circuit 1
346 Safety circuit 2
347 Safety circuit 3
348 Safety circuit 4
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 19>
349 Safety circuit 5
350 Safety circuit 6
351 Safety circuit 7
352 Safety circuit 8
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 20>
353 RTD range
354 Delay after outputs
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 21>
355 Primary LCD type
356 Primary LCD minimum light
357 Primary LCD maximum light
358 Secondary LCD type
359 Secondary LCD minimum light
360 Secondary LCD maximum light
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 22>
361 Recipe 1 input
362 Recipe 2 input
363 Recipe 3 input
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 19
364 Recipe 4 input
365 Recipe 5 input
366 Recipe 6 input
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 23>
367 Recipe 1 output
368 Recipe 2 output
369 Recipe 3 output
370 Recipe 4 output
371 Recipe 5 output
372 Recipe 6 output
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 24>
373 End output method
I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 25>
374 Level input
375 Hatch input
376 Swing 1 input
377 Swing 2 input
378 Low flow input
379 Alarm output 2
ADDITIVE 1 I/O PARAMETERS
380 Ratio/valve output
381 Feedback/meter input
382 Selection input
ADDITIVE 2 I/O PARAMETERS
383 Ratio/valve output
384 Feedback/meter input
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 20 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
385 Selection input
ADDITIVE 3 I/O PARAMETERS
386 Ratio/valve output
387 Feedback/meter input
388 Selection input
ADDITIVE 4 I/O PARAMETERS
389 Ratio/valve output
390 Feedback/meter input
391 Selection input
ADDITIVE 5 I/O PARAMETERS
392 Ratio/valve output
393 Feedback/meter input
394 Selection input
ADDITIVE 6 I/O PARAMETERS
395 Ratio/valve output
396 Feedback/meter input
397 Selection input
ADDITIVE I/O PARAMETERS
398 Clean line output
399 Flush output
COMPONENT 1 BLOCK VALVE
400 Block valve output
401 Block valve input
COMPONENT 2 BLOCK VALVE
402 Block valve output
403 Block valve input
COMPONENT 3 BLOCK VALVE
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 21
404 Block valve output
405 Block valve input
COMPONENT 4 BLOCK VALVE
406 Block valve output
407 Block valve input
COMPONENT COMBINATIONS <PAGE 5>
408 Combination 1 (1XXX)
409 Combination 2 (X2XX)
410 Combination 3 (12XX)
411 Combination 4 (XX3X)
412 Combination 5 (1X3X)
COMPONENT COMBINATIONS <PAGE 6>
413 Combination 6 (X23X)
414 Combination 7 (123X)
415 Combination 8 (XXX4)
416 Combination 9 (1XX4)
417 Combination 10 (X2X4)
COMPONENT COMBINATIONS <PAGE 7>
418 Combination 11 (12X4)
419 Combination 12 (XX34)
420 Combination 13 (1X34)
421 Combination 14 (X234)
422 Combination 15 (1234)
END <PAGE 8>
423 End output
424 End input
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 22 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
425 Flush pulses
TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
426 Buoyancy
427 Temperature units
428 Density units
429 Pressure units
430 Reference temperature
431 Sample qty
COMP 1 TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
432 Temperature option
433 Alpha
434 Backup temperature
COMP 2 TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
435 Temperature option
436 Alpha
437 Backup temperature
COMP 3 TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
438 Temperature option
439 Alpha
440 Backup temperature
COMP 4 TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
441 Temperature option
442 Alpha
443 Backup temperature
COMP 1 PRESSURE PARAMETERS
444 Pressure option
445 F-factor X 1000000000
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 23
446 Backup pressure
COMP 2 PRESSURE PARAMETERS
447 Pressure option
448 F-factor X 1000000000
449 Backup pressure
COMP 3 PRESSURE PARAMETERS
450 Pressure option
451 F-factor X 1000000000
452 Backup pressure
COMP 4 PRESSURE PARAMETERS
453 Pressure option
454 F-factor X 1000000000
455 Backup pressure
COMP 1 DENSITY/GRAVITY
456 Density/gravity option
457 Backup density/gravity
COMP 2 DENSITY/GRAVITY
458 Density/gravity option
459 Backup density/gravity
COMP 3 DENSITY/GRAVITY
460 Density/gravity option
461 Backup density/gravity
COMP 4 DENSITY/GRAVITY
462 Density/gravity option
463 Backup density/gravity
METER 1
464 Pressure @4 mA
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 24 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
465 Pressure @20 mA
466 Density @4 mA
467 Density @20 mA
METER 2
468 Pressure @4 mA
469 Pressure @20 mA
470 Density @4 mA
471 Density @20 mA
METER 3
472 Pressure @4 mA
473 Pressure @20 mA
474 Density @4 mA
475 Density @20 mA
METER 4
476 Pressure @4 mA
477 Pressure @20 mA
478 Density @4 mA
479 Density @20 mA
RECIPES
480 Number of recipes
RECIPE 1
481 Name
482 Component 1 %
483 Component 2 %
484 Component 3 %
485 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 25
486 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 2
487 Name
488 Component 1 %
489 Component 2 %
490 Component 3 %
491 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
492 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 3
493 Name
494 Component 1 %
495 Component 2 %
496 Component 3 %
497 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
498 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 4
499 Name
500 Component 1 %
501 Component 2 %
502 Component 3 %
503 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
504 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 5
505 Name
506 Component 1 %
507 Component 2 %
508 Component 3 %
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 26 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
509 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
510 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 6
511 Name
512 Component 1 %
513 Component 2 %
514 Component 3 %
515 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
516 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 7
517 Name
518 Component 1 %
519 Component 2 %
520 Component 3 %
521 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
522 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 8
523 Name
524 Component 1 %
525 Component 2 %
526 Component 3 %
527 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
528 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 9
529 Name
530 Component 1 %
531 Component 2 %
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 27
532 Component 3 %
533 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
534 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 10
535 Name
536 Component 1 %
537 Component 2 %
538 Component 3 %
539 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
540 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 11
541 Name
542 Component 1 %
543 Component 2 %
544 Component 3 %
545 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
546 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 12
547 Name
548 Component 1 %
549 Component 2 %
550 Component 3 %
551 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
552 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 13
553 Name
554 Component 1 %
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 28 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
555 Component 2 %
556 Component 3 %
557 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
558 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 14
559 Name
560 Component 1 %
561 Component 2 %
562 Component 3 %
563 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
564 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 15
565 Name
566 Component 1 %
567 Component 2 %
568 Component 3 %
569 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
570 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 16
571 Name
572 Component 1 %
573 Component 2 %
574 Component 3 %
575 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
576 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 17
577 Name
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 29
578 Component 1 %
579 Component 2 %
580 Component 3 %
581 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
582 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 18
583 Name
584 Component 1 %
585 Component 2 %
586 Component 3 %
587 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
588 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 19
589 Name
590 Component 1 %
591 Component 2 %
592 Component 3 %
593 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
594 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 20
595 Name
596 Component 1 %
597 Component 2 %
598 Component 3 %
599 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
600 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 21
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 30 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
601 Name
602 Component 1 %
603 Component 2 %
604 Component 3 %
605 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
606 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 22
607 Name
608 Component 1 %
609 Component 2 %
610 Component 3 %
611 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
612 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 23
613 Name
614 Component 1 %
615 Component 2 %
616 Component 3 %
617 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
618 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 24
619 Name
620 Component 1 %
621 Component 2 %
622 Component 3 %
623 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
624 Sequence or low proportion
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 31
RECIPE 25
625 Name
626 Component 1 %
627 Component 2 %
628 Component 3 %
629 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
630 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 26
631 Name
632 Component 1 %
633 Component 2 %
634 Component 3 %
635 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
636 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 27
637 Name
638 Component 1 %
639 Component 2 %
640 Component 3 %
641 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
642 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 28
643 Name
644 Component 1 %
645 Component 2 %
646 Component 3 %
647 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 32 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
648 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 29
649 Name
650 Component 1 %
651 Component 2 %
652 Component 3 %
653 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
654 Sequence or low proportion
RECIPE 30
655 Name
656 Component 1 %
657 Component 2 %
658 Component 3 %
659 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
660 Sequence or low proportion
ADDITIVE CALIBRATION
661 # add calib cycles
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
662 Address
Ch. A
663 Mode
664 Data rate
665 Word size
666 Stop bits
667 Parity
Ch. B
668 Mode
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 33
669 Data rate
670 Word size
671 Stop bits
672 Parity
673 Alarm in manual
DYNAMIC DATA DISPLAY <PAGE 1>
679 Mode
680 Line 1 data code
681 Line 2 data code
682 Line 3 data code
683 Line 4 data code
DYNAMIC DATA DISPLAY <PAGE 2>
684 Line 5 data code
685 Line 6 data code
686 Line 7 data code
687 Line 8 data code
DYNAMIC DATA DISPLAY <PAGE 3>
688 Line 9 data code
689 Line 10 data code
690 Line 11 data code
691 Line 12 data code
DYNAMIC DATA DISPLAY <PAGE 4>
692 Line 13 data code
693 Line 14 data code
694 Line 15 data code
695 Line 16 data code
DATA LOGGING <PAGE 1>
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 34 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
696 Batch summary
697 Transaction summary
698 Alarm log
699 Power fail log
700 Program mode entry/exit
701 W&M switch opened/closed
DATA LOGGING <PAGE 2>
702 Program value change log
703 Configuration summary data log
704 Crash memory summary
705 Totalizers
706 Transaction ticket
707 Transaction ticket reprint
DATA LOGGING <PAGE 3>
708 Thruput
709 Sequence numbers
710 Cutoff hour
BLENDING <PAGE 1>
711 Ramp down %
712 Rate reduction
713 Low flow start qty
714 Clean line qty
715 Low prop fac
BLENDING <PAGE 2>
716 Correct after qty
717 Alarm after qty
718 Adjustment qty
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 35
719 Comp % display
720 Add calib delay (s)
BLENDING <PAGE 3>
722 Blend error method
723 Max dev %
724 Blend tol %
725 Max dev vol
726 Blend tol vol
727 Blend sample qty
METER 1
728 Flow adj fac
729 Ratio adj fac
730 Ramp %
731 CALMON analysis method
METER 2
734 Flow adj fac
735 Ratio adj fac
736 Ramp %
737 CALMON analysis method
METER 3
740 Flow adj fac
741 Ratio adj fac
742 Ramp %
743 CALMON analysis method
METER 4
746 Flow adj fac
747 Ratio adj fac
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 36 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
748 Ramp %
749 CALMON analysis method
MPMC
752 FPO basis
753 CALMON error limit
754 CALMON reset count
755 Calib fail alarm action
METER 1
756 FPO
757 Number of blades
758 Max max char dev
759 Max tot char devs
760 Calibration sample
METER 2
761 FPO
762 Number of blades
763 Max max char dev
764 Max tot char devs
765 Calibration sample
METER 3
766 FPO
767 Number of blades
768 Max max char dev
769 Max tot char devs
770 Calibration sample
METER 4
771 FPO
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 37
772 Number of blades
773 Max max char dev
774 Max tot char devs
775 Calibration sample
RECIPE 1
776 Low flow rate
777 High flow rate
RECIPE 2
778 Low flow rate
779 High flow rate
RECIPE 3
780 Low flow rate
781 High flow rate
RECIPE 4
782 Low flow rate
783 High flow rate
RECIPE 5
784 Low flow rate
785 High flow rate
RECIPE 6
786 Low flow rate
787 High flow rate
RECIPE 7
788 Low flow rate
789 High flow rate
RECIPE 8
790 Low flow rate
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 38 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
791 High flow rate
RECIPE 9
792 Low flow rate
793 High flow rate
RECIPE 10
794 Low flow rate
795 High flow rate
RECIPE 11-20
796 Low flow rate
797 High flow rate
RECIPE 21-30
798 Low flow rate
799 High flow rate
ADDITIVE 1
800 Pump output
801 Block valve output
ADDITIVE 2
803 Pump output
804 Block valve output
ADDITIVE 3
806 Pump output
807 Block valve output
ADDITIVE 4
809 Pump output
810 Block valve output
ADDITIVE 5
812 Pump output
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 39
813 Block valve output
ADDITIVE 6
815 Pump output
816 Block valve output
LPG/pressure
818 PT type
819 Pe method
820 Pinch back method
821 Pinch back pressure
822 Atmospheric pressure
823 Pinch back qty
824 T1
825 Pe1 at T1
826 T2
827 Pe2 at T2
828 T3
829 Pe at T3
SAFETY CIRCUITS
830 Circuit 1 type
831 Circuit 2 type
832 Circuit 3 type
833 Circuit 4 type
TRANSACTION / BATCH FILE CONFIGURATION <PAGE 1>
834 Transaction record length
835 Start page and # pages
836 Batch record length
837 Start page and # pages
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 40 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
838 Tr tk format
839 Time out tr
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 2>
840 1 Addr
841 2 Tr seq #
842 3 Recipe #
843 4 Recipe name
844 5 Side
845 6 Prompt 1
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 3>
846 7 Prompt 2
847 8 Prompt 3
848 9 Prompt 4
849 10 Prompt 5
850 11 Data item 1
851 12 Data item 2
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 4>
852 13 Data item 3
853 14 Data item 4
854 15 Data item 5
855 16 Start date
856 17 End date
857 18 Gross
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 5>
858 19 Std
859 20 Temp
860 21 Pres
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 41
861 22 Dens
862 23 Start gross
863 24 Start std
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 6>
864 25 End gross
865 26 End std
866 27 Alarm bit map
867 28 Prim alarm
868 29 Temp alarm
869 30 Add 1
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 7>
870 31 Add 2
871 32 Add 3
872 33 Add 4
873 34 Add 5
874 35 Add 6
875 36 Op mode
TR FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 8>
876 37 Gross units
877 38 Std units
BATCH FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 9>
880 1 Addr
881 2 Ba seq #
882 3 Tr seq #
883 4 Temp
884 5 Pres
885 6 Dens
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 42 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
BATCH FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 10>
886 7 Preset
887 8 Gross
888 9 Std
889 10 Comp gross
890 11 Comp std
891 12 Comp temp
BATCH FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 11>
892 13 Comp dens
893 14 Comp pres
894 15 Comp %
895 16 Add 1
896 17 Add 2
897 18 Add 3
BATCH FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 12>
898 19 Add 4
899 20 Add 5
900 21 Add 6
901 22 Op mode
902 23 CCF
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 1>
920 1 Addr
921 2 Tr seq #
922 3 Recipe #
923 4 Recipe name
924 5 Side
925 6 Prompt 1
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 43
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 2>
926 7 Prompt 2
927 8 Prompt 3
928 9 Prompt 4
929 10 Prompt 5
930 11 Data item 1
931 12 Data item 2
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 3>
932 13 Data item 3
933 14 Data item 4
934 15 Data item 5
935 16 Start date
936 17 End date
937 18 Gross
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 4>
938 19 Std
939 20 Temp
940 21 Pres
941 22 Dens
942 23 Start gross
943 24 Start std
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 5>
944 25 End gross
945 26 End std
946 27 Alarm bit map
947 28 Prim alarm
948 29 Temp alarm
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Appendix B - 44 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
949 30 Add 1
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 6>
950 31 Add 2
951 32 Add 3
952 33 Add 4
953 34 Add 5
954 35 Add 6
955 36 Op mode
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 7>
956 37 Gross units
957 38 Std units
ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 8>
960 1 Addr
961 2 Ba seq #
962 3 Tr seq #
963 4 Temp
964 5 Pres
965 6 Dens
BSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 9>
966 7 Preset
967 8 Gross
968 9 Std
969 10 Comp gross
970 11 Comp std
971 12 Comp temp
BSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 10>
972 13 Comp dens
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code Parameter Value / Selection
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 45
973 14 Comp pres
974 15 Comp %
975 16 Add 1
976 17 Add 2
977 18 Add 3
BSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 11>
978 19 Add 4
979 20 Add 5
980 21 Add 6
981 22 Op mode
982 23 CCF
ANALOG INPUTS (v2 CPU)
983 RTD Alpha
CPU 4-20 mA (v2 CPU)
984 LL cnt (4-20 mA input)
985 LH cnt (4-20 mA input)
986 HL cnt (4-20 mA input)
987 HH cnt (4-20 mA input)
CPU RTD (v2 CPU)
988 LL cnt (RTD input)
989 LH cnt (RTD input)
990 HL cnt (RTD input)
991 HH cnt (RTD input)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix B - 46 _____________________________________________C onfiguration Record
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix C
LPG LoadingConfiguration Checklist
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 1
LPG Loading Procedures and Sub-Procedures
INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
1) TEMPERATURE CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
2) PRESSURE CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
3) PRESSURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
B) PRESSURE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLE VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
D) VAPOR PRESSURE METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C - 2 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
Instructions
This appendix contains three main procedures (1-3) and six sub-procedures (A-F) for configuringthe Daniel DanLoad 6000 electronic preset for LPG loading. The three main procedures are:
- 1) Temperature correction,- 2) Pressure correction, and- 3) Pressure control.
Start with the page titled "LPG Loading Configuration Checklist" below. Follow the applicable mainprocedures (following the sub-procedures as directed in the text) and check individual steps "X"when complete or mark "N/A".
NOTE: The best way to configure the dynamic data display is to write down the datacodes you require as you encounter them in the procedures and sub-procedures andconfigure the dynamic data display pages (program code 680, etc.) at the end.
The DanLoad 6000 should not be placed into operation until all applicable procedures have beencompleted.
NOTE: Although up to four meters, components, etc. can be configured on theDanLoad 6000, this appendix lists only the program codes and the data code for thefirst two meters, components, etc. Those for other meters, components, etc. can befound in Section 6.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 3
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
Configure K-factors, meter factors, flow rates, delivery parameters, safety circuits, recipes, etc. basedon the user's requirements.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If temperature correction is required, i.e. standard quantity corrected for temperature, performprocedure 1) TEMPERATURE CORRECTION.
+)),.................................................................................................... .))-
If pressure correction is required, i.e. standard quantity corrected for pressure, perform procedure 2)PRESSURE CORRECTION.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If flow control based on pressure is required, i.e. flow control valve "pinch back", perform procedure3) PRESSURE CONTROL.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Discuss any outstanding questions concerning local safety practices or use of the equipment with theuser.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Verify field wiring using the DanLoad 6000's "Diagnostics"/"Inputs/Outputs" option in the programmode menu.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display pages (program code 680, etc.) using the data codes specifiedin the procedures and sub-procedures that you have followed.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Verify the DanLoad 6000's valve control, standard quantity computations and dynamic data displayvalues (press the "SELECT" key while in the loading display) by loading "small" batches.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C - 4 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
1) TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
Perform procedure F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure a temperature correction option per component (program codes 432, 435, etc.). Thetemperature correction option selected depends on the user's operational requirements. “TP-16" istypically used in the United States.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
When "Linear", "6C" or "54C" is selected, the component's alpha (program codes 433, 436, etc.),which is its coefficient of thermal expansion per the configured temperature units, must beconfigured.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLE VOLUME. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
TLConfigure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the C factor per meter (datacodes 126, 127, etc.) and the combined correction factor per meter (data codes 9, 26, etc.) aredisplayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure thedynamic data display pages at the end.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 5
2) PRESSURE CORRECTION
Perform procedure B) PRESSURE INPUTS. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-If the PT type (program code 818) is "Pm", i.e. static pressure transmitters, perform procedure D)
d m eVAPOR PRESSURE METHOD since P = P - P must be computed for the pressure correctioncomputation.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure a pressure correction option per component (program codes 444, 447, etc.) based on theuser's requirement, industry standards or local standards. “11.2.2" is typically used in the UnitedStates.
WARNING: Selection of an incorrect pressure correction option is potentiallydangerous.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
When "Const" is selected, the component's F-factor (program codes 445, 448, etc.), which is itscompressibility factor in volume units per pressure unit, must be configured.
WARNING: Entry of an incorrect pressure correction option or and incorrectlyscaled F-factor is potentially dangerous, especially if batch delivery is by standardquantity (program code 80).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS. (The temperature is required in order to performpressure correction.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES. (The density is required in order to performpressure correction.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLING VOLUME. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-Perform procedure E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
PLConfigure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the C factor per meter (datacodes 139, 140, etc.) and the combined correction factor per meter (data codes 9, 26, etc.) aredisplayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure thedynamic data display pages at the end.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C - 6 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
3) PRESSURE CONTROL
Determine the pinch back method from the user's requirements. Configure the pinch back method(program code 820). +)),
.....................................................................................................))-If the pinch back method is "Sw.", i.e. pressure switches are used, configure a close input per flowcontrol valve (program codes 296, 301, etc.).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Test the pressure switch per valve via inputs/outputs diagnostic. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-If the pinch back method is "Sw.", adjust the pressure switches per valve to be closed when there issufficient pressure to load and open otherwise.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the pinch back method is "Pm" or "Pd" perform procedure B) PRESSURE INPUTS. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-If the pinch back method is "Pm" configure the pinch back pressure (program code 821) to be thestatic pressure below which pressure control adjustments will be made to the flow control valve.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the pinch back method is "Pd" configure the pinch back pressure (program code 821) to be thedifferential pressure below which pressure control adjustments will be made to the flow controlvalve.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the pinch back method is "Pd", i.e. valve control based on differential pressure, and the PT type(program code 818) is "Pm", i.e. static pressure transmitters, perform procedure D) VAPOR
d m ePRESSURE METHOD since P = P - P must be computed. +)),
.....................................................................................................))-If the unit type (program code 26) is "In-line", configure the ramp down percentage (program code711) to a suitable percentage of the configured high flow rate. (There is one high flow rate perrecipe.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the unable to ramp down alarm so that a failure of the flow rate to decrease can bedetected and acted on (program code 276 and 277).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
NOTE: If you experience “pressure failure” alarms right at the start of a batch, youmay want to consider setting the pinch back quantity (program code 823). SeeSection 6.
* * *
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 7
A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS
NOTE: This procedure is for 100S RTD inputs ("live" temperatures) or backuptemperatures.
Configure an appropriate temperature failure alarm action (program code 238). The default value,i.e. "Primary", is usually acceptable. However, if loading is to continue with backup temperatures(program codes 434, 437, etc.) when the temperature goes out of range during a batch, set thetemperature failure alarm action to "Info" and enter backup temperatures (program code 434, 437,etc.).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure appropriate minimum and maximum temperatures (program codes 239 and 240) fortemperature failure alarms, i.e. slightly below and above the temperatures that should be measuredduring normal operation.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure an RTD input for each meter (program codes 318, 324, etc.). When 3-wire RTD's arebeing used (not recommended) it may be necessary to compute a "resistance offset" (program code319, 325, etc.) using a high-spec 100S resistor.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the current temperature permeter (data codes 74, 80, etc.) and the average temperature per component (data code 75, 81, etc.)are displayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure thedynamic data display pages at the end.)
WARNING: Incorrect temperature configuration is potentially dangerous, especiallyif batch delivery is by standard quantity (program code 80) or vapor pressurecomputation for differential pressure is required.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C - 8 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
B) PRESSURE INPUTS
Configure appropriate minimum and maximum pressures (program codes 244 and 245, usingpressure units appropriate to the pressure correction option being used) for pressure failure alarms,i.e. slightly below and above the pressures that should be measured even when there is no batch inprogress.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure a pressure input for each meter (program codes 320, 326, etc.). +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the pressure transmitter type, i.e. static or differential pressure (program code 818). +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Calibrate the pressure inputs by configuring the pressures corresponding to 4 mA and 20 mA permeter (program codes 464 and 465, 468 and 469, etc. using pressure units appropriate to the pressurecorrection option being used) using the information marked on the pressure transmitter.
WARNING: Incorrect pressure transmitter calibration is potentially dangerous dueto product "flashing" and overruns if batch delivery is by standard quantity(program code 80).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the current pressure per meter(data codes 135, 136, etc.) and the average pressure per component (data code 108, 110, etc.) aredisplayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure thedynamic data display pages at the end.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 9
C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLE QUANTITY
Configure a suitable sample quantity (program code 431) for temperature and/or pressure correction,i.e. standard quantity computation. This should be sufficiently small to allow good averagetemperatures and pressures to be computed, but should not be less than the quantity which flows inone second of any component at its highest flow rate. This quantity does not affect temperature andpressure sampling for alarm and "pressure maintenance" purposes.
WARNING: If the sample quantity (program code 431) is too large the standardquanties computed by the DanLoad 6000 will not be correct.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C - 10 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
D) VAPOR PRESSURE METHOD
eConfigure the vapor pressure (P ) method (program code 819) based on the user's requirements,industry standards or local standards. “TP-15" is typically used in the United States. The vapor
m epressure is required in order to compute the differential pressure (P - P ) which is used for pressurecorrection (computation of standard quantity) and (optionally) for valve control (program code 820).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "Const Pe" enter the fixed vapor pressure per component (programcodes 446, 449, etc.).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "2 point" enter two known temperature and vapor pressure pairs(program codes 824 through 827).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "3 point" enter three known temperature and vapor pressure pairs(program codes 824 through 829).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "Hillburn" enter the known vapor pressure at 100°F per component(program codes 446, 449, etc.).
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "TP-15" perform procedure F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES. (Thedensity scale (program code 46) should be 4 and relative densities 60°F/60°F and temperatures in°F are required.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the atmospheric pressure (program code 822). The "standard" atmospheric pressure forthe printed TP-16 tables is 14.7 psia. The actual atmospheric pressure allows the component's vaporpressures to be computed most accurately.
eWARNING: Component vapor pressures (P ) are used to determine differential
m epressure (P - P ), which is used for pressure correction (standard quantities) andvalve pressure control. Incorrect configuration is potentially dangerous.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 11
E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE
Configure the preset/delivery type (program code 80) to be "Gross" or "Std" based on the user'srequirements.
WARNING: The gross quantity of LPG's changes depending on temperature andpressure, more so than with gasolines. Users may wish to deliver standard quantityor may have a policy of delivering gross quantities that take maximum expansion intoaccount.
WARNING: The gross quantity the volume actually occupied by the product at the(average) measured temperature. The standard quantity, i.e. the temperature andpressure corrected quantity, is "equivalent" to mass (weight), i.e. weight in pounds= net volume in gallons x density in pounds per gallon.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the delivery display type (program code 81) to be "Gross" or "Std" based on the user'srequirements. (The determines whether the gross loaded quantity or the standard loaded quantity isdisplayed during a batch.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C - 12 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES
Configure the density/gravity scale (program code 46) to allow densities/gravities to be formattedcorrectly for display, printing, and calculation, i.e. 1 for kg/m (format 9999.9), 2 for °API (format3
999.99), 4 for kg/L or relative density (format 9.9999). +)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If 4-20 mA density transmitters are to be used (not necessary if the density at standard conditions isa constant), set the density/gravity option per component (program codes 456, 458, etc.) to "On"(DanLoad 6000 v4.00 and below) or "DT" (DanLoad 6000 v4.06 and above), configure appropriateminimum and maximum densities/gravities (program codes 242 and 243) for density failure alarms,i.e. slightly below and above the densities that should be measured during normal operation,configure the densities corresponding to 4 mA and 20 mA per meter (program codes 466 and 467,470 and 471, etc.), and configure a density input per meter (program codes 321, 327, etc.)
NOTE: The DanLoad 6000 is not capable of correcting densities/gravities at ambientconditions to densities/gravities at standard/reference conditions. Densitytransmitters should be used only if the densitometer can perform the correctionexternal to the DanLoad 6000.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
If density transmitters are not to be used (or if a backup density is required for any other reason)configure the backup density/gravity per component (program codes 457, 458, etc.). Thedensity/gravity at "standard conditions" for the required temperature and pressure correction optionsshould be entered, e.g. relative density 60°F/60°F for GPA TP-16 and API Table 11.2.2.
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the current density/gravity permeter (data codes 143, 144, etc.) and the average density/gravity per component (data code 107, 109,etc.) are displayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configurethe dynamic data display pages at the end.)
+)),.....................................................................................................))-
* * *
Appendix D
Spare Parts
Spare Parts - DanLoad 6000
Item Quantity Model No. Part No. Description
6000-(--------) Model number from unit tag
Spare Printed Circuit Board Assemblies
1 1 (---1----) 3-6000-002 2-Ch. Meter Pulse Board CE-12604
2 1 (---2----) 3-6000-042 4-Ch. Meter Pulse Board
3 1 (----1---) 3-6000-005 AC I/O Board CE-12613
4 1 (-----1--) 3-6000-006 DC I/O Board CE-12616
5 1 (-------2) 3-6000-020 DUART (2) RS-485 Ports CE-12625-2
6 1 (-------1) 3-6000-009 DUART (1) RS-232 / (1) RS-485 Port CE-12625-1
7 1 (----2---) 3-6000-010 Additive Injection Board CE-12628
8 1 3-6000-048 Enhanced I/O Board (3 HIGH & 3 LOWstatus points)
9 1 3-6000-049 Enhanced I/O Board (All HIGH statuspoints)
10 1 (------2-) 3-6000-007 A/D 8-Channel Board CE-12619-2
11 1 (------1-) 3-6000-026 A/D 2 Channel Board CE-12725
12 1 (--1-----) 3-6000-027 115 Vac Power Supply CE-12575-1
13 1 (--2-----) 3-6000-031 230 Vac Power Supply CE-12575-2
14 1 (-1------) 3-6000-052 Keypad Assembly [English] CE-12680
15 1 (-3------) 3-6000-054 Keypad Assembly [French] CE-12680
16 1 (-2------) 3-6000-055 Keypad Assembly [Spanish] CE-12680
17 1 All 3-6000-038 Display CE-12578
18 1 All 3-6000-029 CPU Board CE-12581
19 1 All 3-6000-030 Keyboard CE-12584
20 1 All 3-6000-032 Motherboard CE-12590
Optional Assemblies
21 1 3-6000-017 I/O Card Extender BE-12647-1
22 1 3-6000-047 Power Supply Card Extender BE-12647-2
23 1 3-6000-050 Battery (CPU) Module 3.0V BE-11887
24 1 3-6000-070 Rib/Cable Key-Display BE-12685
25 1 3-6000-071 Rib/Cable Display-CPU BE-12683
Spare Parts - DanLoad 6000
Item Quantity Model No. Part No. Description
26 1 3-6000-073 Rib/Cable P/S-Display BE-12689
27 1 3-6000-013 P/S Board Meter Pulse Board AE-12637[Included in part number 3-6000-002 (seeabove)]
Optional Mechanical Parts
28 5 4-9213-510 Enclosure lid mounting boltssocket head M10-1.5 X 50MM
29 4 4-9213-511 Enclosure mounting boltssocket head M10-1.5 X 15MM
30 2 4-9213-512 Enclosure lid security mounting boltssocket head M10-1.5 X 60MM w/hole
31 1 4-9200-013 Keypad wire seal screw
Manuals
32 1 3-9000-670 DanLoad 6000 Reference Manual
33 0 3-9000-674 DanLoad 6000 CommunicationsSpecification
Optional Auxillary Equipment
34 1 1-6000-006 RAM Copy Eraser
35 0 1-6000-005 DanLoad 6000 Simulator
36 1 3-6000-123 2-Channel Pulse Simulator
Appendix EField Wiring Drawings
Field Wiring, Power Supply CE-12692Field Wiring, CPU & DUART Board CE-12693Field Wiring, Meter Pulse Bd (2-Ch) CE-12694Field Wiring, AC I/O Board CE-12695Field Wiring, DC I/O Board CE-12696Field Wiring, Additive Injector Bd CE-12697Field Wiring, 8-Chan. ADC Board CE-12698Field Wiring, 2-Chan. ADC Board BE-12707Field Wiring, Remote Display BE-12711Field Wiring, P/S 6000R BE-12714Field Wiring, Meter Pulse Bd (4-Ch) CE-15532Field Wiring, Enhanced I/O Bd CE-19027Field Wiring, CPU Version 2 BE-19712Field Wiring, Remote Start/Stop AE-19713Field Wiring, Remote Start/Stop & Display BE-19714Field Wiring, RS-485 2-Wire, Model 6000 BE-19862
Appendix FOther Drawings
Print Sharer Wiring (Dresselhaus) BE-12462Wiring for Model 1815 Valve AE-12496Outline and Dimension XP enclosure DE-12535Overview and Board Layout CE-12691Suggested Permissive Wiring BE-12722Suggested Permissive Wiring Swing Arm Apps BE-12789Program Code to Device Assignments DE-18201Device Linkages BE-18204Typical DanLoad 6000 Wiring Diagram DE-19253Surge Protect, V. 1 DUART, RS-485 Multipt CE-19391Surge Protect, V. 2 DUART, (2) RS-485 CE-19392Surge Protect, V. 2 DUART, RS-485 Multipt CE-19393Surge Protect, V. 2 DUART, RS-485 & RS-232 CE-19394Control Valve Seal Placement AK-31030Turbine Meter Seal Placement AK-31031DanLoad 6000 Preset Seal Placement AK-31032Typical Swing Arm / Ground Wiring AK-31033
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.
RETURN POLICY FOR WARRANTY
AND NON-WARRANTY MATERIAL
Use the following procedure for returning equipment to the Daniel factory in the United States.
Step 1 Obtaining a RMA Number
A Return Material Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained prior to returning anyequipment for any reason.
To obtain a RMA number, call the Customer Service Department at 713-827-5033 between 8:00a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (Central Standard Time), Monday through Friday, except holidays or [email protected].
No product returns will be accepted without a RMA number and will be returned at thecustomer’s expense. For warranty consideration, the product must be returned to Daniel within twelve (12) monthsof the date of original shipment or within eighteen (18) months of the date of original shipmentof the product to destinations outside the United States. The Purchaser must prepay anyshipping charges.
In addition, the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any product shipped for return, and assumesthe risk of loss of the product during shipment.
• The following information is required at the time the RMA is issued:• Customer name• Contact name• Billing address• Contact Phone # and email address• Daniel SO #, PO #, or Invoice #• Item(s) to be returned• Reason for return• End user and final destination address• Consignee’s complete name, address, contact name and phone number
• A RMA number is required for each original order. (Example: Two fittings purchased ontwo separate orders now being returned require two RMA numbers.)
For product returns from locations outside the United States, Daniel Customer Servicepersonnel will provide additional shipping requirements.
Step 2 Cleaning and Decontamination
Prior to shipment, thoroughly clean and decontaminate all equipment removing all foreignsubstances. This includes all substances used for cleaning the equipment. The cleaning anddecontamination requirement applies to any part exposed to process fluids or cleaning substances.
Shipping equipment that has not been decontaminated may be in violation of U.S. Department ofTransportation (DOT) regulations. For your reference, the requirements for packaging and labelinghazardous substances are listed in DOT regulations 49 CFR 172, 178, and 179.
If you suspect that a part has been contaminated, the part must be completely drained and flushedto remove contaminants.
MAY CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL
Contents may be under pressure or materials may be hazardous
Follow appropriate handling instructions for accessing pressurized equipment. Avoid contactwith hazardous materials or contaminated units and parts. Failure to do so may result in deathor serious injury.
Decontamination/Cleaning Statement
A blank Decontamination/Cleaning Statement is provided on the “Returned Material AuthorizationRepair Form for Used Equipment”.
• A Decontamination/Cleaning Statement is required for each returned part.• Fully complete each form and include a signature. If the decontamination statement is
incomplete, the customer may be charged for decontamination and cleaning.
If the equipment has been exposed to a known hazardous substance with any characteristic that canbe identified in the Code of Federal Regulations, 40 CFR 261.20 through 261.24, the chemicalabstracts number and hazardous waste number/hazard code must be stated in the space provided onthe form.
Two (2) copies of each Decontamination/Cleaning Statement must be provided:• One (1) copy must be attached to the outside of the package.• One (1) copy must be included inside the package.
Step 3 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Provide a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) with the returned equipment for each substance thathas come in contact with the equipment being returned, including substances used fordecontamination and cleaning.
A MSDS sheet is required by law to be available to people exposed to specific hazardoussubstances, with one exception: if the equipment has only been exposed to food-grade substancesor potable water, or other substances for which an MSDS is not applicable, theDecontamination/Cleaning Statement form alone is acceptable.
Two (2) copies of each MSDS must be provided:• One (1) copy must be attached to the outside of the package.• One (1) copy must be provided inside the package.
Step 4 Packaging
Shipping a Device With Possible Contamination
To meet DOT requirements for identifying hazardous substances, ship only one device per package.
Shipping a Device Without Any Potential Contamination
Devices being returned may be shipped together in one package, if there is no potential of foreignsubstance contamination.
Step 5 Shipping
Before returning used equipment:• Mark each package clearly with a RMA number.• Include a Decontamination/Cleaning Statement inside the package.• Attach a duplicate Decontamination/Cleaning statement to the outside of the package.• Include a MSDS for each substance that has come in contact with the equipment inside the
package.• Attach a duplicate MSDS to the outside of the package.
No product returns will be accepted without a RMA number and will be returned at thecustomer’s expense. For warranty consideration, the product must be returned to Daniel within twelve (12) monthsof the date of original shipment or within eighteen (18) months of the date of original shipmentof the product to destinations outside the United States. The Purchaser must prepay anyshipping charges.
Ship all * mechanical equipment to the following address:
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc.Attn: Service Dept.5650 Brittmoore Rd.Houston, TX 77041Ref: RMA#____________________
*Mechanical equipment includes: Orifice Fittings, Parts, Plates, Seal Rings, Turbine Meters,Control Valves, Provers, Strainers, Meter Tubes, Ultrasonic Meters, Flow Conditioners, etc.
Ship all * electronic equipment to the following address:
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc.Attn: Service Dept.11100 Brittmoore Park DriveHouston, TX 77041Ref: RMA#____________________
*Electronic equipment includes: Gas Chromatographs, Petrocount Presets, Danload Preset,Ultrasonic Meter Electronics (CPU boards, transducers, etc.), 2403 Totalizer, MRT 97 Indicator,Preamps, Pick Up Coils, Prover Interface Boards, and the following Flow Computer Models: 2230,2239, 2270, 2460, 2470, S100, 2100, and 3000.
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc.
Returned Material Authorization
Repair Form for Used EquipmentIncluding Decontamination/Cleaning Statement
1. Return Material Authorization (RMA) Number ____________________________________
2. Equipment to be returned:Model Number _________________________ Serial Number _______________________
3. Reason for return: ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Decontamination/Cleaning Fluids Process
A. List each substance in which the equipment was exposed. Attach additional documents if necessary.
CommonName
CAS# ifavailable
Used for HazardousWaste (20 CFR 261)
EPA Waste Codeif used for hazardous waste
[ ] Yes [ ] No
[ ] Yes [ ] No
[ ] Yes [ ] No
[ ] Yes [ ] No
[ ] Yes [ ] No
[ ] Yes [ ] No
B. Circle any hazards and/or process fluid types that apply:
Infectious Radioactive Explosive Pyrophoric Poison Gas
Cyanides Sulfides Corrosive Oxidizer Flammable Poison
Carcinogen Peroxide Reactive-Air Reactive-Water Reactive-Other(list)
Other hazard category (list):
C. Describe decontamination/cleaning process. Include MSDS description for substances used in decontamination andcleaning processes. Attach additional documents if necessary.
Shipping Requirements
Failure to comply with this procedure will result in the shipment being refused.
4. Write the RMA number on the shipping package.
5. Inside the package include one copy of this document and all required Material Safety DataSheets (MSDS)
6. Outside of the package attach one copy of this document and all required Material Safety DataSheets (MSDS).
THIS EQUIPMENT, BEING RETURNED “FOR REPAIR,” HAS BEEN COMPLETELYDECONTAMINATED AND CLEANED. ALL FOREIGN SUBSTANCES HAVE BEENDOCUMENTED ABOVE AND MSDS SHEETS ARE ATTACHED.
By:
(Signature) (Print name)
Title: Date:
Company:
Phone: Fax:
The sales and service offices of Daniel Measurement and Control are locatedthroughout the United States and in major countries overseas.
Please contact Daniel Measurement Services at11100 Brittmoore Park Drive, Houston, Texas 77041, or phone (713) 827-6314
for the location of the sales or service office nearest you. Daniel Measurement Services offers both on-call and contract
maintenance service designed to provide single-source responsibility for all Daniel products.
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., and Daniel Measurement Services, Inc.Divisions of Emerson Process Management reserves the right to make changes to any of its products or services
at any time without prior notification in order to improve that product or service and to supplythe best product or service possible.www.emersonprocess.com/daniel